HomeMy WebLinkAboutArch/Structural specs for cabana,pool,hot tub areas '
,
ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL
� SPECIFICATIONS
' FOR THE
CONSTRUCTION
, OF THE
' CABANA, POOL AND HOT TUB AREAS
ABINGDON WAY
' FOR
' Richard and Britt Gage
'
1
'
'
1
1
'
' By
ARCHITECHTURE
' Architects
'
'
'
TITLE PAGE '
PROJECT: R.ichard and Britt Gage Residence Addition '
218Q Abingdon Way
Long lake,Minnesota
ARCHITECT AR.CHITECHTUR]E Suite 101 I
Minneapolis,Minnesota 55401 Phone 612-339-2844
STRUCTURAL Meyer,Bocgman&Johnson/Roland Johuson '
ENGINEER: Minneapolis,Minnesota
'
CER1'IFICATION:
I hereby eerti that this Specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a '
d Architect under the laws of the State of Minnesota.
C. . un st
'
Date:4,2 2007
Minneso Architectural Regishation No.7535 '
�
,
1
'
. '
. '
'
'
'
'
TITLE PAGE Page 1 of 1
'
=' �1GW42D E �R�?f C�e�' T-p-0 7 RB�NY'arOpN (�,�,+�
` LoT 6 � P�t o� Lar S
� HARDC VER CALCULATION WORKSHEET � �
SETBACK ZONE: (CIRCLE ONE) 0-75' 75-250' 250-500' ' 500-1000' 44�'� `
EXISTING HARDCOVER IN ZONE NOTE: SET(�4GC t5 FR�M TE+.E �REEK To TNE �.9a1"
A. House x = S.F.
Length Width
X = S.F.
x � = S.F.
B, Garage x - S.F.
C. Driveway x = S.F.
x = S.F.
D. Sidewalk x = S.F.
x = S.F.
E. Patio/Deck x = S.F.
x = S.F.
F. Landscape x = S.F.
Underlain x = S.F.
By Plastic x = S.F.
G. Retaining x = S.F.
Walls
H. Other x = S:F.
TOTAL HARDCOVER IN ZONE - � S.F. A
TOTAL PROPERTY AREA IN ZONE - (2,500 S.F. B
q + B x 100 —T 0 %
PROPOSED HARDCOVER IN ZONE
A. House x = S.F.
Length Width ''
x = S.F.
X = S.F.
B. Garage x = S.F.
C. Driveway x = S.F.
X = S.F.
D. Sidewalk x = S.F,
x = S.F.
E. PatiolDeck x = S.F.
X = S.F,
F. Landscape x = S,F,
Underlain x = S.F.
By Plastic x = S.F.
G. Retaining x = S.F,
Walls
H. Other x = S,F.
TOTAL HARDCOVER IN ZONE - S,F. A
TOTAL PROPERTY AREA IN ZONE - S,F. B
q j B x 100 = %
� �K�cN�Ro E Br��°t�' C� 7- 9-a7 ��N�Qo� t�c�,�
.
' ' l.oc b f A��c o� Gat�
� HARDCOVER CALCUrJ.�TION WORKSHEET
SETBACKZONE: (CIRCLEONE) 0-75' ���50' 250-500' ' 500-1000' '�r� r
EXISTING HARDCOVER IN ZONE M��� S��K �� ��'� r�F �"�'���' Ta �� ��'�
A. H�se x = �3 3 S.F.- 5�1.�ID
Length Width 'P������
x = S62 s.F.— �i�Aa•�A
X � = S.F.
B. Garage x - S.F.
7D4�t' S.F.—T�NN t$
C. Dri�way x _ �p u�T
x - S.F.
D. Sidewalk x = S.F.
x = S.F. � P�
� �
E. Patio/Deck x = �S4 S.F.-PA.T��
X = S.F.
F. Landscape x = S.F.
Underlain x = S.F.
By Plastic x = S.F.
!�, u�Au.S �E f i RE
G. Retaining 3�1 - Bb�+G�ht.'S x 2� " R�N�_ = b2 S.F.
Walis
H. Other x = 23 S:F.-�+�N��"rt��L
TOTAL HARDCOVER IN ZONE - 817 8 S.F. A
TOTAL PROPERTY AREA IN ZONE - (�,�9 S.F. B
A + g x 100 = •81 %
PROPOSED HARDCOVER IN ZONE
A. House x = S.F.
Length Width ''
x = S.F.
x - S.F.
B. Garage x = S,F.
C. Driveway x = S.F.
x = S.F.
D. Sidewalk x = S.F,
x = S.F.
E. Patio/Deck x = S.F.
x = S.F,
F. Landscape x = S.F.
Underlain x = S.F.
By Plastic x = S.F.
x - S.F.
G. Retaining '
W alls
H. Other x = S.F.
TOTAL HARDCOVER IN ZONE - S.F. A
TOTAL PROPERTY AREA IN ZONE - S,F. B
A + g x 100 = %
'' , ���H��rzO � �R.�7r �A�„� 7-9-a 7 �Bth6.DoN �l.�v
' HARDCOVER CALCULATION WORKSHEET � �'� � f P�r oF Lor�
SETBACK ZONE: (CIRCLE ONE) 0-75' 75-250' 2�6' ' 500-1000' '��0� �
�?-30D
EXISTING HARDCOVER IN ZONE NpT,�:SET�AL.IC 15 �ROM Ti��. C..F�',�1�. TC� T!"+�,� ���',
A. House x = qbl S.F.— uDUSE
Length Width
X = S.F.
X � = S.F.
B. Garage x - S,F.
Bl,.t�Gl<TO�
C. Driveway x = E,33 S.F.-���£i,vhr
x = S.F.
D. Sidewaik x = 4b S.F.-���TO��
e
x = S.F. WA,ut
PRoP�s�.D
E. Patio/Deck x = 2SqZ S.F.- �p� p�"T�'G7
x = I'7�- S.F.-STEP�S Aap
• 80��o�'It �v�V��.�
F. Landscape x = S.F.
Underlain x = S.F.
By Piastic x = S.F.
�r�a��. �a�
G. Retaining x = �l�i S.F:- ��,�y�
Walls
H. Other �!-a x 2y- _ ��D S:F.— �O�L
TOTAL HARDCOVER IN ZONE - 5��I S.F. A
TOTAL PROPERTY AREA IN ZONE - 6"7�Sba S.F. B
q + g x 100 = 8.08 %
PROPOSED HARDCOVER IN ZONE
A. House x = S.F.
Length Width ''
x = S.F.
x - S.F.
B. Garage x = S.F.
� C. Driveway x = S.F.
X = S.F.
D. Sidewalk x = S.F.
x = S.F.
E. Patio/Deck x = S.F.
x = S.F,
F. Landscape x = S,F.
Underlain x = S.F.
By Piastic x = S.F.
G. Retaining x = S.F.
Watis
H. Other x = S.F.
TOTAL HARDCOVER IN ZONE - S.F. A
TOTAL PROPERTY AREA IN ZONE - S,F. B
q + g x 100 = %
�
% �_ ,�,��5" LOG l� F B (� RING
1�1TEf�TEC
Braun Project BL-06-04823 BORING: ST-1
GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION LOCATION: East boring location near tennis court
Proposed Pool
21i�u Abingdon Way
Orono,Minnesota -
DRILLER: ti3ike MeVdilliams METHOD: 3 1/4"I ISA Autohammer DATE: 10/24/OG SCALE: 1"=4'
Elev. Depth
feet feet ASTM Description of A�taterials �pF WL MC qp Tests or Notes
p?? C1.Q Svmhol (ASTM D2488 or D2487) % tsf
97.4 0.3 FILL FiLL: Leau Clay,black,moist. �=' Benchmark:
FILL To soil "� Elevation 100.0�
FILL: Clayey Sand,dark brown,wet. lowest level
_ (Possible Fiil) 6 ' elevation of existing
� house.
93.7 4.d '
CL SANDY LEAN CLAY,with A trace of Gravel,brown and
gray at 12 feet then gray,wet,medium to stiff. 10 l 1/2
(Glacial Till)
�
�
0
c° 13 17 1 1/4
�
.`o
.n
c.�.,
O
0 13 1 1/2
.�
�
�
v
�° 16 2
�
W
.0
b
O
� g
.�
�
H
i
i.—
N
a"
�
�
8
7�.2 20.5
END OP BORING.
Water not observed with 19 feet of hollow-stem auger in
the ground.
�
� Water not observed to cave-in depth of 7 feet immediately
� after withdrawing the auger.
� Boring immediately backfi(fed.
z
d
�
�
�
N
a
0
0
a
V
Q
x
�
� ST-I page 1 of(
.,-_•...T.,.a�r..,.r`nm�ration
'����' � LOG OF BORING
• INTER7���
Braun Project BL-06-04823 BORING: ST-Z
GF,OTECHNICAL EVALUATION LOCATION: Center boring location
Yroposed Pool
2180 Abingdon Way
Orono,Minnesota �
DRILLER: Mike McWilliams ME'CHOD: 3 U4"HSA Autohammer DATE: 10/24l06 SCALE: 1"=4'
�lev. Depth
feet feet ASTM Description of Materials RPF WL MC qp Tests or Notes
97.5 0.0 Symbol (ASTM D2488 or D2487) % �f
P[LL F1LL: Sandy Lean Clay,with a trace of Gravel,dark
brown to black,moist to wet.
8
93.5 4.0 +
CL SANDY LEAN CLAY,with a trace of Gravel,brown at
20 feet then gray,wet,medium to stiff. ]0 l 1/2
(Glacial Till)
�
C
O
.�
�� 12 2
.a
�
0
'� 13 18 2
r
x
�
�
;, 13
.�
y
�
•� 14
F
>
.�
.�
�
C�
a°Ji
�
13
77A 20.5 .
END OF BORING.
Water not observed with 19 feet of hollow-stem auger in
,� the ground.
�
rv
o Boring immediately backfilled.
��—
F
q
c7
7
J
a
m
a
C7
N
�
�
�..�
V
N_'"'"
�
m
z
�
�
.
r ao. �r sM
LOG OF BORING
I NTE RTE�
Braun Project BL-06-04823
GEOTECHNICAL EVAI,UATION BORINC: ST-3
Proposed Po�l LOCATION: West boring location
2180 Abingdon VVay
Orono,Minnesota �
DRIL•��:;K; Mike McWilliams METEIOD: 3 1/4°HSA Autoha�muer DATE: l0/24/06 SCALE: 1"=4'
Elev. Depth
feet feet ASTM Description of Materials BPF WL MC qp Tests or Notes
967.0 O.0 �ymba! (ASTIvi D2488 or D2487) °/a tsf
• 9G6.3 p.7 CL SANDY LEAN CLAY,black,wet.
CL (ToUso��
SANDY LEAN Ci,AY,with a trace of Gravel,dark
brown,rnoist to wet,medium.
(G(acial Til!) 6
963.0 4.0 '
CL SANDY LEAN CLAY,with a trace of Gravel,brown
to13 feet then gray,wet,medium to very stiff. 8
(Glacial Till)
N "
�r
�
.�
.?
� 13 2
�
�..
0
�
0
c° 7 2
�
�
�
v 9 22
�
�
> -
0
c
c
� ��
E�
> I
U
y
G
�
�
�7
946.5 20.5 _�
END OF BORING.
Water nat observed with 19 feet of hollow-stem auger in
�� the ground.
�:
� Water not observed to cave-in depth of 17 feet
N iimnediately after withdrawing the auger.
j Boring immediately backfilled.
�
�
�
d
v
��
3
�
a
V
�n ---
t
�
�
4 �
i
Jul QB 07 01 : 51p Svoboda Ecolo�ical Rez 952-471-0007 p. 4
' _ _ .:f�-�I,tls.:. ••,,T. _ _:.4w;;:.
L..4.a �ar�; �� � �f ',�.... _
... �—r.n • }�Y '� '.l' �'• ' �
•y.:.,4e.,p..`:+.i.rLy..a Z � r�, � " d �•
•��.. .�� ..
� ����� CELEBRATING 4D YEARS OF '
IMPROVING QUALtTY OF WATER, QUALITY OF LIfE
� Local Cravernment Unit's Findtng,s and Gonalusions .
A delineation review was condetctcd on July 3,2007 at the Gage site loc�tcd at
2 t 8U Abingdon Way(PTN 03[172324+�07}in Orono, Hennepin Cannty.The
Yhe Minnehaha Crsek weaiher w�s humid,sw�ny and about$5 degrees N. The terrain ws�.s somewhat
Watenhed Oistrict is hilly sl�ping down to tY�c march complcxcs with a single farnily home lacatcd an
the pazcet. The adjoinin�lanci to lhe sauih�es a largc maxsh complex,to the
Committed to o northcast is a rclatively smaller marsh and a small siream paralEcls the east side of
tetrtlership ro(e i� thc pfoperty. A stormwater pond was delineated on thc wcst sidc of the ldt.
protectiny, lrnprpvin� �e�arcel was deiine�ted by Svoboda F.cotogical Resources in late June 2007 �
Q„d,,,Q,�y;,,y�,Q wiih iwa weilancis preseat on the pac�cQl. The delin�ation reporl was subAnittcd to
the Minnehaha Creck Watcrshed District{MCWD)c�n dune 28,ZU07_
su+face waters and
a,���ated yro�,rdworer "I'�e wetland on the south sidc of thc parcel are designated as public waierways,as
�Qu�����n� follows: _
Wctland 2 Qa south edge of parcel 27-8b2W
Disbic� tricludirrg tJreir ,
retatians�rips ro tbe Thc flagged boundary as notated in the delinealipn report dated Juuc 28,2007 is
' d�tn«i acaeptable by Minnehraha Cr�ek Watershed A�strict. � -
erosytrems raj wtrtdt they
are on r'nre�ror nart. �p�j�t may require a MCWD►approvcd�crmit in addition to other required
penmiLs. If you have any queslions,ptease contact me vrJames Wis?�ccr,MC'WU
We orhieve our mission PC�mimng Ofticor�81�452-471-0590.
through regulation,
Regort dra#�ed by: . �
caAital Projects. � -
�,xot�,cooverctive An�ela Hamrners
c�d�or�, and otirer MCWD Technician I
�uly 3,2007 .
pragrams bosed on ,
sound scre�rce.
innavvtive thinking,an
infvrmed arrd e►r�aged '
cor,stituency,and d�e .
rost effectiNe use of • -
public frrnds.
3$20�Minnetontm Boulevacd,Oee(�en,MN 55�391 + 952-471-039U • Faxs 952-471-0682 . www.min�ehaf�acreek.org
�
JlA 1 Ud U ! U 1 : .'71 P .'7V4�JOOa t00 1 O�1 Ga 1 KCS �7+'7G"'t !1-UUU f P• C
� � r • • 4
w ' • • • • • �� •
Name and Address af Local Gavvrnment C�nit: Minnehaha Creek Watershcd District
Nam�of A�piica�nt: Britt and Richard Gaec Project Name: 2184 Abing�on Way, C,h�ono:
� i Coun
Appaication Number: . .
Type of Application(check one): ❑ �xcmgtian llecision
. ❑ NO LOSS DeciSla�
. ❑ Rcplacement Plar� Decision �
❑ Bat�king Piart Dc:cision
� Weiland TypelBoundary pecision
Datc of Decision: 7-03-07
Check QnG: �Approved
❑A�l�r�ved With Ct�nd�tipIIS(see nvte vnpa,�e 2 reegarding use oFwetland ba�fcittg credits)
, ❑DPa7i�d ,
Stlillmary of P1�OjecUDecisip�(indicate exetn�tion anmber per MN R�le 8420.0122,if apglicable}� YObOd
Lcologf�l Rasourees examined thc 2]80 Abin�don Wav Pzircel within the citv o,�'�?ronv ta identifv artd
� �lin�te all a,ssoeiated jurisdictionat wc�lands. The boundazv o�vf eX,��s numbered i-2(as labcicxi on th�
survey submitted to MCWD datcd J����,2007 end based an the dctirlcatioa rcnvrt of June 27.2007)a��e,
ac tcd by Minnehaha Creek��#�cs��istrict. The site was ictsaected on�uly 3.2047 hy MCWD
si .
List of�ddressees:
Landowner:
Britt��d R�chard Gage �
2I$4 Abingdon Way � � � �
Vt�ay�ata,Miv 55391
� Repr�sentaivc: . �
Svoboda Ecological Resourci:s
Attn:.Richard Barkosky
247?Sh�adywood Rd
Exceisior, MN 55331
Minnesota Boazd of'W'ater and Soil Resources
Attn: Brad Woztiey .
. 530 Lafayette Ro�d,2"�Flaar
St Paul,MN 55I55-4102
.
. -Paga 1 of 2
218o Abio.gdon way NQD.doc 9/1 G/04 •
1 �
Departn,ent of Natuxal Resouz-ces
Central Region Watcrs
Attn: Kate Drewry
12�0 Warner Road
St. Paul, MN 55]Ofi-6793
DI�TR Wetlands.Coorilinalor�),
EGc51p�iCa1 Service5 SBCti�n
5(.?(? Lafayette Ro�td, B�x 25
St. �'aul, MI�55155
U-S. Army Cor�s of T:ngineers
ALLII; Mr. 1oe YanCa
190 s"' st. E�sc. - _
Saint Pau1, 1v�N SS10X-136$
Iiennepin Caunty Department of Environrnental �ervices
Attn: Eitcn Sancs
417 North 5`�' Stz•eet, Suite 2UU
Minneapolis, MN 554U1-1317
You aze hcrcby notified that I:he d�eision of t�ic Loeal Govcrnment Unit on the aL��vc-rcfcrenced
application was madc on thc datc statc;ci abovc. A copy of the Local Governmer�i Unit's Findings
a�d Conclusions is attached. Pursuant to Minn. R. 8420.Q250 any appeai o�t��.e dccision inust be
comme�iced by mailing a petition for appeal to the Minnesol,a Board of Watcr and Sail Resaurees
within l�iirty(34} calendar days of ttie date of the tnailing of this Noticc.
NOTE: Approval aF Wetlartd Replacement Plan Applications involvin�th.c use of wetland
banking crcdits is conditional upon withdraw�l of the appropriate credits fi-am the statc wetland �
barik. Nt► well�nd i�tZpa�fs m��earnrnence until the applicant receives a copy of the fully signed
• and executed "AppIication for Withdrawal of Wetland Credits,"signed by tlic BWSR wetland �
bank aelministra��r cerlifyin� Ehal the wetl�nci bank credits have b�en debitcd.
THI,S D�CI�SIfJN ONLYAPPLIES Tl)thA Minnesar� Wetland Conservation Ac1. Additional upprr,val,s or
permits from lacal, stat� and federal agencies may be required. Ch�ck with all appmpriate authnritie.r
be�'ore commencing work in or nenr wetlarids.
LOCA.L GOVERNN���iT UNZT
-������-
Si};naturc Datc
,A�E1�eIa Hanixners.District Techni.�ian I
I�iarrie and Titte
-Page 2 of 2
2180 A�in�dvn Way NQU.doc 9/lfi/d4
'
TABLE OF CONTENTS
� DIVISION 0-BIDDING AND CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS
Title page
' Certification page
Table of contents
� Note: Pre-bid information,instruction to bidders,information available to bidders,bid forms,agreement
forms,and conditions of the contract(contracts between owner and builders,supplementary condidons,
ec�ual employment opportunity/affirmative action requirements,targeted vendor business requirements,
� special conditioas for contract work involving federal Iabor stattdard requirements)are by others under
separate cover. The geIIeral conditions of the contract for construction are included at end of this
specification
� SPECIFICATIONS
DNiSION 1-GENERAL REQUiREMENTS
� 01010 Summary of Work
O 1015 General Structural Notes
01030 Alternates
OI050 Field Installation
� 01300 SubmittaLs
01410 Testing Laboratory Services
01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
� 01600 Material and Equipment
01700 Project Closeoat
0174o warranties
� DIVISI4N 2-SITEWORK
02070 Selective Demolition
� 02200 Earthwork
DIVISION 3-CONCRETE
' 03000 Poured in Place Concrete
DIVISION 4-MA.SONRY
� 04200 Unit Masonry(CMU}
04300 Stucco
' DIVISION S-METALS
OSi20 Shvctural Steel
' DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry
06170 Siructural Glued Laminated Units
' 46200 Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7-THE_I�1vtA�.AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 Insulation
� 07314 Wood Shakes
07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07901 Joint Sealants
�
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 2
'
r
DIVISION 8-DUO.RS AND WIl�TDOWS
0880Q Glass and Glazing �
082I 1 Wood Doors
08312 Wood Sliding Glass Doors/Glazing
08b10 Wood Windows/Glazing ,
08710 Door Hazdware '
DIVISION 9-FIlVISHES �
Q9250 Gypsum Drywall
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES �
DIVLSION 11-EQUIPMENT Pool,Hot Tub and Equipment(under separate cover)
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS none �
DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Gas Fiteplace(under sepazate cover) �
DIVISION 1S-MECHANICAL by others under separate cover
DTVISYON 16-ELECTRICAL(SHQRT FOR1Vn A GUIDE �
GENERAL CONDITIUNS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
END OF DIVISION-BIDDING AND CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS �
�
�
'
�
,
i
1
r
TABLE 4F CONTENTS ' Page 2 of 2 �
'
�
� 01020 SIJ2VIIVIARY OF THE WORK
DIVLSION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
� General:
� The work of the contxact consists,in ge�eral,of the construction a Cabana,a Poo1 and a Hot Tub at the
Richard and Britt Gage residence,Long Lake,Minnesota as shown on the Drawings and described in
these Specifications. It includes both the removai of materials and the installation of new materials. The
� Owner has the right to rejects ali bids.If the Owner accapts a bid,the successful Bidder/Buiider will
enter into an agreea�ent with the Owner to undertake this projec�
� The General canstruction contract includes the contracts,the drawings and the project manual.Tlte
Mechanical and Electrical work shall be bid under separate cantracts.
� The data set forth in this specification and indicated on tl�e drawings is accurate as can be obtained,but
its extreme accuracy can not be guaranteed. Final application shall be determined by the approval of the
Owner.
� The law and locahon of the construction sit8s govern the construchon of any contract,all buitding,
heating,ventilating,plumbing and electricai codes of the State of Minnesota and local laws a.�d
ordinances,which are hereby made part of each Contract.
� Scope of Work; Contractors will provide material delivered to the site and all labor to complete the work
according to the drawings and the project manual. All Sub-Contractors shall be responsible to the
� General contrac#or. The Owner will enter into various Contracts as required to complete the work
described.
' There shall be no communication,concerning technica!matters,between the Owner and the Contractors
regarding the Work after it begins. All commtu�ication regarding such matters shall take place between
the Contractors aad the Architect and or his Engineers.
� 01015
GE,NFRAL STRUCTURAL N4TES
r ��U�ts�
• Structiu�ai Steel-ATSM A572"W shapes;ASTM A36 for angles,plates saddles and bars.
' • Structural Tube Steel-ATSM A501,Grrade B. "
• Reinfarcutg Steel-ATSM A615,Grade 54.
• Welded Wire Fabric-ATSM A185.
� • Concrete-fc=3UOQ psi @.28 days,footing,slabs a�d beams;except 4004psi with 7%air
entrainmen#for garage slab.
• Masonry-f'm=150Q psi.
' • Concrete core fiIl for masonry-3000 psi @.28 days.
� • Microlam beams and PSL cols-Truss Joist MacMillan 2.OE,Fb=2900 psi treated when exterior
use. .
• Glulam beams-DFL,Fb=2400 psi with exterior glue lines.
� � Dimensional lumber SPF#2 or better,treated for exterior us�.
SUi�Il�iARY�F WORK Page 1 of 5
� GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
�
�
Design Live Losd� '
• Roof Live Load-40 psf.
• Floor Live Load-40 psf. '
• Balconies and Decks-60 psf.
• Wind Load- 15 psf.
Foundatioas �
• Footings are designed for an assumed maximum soil bearing pressure of ZOOOPSF. It shall be the
responsibilrty of the contractor to verify that this value is achieved at the foating elevations
indicated and without long term damaging differential settlement to the structure. �
� Bac1�i11 material against the foundation walls shall be granular,free dra.ining and contain not more
than 10%passin�#200 sieve
• Minimum soii cover for new exterior footings at building perirneter shall be not less than 3'-6" �
unless required by local building code to be deeper or where required to match existing footing
cover. Soil cover for footings supparting attached exterior decks shall be 5'-0".
• Unless otherwise noted, faotings under exterior and interior bearing walls shall be 12"wider than �
the wall thickness x 12"deep and reinforced with 2#4 continuous.
Strnctural Steel '
• Codes for Structural Steel desiga,f�brication and erection.
• AISC Manuel of Steel Construction,ASD,current addition.
• AI 1 bolts to be 3/4"diameter,ASTM A325,unless otherwise noted.Shop connections may be
welded. �
• All beam web copes shall be made to a l"m�um radius.
• Provide shop dra.wings for all shuctural steel items.
Wood Framing �
• Code:NFPA National Design Specification for Wood Construction,latest eciition.
• Shop drawings are required for all Microlatn and Glulam members. �
• Wood posts made up of 2 x members shail be nailed together @ 18" o.c.,each side,staggered
spacing,using IOd naiIs unless otherwise noted.
• Double all floor joists under parallel to span partitious. �
• Where indicated,joist hangers shall be 18 ga.,face mounted unless noted oti�erwise.
Genera! �
• Prnvide tempora�y bracing,shoring,etc,to all sire�ctural elements,as required at any stage of
constraction,to withstand construction loads or any other usual load during the cons#ruction
period. Such bracing shall remain in place as long as required for safaty until completion of the �
project.
OI030 ALTERNATES �
General
This section includes administrative and procedural requirements goveming Alteraates. �
Procedures
Coardination:Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completeiy and fi�lly integrate '
that Work into the Project. Include as part of each alternate,miscellaneous devices,accessory objects,
and similar items inciden#al to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of
the Ahernate. �
SUNIIVIARY OF WORK Page 2 of S
GFNFRAi REQUIREMENTS �
�
Definitions:
� 'CHE DEFINTTION BELOW AMI'LIFIES THE DEFINITION IN AIA DOCUMENT A741,
"INSTRUCTIONS TU BIDDERS."IT ASSUMES THE NORMAL BIDDING SITUATION WITH
� CONTRACTORS STATING ALTERNATE AMOUNTS REQUESTID ON THE BID FORM. IT
ALSO ASSUMES THAT TI�4WNER WILL DECIDE TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ALTERNATES
BBF�RE SIGNIIJG THE AGREEMENT. IT ALSO ASSUMES THAT THE BIDDiNG
� DOCUMENTS STIl'ULATE TERMS i�DER WHICH THE OWNER WILL ACCEPT OR REJECT
'I�ALTERNATES.
Alternates:
� A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain
work defined in the Bidding Requirements that r�tay be added to or deducte�from the Base Bid
� amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding cha�ge in either the amount of canstruction
to be completed,or in the products,materials,equipment,systems,or instaIlation methods
described in#he Contract Documents.
� 1. The cost or credit for each aitemate is the net addition to or deduction from.the
Contract Sum to incoiporate the Altemate into the Work. No other adjustments are
' made to the Contract Sum.
Procedares:
� A. Coordination: Modify or adjust afFected adjacent Work as necessary to completely at►d fully
integrate that Work into the Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate,miscetlaneous devices,accessory objects,and similar
� items incidental to or required for a cotr►plete installation whether or not mentioned as part of
the Alternate.
� B. Notification: Immediatsly following the award of the Contraet,notify each party involveci,in
writing,of the status of each alternate. Tndicate whether alternates have been accepted,reject�i,or
deferred for later consideration. Inciude a complete description of negotiated modifications to
� altemates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as ather Work of this Contract.
� D. Schedule: A"Schedule of Altemates"may be included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements far rnaterials necessary to achieve the
� Worle described under each alternate.
Prodacts(Not Applicable)
� Eaecntion
Schedule of altemates
� OIU50 FIELD INSTALLATION
� Laying and Staidng Uat:
A Surveyor hired by th Owner shall meet with the 4wner or their Architect to determine exact location,
accurately lay out the worlc and provide necessary instnuneirts,etc.,according to the drawings furnished.
� However each Contractor wil!he held responsible for verifying the correct location of their work on the
premises.
� SUMMARY OF WORK Page 3 of 5
GENERAI.REQUIREMENTS
�
013{IO SUBNIITTALS
Seqaence of Wark/Secacity: '
The Cabana Contractor shaI!be responsible for setting a schedule and will be responsible for coordinating �
security with the Owner.
01340 SHOP DRAWINGS �
Make all Shop Drawings accurately to scale and sufficiendy large to show alI pertinent features of the
item and its method of connection to the Work. ,
Submit 3 capies of Shop Drawings which are clear and legible in blue or black line on white backgcound.
01410 TESTIl�IG LASORATORY SER'V�CES r
General:
The Owner will select an inde ndent testin laborato if r uired. �
Pe 8 rY� e9
When initial tests indicate non-compliance with t�e Contract Documents,subsequent retesting ,
occasioned by the same testing agency,and costs thereof will be chazged to the responsible Sub-
Contractor.
0154(1 CONSTRUCTION FACYLITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS �
General: �
Owner shall pay for ail water,electricity,gas,temporary heat and other utilities needed during progress
of construction. �
Products:
The various contractors retained by the Owner shail provide such temporary facilities,and utiiities as are �
required for the safe and proper completion of the Woric.
Eaecution: r
The various contractors shall maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and �
proper completion of the Work. Remove such temporary facitities and controIs as rapidly as progress of
the Work will Permit
Coordinate location of temporary faciIities so as not to disrupt the neighbors. �
01500 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
General: �
Substitutions:Coatract is based on the stsndards of qeiality established in the Contract Documents. '
Substitu#ions will be considered oniy when listed at the time of bidding.
Do not substitute materials,equipment,or mefihods unless suc�substitutivn has been approved �
specifieally in writing by the Architect for this Work
SUMMARY OF WORK Page 4 of 5 �
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
�
Where the phrase"or equal"occurs in the Contract Documents,do not assume that the materials,
� equipment,or other methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically so approved
for this Work by the Architect
' Product Handling:Comply with the manufacturer's recommendation on product handling,storage and
prote�tion.Deliver products to the job site in thezr original containers,with labels intact and legible. All
material shall be stored off the�rottnd,under waterproof en-closnres, and away&om wet or damp
� surfaces. Maintain all finished surfaces clean and unmarred,and suitably protected untii accepted by
Owner.
� 01700 PROJECT CLOSEUUT
Generat:
' When the various cor►struction Work is within fifteen(1 S)days of completion,the various Contractors
shall give wiitten notice to the Archi#ect of date of substant�al completion and ready for pre-fin�al
� inspection.
Ali Subcontractors shall take action required to correct all deficiencies listed and when they have been
completed,a final inspection will be made.
' U on com letion of final ins ection the Architeet eatt state that tbe ro'ect is com lete,or if work
p P P P J P
remains that a sutm,satisfactory to inseu'e the performance of the work, be retained until completion.
' When project is approaching completion and final payment,all Sub-Contractors shali secure lien wavers
in full for labor and materiai furnislted itom a31 suppliers. Inadequa.te,in.complete,or insufficient wavers
� shall constitute cause for non-approval ef fmal application for payments.
Project record documents:
� Throughout progress of the Work,each Contractor will maintain an accurate record of changes in the
Conh�act Documents. Mgintain one complete set of the Contract Documents on the Site,to i�e used only
� as the"Job Record Set".
Do not use tlne 7ob Record Set for any purpase other than to record changes occurring in the Contract
� Documents during the progress of the Work. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information
that the change has occurned. Upon completion of the Work,and as a condition of its acceptance,deliver
the properly annotated 7ob Record Set to the Architec�
� 010740 WA�RRANTIES
� Each Contractor shall be responsible for its own work and shall repair or replace(a#its own expenss)any
defective work or material which may show itself within one year after issuance of Certif cate of Final
Completion by the Owner.
, END OF
DMSION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
�
�
� SUMMARY OF WORK Page 5 of 5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
�
� SITE WORK
� 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITiON
General:
iDemolition: Provide aU materials and labor to accomplish demolition as may be reasonably required ta carry
out#he Work set forth in the Contract Docusnents. The Demolition Contractor(This Cotttra.ctor} shall
� salvage any items that are in good condition and can be reused. All demolition exterior waIls, stairs etc.
indicated or required and not ottierwise assigned, is included under the responsibility of this Contractor.
This Contractor shall protect all trees marked with a red ribi�on. He shall also proteot all feuces, both
' tennporary and permanen#, the iree shack and the main house. This Contractor shail contact atl �tility
companies for the location flf atl utility lines in the construction area before beginning the work as it shall
be his responsibility to proteet all ubility lines and utility boxes af all types,both on or in the ground
� This Contractor shall operate within the construction limit boundary lines shawn on the architect's site
drawing.
� Repairs: This Contractor,at their own expense,shall make good to the General Contractor or any person
whose property is damaged or destroyed as a result of demolition operations. He is not responsible for
damage caused by others,however he must inspect the property to be demolished and regort any damage of
� items to be sa.ved before he begins his work.
Termination of Services: Each Trade shall terminate its own services to existing construction which are to
be permanently disconnected. They shall further make all temporary service terminations indicated or
� replaced services required as a part of work under all Contracts.
Disposal: This Contractor is responsible for removal,hauling,and disposing af all debris resulting from his
� operation every two days.
Salvaged items shall be Ieft on the site at a spot chosen by the Construction Manager.
� END OF SECTION 02070
�
�
�
�
r
' SELECTNE DEMULITI4N Page i of 1
�
,
, EARTHWORK
SECTION 02200
� PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contrac#, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Secrion.
' 1.2 SLTIVIIvIARY
A. This Sectioa includes the following:
' 1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, wallcs, pavements, snd
landscaping.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
� 3. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for waIks and pavements.
5. Excavating and ba.ckfilling trenches within building lines.
� B. Related Sections: The fo�lowing Sections contain r�uirements that relate to this Section.
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-In-Place Cancrete"for concrete encasings,cradles, and
' appurtenances for utility systems. �
2. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
3. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
4. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
' S. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
6. 6 inches beneath invert elevation of pipe in trenches,end the greater of 24 inches
wider than pipe diameter or 42 inches wide.
, 1.3 DEFINI'I�ONS
A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the
' reuse or disposal of materials remov�.
B. Subgrade: The uppermost surfaacce of an excavation or the top sw�face of a fill or backfill
' immediately below subbase,drainage fill,or topsoil materials.
C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficieat approved soil materiat is not
available from excavations.
� D. Subbase Course: The Iayer placed between the subgrade and base course in a paving system
or tixe Iayer placed between the subgrade and sw�face of a pavement or walk.
, E. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving
system.
� F. Drainage�ill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut
'oi�upward capillary flow of pore water.
' G. Unauthoriz�d excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrs.de
elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthoriz�d excavation,as
weli as rennedial work directed by the Archrte�t,shall be at the Contractor's expense.
� EARTHWORK Page 1 of 5
'
'
H. Structures: Building, Pool,Hot Tub,footings,foundations,retaining walls, slabs,tanks,
curbs, mechanical and elecbrical appartenances, or other man-made stationary features '
constructed above ar below ground surface.
I. Utiiities include on-site underground pipes,well,septic system,conduits,d�tcts,and cables, �
as weil as underground services withia buil@ing iines.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of autharities ,
having jurisdiction. .
I. Before commencing earthworlc, meet with the Architect, and other concerned �
entities as required. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including
testing and inspection procedures(if any)and requirements. Record discussions
and agreements and fumish a copy to each participan� ,
1.5 PRO.IECT CONDITIONS
A. ExistingUtiIities: DonotinterruptexistingutiliriesservingfacilitiesoccupiedbytheOwner �
or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and tl�ten only after acceptable
temporary utility services have been provided.
1. Provide a minimum 4&hours'notice to the Architect and receive written notice to �
proceed before intemipting any utility.
B. Coordinats with utility compaaies and Owners as to shutoff services if lines are active. ,
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOII,MATERIALS '
A. General: SEE STRUCTURAL NOTES AND DETAILS: '
2.2 ACCESSORTES
A. Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant p�lyethylene film warning tape manufactut�ed for '
marking and identifying ur►derground utilities,6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,continuously
iciscribed with a description of the utiirty.
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resista.nt polyethylene film warning tape '
manvfactured for marking and identifying underground utilities,6 inches wide and 4 mils
thicic minitt�um,continuously insczibed with a description of the utility,with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection,de#ectable by metaI detector when ,
ta.pe is buried up to 2'-6"deep.
I. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: '
a. Red: Electric.
b. Yellow: Gas,oil,steam,and dangerous materials.
c. Orange: Telephone and other communications,
d. Blue: Water systems. �
e. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3-EXECUTION �
3.1 PREPARATION
EARTHWORK Page 2 of 6 �
'
,
A. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused
' b3settlement, lateral movement,undernuning,washout,and other hazards created by
eazthwork operations.
� B. Tree protection is specified in the Divisiott 2 Section"Selective Demolition."See Architec#
if it appears that grading may damage existing trees
' 3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surfac$water and stibsurface or ground water,fram pondmg on prepared subgrades,
and from flooding Project srte and svrrounding area.
' B. Protect subgrades soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
' 3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Classified Excavatwn: Excavatian is classified and mcludes excavatton to requued
subgrade elevations. Excavation will be classified as eaRh excavation or rock excavation
� as foltows:
l. Earth excav�tion includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visibla
' on surface;underground structures,utiiities,and other items indicated to be demolished and
removed;together with soil aad other materials encountered that are not classified as rock
or unauthorized excavation.
� 3.4 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. Compiy with local crodes,ordinances, and requirements of authorities havin�jurisdiction
, to maiutain stable excavations.
3.5 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
' A. Notify Arclutect when excavations have reacheci required subgrade. �
B. When unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
' compacted backfill or filI material as directed.
3.b UNAUTHORI�ED EXCAVATION{TF ANY)
, A. Fill unauthorized excava#ion under foundations or wall footings by eartendizig indicated
bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to exca.vation bottom,without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to pmper p�sition
when accepta.hle to the Architect.
, 1. Fiil unauthorized excava�ions under other construction as directed by the Architect.
� 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stocicpile excavated materia.ls acceptable for backfill aud fill s�il materials, inaluding
, acceptable bonow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place,grade,
.and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to preveat wind-blown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store.within drip
' line of remaining trees.
3.8 BACKFILL
' A. Backfill excavations promp#ly,but not before completing the following:
EARTHWORK Page 3 of 6
�
'
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including perimeter insulation where ,
applicable.
2. Surveying Iocations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Testing,inspecting,and approval of underground utili#ies. �
4. Concrete form work removal.
5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
B. Place az►d compact initial backfill of satisfactory soit material or subbase material,free of '
particles lazger than 1 inch,to a height of 12 inches over the utili#y pipe or conduit
C. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. �
D. Fil!voids with approved backf iti materials as shoring and bracing,and sheeting is removed.
E. Place and compact final bacl�ill of sa.tisfactory soil material to final subgrade. '
F. Install wacning tape directly above utilities,l2 inches below finished grade,except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs. �
G. Drainage Bacl�'ill:Place and compact drainage backfill of filtering material over subsurface
drain,in width indicated,to within i2 inches of finai subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill
with one layer of filter fabric, overlapping edges at Ieast 6 inches. '
3.9 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, ,
obstructions,and deleteriaus materials from ground surface prior to placing fills.
1. Plow strip,or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill �
material will bond with existing surface.
A. Place fiIl material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. ,
1. Under grass,use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements,use subbase or base material,or satisfactory excavated �
or borrow soil ma#erial.
3. Under steps and ramps,use subbase material.
4. Under building slabs in all occupied areas,use special gas permeable material(for
Radan protection). ,
3.10 MOTSTURE C4NTROL
A. Grade aIl contours so the slope is away from all structures and starting 6"below fmished �
building surfaces TE,stucco,waod,Etc.
3.11 COMPACTION �
A. Place bacicfill and fill materiais in layers not more thsn 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipmen�and not more than 4 inahes in loose depth for '
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations.
Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. ,
C. Percentage of Maximum Ihy Density Requirements: Compact soil to not Iess than the
followiag pexcenta.ges of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: '
EARTHWORK Page 4 of 6
'
'
1. Under structures,pool,hot tub,building slabs,steps,and pavements,compact the
' top 1 Z inches below subgrade and each iayer of backfilI or filt material at 95 percent
maximum dry density.
2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of
bacicfill or fiIl material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
, 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas,compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each
Iayer of backfill or fiil material at 90 percent maximum dry density.
' 3.12 GRADING
, A. General: Unifarmly grade areas to a smooth surface,free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and gcade to cross sections, tines, and elevations
' indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
' 2. G�#out soft spots,fiIl law spots,and trim high spots to conform to required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water ar�vay from buildings(See Drawings and 3.1 Q A
' above)to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within ttie following
tolerances:
' I. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
2. Wallcs: Plus or minus 0.10 foo�
3. Pavements: Plus or minus I/2 inch.
' C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgracie toleranc8 to i/2 inch when tested with a
10-ft straightedge.
' 3.13 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Under pavements and walks,place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place
base course material over subbases to pavements.
' 1. Compact subbase and base couises at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections and thickness t�not less thaa 95 percent of ASTM D 4254
' relative density.
2. Shape subbase a�ad base to required crown eievations and crass-slope grades.
3. When compacted subbase or base course thickness is 6 inches or less, place
materials in a single layer.
� 4. When thicicness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place
materials in ec�ual layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick when compacted.
' 3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic,freezing,and erosion.
' Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Protecting existing site marked vegetation and drawing marked vegetation: Protect existing
, trees,shcubs,Etc.from damage within grading limits
C. Repair and re-establish grades to s�cified tolerances where completed or paztially
completed surfaces become eroded,rutted,settled,or lose compaction due to subsequent
' construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace materiai to depth directed by the Architect;reshape
, and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density.
EARTi-iWORK Page 5 of 6
'
D. Settlin : Where settlin occurs durin the Pro'ect correction eriod, remove finished '
� g g J P
surfacing,bacidll with additional approved material,compact,and reconstruct surfacing.
1, Restore appearance,quality,and conditian of fiEnished surfacing to match adjacent '
work,and eIiminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3,15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS ,
A. Disposa.l: Remove surplus satisfa.ctory soil andwaste material,includingunsatisfactory soil,
trash,and debris, Note: the surplus soil and unsatisfactory soil will be disposed of on the ,
Owner's property as directed by the ar�hitect. Only trash and debris will be legally disposcd
of off site.
,
'
. '
. '
,
. '
1
�
'
'
'
�
,
END OF SECTION 02200 Page 6 of 6 '
,
,
' POURED-IIwPLACE CONCRETE
' SECTION 03300
THIS SECTION USES Tf�TERM ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER.
' PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections (General Stwvchual Notes), appiy to
this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
, A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix
desiga,placement procedures,and finishes.
B.. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
' 1. Fo�ndations aad footings.
2. Slabs-on-g�rade.
3. Equipnnent pads and bases.
' C. Related Sections: The follawin Sections contain re uirements that relate to this
8 q
Section:
' 1. Division 2 Section "PoRland Cement Concrete Paving" for concrete walks, and
aprons. •
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Gener�i: Submit the following according to Conditians of the Contract and Division 1
' Specification Sections. �
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
' accessories, admixtures, patching campounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
compounds,dry-shake f�nish materials,and others if requested by Architect.
C. Shop clrawings for reinforcement detaiiing fabricating, bending, and piacing concrete
' reinforcemen�. Cornply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detaiiing
Reinforced Concrete S4ructt�res" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diag�ams, and artangement of cflncrete reinforceraent. Include special reinforcing
' required for openings through concrete structures.
D. Samplcs of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and
' descriptions,as follows:
1. Waterstops.
2. Vapor retarder/baxrier.
' 3. Tile inlays
G. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test regorts. Material certificates shall
, be signed by raanufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies
with or exceeds specified requirements. Pmvide certification from admuctare
rnanufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.
' CONCRETE Page 1 of$
'
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, speci�cations, '
and standards,except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." '
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI)"Manual of Standard Practice."
PART 2-PRODUCTS '
See General Structural Notes: in Division I General rec}uirements for:
2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS ,
A. Reinforcing Bars:
B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: '
C. Steei Wire: ASTM A 82,piain,coid-drawrf steel. (if any,see drawings).
D. Welded Wire Fabric: (If any,see drawings). ,
E. Supports for Reinforcemenr Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and weidect wire fa.bric in place. Use wire bar-type '
supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where ,
base materia�will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with
forms,provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic(CRSI,Class 1)or stainless
steel(CRSI,Class 2). ,
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I. '
1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to
Architec� '
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Type F.
C. Normal-VVeight Aggregates: ASTM C 33. Provide aggregates from a single source for ,
exposed concrete.
1. For exgosed exterior surFaces,do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain ,
substances that can cause spalling.
2. Local aggregates not camplying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to ,
produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual
service may be used when acceptable to Architect.
D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. '
E. Water: Potable.
G. Admixtures,General: Provide concrete admixtures that conta.in not more than 0.1 percent ,
chloride ions.
H. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by snanufacturer to be compatible '
with other required adraixtures
CONCRETE Page 2 of 8
,
'
1. AvaiIable Prodacts: Subject to compiiance with requirements, products that may
� be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the foliowing:
2.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
' I. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A.
1. Availabte Products: Subject to compliance with
' 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS
' I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
A. Sand Cushion: Clean,natural sand.
' B. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested
according to ASTM E 154,as follows:
' 1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils#hick.
C. Liquid Membrane-Fortning Curing Compound: Liquid-iype rnembrane-forming curing
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than
' 0.55 kgf sq.meter when applied at 240 sc�,ft./gal.
1. Pravide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound(VOC)rating of
' 350 mg per liter.
2. Available Products: Subject to campliance with requirements.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNTNG NIIXES
' See)1015 Genexal Structura.l
' 2.4 CONCRETE MIIfl.i�IG
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,and as specified.
' PART 3-EXECUTION
3.I GENERAL
' A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarderlt�arrier, and other related
materials with placement of forms and reiaforcing steel.
, 3.2 FORMS
A, General: Design,erect,support,bracs,and maintain formwork to support vertical,lateral,
' static, and dynaraic loads that might be applied until concrete struct�re can support such
loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size,shape,
alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain fotmwork construction tolerances and
surface irregularities c�mplying with the following ACi 3471imits:
, 1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces ex}�osed to view.
2. Provide Class C toierances for other concrete surfaces.
' B. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommadate
worlc of other trades. Determine size and location of openings,mcesses,and chases from
trades providing such items. Accurately piace and securely support itcros built into forms.
I3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARR�R Il�TSTALLATION
' CONCRETE Page 3 of 8
'
A. General: Place vapor retarderlbazrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel
with direcrion of pour. �
B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-
sensitive tape.
1. PLACING REINFORCEMENT ,
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for '
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and
supports and as specified.
1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinfarcement '
placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose nist and mill scale, eatth, ice, and ottter materials that '
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure rainforcement against dispiacement. Locate and ,
support reinforcung hy metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved
by Architect.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. '
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete,not
toward exposed concrete surfaces. '
E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as Iong as practicable.Lap adjoining pieces at ieast
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset Iaps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction. ,
� 3.4 JOINTS
A. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to ,
form continuous diaphragm in each join� Support and protect exposed waterstops during
progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufachuer's printed
instructions. ,
B Isolation Joints in Slabs-on�{'rrade: Conshuct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points
of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as coiumn pedestals, '
foundation waUs,grade beams,and other locations,as indicated.
1. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
C. Contraction(Control)Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on- '
gra.de to form panels of patterns as s�own. Use saw cuts 1!8 inch wide by one-fourth of
slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth,unfess otherwise indicated. ,
1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberbaard
strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush vrith slab surface. Tool
slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, reznove inserts '
and clean groove of loose debris.
2. Contraction joints in uneazposed slabs may be formed by sa.w cuts as soon as
possible after sIab finishing as may be safely done wrthout dislodging aggregate. ,
3. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either
direction and located to canform to bay spacing wherever possible (at cfllumn
centerlines,half bays,third bays).
4. Joint fillers and sea.lants are specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." '
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
CONCRETE Pa e 4 of 8 '
S
�
' A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect aBd coFnplete formwark installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify ofher trades to permit
installation of their work.
' B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete,"and as specified.
' C. Deposit concrete cantinuousIy ar in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened snfficiently to cause searns or planes of vveakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified.
' Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than
24 inches and in a manner to avoid incluaed construction joints. Where placement
' consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid
cold joints.
' 1. Cansolidate placed conerete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by
hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of conerete complying with ACI 309.
, E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate conerete slabs in a con�inuous
operation, within limits of construc�ion joints, until completing placement of a panel or
section.
' 1. Consolidate conerete during piacement operations so that conerete is thoroughiy
worked around reinforcement,other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straiglrtedge and strike of� Use bull
' floats or darbies to smooth swface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operatians.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placetttent.
' F. Ho#-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality
and strength of concrete,place conerete complying witb ACI 30S and as specified.
' 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilied or
chopped ice may be ased to control temperature,provided water equivaIent of ice
, is caIculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitro�en to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that
steel temperahue wiil not exceed the amhient air temperatut'e imraediately before
' embedding in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just�before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
' 4. Use water-reducing retarding admix#ure when required by high temperatures,low
hwnidity,or other adverse placing conditions,as acceptable to Architect.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
, A. Rough-Formeci Finish: Provide a rough-formed futish on formed concrete surfaces nat
exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the
' conerete surface having te�cture imparted by form-facing mat�erial use�d,with tie holes and
defective areas repaired and patched,and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in
height rubbed down or chipped off.
' B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on fornaed concrete surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete,or a
covering material applied ciirectly to concrete,such as waterproofing,dampproofing,
' CONCRETE Page 5 of 8
,
'
veneer piaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface
obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical
manner with a minimum of seams or as shown. Repair and patch defective areas wi#h fins '
and other projections completely removed and smoothed.
3:8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES �
, A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing,membrane or elastic roofing,or sand-bed terrazzo;and where indicated. ,
1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface
until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, '
when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently
to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with
power-dreven floats or by hand-floating if area is smalI or inaccessible to power ,
units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F} 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fll
low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. rmmediately after leveling,
refloat surface to a uniform, smooth,granuIar texture. '
B. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin
� final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surFace. '
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to toIerances of F(F) 20 (floor
flatness) and F(L) ]7 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind
smooth any surFace defects that would telegraph through appfied floor coveriag system. ,
C. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Wttere ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-
set mortar, apply a trowel fuush as specified, then immediately follow by stigiltly
scarifying the surface with a fine broom. '
3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE TTEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in conerete structures for passage of work by '
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place.
Mix, place, and cure conerete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide '
o#her miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, '
intersections,and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipmenrt Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and '
foundations as shown on dra.wings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
3.10 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION • I
A. General: Protect freshiy placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot ,
temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss
before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply
according to manufacture�'s instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before
power floating and troweling. '
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after
placing and finishing. Weather perrnitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 t
days.
CONCRETE Page 6 of 8
' G Curis�g Methods: Cure concrebe by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-
retaining cover curing,or by combining these methods,as specified.
, D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
, 2. Use continuous water-fog spray.
3. Cover concrete surface with spec�ed absorptive cover,thoroughly saturate caver
with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide
coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4inch lap over adjacent
' absorptive covers.
E. Provide moisture-re#aining cover curing as follows:
' 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moist�re-retaining cover for curing concrete,placed
in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed
by waterproof tape or adhesive. Lnmediately repair any holes or t-ears during
' curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs,walks,and curbs
' as follaws:
1. Apply curing compound to concrete siabs as soon as final finishing operations are
complete(within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply
' uniformly in aontinuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours
after initial application. Maintain contiauity of coating and repair damage during
' curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that witl not affect surfaces to be covered with
fuiish materials applied directly io concrete.
' G. Guring Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces,by applying the appropriate curing method.
' l. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-r�taining
caver,unless otherwise directed.
3.11 C�NCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
, A. Mix dry-pack mortar,consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggegate
passing a No. 16 mesh sieve,using only enough water as required for
' handling and placing.
1. G�t out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and
' holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less
than 1 inch. Maice edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with
bonding agent. Place patching martar before bonding agent has dried.
' 2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend w�ite portland cement and standard portland
c�ment so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide
test $reas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
' proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off siightly higher
than suirounding surface.
A. Sampling and testing for c}uality control during coacrete placement may include the
' following,as directed by Architect.
1. Sampling Fnesh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for stump to comply
' with ASTM C 94.
a. Siump: ASTM C 143;one test at point af discharge for each day's pour of
each Lype of concrete;additional tests when concrete consistency seems to
' have changed.
CONCRETE Page 7 of 8
'
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric in.ethod for lightweight or normal '
weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight
concrete;one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C lt}64; one test hourIy when air '
temperature is 40 deg� (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C}
and above,aud one test for each set of compressive,-strengt�specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard
cyiinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. '
Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when
field-cured test specunens are required.
e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour t
exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additionai sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the
first 2S cu.yd, of each conarete class placed in any one day;one specimen
tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen '
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
£. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is iess thar� 50 cu. yd.,
Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory
sirength is provided. �
C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, ready-mix producer, and Contractor
witiiin 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shail contain the Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing '
service,concrete iype and class,location of concrete batch in struoture,design compressive
strength at 28 days,concrete mix proportions and materials,compressive breaking strength,
and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. '
END�F SECTION 03300
t
'
1
1
'
1
,
'
'
CONCRETE Page 8 of 8 '
1
. U1�IT MASONR.Y
' SECTION 04200
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT 4R ENGINEER".
PART I -GENERAL
I1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, inclvding General and Suppiementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
I.2 SUMMARY
� A. This Section includes the following:
, 1. Concrete unit masonry.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIItEMENTS
' A. Provide uni.t masonry that develops the follawing installed compressive strengths(fm):
1. �or concrete unit rt►asonry: As follows:
� a. fm= 1SOQ psi.
b. As indicated.
� 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following�iz�accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
' Specification Sections.
B. Product data.for each different masonry unit, accessory,and other manufactured produc#
' indicated.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabricaxion, bending, and placement of unit
masonry reinforcing ��ars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details a�d Detailing of Concrete
� Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and
arrangement of masonry reinforcement.
' D. Material certificates for the following signed by manufacturer and Cantractor cert.ifying
that each material camplies with requirements.
1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout including name of
' manufacturer,brand,type,and weight slips at time of deiivery.
2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
3. Each type and size of joint reinforcemen�
� 4. Mortar camplying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.
5. Grout mixes. Include descr�ption of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
6. Masonry units.
1 E. Hot weattier construation procedwres evidencing compliance with requirements specified
in referenced uuit masonry standard.
� 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.I/ASCE 6 "Spec�cations for Masonry
Structures,"except as otherwise indicateci.
'
' UNTT MASONRY Page I of 6
'
1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2,
and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.S.I.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to ,
modify Article 2,1.1.4 by deletin� requirement for installing vent pipes and
conduits built into masonry.
2. Mortar composition and properties will be evaivated per ASTM C 784.
3. Grout compressive strength wiil he tested per ASTM C 1019. '
1.6 DELNERY, STORAGE,,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. '
B. Store and handie masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperattire changes, �
contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place unti!units
are in an air-dried condition.
C. Stora cementitious materials off the ground,under cover,and in dry locaxion. '
D, Store aggegates where grading and athar required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided. '
E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumuiation
of dirt and oil. �
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and silIs with �
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 houzs and concentrated ioads for ,
at least 3 days after building masonry wails or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout,mortar,and soil from staining the face af masonry to be �
left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in
contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed raud and mortar splatter by means of �
coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
D. Hot-Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. '
PART1 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS '
A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete
masonry unit required. �
1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows:
a. �or lintels,comers,jambs,sash,control joints,headers,bonding,and �
other special conditions.
b. Squar�edge.ci units for outside comers,except where indicated as
bullnose.
2. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated �
below for size tha# are manufactured to specified face dimensions within
tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for '
concrete masotuy units.
TJNIT MASONRY Pagc 2 of 6
'
1 ----•-
a. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8
' inch less than nominal widths by noininal heights by nominal lengths
indicated on drawings.
1. Provide Type I,moishue-eenlrolled units.
� 2. Provide Type II,non-moisture-controlled units.
3. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture,
unless otherwise indicated.
' B. Hollow Load-Bearing Conorete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area
� compressive strength indicated below:
a. 1900 psi.
, b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths rec}uired ta prociuce concrete
unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
1 Weight Classification: Normal weight.
� C. Salid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C i45,Grade N and as follows:
� 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide einits with minimum average net area
comgressive strength indicated below:
a. 1800 psi.
� b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete
uni#masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
� 1. Weight Classification: Normal weigh�.
2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERYALS
� A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type i or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
required mortar color.
� B. Masonry Cemen� ASTM C 91.
C. Water. Clean and potable.
I2.3 REINFQRCING STEEL
� A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit
masonry standazd and this article.
� B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
� 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615.
2. Grade 60.
� C. Plain Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.
2.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
' A. Generai: Provide joint reinforcemen# complying with requ'vrements of referenced unit
masonry srtanciard and this article,formed from the following:
� 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit
' UNI'f MASUNRY Page 3 of 6
'
masonry standard for application indicated.
B. Description: Weided-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and '
plain cross rods into straiglit lengths of not less than 10 feet,with prefabricated corner and
tee units,and complying with requiremen#s indicated below:
1. Wire Diameter for Sida Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage). '
2. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1875 inch.
3. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage). '
a. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16
inches o.c.
b. Truss design with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than lb inches o.c. �
and number of side rods as fol�ows:
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliar�ce with requiremeuts, provide joint reinforcement '
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS,GENERAL
A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with �
requirennents for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of this article.
B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, coating cIass as required by referenced unit �
masonry standazd for applicatian indicated.
1. Wire Diameter: As indicated.
�
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: As follows:
1. ASTM A 526 (commercial quality), Coating Designarion G64, steel sheet zin� �
coated by hot-dip process on continuous Iines prior to fabrication, for sb.eet metai
ties and anchors completely embedded ir►mortar.
2. ASTM A 366 (commercial quality) cold-rolied carbon steel sheet hot-dip �
galvan�ed after fabrication to compIy with ASTM A 153, Class B2 (for unit
lengths over 15 inches)and Class B3 (for unit Iengths under 15 inches), for sheet
metal ties and anchors exposed to the weather and not completely embedded in �
mortar and gout
D. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or
ASTM A 153, Class B3,as applicahle to size and form indicated. '
E. Manafacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
2.b MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS �
C. Anchor Bolts: Steei holts complying with A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A Sb3
hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A �
153,Class C;of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations:
1. Headed}�olts. �
2. Nonheaded bolts,straigh�
3. Nonheaded boIts,bent in manner indicated.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES ,
A. Nonmetallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D
1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber-like materials with �
specific resistance to petroleum base oils),Grade 1 (compression-deflection range of 2-5
iTNIT MASONRY Page 4 of 6
. �
'
psi), compressibie up to 35 percent, of width and thickness indicated, formulated from the foIlowing
� material:
I. Neoprene.
2. Urethane.
' 3. Polyvinyi chlonide.
B. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to frt standard
' sash block and to maintain lateral stability in rinasonry wall; size and configuration as
indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000,Designation 2AA-805.
� 2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287,Generai Parpose Grade,Type PVC-65406.
' 2.8 MORTAR AND GR4UT MIXES
A. Generai: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigmsnts, air-entraining agents,
accelerators,retarders,water repellent agents,antifreeze coznpounds,or other admixtures, ,
� unless otherwise indicated.
l. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
� B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270,Proportion Specification,for types
of mortar indicated below:
' C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Properiy Specification for job-
mixed mortar and ASTM C 1142 for ready-mixed mortar,of types indicated bclow:
� D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry
standard.
PART 3-EXECUTION
r3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting
performance of unit masonry.
� 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accura.te spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
� widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at comers,jambs, and where possible at other
locations.
� B. Lay up watls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with covrses accurately
spacea and coordinated with other construction.
, C. La.y concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by Iapping
not Iess than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not
use units with less than nominal4-inoh horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
� D. Stopping and Raswning Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit lengti� for ono-half
running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond;do not too#h. Clean exposed
surfaces of set masonry, if required},and remove loose m�so�ry units and mortar prior to
' laying fresh masonry.
UNIT MA3UNRY Page 5 of 6
�
E. Su rt maso solidl with mortar unless otherwise indicated. '
PP� I►rY Y �
33 MORTA.R BEDDING AND JOINTING �
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: ,
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in znortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,
columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with �
grout.
3. For starting course on footings where celIs are not grouted, spread out fuil mortar
bed including areas under cells. �
3.4 INSTALLATiON�F REINFORCED iTNIT MASONRY
A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to coinply with requirements of referenced unit '
masonry standard.
B. Temporary Formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry �
elements daring construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make
sufficiently tight to prevent ieakage of mortar and grout. Brace,tie, and support �
forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of teinforced
masonry.
C. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained '
sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.
D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hazdeneci �
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
3.5 REPAIRING,POIIVTING,AND CLEANING '
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, ar otherwise �
damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Instail new units to rnatch adjoining
units and in fresh mortar or grout,pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints,enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes,and '
completely fiIl with znortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings,and adjacent
construction to provide a neat,uniform appearance,prepared for application of sealants.
C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as �
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic �
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or '
waterproof masking tape.
3. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK
45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces.
D. Protection: Provide final protection aud maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to t
Installer,that ensure unit masonry is withaut damage and deterioration at tune of
Substantial Completion. �
END OF SECTION 04200
U1�TIT MASONRY Page 6 of 6 ,
'
,
STUCCO
SECTION 043Q0
� PART 1 GENERAL
l A l SUMMARY
rA. Section Description: Portland Cement Plaster over conventionally framed and sheathed
substrates and masonry.Material used shall be the same that is on the existing house. WaII
� material conditions wiIl be different
B. Section Includes:
� 1. Water-Resistive Barrier
2. Lath and accessories
3. Plaster materials
4. Optional acrylic primer
' S. Acrylic finish
C. Products instalied by others but not suppiied under this section:
rl. Flashing Papers/Membranes:Rough window sills shall be properly covered with
reinfarced coated vapor harrier,grade A or B product under the direct supervision
of tha sub contractor.
� 2. Flashing and Sheet Metai:Refer to Section 07600.Fabrication and installation of
related flashing and sheet metal components shall be under direct supervision of sub
contractor. Mechanic shall be experienced and competent in sheet metal trade.
� 3. Joint Sealers:Refer to Section 07900. Iastallation of joint sealant shall be under
direct supervision of the sub contractor. Joint sealant installer shall be experienced
and coinpetent in the installation of elastomeric construction sealants.
� 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Seetion OI330—$ubmittal Proeedures
� B.Section 05400—Cold-Formed Meta1 Framing
C.Section 06110—Wood Framing
D. Section 06164—Sheathing
E. Section 07600—Fiashing and Sheet Metal
, F. Section 07900—Joint Sealsrs
G.Section 08500—Windows
H.Seetion 08310— Access Doors and Panels
� I. Section 08550—Wood Windows
J. Section 09250—Gypsum$oard
K. Section 10200— Louvers and Vents
� 1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials{ASTM)
Standards.Most cwrent version.
' 1. ASTM C 79:Standard Specification for Treated Care and Nontreated Core
Gypsum Sheathing
� 2. ASTM C 91: Standard Specification for Masonry Cement
3. ASTM C 15U: Standazd Specification for Portland Cemeut
4. ASTM C 206: Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime
5. ASTM C 26U: Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
' Concrete
04340 STUCCO Page 1 of 7
,
1
�
. 6. ASTM C 847: Standard Specification for Mata1 La.th
7. ASTM C 897: Staudard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed '
Portland Cement-Based Plasters
8. ASTM C 926: Standard Specification for Application of Portland
Cement-Based Plaster �
9. ASTM C 979: Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete.
14. ASTM C 1063: Standard Specification for:
11. Installation of Latliing and �urring to Receive Interior and Exterior �
Portla.nd Cement-Based Plaster
12. ASTM D 578: Standard Spec�cation for Glass Fiber Strands
B. Portland Cement Plaster{Stucco)Manual:Portland Cement Association �
C. U8C Standard 14-1: Kraft Waterproof Building Paper 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
*NOTE TO SPECIFIER: EDIT ARTICLE B SUBSECTi4N t OR 2 BELOW TO SUIT �
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS.
A. Portland Cement Plaster(Stucco): A proportioned field mixed blend of Portland cement,
masonry cement,sand,glass fibers,acrylic admixture ai►d potable water. �
B. Finish Op#io�s.
1. Stucco Finish Coat:A proportioned field mixed blend of white portland �
cement, lrydrated lime,silica sand,acrylic admixture and water.
2. Acrylic Finish: A proprietary mixture of 100 percent acrylic polymer,
aggrega#e,water and pigments.
C. Functionat Criteria. �
1. General:System shall be applied to vertically oriented substrates and shall
be protected firom wea#her exposure harmful to coating performance. �
Horizoritally oriented surfaces shall be sloped for positive drainage.
2. Substratc Conditions.
a. Substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, latence and
contaminants. '
b. Substrate dimensional tolerances:Flat within 1/4{0.25)inch in any
4 foot surface radius
3. Expansion and Control Joiats: Continuous expansion and control joints '
shall be ins�lled at locations noted on the dra.wings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section U1330: ,
1. Product Data:Acrylic finish manufacturer's produot information,eva.luation reports,
testing Information,certificates and warranty. �
2. Shop Drawings:
3. Samples: [Indicate quantity]24 inch square samples of portlaud cement plaster with �
���1 I�cryIic finish] in each color and texture specified, for preliminary approval.
Each sample shall be prepared using#he same tools and techniques propased for Project
application. �
I.Q6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
(kE300 STUCCO P e 2 of 7 �
�
�
,
� A. Plastering Contractor Qualifica�ions
' 1. Contraetor shall provide a Iist of completed work of equal scope.
2. Contractor stiall hold a current certificate from the manufacturer of the acrylic finish
� to apply that material.
B. Field Mock-Ups:Prepare field mock-ups ta match preliminary samples approved by the
Architect.
, l. The Architect shall determine location and size.
2.. Mock-up(s)sha.11 accurately represent the products to be instalIed on the project,
� utilizing the same tools,and techniques proposed for Project appiication.
3. The approved mock-up(s) shalI be available and maintained at the job site for
reference.
� C. Pre-Ltstallation Conference: Schedule a pre-iunstallation conference with the Architect
and Contractor,to review the work of this Section.
1 A7 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
� A Deliver materials in original containers with labeis intact and legible. Store and protect
materials in cool,dry locatiom, out of sunlight,protected from weather and other hannful
' environment, and at a temperature above 40' F and below 110° F in accordance with
manufac€urer's instructions.
1.0$PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
� A. Protect adjacent co��struction materials that are likely to be soiled by the application
process.
� B. Environmental Requirements
1. Cement Plaster
a. Coid Weather
� 1) Do not use frozen materials or materials that have been previously
frozen.
2) Do not $pply cement plaster to frozeti surfaces or surfaces
� comaining&ost.
3) Tnstallation Ambisnt Air Temperature:Do not mix materials or
apply cement plaster when ambient temperatut�e is less than 40°P.
Ainbient air temperature must remain at 40° F and rising, and
� remain so far a minimum 24 hours thereafter.
b.Hot Wea#her
1) Protect cement piaster from aneven�nd excessive evaporation
during hot, windy, or dry weather. Avoid application in direct
� sunligh�.
2} In hot,windy or dry weather,the cement plaster should be spray
misted with potable water and then covered with a single sheet of
� clear polyethyIene plastic.
2.Acrylic Primer and Finish Coatings
a. Comply with acrylic fuush manufacturer's recommendations for conditions
affecting product performance
� b. Protect installation from direct precipitation during the application and the
setting/curing period of primer and fmish coa� Ensure that the finish is
fully set prior to re�noving prote�tive covering.
' c. Do not use frozen materiaIs.
04300 STUCCO Page 3 of 7
'
'
d. Apply acrylic primer and/or finish oniy when ambient air temperatwe is 48° �
F and rising. Ambient air temperature shall remain at 40°F for a minimum
of 24 hours or longer if required,until fhe coatings are completely dry. '
e. Do not apply acrylic primer and/or finish to"brown"coat of cement plaster
if sun is directly on #he wall surface and temperature is 75° F or higher.
Protect from direct sunlight. '
PART 2 PRODUCTS
*NOTE TO SPECIF'IER:EDIT PARAGRAPH A or B,DEPENDING ON SUBSTRATES.WOOD BASED ,
SHEATHINGS REQUIRE TWO LAYERS OF GRADE D BUII,DING PAPER. EDIT PARAGRAPH E
BELOW TO LIST
ACCEPTABLE ACRYLIC FINISHES
2.Q1 MATERIALS �
A. Building Paper: Minnesota.State Building Code,Type I,Grade D,StyIe 2.
1. Tyvek Stucco Wrap
2. Moisture Vapor Transmission:35 gcams/square meter/24 hours. �
3. Water Resistance: 10 minutes minimum.
B. A.sphalt Felt:International Building Code,International Residential Code,
Na. 15 asphalt felt complying with ASTM D 226 for Type 1 felt. �
C. Metal Lath:ASTM C847,self-furring,expanded galvanized steel lath,not less than
3.4 pounds per square yard. �
1. Shapes used as grounds shalI be sized and dimensioned to provide
required plaster thicknesses.
2. Wea.ther-exposed accessories shall be fabricated of gaivanized steei
or zinc alloy materials. '
3. Profile of casing beads and control joints shall provide screed flange
and/or embedment section.
4. Comer reinforcing shall be galvanized welded wire"Corneraid" �
(Stockton Wire Products) or equal and be fabricated for full
embedment itt the"brown" coat.
S. Provide standard trim items iztcluding control joints,casing beads
and basa screeds. '
D. Plaster Materials
]. Portland Cement:ASTM C150,Type I.Fresh and free of lumps.
2. Masonry Cemen�ASTM C91.Fresh and free of lumps. �
3. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C206,Type S.
4. Sand:ASTM C897.Moist and loose.
5. Water.Clean and potable. �
6. Fiber: ASTM D578. 0.5 inch long chopped fberglass,polypropylene or
nylon strands,allcali-resistan�
'7. Admixtures: Acrylic iiquid admix Acryl 60(Thoro Systems Products,Inc.)
or equaL �
E. Acrylic Finish
1..Factory prepared acrylic finish by[indicate manufacturer(s}]. . �
2. [Indicate Color].
3. [Tndicate Texture].
�
04300 STUCCD Page 4 of'7 �
,
, �
� Z.aa�s
� *NOTE TO SPECIFIER:DELETE ARTICLE B,SUBSECTION 4 IF STUCCO FINISH WII.L BE USED.
DELETE ARTiCLE C, SUBSECTION 3 IF STUCCO FINISH C�AT"IF ACRYLIC FINISH WILL BE
USED.
� A.General
1. Accurately proportion materials for each batch using measuring devices of
' known volurne.
2. Size batches for complete use within one hour after mixing.
3. Withhold lU percent mixing water unNl mixing is nearly complete,then add
as needed to produce necessary consistency. Keep water to a minimum.
� B.Mechanical Mixing
, 1. Mix each batch separateiy,
2. Maintain mixer in clean condition before, during and after plaster
preparation.
3. Maintain mixer in continuous operation while charging mixer.
1 4. Mix factory prepazed acrylic finish in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
' C. Mix Proportions by Volume
1. Dry Materials—Scratch Coat
a. 1 cubic foot portland cecnent
� b. 1 cubic foot masonry cement.
c. 1.S to 2.5 pounds of 1/2 inch chopped fiber.
d.4 cubic feet sand.
� 2.Dry Materials—Brown Coat
a. 1 cubic foot portland cement.
b. 1 cubic foot masonry cement.
c. 1.S to 2.5 pounds of 1/2 inch chopped fiber.
� d. 5 to 6 cubic feet sand.
3.Dry Materials--Stucco Finish Goat
a. 1 cubic foot white portland cement
, b.3/4 cubic foot Iime.
c.Pigments as requined.
d.3 cubic feet silica sand.
4.Mixing Liqnid:3 parts water aud 1 part acrylic adraixture.
' PART 3 EXECUTf4N
1 3.41 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under whict�the work is to be performed and
notify the Genera.i Contractor in writing of conditions detriznental to the proper and
timeiy completion of the work.
, B. � Do not proceed with instailation until unsatisfactory conditions ha.ve been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
� A. Building Paper Asphalt Felt
'
0430Q STUCCO Page 5 of 7
�
'
1. Shall be fi�ee from holes and breaks other than those created by fasteners. �
2. Apply horizonta.11y with the upper layer lapped over the lower layer not less
than 2 iaches. Where vertical joints occur,paper shall be lapped not less �
than 6 incl�es.
*NOTE:NIINNESOTA STATE BUII..DING CODE REQUIRES TWO LAYERS
OF BUII.DING PA.PER ON WOOD BASED SHEATHINGS. ,
B. Lath:Attach to framing or substrate in accordance wrth ASTM C 1063,Iappu2g sides
not less than i/2 inch and ends not less than I inch.
C. Accessories �
1. Attach level,plumb and true to create a proper screed and depth for the
cement plaster. �
2. Install control joints to create panels relatively square,not larger than 144
square feet,and with no dimension exceeding 18 feet or a length to width
ratio of 2-1/2:I,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. �
D. Access Panels and Vents: Install accurately located aud secured to substrate with
appropriate fasteners as per sections 08310 and 10200.
E. Portland Cement Plaster �
1. Total thiclrness to meet code requirements. �
2. Nominal plaster base cflat thicIrnesses
a. First coat"scratch: 3/8 inch.
!�. SeColld"btovm": 3/8 inch.
3. Apply the scratch coat of cement plaster with sufficient force{i�y hand or �
machine)to fili soiidly openings in the lath.
4. Horizontally eross rake the scra.tch coat siightly to provide key far second
. base coat Coat must be uniform in thickness. �
5. The double-back method of application(first and second coats are applied
and cured as one system)may be used. -
a. Apply the second coat(brown)as soon as the scratch coat is rigid.
6. Apply second coat to provide tfie rec}uired total thickness. Coat must be �
untform in thickness.Rod of�level to screeds,to provide a true flat plane.
Follow this by wnod floating or darbying the surface. Fill voids and dress
surface for finish.
'7. Completed second coat of cement plaster shall cure a minimum 7 days,prior '
to application of the finish coat.
*NOTE T�SPECIFIER:DELETE�NE OF TF�FOLLO WIl�iG PARAGRAPHS TO SUTT THE PROJECT '
REQUIREMENTS.
F. Stucco Finish Coat
1. Stucco finish coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to �
bond to and cover the brown coa�
G. Acrylic Finish Coat �
l. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for mixing and application of
acrylic primer and acrylic finish.
2. Apply finish continuously and in one operation to the entire walUsoffit area. • �
maintaining a "wet"edge so that compl�ted finish is free of scaf�old lines
and other imperfections due to application methods.
3. Completed finish texture(s)and coIor(s) shall be aonsistent with the '
approved field sampl8s/mock ups.
04340 STUCCO Page 6 of 7
�
�
�
3.03 CLEANIl�TG
� A. Remove spattering of plaster and acrylic finish from other finished surfaces,paving
and Wallcs.
, B. Remove and legally dispose of piaster system instaliation debris materiai from
groject site.
� END OF SECTION 04300
�
,
'
,
�
�
�
,
'
'
�
�
' 04300 STUCCO Page 7 of 7
'
�
, STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 05124
' THIS SECTiON USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER."
PART 1-GENERAL
, 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of Contrac#, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections(GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES),
apply to this Section.
� 1.2 SUIVIlI�IARY
A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on
� drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of inembers,
typical connections,and types of steel required.
' 1. Structural steei is thax work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC) "Code of Standard Practice"and as otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division S.
, 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in aceordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
� Specification Sections.
1. Structural steel(each type).
� 2. High-strength bolts(each type),including nuts and washers.
3. Structural steel primer paint.
4. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
' B. Shop drawings prepared under supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer, including
comglete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members,
procedures,and diagrams.
� 1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pert�r►ent data.
Indica.te welds by sta.ndard AWS sy�nbols and show sizs,length,and type of each
' weld.
2. Provide setting drawings,templates,and directians for instailation of anchor bolts
and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.
' 1.4 QUALTI'Y A5SURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following,except as otherwise indicated:
' 1. American Instihrte of Steel Construction(AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
� 2. AISC"Spec�cations for Structurai Steel Buildings,"including"Commentary"
3. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"approved
by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
' 4. American Welding Society(AWS)D1.1 "Structurai Welding Code-Steel."
STRUCTURAL STEEL Page i of 5
,
'
5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, '
Sheet Piling a�d Bars for Structural Use."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING '
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterretp#ed progress of work. �
COORDINATE BELOW WITH DN. 1 REQUIREMENTS.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast in-placa �
concrete or masonry, un ample time to not to delay work.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steei members �
of�gound by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts becorae dry or rusty,
clean and relubricate before use. �
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or
damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials '
or structures as directed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS I
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed ta view, use only �
materials that aze smoothand free ofsurface blemishes including pitting,rust and scale sea�m
mazks, roller marks, rolled trade naznes, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by
grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface �
finishes.
B. Structural Steel Shapes,Plates,and Bars: ASTM A572 and ASTM A36.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E or S,Grade B;or ASTM A 541. '
1. Finish: Black,except where indicated to be galvanized. �
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307,nonheaded type unless otherwise iadicated.
1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. '
E. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts,heavy hexagon nuts,
and harclened washers,as follows: �
1. Quenched aad tempered medium-carbon steel bolts,nuts,and washers,complying
with ASTM A 325. ,
2. Qusnched and tempered alloy steei boIts,nuts,and washers,complying with ASTM
A 490. �
F. Structurat Steel Primer Paint SSPC-Paint 2;red lead-iron oxide,oil allcyd
STRUCT'URAL STEEL Page 2 of 5 ,
'
,
' G. Cement Grout: Portland cement{ASTM C 154,Type I or Type IIn and clesn,uniformly
graded,natucal sand(ASTM C 404, Size No.2). Mix at a rado of 1 A part cement to 3.0
' pazts sand,by volume,with minimunn water required for placement and hydration.
H. Metalfic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:Premiared factory-packaged ferrous aggregate grouting
� compound.
2.2 FABRICATION
� A. Shop Fabrication and Assennbly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to
greatest extent possibte. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specifications a�nd as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural
' mennbers where indicated.
1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery
� sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
2. Provfde unfmished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary
framing members to primary members(including purlins,girts,and other framing
' members taking only �ominal stresses} and for tennporary bracing to facilitate
erection.
� B. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance
with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325."
, C. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for proced�res,appearance and quality of
welds,and methods used in con�ecting welding work.
' D. Holes for Other Wark: Provide holes fequired for securing other work to structuraI steel
framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members,as shown on final
shop drawings.
� E. Cut,drill,or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame�ut holes or enlarge
holes by burning. Drill hales in bearing plates.
' F. Painting: Provide a one-coat,shop-applied paint system complying with Steel Struetures
Painting Council{SSPC)Paint System Guide No.7,00.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
, A. General: Materials and fabrir,ation procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill,
shop,and field,canducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tes�ts will
not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providittg materials and fabrication procedures
� in compliance with specified requirements.
i. Promptty remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply.
� B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical;similaz details apply to
similar conditions,unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible
, without causing delay in the worlc.
1. Pxomptly notify Architect or Engineer whenever design of inembers and
� connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 3 OF 5
�
'
,
PART 3-EXECU'TION
3.1 ERECTION �
A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with ,
connections of sufficieat sirength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and
connections when permanent members are in place and final cannections are made. Provide
temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.
B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporaty planking and working platforms as necessary to �
effectively complete work.
C. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Ciean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of '
bond-reducing materials and mughen to imprave band to surfaces. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates. �
1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structurai members on
wedges or other adjusting devices.
2. Tigiiten anchor bolts after supported raembers have been positioned and plumbed. ,
Do not remove wedges or shims,but if protruding,cut off flush with edge of base
or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no �
voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to
cure.
4. Foc proprietaty grout materials,comply with manufacturer's instructions. ,
D. FieId Assembiy: Set stxuctural frames accurately to iiaes and elevations indicated. Align
and adj ust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanendy
fastening. Cleau bearing surfaces and other snrfaces that will be in permanent contact i
before assembly. Perform necessary adjushnents to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and aGgnment.
E. Level and plumb individual members of struc#ure within specified AISC tolerances. �
F. Establish required leveling and piumbing raeasuremerrts on mean operating temperature of ,
structure. Make allowances for difference 6etween temperature at time of erection and
mean temperature at which stnucture will be when eompleted and in service.
G. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. ,
H. Erection Bolts: On exposedwelded construction,remove erection bolts,fill holes with plug
welds,and grind s�nooth at exposed surfaces. '
1. Comply with AISC Specifications for beari�ng,adequacy oftemporary conne�tions,
alignment,and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. ,
2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins,except in
secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
J. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrica.tion errors in �
primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are
not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared
appearance when permitted. �
STR.UCTLTRAL STEEL Page 4 OF 5
�
,
�
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL
� A. Engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted
connections and welded connections aad to perform tests and prepare test reports.
' DELETE EITH�R AB4VE 4R BELOW, OR REVISE TO SUIT LOCAL
PRACTICE/JURISDIG'TTON.
� B. Owner will engage an undependent tssting and inspection agency to inspect high-strength
bolted connections and weldecl connec�ions and to perform tests and prepare test reports if�
required by the Engineer.. �
rC. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests,state in each report whether test specimens
corr►ply with requirements,and specifically state any deviations therefrom.
� D. Provide access for testing agency to pl$ces where structural steel work is being fabricated
or produced so that required inspection and testizig can be accomplished.
' E. Testing agency may inspect struct�t�ral steel at plant before shipment.
F. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have
� indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at
Contractor's expense,as necessary to reconfir�n any noncompliance of original work and to
show compliance of corrected worlc.
� G. Shop-Bolted Co�ections: Engineer shall decide if Inspections or tests be conducted in
accordance with AISC specifications.
NH. Shop Weldin�: Engineer shall decide if Inspections or tests be conducted in accordanca
with AISC specifications.
Inspect and test during fabrication af structural steel assemblies and if so as:
� 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and
locations of defects found in work. Record work reyuireci and perfor�ed to correct
� deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform tests of welds as follows. Lispection procedures Iisted are to be used at
' Contractor's option. �
I. �ield-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications.
� 1. For Direct Tension Indicators,conaply with requirements of ASTM F 959. Ver�fy
that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2.
� J. Field WeIding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:
1. Certafy welders and conduct inspections and tests as req�ired. Record types and
� Iocations of defects found in work. Record work required and perfornaed to correct
deficiencies.
2. Perform visual insgection of all'vrrelds.
� END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL Pa�e 5 of S
�
,
� ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06100
� PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings aud general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to#his Section.
� i.2 SUMMARY .
A. This Section includes the folIowing:
, 1. Frazning with dimension lumber.
2. Framing wittz engineered wood products.
3. Wood grounds,nailers,and biocking.
' 4. Wood furring.
5. Sheathing.
, B. Related Sec�ions: The following Sections contain rec�uirements that relate to this Secrion:
1. Division 6 Section"Finish Cacpenbry"for nonstructurai carpentry items exposed to
view and not specified in another Seotion.
' 1.3 DEFIl�TITIONS
� A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and
ganerally not ex}wsed,unless otherwise specified.
1.4 SUBMITTA,LS
' A. General: Suhmit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
� B. Product data for the followi.ng prnducts:
1. Engineered woad products.
1 2. Insulating sheathing.
3. Air infiltration barrier.
4. Metal framing anchors.
' S. Construction adhesives.
C. Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable
unit stresses. Indica#e species and grade selected for each use as we11 as design values
' approved by the Board of Review of American Lwnber Standards Committee.
D. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for
' handling,storing,installation,and finishing of treated material:
1. For each type of preservative treated wood prociuct include certification by treating
plant stating type of preservative solution and presswe process used,net amount of
' preservative retained,and campliance with applicable standards.
2. For water-bome treated products include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to leveis indicated prior to shipment to project site.
' 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood products include certification by treating plant that
treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 7
'
'
E. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to �
au#horities having jurisc�iction�videncing compiiance of t12e following wood products with
specified requirements and building code in effect for Project.
1. Engineered wood products. �
2. Air infillration bazriers.
3. Metal framing anchors.
4. Power driven fasteners. ,
5. Treated wood praducts.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-SourceResponsibilityforEngineeredWoodProducts: Obtaineachtypeofengineered �
wood products fram one soarce from a single manufachtter.
B. Single-Sonrce Responsibitity for Treated Wood: Obta.in ireated wood products from orte �
source.
1.6 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING ,
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as weit as piywood and other
panels;provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings '
inclvding polyethylsne and similar materials.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure h�eated with waterborne chemicals,place spacers � '
between each bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER,GENERAL I
A. LumberStandards: FurnishlumbermanufacturedtocomplywithPS20"AmericanSoftwood ,
Lumber Standard° and wit� applicable gradiag rales of inspection agencies certifed by
American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC)Board of Review.
1. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. �
2. WCLIB-West Coast Lwnber Inspection Bureau.
3. 1NWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of t
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying
grading agency,grade,species,moisture content at time of surfscing,and mill.
I. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each '
piece; or omit gra�de staraps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance
issued hy inspection agency. ,
C. Nominal sizes are indicabed,except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as
required by PS 20,for moisture content specified for each use.
1. Provide dressed Iuznber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated. ,
2. Provide seasaned lumber with 19 percent �aximum moisture content at time of
dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless '
otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 7 ,
'
�
' 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. For light framing provide"Stud,""No.3,"or"Standard"grade lumber for stud framing(2 to
4 inches thick,2 to 4 inches wide, l0 feet and shorter)and"5tud"or"No.3"grade for other
' light framing(2 to 4 inches thick,2 to b inches wide),any species.
' B. For light framing(2 to 4 incfles thick,2 to 4 inches wide)provide the following grade ancf
species:
1. TMConstruction"grade.
� 2. Southem Pine graded under SPIB rutes.
3. Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules.
' C. For structural light framing(2 to 4 inches thick,2 to 4 inches wide),provide the following
grade and species:
1. "No.2"grade or better.
, D. �'or structurat fiaming(2 to 4 inches thick,5 inches and wider),pzovide the following grade
and species:
1 1. "No.2"grade or better.
2. Douglas Fir-Larch graded under WCLIB or WWPA rules.
3. Hem-Fir graded under WWPA rules.
� 4. Southern Pine grad�under SPIB rules.
5. Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules.
, 2.3 BOARDS
A. Exposed Boards: Where boards wiil be exposed m the finished work,provide the follawing:
' 1. Moisture Content: 19 percent zn�imum, "S-DRY"or KD-19.
2. VVhere transparent or nat�ral finish or no finish is indicated,provide the following:
3. Where painted finish is indicated, provide "No. 1 Boards"per SPIB ruies, "Seiect
Merohantable Boards"per WCLIB ruies,or"No.2 Common Boards&Better"per
� WWPA rules.
B. Coacealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work,provide lumber of 19
, percent maximum moisture content(S-DRY or KD-I9)anc�of following species and grade:
C. Board Sizes: Provide sizes indicated as at fascia or, if not indicated (for sheathing, and
similar uses),provide 1-inch by 12-inch boards.
I2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
, A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construetion including curbs and
support bases,cant strips,bucks,nailers,blocking,furring,grounds,stripping,and similar
members.
� B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes
shown.
' C. Moist�re content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment
D. Grade: "Standard"grade ligtit-framing-siz�e lumber of any species or baard-size lumber as
' required. "No.3 Common"or"Standard"grade boards per WCLIB or W WPA niles or'No.
2 Boards" per SPIB ruies.
ROUGH CAltPENTRY Page 3 of 7
,
�
2.5 CONSTRUCTI4N PANELS,GENERAL '
A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S.Product Standazd for Construction
and Tndustrial Plywood"forplywood constnzction panels and,for products not manufactured
under PS I provisions,with APA PRP-108. '
B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that ate each factory-marked with APA trademark
evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
1. Exposure Durability Classifica#ion: EXTERIOR. ,
2. Span Rating: As required to suit joist spacing indicated.
C. WaII Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING. ,
1. E�osu�e Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
2. Spaa Rating: 12/0, 16/0,20/0 or WaJI-16 oc for stud spacing of 16 inches or less. '
2.6 AIR INFII.TRATION BARRIER
A. Polyethylene sheet,0.0(161 inch thick,formed by spinning continuous strands of fine high '
density polyethylene interconnected fibers a�td bonding�em together by heat and pressure;
with a moistuse vapor transmission rate of 40p grams/sq. meter/24 hrs. per ASTM E 96,
procedure B;flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 5 and 10 per ASTM E 84. ,
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and typa indicated that comply with requirements �
specified in this articla for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather,in ground cantact,or ir�area of high ,
relative humidity,pmvide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or
of AISI Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails,Wire,Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. ,
C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. �
2.8 METAL FRAMIl�TG ANCHORS ,
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type,size,metal,and fmish indicat+ed that comply
with requirements specified including the following:
1. Current Evaluation/Research Raports: Provide products for which model code '
evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having j urisdiction
and that evidence compliance ofinet$1 framinganchors for application indicatedwith �
the building code in effect for this Project.
2. AUowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacttuer publishes
aliowable design loads that are determined from empiricai data or by rational
engineerittg analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed �
by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior ,
to fabrication #o comply with ASTM A 525 for Coating Designation G60 and with
ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural qualifiy); ASTM A 52b (commercial quality); or
ASTM A 527 {lock-forming quality}; as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor
indicated. ,
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 7 ,
'
I. Use galvanized s�eeI framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in
' ground contact,or in area of high relative humidity,and where indicated.
, 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill Sealer Gaskets: Glass fiber resilient insulation fabricated in strip form for use as a sill
sealer; 1 inch nominal thicl�ess compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's
, standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated; in rolis of 50 feet or i 00.feet in
Iength.
� B. Adhesives for Field Giuing Pane1s to Framing: Formulation aomplying with APA AFG-01
that is approved for use with type of constriiction panel indicated by both adhesive and pane!
manufacturer.
, C. Water Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing
3-iado-2-propynyl butyi carbonate(IPBC)as its active ingredien�
' 2.10 PRESERVATNE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. General: Where lumber or piywood is indicated as preservativ�treated wood or is specified
herein to be treated,comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2(Lumber)
' and C9 {Ptywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark
Requuements.
' B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-bome preservatives to a minimum retention of
0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber�nd plywood to a maximum
moisture content,respectively,of 19 percent and 15 percent, Treat indicated items and the
following:
, 1. Wood cants,decking,nailers,curbs,equiprnent support bases,blocking,stripping,
and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barciers, and
' waterproofing,
2. Wood sills,sleepers,blocking,furring,stripping,and similar conceaEed mexnbers in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
� C. Pressure-treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne
preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.
� D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to trea#ment, where possible. If cut after
trea.tcnent, coat cut surfaces to compiy with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of iumber or
plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.PART 3 -EXECUTION
r3.1 INSTALLATTON,GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality ofrough carpentry construction and
' that aze too small to use in fabricating rough carpen#ry with minimum joints or optimwn j oint
arrangement.
' B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb and ttve to line and cut
and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
' Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow
attachment of other construction.
' D. Secureiy attach rough carpentry work to subsirate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.
E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry wark and fill holes.
� ROUGH CARI'ENTRY Page S of 7
,
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use fmishing rtaifs for finish work. '
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed
to view or wilI receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting of wood;predrill as required. ,
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS,NAII..ERS,BLOCKING,AND SLEEPERS
A. Instail wood grounds,nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for ,
screeding or attachment of other work. Foma to shapes as shown and cut as required for true
line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink hoIts and nuts flush �
with surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry
worlc. Where possible,anchor to formwork before concrete placemen�
C, install permanent grounds of dressed,preservative treated,key-beveled lumber not less than '
1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thicla�ess of
finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. '
33 WOOD FURRING
A. Install plumb and level with closure sirips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as '
required for tolerance of finished work.
3.4 WOOD FRAMING,GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manuai for Wood Frame Construction,"unless ,
otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install framing composed of engineered wood `
produets to comply with manufacturer's directions.
C. Install fi�ming members of size and spacing indicated. '
D. Anchor and nail as shown,and to comply with the following;
1. National Evaluation Report No. NER 272 for pneutnatic or mechanical driven �
staples,P-Nails, and allied fasteners.
2. Published requirements of manufacturer of ine#al framing anchors.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports. �
F. Firestop conceaIed spaces of wood fra.med walls and partitions atfloor level and at the ceiling ,
line. Where firestops are not aumm$ticaily provided by the framirig system used,use closely
fitted wood blocks of nominal 2-inch�hick lumber of the same width as framing members.
3.5 STUD FRAMIl�iG �
A. General; Azrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to d�rection of wall or
paitition and narrow face is parallel. L►stall single bottom pIate and double top plates using ,
2-inch-thick members whose widths ec}ual that of studs;except single top plate may be used
for non-load-bearing partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting cot�struction.
1. For extetior walls insta112-inch by 6-inch and 2 inch by 12"wood studs spaced 16 �
inches o.c.
B. Consiruct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs(see Architectforcornerdetai�). ,
Install miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of faciag
materiaLs,fixtures,specialty items,and trira.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 6 of 7 �
�
1. Install continuous horizontal bIocking row at rnid-height of singte-story partitions
' over 8 feet higl� using 2-inch thick members of same width as wall or partitions.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Install nailed header members ofthiclrness
' equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
1. For nonbearing partitions, install double jamb studs and headers not less than 4
inches deep for openings 3 feet and less in width,and not less than 6 inches deep for
' wider openings.
2. For load-bearing partitions,install double jamb studs for openings 6 feet and less in
width,and tripl�jamb studs for wider openings. Instal!headers of depth shown,or
' if not shown,as recommended by N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing."
D. Install diagonaI bracing in stud framing of exterior walls, except as otherwise indicated.
Brace both walls at each external corner,fuil story height,at a 45 degree angie,using either
' a let-in 1 by 4 or 2 by 4 blocking or metal diagona!bracing. Omit hracing where following
iypes of sheatfiing are indicated.
, 1. Piywaod sheathing or corner bracin�4-feet-wide panels vertically.
E. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crovm up and to coznply with requirements specified
above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters
' 1. Where principal ceiling jois�s are at right angles to rafters,frame as indicated with
aciditionaI short joists from wall plate to first joist;nail to ends of rafters and to top
' plate and nail to long joists or anchor witti framing anchors or metal straps. Install
1 by 8 or 2 by 4 siringers spaced 4 feet o.c.crosswise over grincipaI ceiling joists.
F. Install collar beams(ties)as shown,or ifnot shown,instail I-inch by 6-inch boards between
, every third pair of rafters.
G. Install special framing as shown for eaves,overhangs,dormers and similar conditions,if any.
' H. Where built-up beams or girders of nominal 2-inch dzmension lumber on edge are shown,
fasten together with 2 rows of 20d naits spaced not less than 32 inches o.c. Locate one row
near top edge and other near bottom edge. Locate end joints in members over supports;for
, continuous members,stagger ends at quarter points between supports.
I. InstalI wood posts using metal anchoring and attachnnent devices indicated.
' J. Seal ends of beams and posts exposed to weather with a water-repellent preservative.
3.8 AIR IlVFILTRATION BA,RRIER
, A. Cover sheathing with air infiItration barrier as follows:
' I. Apply plastic sheet to comply with manufacturer's printed directions.
END OF SECTION 06100
'
,
,
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 7 of 7
�
,
, STRUCTURAI. GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER
SEG"TION 06185
� PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
' 1.2 Si:fNiMARY
A. This Section includes structural glued laminated timber elements.
, B. Structural glaed Iaminated(gl�lam)ti�mber is defined ta include wood members fabricated
from 1-inch or 2-inch nominal thickness lumber,glued face-to-face to a depth of five or
more laminations.
' 1. Provide connectors,anchors,and accessories necessary to interconnect and secure
glulam members to buildiag stntoture.
, C. The types of struatural glued laminated uni#s specified include the following:
I. Straight beains,including girders,purlins,and cambered members(if any).
' 2. Columns,including posts and standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
� A. Genera.l: Submit the fol�owing according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
' B. Praduct data including specif cations and installation instructions covering lumber,
adhesives,fabrication process,preservative treatment,accessories,and protection.
C. Shop dra.wings showing full dimensions of each member and layout of entire structuraI
, system. Show larga-scale detaits of connections,c�nnectors,and other accessories.Indicate
species and latninating combination,adhesive type,and other variables in required Work.
' i.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with.ANSUAITC A 190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber."
� B. Manufacturer Qualification: Provide factory-glued siructural units, produced by an
AITC-licensed fiim qualified to apply the AITC Quality Inspected mark
' C. Factory-mark each piece of glued laminat�stcvctural units with AITC Quality Inspected
mark.
1. Piace AITC mark on timber surfaces which will not be exposed in completed Work.
, D. Installer. Firm that has demonstirated comgetence specializing in instatling glued laminated
timber for at least 5 yeazs.
' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with provisions of AITC i 1 I,"Recommended Practice for Protectiom of
' Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage,and Erection."
STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER Page 1 of 3
'
'
'
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED UNITS S
A. Lumber: Comply with ANSUAITC A190.1 and applicable lumber association standards
cited therein for grades required to achieve glulam requirements for design values, ,
appearance,fabrication iimitations,and species.
B. Lumber Species: Douglas Fir-Larch or Southern Yellow Pine. ,
C. Adhesive: ANSUAITC A190.1,wet use type.
D. End Sealer: Manufacture�'s standard, transparent, colorless wood seaIer, effective in '
retarding transmission of moisture at ccoss-grain cuts.
E. Penetrating Seater: Manufacturer's standard;translucent,penetrating wood sealer,that will ,
not interfere with application of wood stain and transparent finish,or paint finish.
1. Refer to Division 9 Sections for required field-appiied finishes.
F. Connectors, Anchors, and Accessories: Provide fabrica#ed steel (ASTM A 36) shapes, '
pIates,aad bars,welded into assemblies of types and sizes indicated. Provide steel bolts
(ASTM A 307),lag balts,nails,and other staitdard fasteners as required for ins#allation. '
I. Finish: Finish fabricated assemblies with rust-inhibitive primer.
2. Wet-Use Finish: Where wet-use glulam work is indicated, finish fahricated '
assemblies with hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153), including bolts and other
fasteners.
2.2 FA.BRICATION '
A. General: Comply with ANSUAITC A 190.1 in providing units indicated;where dimensions
are not comptetely documented,provide manufacturer's standard sizes and shapes required '
to fulfill indicated performances.
B. Appearance Grade: For exposed members,provide Architectural appearance grade units
complying with AITC 1 i 0. '
C. Preservative Treatment: Laminate members from preservativo-treated lumber. After
dressing and end-cutting each member to fiaal size and shape,apply a heavy brush coat of '
� same(or compatible)preservative t�eatmen#(in a light petroleum solvent)to surfaces cut
to a depth of more than 1/16 inch. Apply according ta AWPA M4.
1. Provide preservafive-treatment solution free of water repellents and other ,
substances that migh#interfere when applying finishes.
D. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately af�er end-cuttit►g each member to final length, and after '
wood treatment(if any�apply a saturation coat of end seaier to ends and other cross-cut
surfaces,keeping surfaces flood�oated for not less than 10 minutes.
E. Seal Coat: After fahricating and sanding each unit,and e�nd-coat sealing, apply a heavy ,
saturativn coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit,except for treated wood where
treat�nent has included a water repellen�
STRUCTURAL GLUED LAIVIINATED TIMBER Page 2 of 3 '
,
,
' 23 DECKING
A. General: Provide T&G wood 2x6 decking,sized as indicated,with following characteristics:
' 1. Face Grade: Standard.
2. Edge Pattern:No V grooves in decicing
' 3. M.C. 10-12%.
' 4. Adtiesive-Resorcinal waterproof.
B. GeneraI: Before shipping or exposing to outdoor conditions,bundle-wrap or individually
wrap with manufacture�'s standard,opaque,durable,water-resistant,plastic-coated gaper
, covering with water-resistant seams.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
' 3.1 1NSTALLATION
A. General: Install miscellaneous steel connectors,anchors,and accessories.
' B. Plan and execu#e erection procedures so that close fit and neat appearance of joints and
structure as a whole wiil not be unpaired. When hoisting members into place,use padded
or nonrnarring siiangs, and protect corners with wood blocking.
' C. Adequately brace members as they are piaced to maintain safe position until full stability
is provided.
' D. Cutting: Avoid cutting glulam members during erection unless appmved by Owner's
Structural Engineer. Except for fastener drilling and other minar cutting,coat cuts with end
sealer.
' 1. VVhere treated members must be cat during erection,apply a heavy brush coat of the
same preservative treatment,complying witl�AWPA Standard M4.
, E. Handle anct temporarily sapport members to provent visible surface damage.
F. Do not remove wrapping on in�dividually wrapped members until it will serve no useful
' purpose,including protection from weather,soiling and damage from work of other trades.
1. Coozdinate wrapping removal with finishing work spccified in Division 9. Retain
, wrapping wherever it can serve as a paa►ting shield.
G. Nail decking to supports according to AITC recommendations and details/See Drawings.
Provide temporary waterproof coveruig to protect exposed decking prior to applying
' fmist�ed roofing.
H. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after compieting erection and removing w+rappings,
, or replace damaged members as directed where damage is beyond acceptable repait.
3.2 PR4TECTION
, A. General: Control heating,ventilating,and air conditioni�g in building to avoid damage to
or deterioration of glulam worlc.
END QF SECTION 06185 �
' STRUCTURAI�GLIJED LANIINATED TIMBER Page 3 of 3
'
,
' FIrTISH CA,RPENTRY
SEC'TION Q6200
' PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of Con#ract,including General and Supplecnentary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Sectio�.
' 1.2 SiJMMARY
, A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim and rails.
2. Interior standing and runniug trim and rails.
, B. Related Sections: The foIlowing Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
� 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for furring,blocking,and other carpentry work
that is not exposed to view.
2. Division b Section"Structural Glued Laminated Timber".
' 3. Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for flashing and other sheet metal work
4. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants"for sealacrts.
5. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors".
' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of finislt carpentry by a firm that can
demonsirate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and quality
to those required for this Project.
' l.4 DELTVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING .
' A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect agains#exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary caverings including
' polyethyiene and similar materials.
B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If fmish carpentry must be stored in ofiher than installation areas,
' store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation
areas.
� 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with fmish carpentry manufacturer's and
' instailer's coordinated advice for optimam tsmperature and humidity conditions for finish
carpenfry during its storage and installation.
' FINISH CARPENTRY I'age 1 of 5
'
,
B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with finish carpentry anly when existing and farecasted weather ,
conditions will permit exterior finish carpentry to be installed in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations and when subshate is completely dry.
PART 2-PRODUCTS '
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL '
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20"American Softwood Lumber Standard"for lumber and
with appiicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by Ainerican Lumber Standards '
Committee Board of Review.
B. Plywood Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S.Product Standard for Construction and Industrial '
Plywood"for plywood and,for products not nnar►ufactured under PS 1,with APA PRP-108.
2.2 FABRICATTON '
.
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
manufacturer's recommendations for moistare content of finish carpentry in relation to relative ,
humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. Provide finish
carpentry with moisture content that is compatible wi#h Project requirements.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions,profiles and details indicated. Easc edges to radius '
indicated for the following:
1. Ltunber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/I6 inch. ,
2. Lumber 1 inch or more in nomiaal thickness: 1/8 inch.
PART 3-EXECUTION ,
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation toleranaes and other '
conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Da not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. '
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. '
B. Condition fuush carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before '
installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Backprime lumber for painted fiaish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements for '
surface preparation and application in Section "Painting."
'
FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 5 '
'
�
' 3 3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
' A. Do not use futish carpentry matsrials that are unsounct, warped, bowed, fwisted, improperly
treated or finished, not adequateIy seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jainting
arraagements.
' 1.Do not use manufactured unrts with defecdve surfaces,sizes,or patterns.
B. Install finish catpentry plumh, level,true,and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
' shims where required for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut fiuish carpentryto frt adjoining work.Refmish a�d seal cuts as recommended
' by manufacture.
2. Install to toterance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and levsl. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/16 inch maximum offset for flush instaliation and 1/8 inch maximum offset
' for reveal instaIlation.
3. Coordinate finish carpenhy witi� materials and systems thax may be in or adjacent to
standing and runningtrim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical itemsthat
, penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
C. Finish in accordaace witt�specified requirements.
' D. Refer to Division 9 Sec�ions for final finishing of fmish ca�pentry.
' 3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged or defective fmish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visuaI
defects. Where not possi'b!e to repair, repiace finish carpentry. Adjust joinsry for uniform�
' aPl�earance.
3.5 CLEANING
' A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch ap factory-apptied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
II.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Tnstaller Qualifications: Arrange for installation of finish carpentry by a firm that cau
demonstrate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and quality
to those required for this Projec�
' 1.4 bELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
, A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials unrler eover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including
' polyethylene and similar materials.
B. Do not deliver interior finish carpenhy un#il environmental conditions meet rec�uirements
, specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in ot3�er than installation areas,
FIlVISFI CARPENTRY Page 3 of 5
1
1
store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for
installation areas. '
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with finish carpentry manufacturer's and ,
installer's coordinated advice far optimum temperature and humidity conclitions for finish
ca�pentry during its storage and installation. '
B. Weather Conditians: Proceed with finish carpentry only when exiating and forecasted weather
conditions will pennit exfierior finish carpeniry to be installed in compliance with manufacturer's '
recommendations and when substrate is completely dry.
PART 2-PRODUCTS ,
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20"American Soflwoocl Lvmber Standard"for lumber and '
with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards
Committee Board of Review. '
B. Plywood Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S.Product Standard for Construction and Tndustria!
Plywood" for plywood and,for products not manufactured under PS 1,with APA PRP-108. '
2.2 �ABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with rec�uirements of specified inspection agencies and '
manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of fuush carpentry in relation to relative
humidity conditions existing during time of fabricaxion and in installation areas. Provide finish '
carpentry with moisture content that is compa#ible with Project requirements.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions,pmfiles and deta.ils indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following: '
1. Lumber less than 1 inch in nominai thickness: 1/16 inch.
2. Lnmber 1 i»ch or more in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. '
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMIl�TA"TI4N ,
A. Exasnine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other '
conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not procaed with
installation until unsa.tisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATTON ,
A. Clean substrates of projections and s�bstances detrimental to application. . '
B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidiiy conditions in installation areas before
instatlation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended by '
manufacturer.
FIrTISH CA►RPENTRY Page 4 of 5 '
'
C. Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Compiy with requirements
� for surface prepazation and application in Section "Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
' A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are urisound, warped, bowed, twist�d,
improperly treated ar finished, not adequately seasoned, or too small ta fabricate with
' proper jointi.ng arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces,sizes,or patterns.
1 B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level,true,and aiigned with a.djacent mater�als. Use concealed
shims where recjuired for alignmen�
' 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry ta fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
I 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level. Install adjoining fmish
carpentry with 1/16 iuch rnaximurn offset for flush installation and 1/8 inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
' 3. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems fhat may be in or adjacent to
standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanicai and electrical
items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
' C. Finish in accordance with specified requirements.
� D. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry.
3.4 ADJUSTING
� A, Repair damag�d or defective finish carpetttry where possible to elimunate fuactional or visuai
defects, Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
I3.5 CLEANING
I A, Clean finish carpenhy on exposed and semie�cgosed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
� END OF SECTION OG200
�
1
I
� FINISH CARPENTRY Pa�e 5 of 5
1
'
�
A. Fire Per.formance Characteristics: Provide insuIation materia.is identical to those whose
indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method '
indicated below, by UL or o#her testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicahle
testing and inspecting organization.
1. Swface Buzniaag Characteristic: ASTM E 84. '
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 1 I9.
3. Cornbustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. �
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building
insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. '
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,ANU HANDLING
A. Pmtect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, '
soiling,and other sources. Store inside and in a dry locatioa. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for handling,storage,and protection dttring installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: �
1. Do not expose to sunlight,except to exten#necessary for perioc!of instaltation and I
concealinent.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating ma#erials to
project site ahead of installation time.
3. Complete instailatian and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in �
each area of construction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering (
insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the
following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of (
one of the following. .
1. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: �
a. Amoco Fosm Prodacts Co.
b. DiversiFoam Products, t
c. Dow: The Dow Chemical Company. �
d. UC Industries,Inc.
2. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: C
a. AFM Corporation.
b. DiversiFoam Products. I
c. Grace Construction Products Div.,W.R Grace 8c Co.
d. Manufacturers with a third party certification progiram satisfying mandatory
, reyuircments for foam plastics of model building codes. �
BUII.DING 1N5ULATZON Page 2 of 5
�
'
'
3. Phenolic Board Insularion:
, a. Manville: Building Insulation Div.,Manville Sales Carp.
� 4. Polyisocyat�urate Board Lisulation:
a Hunter H-Shield-NB
� 5. Cellular Giass Block�nsulation:
a. Pittsburgh Coming CorQ.
, 6. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
a CertainTeed Corp.
' b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
c, Manville: Bnilding Insulations Div.,Manville Saies Corp.
d. Owens/Coming Fiber�las Corp.
, 7. Manufacturers of Semi-Refractory Fiber Insulation:
a. Cafco Industries Ltd.
' b. Fibrex Inc.
c. USG: Therm�ber Div.,USG Interiors,Inc.
� 8. Man�facturer of I.00se Granular Perlite Insula#ion:
a. Produccr Members ofPerlite Institute Inc.
� 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that cornply with requiremettts and with referenced
' standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated,seiected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses,widths,and lengths.
� B. Extruded Poiystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid,celiular polystyrene thermal insulatian with
closed-cells aud integral high densrty sicin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base
� resin in an extrusian process to comply with ASTM C 578 for type indicated;with 5 yea�r
aged r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F(4.4 and 23.9 deg C}, respectively; and as
follows:
' 1. Type N, 1.6 pcf min.density,unless otherw�se indicated.
C. Fabri�Faced Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid,ceilular polystyrene themnal
' insuIation with closed-celis and integral high density skin, forn�ed by the expansion of
polystyrene base resia in an extrusion process to compIy with ASTM C 578 for type
indicated;fabricated with tongue and groove edges and with one side haviu�g a matrix of
vertical and horizontal drainage channels faced with manufacturer's stsndard spunbonded
� filiration fabric;wifh S-year aged r-value of 4.4 at 75 deg F(23.9 deg C).
1. 'Pype VI, i.8 pcf min. density.
�
BUILDING INSULATION Page 3 of 6
'
'
D. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular therntal insulation formed by the ,
expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with
ASTM C 578 for type indicated;and as follows:
1. Type VIII, 1.15 pcf min.density,aged r-values of 4.2 and 3.8 at 40 and 75 deg F '
(4.4 and 23.9 deg C),respectively.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spreac! and smoke developed
values of 75 and 450,res}�ectively. �
E. PhenolicBoardInsulation: Rigid,cellulazthermalinsulationwiththermosetphenolic-based
closed-cell foam core and 2-ply foil-kraft-liner facing lami�nated to both sides,in board forna
comglying with ASTM C 1126 for Type II,Grade l;with r-value of 8.33 at 75 deg F(23.9 '
deg C).
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and srnoke developed
values of 25 and 35,respectiveiy. �
F. Polyisocyanurate Baard Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with
giass-fiber-reinforced polyisocyanurate closed-cetl foam core and aIuminum foil facing '
Iaminated to both sides;complying with FS HH-I-1972/1,Class 2; aged r-values of 8 and
7.2 at 40 and 75 deg F{4.4 and 23.9 deg C},respectively;and as follows:
I. Surface Burning Chara.cteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed '
values of 20 and 200,respectively.
G. Cellular Glass Block Insulation: Rigid cellular glass thermal insulation with closed-cell �
structure,passing ASTM E 136 for testing of combustion characteristics,in flat or tapered
block form complying with ASTM C 552 for Type I;with r-values of 3.03 and 2.86 at 50
and 75 deg F(1Q and 23.9 deg C),resp�tively. �
I. Rigid Board: Class 1 and 2,nominal density of 6.0 pcf,r-value of 4.3 at 75 deg F
(23.9 deg C).
H. UnfacedMineralFiberBlanket/BattInsulation: Thermalinsulationproducedbycombining �
mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comp[y with
ASTM C 665 for Type I(blankets without membrane facing);and as follows: �
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from gtass or slag.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
val�es of 25 and 50,respectively. �
I. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insalation: Thermal insulation produced by combining
mineral �6ers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with �
ASTM C 665 for Type III,Class A(blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing
with flame spread of 25 or iess);foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder
membrane on one face,and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. �
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: M�imum flaine spread and smoke developed
vaiues of 25 and 50,respectively. '
J. "RX-2 Reflective Aluminum Foil Insulation,"R-Fax Technologies,Inc.
VAPOR RETARDERS �
A. Poiyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397,6.0 mils thick,with a maximum permeance
rating of 0.13 perins. '
BUILDING INSULATION Page 4 of 6
'
'
� B. Tape for Vapor Retarder: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommanded by vapor retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with reqauements.
' D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
� 1. Foil-Polnester Film Vapor Retarder:
a. Alumiseal Zero Perm, Alwniseal Corp.
' PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMIl�TATION
iA. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present,for coinpliance with requirements
of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determ�ne if other
conditions afFecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with
� installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
, A. Clean substrates of substances haz�nful to iasulations ar vapor retarders,including removal
of projections that might punctwe vapor retarders.
� 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Camply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application
� indicated. ff printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions,
consult manufacturer's technical represe�ative for specific recommendations before
proceeding with installation of insulation. See drawings.
' B. Extend insulation fuil thickness as indicated to envelop entire azea to be insulated. Cut and
fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that
interfere with placement.
tC. Apply two layers of insulation to meet required thickness,unless otherwise shown.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIlVIETER AND UNDER-SLAB 1NSULATION
� A. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces(from damage during back-filling)by
application of protection board. $et in adhesive in accordaoce with recommendations af
� manufa�turer of insulation.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insula.tion by securing boards with twapiece
wall ties designed for this purpose and specified under Division 4"Unit Masonry."
� B. On unrts of cellular glass insulation,apply insulation with closely fitting joints using method
indicated below:
, 1. Gob Method: Install four gobs of adhesive pe�'unit and apply firmly against inside wythe
of masonry or other constivction as shown. Apply gobs at each corner,spread gobs to form
pads 4 inches in diameter by 1/4 inch thick.
I3.6 1NSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUII,DING INSULATION
�
BUILDING INSULATION Page S of 6
�
. '
A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's �
recommendations. If no specific method is indicated,bond units to substrate with adhesive
or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placennent and support ofunits.Overlap
the layers of rigid insulation board on roof deck
B. Seal joints between closed-cell{nonbreathing)insulation units by applying adhesive,mastic, �
or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids
in completed installation with adhesive,mastic,or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer. �
C. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction,except as
otherwise indicated. ,
' D. Set reflective,foil-faced units accurately with not less than 0.75-inch air space in front of
foil as indicated. �
E. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume(to a densiiy of
appro�cimately 2.S pcf}. �
3.8 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. GeneraI: E�ctend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor '
tra.nsmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated.
Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated suhstrates.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. �
Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall
openings,and at Iap joints; space fasteners 15 inches o.c. �
C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor cetarders with adhesives or tape per vapor retazder
manufacturer's printed directions. Seal butt join#s and fastener penetrations with tape of
type recoznmended by vapor retarder manufacturer. Locate all joints over framing members '
or other solid substrates.
D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as '
recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
E. Seal joints caused by pipes,conduits,electrical boxes,and similaz items penetrating vapor
retarders with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer to create an airtight �
seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other �
work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.1 U PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from da.mage due to harmfu! �
weather exposures, physical abase, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or
enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected '
by permanent construction immediately after installation. .
END OF SECTION 07210
. �
BUILDING INSULATION Page 6 of 6 �
�
'
IWOOD SHAKES
SECTION 07311
' PART 1 -GENERAL
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM °°ARCHiTECT.'°
' l.l RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
' Conditions and Divisional Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes wood shakes and required flashing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections cantain requirements that relate to this Section:
' 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for underlayment and wood framing.
1.3 SUBNdITTQI.S
' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Divisional
Specification Sections.
' B. Product data for each type of product specified,including details of construction relative to
raaterials,dimensions of individual components,profiles,textures,and colors.
' C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form ofmanufacturer's sample finishes showing full
range of colors and profiles available.
' D. Samples for verification purposes in form of two full-size units of each type of shingles
required:
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products that are identical to those tested for the
specified fire performance characteristics by UL or other testing and inspecting
' organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and 'rnspecting organization.
1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in tTL
' "Fire Resistance Directory."
LS I)ELTVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with
labels intact.
' �. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other
physical damage. Store roll goods on erid. Cornply with manufacturer's recommendations
for job site storage,handling, and protection.
' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
' �VOOD SHt�.I�ES Page 1 of 4
'
,
,
A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with Work only when existing and farecasted weather
conditions will permit Work to be installed in compliance with manufacturer°s
recommendations and when substrate is completely dry. ,
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as ,
described below,packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
clearly describing contents.
l. Furnish quantity of full-size wood shakes equal to 2 percent of amount installed. '
1.8 WARRANTY '
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a writlen warranty,executed by manufacturer,agreeing
to repair or�epiace wood shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of ,
shakes beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to,and not a limitation
of,other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty period shall be 20 years after date of Substantial Cornpletion. '
PA�RT 2-PRODITCTS
2.1 MANUFACTIJRERS t
A. Available Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering '
wood shakes that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood shakes by ,
following:
1. CERTI-LABLE '
2.2 WOOD SI-�AKES
A iJse Certi-Labte Cedar Shakes type Certi-Split Handsplit Shakes,Blue Label,(Number l ,
Grade) 24"x 1/2" installed by a Shingle Bureau ("CSSB") appraved installer. Proper
application plays a large role in determining roof system integriTy.
Fasteners: Two nails(only)for each Certi-label shake-approximately 3/4 from edge and '
approximately 1-1/2"above exposure line. Each Certi=label shalce should be applied with
two corrosion-resistant fasteners,such as stainless steel(type 304 or 316),hot-dipped zinc
coated, or aluminum nails or other fastener as accepted by your local building official. '
Fasteners shall be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing at least 3/4" or all the way
through the driven flush with the surface of the Certi-label shake.
Felt: The bottom edge of the felt should be positioned above the butt of the shake at a '
distance equal to twice the weather exposure.. Fedt interlay is shown in Figure 1.
Underdriving or overdriving any fasteneer will affe,ct the integrity of the roofing ,
system. Certi-Guard (fire-retardant-treated} or Certi-Last (preservative-treated)
shakes: Ask the treatment company which fasteners are recommended for use with their
pressure-treated Certi-label shakes. Some fasteners are not compatible with treated m�terial. '
WOOD SHAKES Page 2 of 4
'
�
� acin : S acing between adjacent shakes should be a minimum of 3/8"and a maximum
of 5�%8"�Shakes shall be laid w�► a side lap of not less than 1-1/2" between joints in
� adjacent coutses.
Refer to the CSSB's New Roof Construction Manual for the groper application
method of solid deck installation. Low slope appiication is also detailed in the New Roof
� Conshvction Manual.
Rooi�xaosure:The maximum recommended weather explosure for Certi-Split and Certi-
Sawn shakes with an interwoven felt or a rubberized membrane system shali be 10".
, B. Hip and Ridge Shakes: Manufactwer's standard factory precut units to match shakes.
� C. Colors,Blends and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated,provide
wood shakes with the foIlowing requirements:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard
� colors,textures,and patterns for wood shakes of type indicated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
rA. Felt Underlaymemt: No. 15;unperforated organic felt complying with ASTMaDa226,Type
I;36 inches wide.
� B. Perimeter Underlayment: Polyethyleae-sheet-backed rubberized wood membrane,40 mils
thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
� I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that shall
be incorporated in the Work include,but aze not limited to,the following:
a. "Bituthene Tce&Water Shieid,"W.R.Grace&Co.
� C. WoodPlasticCemenr NonasbestosfibratedwoodcementcomplyingwithASTMaD�4586,
designed for trowel application.
� D. Nails:Otily those fasteners recommended by the shingle manufacture to penetrate 3/4 inch
through pIywood roof sheathing. Note: Material of nails in contact with flashing sh�il
match materials selected for flashing�prevent galvanic action.
, E. Metal Drip Edge: Minimum 0.024-inch mifl fuush white finish aluminum continuous sheet,
brake-formed ta provide 3-inch roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch
� drip at lawer edge.
F. Prefinished Meta.l Flashing: 0.024-inch mill white finish sheet alurr�inum,job-cut to sizes
and configurations required.
� 1. Each valley flashing piece shall be a continuous preformed piece with inverted v
profile at center of valley and shait match coior of shakes.
' PA.RT 3-EXECUTION
� 3.1 EXAMI1�iATION
A. Examme substrate for comphance with requaz�ements for substrates,�nstallation tolerances,
and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with
� insiallation until wnsatisfactory conditions have been con�ted.
WOOD SHA,KES Page 3 of 4
'
�
�
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean suhstrates ofprojections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knatholes ,
or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncorrosive
roofing naiis.
B. Coordinateinstallationwithflashingsandotheradjoiningworktoensurepropersequencing. �
Do not install raofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof
sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. �
3.3 TNSTALLATION
A. ComQly with mannfactnrer's installation instructions and recommendations,bat not �
iess than recommended 6y"The CSSB Roofing Maaual."
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply one layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface �
to receive wood shakes, Iapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches, end laps a
minimum of 4 inches, and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with
sufficient nwnber of roofing nails or aoncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place �
until wood sbingle application.
C. Perimeter UnderIayment: Apply minimum 36-inch-wide layer of perimeter anderlayment
at eaves. Extend perimeter underlayment at ea.ves a minimum of 24 iunches inside exterior �
wall line.
1. In addition to eaves,apply perimeter underlayment at entire perimeter of surfaces �
to receive wood shakes,including ridges,valleys,and rakes.
D. Install wood shalces beginning at lower end with a starter strip of roli roofmg. Fasten shakes
in pattem, with weather exposure, and using number of fasteners per shingle as �
recornz�ended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines or premarked
underlayment to ensure straight coursing.
I. G�t and frt wood shakea at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather �
prot�ction. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap
shakes at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wittd. Fasteners
at ridges shall be of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. '
E. Flashing: InstalI metal flashing as indicated and in accordance with detaiIs and
recommendations of the"Wo�l Roofing"section of"The CSSB Roofis�g Mane2al." �
F. CSSB specifications/notes,shall take precedence over similar notes in this specification.
3.4 ADNSTING ,
A. Replace arty damaged materials installed under this Section wi�new materials meeting ,
spec�ed requirements.
END OF SECTION 07311
'
� WOOD SHAKES Pa e 4 of 4 �
g
'
r
� FLASHIN6 AND SI�EE�ME'FAL
SECTION 07600
� THIS SECTION USES TI�TERM"AR.CHITECT."
PART 1 -GENERAL
, ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general� provisions of Contract, inelu�ing Genet�al and Supplementary
, Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to work af this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
tA. This Section includes the following:
�
�. Built-in metal valleys,gutters,and�seuppers.
� 2. Gutters and downspouts(rain drainage).
3. Exposed metat trim/fascia units.
4. Miscellaneous sheet nnetal accessories.
rB. Roo�ing aceesso�ies insta�led integr�with roofing membrane arte speeif e�in roo�ing system
sections as roofmg work.
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following ia aeeordanee wi�h Eonditions of Eontract ar�d Division �
� Specification Sections.
B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, an�Aecessories: 11�anufaeturer's technical produet
data,installation instructions and general recammendations for each specif ed sheet material
� and fabricated prodact
C. Sampies of the following flashing,sheet metal,and accessory items:
' 1. S-inch-square samples of specified sheet mat�rials to be exposed as finished
surfaces.
� D. Shug drawings showing �ayoa�, pro€�les, me��vds o€joining, and anchorages details,
including major eounterflashings, trim/fascia units, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, and
expansion joint systems. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale.
� 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Eoordinate work of this section with interfaeing and ad;joining worlf for pmper sequeneing
� of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and
protection of materials and finishes.
' PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TR1M MATERIALS
� A. Extrude�1�Iuminum: Mantrfae�rer's standard ex�cusions o€stzes and pro�les indieated;
60063-T52,AA-C22A41 clear anodized finish;0.080-inch minimum thickness for primary
legs of extrusions.
, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page 1 of 4
�
r
B. Fascia gravelstops,gutters and downspouts shali be of continuous,single piece construction �
and shall match existing prof ies of such items used on existing house.
C. Valley flashing shall be of continuous, single pieca consttuction and the scuppers on tiie �
Cabana shall be part ofthe valley flashing and shali extend 3"past the adjacent fascias. The
flashing shall be 10 inches wide and run up 8"under the shingles on each side of the valley. '
See drawings.
D. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of expased heads with materiat being �
fastened.
E. Masric Sealan�: Polyisobutylene;non-hardening,non-skinning,non-drying,noa-migrating '
sealant.
F. Elastomeric SealanG Generic iype recommended by manufacttuer of inetal and fabricator
of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified �
in Division 7 Section"Ioint Sealers"
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer; 2-part noncorrosiv8 metal seain cementing compound,recommended
by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior nonmoving joints including riveted joints. �
H. Adhesives: Type recommendec� by flashing sheet manufacturer for
waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. �
I. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb.rosin-sized building paper.
J. Polyethylene Underlaymen�: IV�inimum 6-mil�earbo�ated polyethyieae film resistant ta �
decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154.
K. Reglets: Meta�or plastic units o€type and profile indicated; compatible with flashing �
indicated,non-corrosive.
�. MetaX Accessories: Provide sheet meta�elips,shee�metai criekets as shown o�t drawings,
shingle tins, straps, anchvring devices, and similar accessory units as required for �
installation of work,matching or compa�ible with materia�being inst�lled,non-eorrosive,
size and gage required for performance.
Iv�. Gr�tter anc�Conduetor-Head GuaFds: 2fl-gage bronze o�nanrnagne�ie stainless steel mesh �
or fabricated units,with selvaged edges and non-corrosive fasteners. Select materials for
compatibility with gutters and downspouts. AIl gntters shall have a continuous top screen.
�
I�. Elas�ie Flashing Filler: Closed�el� po�yethylene or otheF sof� elosed-ee� materia�
recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure '
movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet.
O. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822,asphaltic.
2.4 FABRICATED IJNTf S '
A. fieneral Metal Fab�ication: Shop-€abMcafe work to-g�eatest exten�possible. Comply wi�h �
details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal
Manua�" and other recognized industry praetiees. Fabrieate for waterproo€ aad
weather-resistant performance,with expansion provisions for running woric, sufficient to
�
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page 2 of 4
�
,
� p�rmauently prevent�leakage, damage,or-deterioration�of ihhe work. Form work to fit subsixates.
Comply with material manufacturer instre�ctions and recommendations for forming material. Form
� exposed sheet metai work without excessive oi1-canning,buckling,and tool marks,true to lune and
levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to foim hems.
B. Searns: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet meta.l with flat lock seams. For metal other
' than aluminum,tin edges to be seamed,form seams,and solder. Form alu�tinum seamswith
epo�ry seam sealer.
� C. Expansion Provisions: Where lappe�i or ba.yonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot
be used or would not be sufficiendy water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep,filled with mast�c sealant{concealed
within joints).
rD. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for
proper perfonnance of work, for�n metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeria
' sealasit,in compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of ineta.l from non-compatible metal or corrosive
seabstrates by coatin�concealed surfaces at locations of contact,with biluminous coating or
, other pemianent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fahricator.
F. Aluminum Extrusion Units: Fabricate extruded aluminum running units with formed or
� extntded aluminum joint covers for installation behind main members where possible.
Fabricate mitered and weided comer units.
G. Shop Finish,Rain Drainage: Provide manufacturer's standard baiced-an white acrylic shop
� finish on sheet metal rai�draiaage units(gutters,downspouts,and similar exposed units);
1.0-mil dry film thickness.
' H. Do not use copper flashing under red cedar wood shingles.
I. Mannfachuers: Subject to complZance wrth requ�rements
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.i Il�TSTALLATION REQUIltEMENTS
, A. General: Excegtasotherwise indicated,compiywithmanufact�u�e�'s installanon instnsctions
and recommendations az�d with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."Anchar
units of work securely in piace by methods in�dicated,providing for thern►al expansion of
� metal units; conceal fasteners wherc possible, and set uni�s trae to line and level as
indicated. Install work with laps,joints,atid seams that wiil be permanently watertight and
weatherproof.
� B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious
or wood substrates, install a. slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene
underlayment.
' C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
' 3.2 CLEANING AND PR�TECTION .
A. CIean exposed metal surFaces,removing substances that migtit cause corrosion of inetal ar
, deterioration o£ftnishes.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page 3 of 4
,
'
B. Protect�ion: Advise Contractor�of required procedures for surveillance and protection�of
flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without ,
da.mage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTi�N Q7600 �
'
�
�
,
�
'
�
'
�
'
�
�
i
i
1
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page 4 of 4
'
'
, THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION
� aonv�r sEa�.,A�vTs
SECTION 07901
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT."
� PART 1 -GENERAL
' 1.1 RELATED DOGIJMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Generai and Supplementary
' Conditions and Division�l Specification Sections,apply to this Sec#ion.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated
� below:
a Conhol and expansion joints in cast in-place concrete.
' b. 7oints between different materials listed above.
c. Perimeter joints beiween materials listed above and frames of doors and
windows.
� d. Other joints as iadicated.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaees and non-trafFic horizontal surfaces as indicated
' belovv:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicateci.
b. Perimeter joints between i�terior wall surfaces and frames of interior
, doors,windows,
c. Other joints as indicated.
� B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Div�sion 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing joints related to
� flashing and sheet me#al for roofing.
2. Division 8"Glass and Glazing"for sea.Iants used in glazing.
� 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and instailed to establish and
' to maintain watertight and airtight continuous sea.ls without causing staining or
deterioration of joint s�bstrates.
� 1.4 SLTBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the fallowing in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division�l Specification Secnons.
' B. Product data from manufacturers for each}oint sealant product required.
THERMAL& MOLSTURE PROTECTIUN Page 1 of 6
�
�
C. Certificates from manufac#urers of joint seaiants attesting that their products comply witt2 �
specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
1.5 QUALI7Y ASSURANCE �
THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION Page 1 of 5 �
A. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials
from a singie manufacturer for each different product required. �
1. Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit
joint pr�paration data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are '
based on previous testing of curnent sealant products for adhesion to, and
compatibility with,joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
1.6 DELIVERY,STOR.AGE,AND HANDLING ,
A. Delive�r materials ta Project sitc in original unopened containers or bundies with 1abeEs
indicating manufaciurer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, ,
pot life,curing time, and mixing inslsuct�ons for multicomponen#materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturei's recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, '
contaminants,or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITTONS '
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
foilowing conditions: �
1. When arabient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
pennitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet �
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed wi� installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. '
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interFering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates. �
I.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
PART 2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL �
A. Compatibility. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one anather and with joint svbstrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field �
experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the folIowing:
THERMAL&MOISTUItE PROTECTION Page 2 of 6 ,
'
'
' 1. Provide custom colors to match ArchitecYs samples.
' 2.2 ELASTOMERIC 3U1NT SEALANTS
A. Elastomexic Sealant Standard: Provide manufacfurer's standazd chemically curing
� elastomerio sealants that comply with ASTMaCa920 and other requirements indicated on
each Eiastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including t�ose
requirements referencing ASTM�C�920 class�cations for Type,Grade,Class,and Uses.
', l. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is
specified in Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the
� capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyciic
moveraent per ASTMaC�719, to withstand the specified percentage change in
the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM�C�920 for Uses indicated.
' B. Pigrnented Narrow doint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent release-curing,
pigmented s}mthetic rubber sealant complyin.g with AAMA�8033 and formulated for
' sealing joints 311b inch or smaller in width.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.
D. Products: Subject to comptiance with requirements.
' 1. Acrylic Sealant:
2, Bt�tyyl Sealant:
' 3. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant:
a. "PTI 200,"Prot�tive Trea�nents,Inc.
� 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable
� latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on
interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage
change in joint width existing at time of installation without faiIing cither adhesively or
� cohesively.
B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealan�: Provide product complying with ASTMaCa834 that
accommodates joint movement of not more than S percent in both extension and
� compression for a total of 10 percen�
C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM{�C�834 and, except
for weigtrt loss measured per ASTMfC&792, with ASTM�C�920 that accommadates
' jaiut movennent of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compressian for a total
of 50 percent.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.
� I. Acryii�Emulsion Sealant:
2. Silicone-Emulsion Sealant:
' 2.4 TAPE SEALANTS
' THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION Page 3 of 6
'
�
A. Tape Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-free, butyl-based tape seaiant with a ,
solids content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, and nonmigra#�ng
in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to prevent ,
stretch and packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side.
2.5 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANTS �
A. Preformed Foam Sealants: Mauufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed,
impregnated open-ceII foam seala.nt manufactured from high-density urethane foam �
impregnated with a nondrying, water repellent agent; factory-produced in precomptessed
sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to deveiop a watertight and
airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and campiying �
with the following requirements:
1. eias�ic, mildew-resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with joint substrates
and other joint sealants. ,
2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of maferial and type that are nonstaining, are '
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience ,
and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Prefortned, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,
nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material ittdicated below and of size, ,
shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant perfarmance:
I. Open-celi polyurethane foam. '
2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liQuid water and gas,
nonoutgassing 'vn uncuptured state.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERI�.LS �
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer . ,
PART3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMIlVATION �
A. Examine joiuts indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installcr present, for compliance �
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other wnditions
afFecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with instailation of joint seaIants
until unsatisfactory conditions have beea corrected. �
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants ,
to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following
requirements:
r
THERMAL& MUISTURE PROTECTION Page 4 of6
�
'
' 1. Remove al! forei material from 'oint substrates that could interFere with
� J
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust,paints (except for permanent, protective
' coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water,surface dirt,aud frost.
' 2. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
3. Clean metai, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other
nonporous surfaces with chemical clea.uers or other means that do not stain,harm
' substrates,or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prirne joint subshgtes where indicated or where recommended by joint
� sealant manufachuez based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant ananufacfure�'s recommendations.
Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not a11ow spiliage or migration onto
' adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
' A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply. .
' B. Sealant installation Standard: Comply wi#h recommendations of ASTMfiC 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
� requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during
' application and at posrtion required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and
depths of instaIled sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
nnovement capability.
� D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants
directly con�tacfiing and fully wetting joint substrates, comgleteIy filling recesses provided
for each joint configuration, and praviding uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths
' relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant znovement capability. Install sealants
at the same time sealant backings are installed.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immedisteiy after sealant application and prior to time
' skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated, to elunina#e air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of join� Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joiut. Do not use
� tooling agents that discolor sealan#s or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
' 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM�C�.1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Use maskin�tape to protect adjacent sarfaces of recessed tooled joints.
' 3.4 CLEANING
� THERMAL &MOISTURE PROTECTI4N Page 5 of 6
�
'
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joinfs as work progresses by '
methocis and with cleaning materials approved by m.anufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur. �
3.5 PROTEC'I�ON
A. Protect joint sealants during and af�er curing period from contact with contaminating '
subsian.ces or from damage resulting from construction aperations ar other causes so that
they are without deterior#ion or damage at time of Substantial Completxon. If, despite �
such protection, damage or deterioratiou occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas aze
indistinguishable from originaI work. �
END OF SECTI�N 07901
,
,
�
. i
t
1
i
1
1
1
1
i
THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION ' Page 6 of 6
�
�
, FLUSH WOOD D
OORS
� SECTION 08211
PART l. - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
� 1.2 SI;iMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
� 1. So1id core doors with wood veneer faces.
2. Solid core doors with hardboard faces.
' 3. Solid core doors with plastic laminate faces.
4. Shop priming of flush waod doors.
5. Factory finishirig of flush wood doors.
6. Factory fitting flush wood doors to fra�nes and factory machining for hardware.
' 1. Division 6 Section"Irtterior Architectural Woodwork"for requirements relating to custom
veneers from the same flitches for both wood doors and architectural woodwork i#ems.
2. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry"for wood door frames.
� 3. Division 6 Section"Inter�or Architectural Woodwork"for wood door frames.
1.3 SUBMIT"I'ALS
' A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specificafion Sections.
' B. Product data for each type of door, including detaiis of core and edge constniction, trim for
openings and touvers,and factory-finishing specifications.
' C. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,elevation of each kind of door,detaiis
of construction, location and extent of hazdwaze blacking, f�re ratings,requiirements for veneer
matching and factory finishing and other pertinent data
� 1. For factary-machined doors,indicate d�nensions and Iocations of cutouts for locksets and
other cutouts adjacent ta light and louver openings.
D. Sampies for initial selection in the form of color charts consisting of actuai nnateriais in small
� sections for the following:
2. Faces of fac#ory-finished doors with transparent finish. Show the full range of colors
' available for stained finishes.
3. Faces of factory-finished doors with opaque finish. Show the full range of colors available.
E. Samples for verification in the form and size indicated l�low:
, 1. Corner sections of doors approximateIy 12 inches(300 m,m) squaze with door faces and
edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and
' solid lumber required. Finish sample wi#h same materials proposed for factory-finished
doors.
� FLUSH WOOD DUORS Page 1 of 6
1
�
1.4 QUALITY ASSURA,NCE '
A. Quality Stantlazd: Comply wi#h the follawing standard: ,
l. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1-A,"Architectural Wood Flush Doors,"of the National
Woocl Window and Door Association. '
2. AWI Quality Standazd: "Architectural Woodwork Quatity Standazds"of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grade of door,core,construction,finish,and other requirements.
3. WIC Quality Standard: "Manual ofMillwork"ofthe Woodwork Institute of California for
grade of doar,core,construction,fmish,and other requirements. �
a. Provide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that doors meet
require�nents of grades specified.
b. Pmvide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate for installaRion. '
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELNERY,STORAGE,AND T3ANDLING '
A. Protect doors during transi�storage,and handling to prevent damage,soiling,and deterioration.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. '
1. Camply with WIC Technical Bulletin 420-R for delivery,storage,and handling of doors.
B. Identify each door with individual apening munbers as designated on shop drawings, using �
tempor�y,removable,or conceaied markings.
1.6 PR�JECT CONDITIONS ,
A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors untiI building is enclosed, and wet work is
complete and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the ,
remainder of the construction perioci.
B. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative
humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and instailation areas during the ,
remainder of the construction period to comply with the following reqnirements applicable to
Project's geographicallocation:
1. AWI quality standazd Section 100-5-11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Conten�." �
2. WIC quality standard Section 2"General Information,Technical Bulletin 419-R."
1.7 WARRANTY '
A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in ti�is Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other pravisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to,and run concurrent with,otb.er wairanries made by�t1�e Contractor under ,
requirements of the Contract Dactunents.
B. Door Ma�nufacturer's WarrAnty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's star►dazd form ,
signed by manufacturer, Installer,and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective duors
that have warped(bow,cup,or twist)more than 1/4 inch{6.35 mm)in a 42-by-84inch(1067-by-
2134mm)section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding O.UI
inch in a 3-inch {�.25 mm in a 75-mm) span, or do not conform to tolerance Iimitations of '
referenced quality standazds.
FLUSH WOOD DOURS Page 2 of 6 �
�
'
'
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
' replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time a.f�er date of
substantial Completion.
, a. Solid Core Interior poors: Life of installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
, 2.1 MANITFACTLJRERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,rnanufacturers offering doors
' that may be incorporated in the Wdrk include,but are not limited to,the folIowing:
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide doors by one af the following:
' 1. Solid Core Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
, b. Ampco Products,Inc.
c. Buell Door Co.
d. Chappell Door Ca
e. Eagle Plywood&Door Manufacturing,Inc.
' f. Eggers Industri�es,Architectural Door Division.
g. Fenestra Corporation.
h. Graham Manufacturing Corp.
' i. Haley Brothers,Inc.
j. Ideal Wood Products,Inc.
k. II'IK Door Go.,Ina
L Marli#e.
, m. Mohawk Flush Doors,Inc.
n. Poncraft Door Co.
o. Ragland Manufacturing Co.,Ina
, p. V-T Industries Ina .
q. Weyerhauser Co.
2.2
' INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Solid Core Doors foa Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
' 1. Faces: White birch,plain sliced.
2.. Gra.de: Prernium.
3. Grade: Custom.
' 4. Grade: Economy.
5. Consiruction: 5 plies.
6. Construction: 7 plies.
7. Core: Particleboard core.
' 8. Core: Glued-block core.
9. Core: Nonglued-block core.
10. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core,then entire unit abrasive planed before
tveneering.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 3 of 6
'
1
�
', '
B. Solid Core Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements: '
1. Faces: Medium-density overlay over standard thickness hardwood face veneers.
2. Facesc Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option. t
3. Faces: Hardboazd.
4. Grade: Premium.
5. Grade: Custom. '
6. Grade: Economy.
7. Construction: 5 plies.
8. Construction: 7 plies.
9. Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core. '
10. Core: Particleboard core.
11. Core: Glued-block core.
12. Core: Nonglued-block core. '
13. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core,then entire unit abrasive planed before
veneering.
2.3 FABRICATION '
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to comply with following requirements:
1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. '
2. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated,with the following unifarm
clearances and bevels:
a, Comply with ciearance requirements of referenced qualiTy standard for fitting. '
Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-resistance-rated doors.
3. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to ,
comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop
drawings,DHI A 115-W series standards,and hardware templates.
a Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify '
dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory machining.
b. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for
hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. '
2.4 SHOP PRIlVIING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat '
of waod primer specified in Division 9 Section"Painting."
B. Transparent Finish: Shop-seal faces and edges of doors for transpazent finish with stain (if '
required),other required pretreatments, and first coat of fmish as specified in the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting." ,
2. Division 9 Section"Exterior Wood Stains."
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing. '
B. Finish wood doors at factory.
C. Finish wood doors at factory where indicated on schedules or Drawings as factory finished. '
FLUSIi WOOD DOORS Page 4 of 6 ,
t.
'
' D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade,fmish system,staining effect,
and sheen.
1. Grade: Premium.
' 2. Grade: Custom.
3. Finish: AWI System TR-2 catalyzed lacquer.
4. Finish: AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.
' S. Finish: AWI System TR-2 catalyzed lacquer or TR-4 conversion varnish as standard with
manufacturer.
6: Finish: WIC System#lb. catalyzed lacquer.
7. Finish: WIC System#2 conversion varnish.
' 8. Finish: WIC System #1 b. catalyzed lacquer or #2 conversion varnish as standard with
manufacturer.
9. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with perFormance requirements comparable to
either AWI System TR-2 catalyzed lacquer or AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.
' 10. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
11. Finish: WIC System#3 cataly�ed polyurethane.
12. Staining: None required.
' 13. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
14. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
15. Effect: Open-grain finish.
16. Effeet: Filled finish.
' 17. Sheen: Satin.
18. Sheen: Semigloss.
E. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade,finish system,color, and sheen.
' 1. Grade: Premium.
2. Grade: Custom.
' 3. Finish: AWI System OP-2 catalyzed lacquer.
4. Finish: AWI System OP-1 standard lacquer.
5. F'inish: AWI System OP-4 opaque conversion varnish.
6. Finish: WIC System#1 g. opaque pigrnented lacquer.
' '�. Finish: WIC System#6 synthetic enamel.
8. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to
AWI System OP-2 catalyzed lacquer.
' 9. Color: Match approved sample for color selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors.
10. Coior: Match Architect's sample.
11. Sheen: Satin.
' 12. Sheen: Semigloss.
13. Sheen: Gloss.
' PART 3 -EXECUTIOIV
3.1 EXAMIIr1ATION
' A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,and swing
characteristics and have been installed with plunnb jambs and level heads.
' 2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Do not proceed dvith installation until unsarisfactory conditions have been corrected.
'
' FLUSH WOUD DOOI2S Page 5 of6
'
'
3.2 INSTALLATION '
A. Hardware: For installation see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufactarer's instructions and ,
referenced quality standard and as indicated.
C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform cleaxances and bevels as indicated ,
below;do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with
fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Daors: Pmvide 1/8 inch (3.2 �xun) at jambs and '
heads, 1/16 inch(1.6 mm}per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doots, and 1/8 inch(3.2
m�) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) clearance from bottom of doar to top '
of threshold.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at '
the job site.
F. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for fmishing requi.rements:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting."
1
2. Division 9 Section "Exterior Wood Stains."
3.3 ADNSTIIVG AND PROTECTION I
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. '
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Pratect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without '
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTTON 08211
,
1
'
'
'
'
FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 6 of 6
'
1
'
' WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS
' SEC'TION 08312
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM ARCHITECT.
' PART 1 -GENER.AL
1.1 RELATED DC}CUMENTS
rA. Drawings and generai provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
' i.2 S[_TNIlVIARY �
C. This Section includes vinyl-clad wood sliding glass doors provided by the Owner and
' installed by the General Contractor..
1. Performance Grade: Provide wood sliding glass doors that comply with
' � requirements of NWWDA I.S.3 for performance grade 20.
2. Glazing requirements for wood sliding glass doors,including those specified to be
factory glazed,are specified in the Division 8 Section "Glazing."
' 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIltEMENTS
A. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force, structural performance, air
, infiltration, and water penetration for wood sliding glass doors are those specified in
NWWDA I.S.3 "Wood Sliding Patio Doors."
B. Testing: Manufacturer's stock units of each grade of required wood sliding glass door shall
, have been tested by a recognized testing agency,according to AST'M E 330 for structural
performance,ASTM E 283 for air infiltration,and AST'M E 547 for water penetration. Test
sampies shall comply with requirements in NWWDA I.S. 3 for test sample sizes and
, methods.
C. Performance Requirements(Grade 40 Sliding Glass Doors): Each wood sliding glass door
unit shall comply with the following performance requirements:
' 1. Operating Force: Not more than 301b of force Yo begin motion,nor more than 15
lb of force to sustain motion.
' 2. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.25 cfm per sq, ft. of overall frame area at an
inwazd test pressure of 1.571bf per sq.ft.
3. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward
test pressure of 4.431bf per sq.ft.
, 4. Structural Performance: No glass breakage, damage to hardware, or permanent
deformation that would impair anit opera.tion or cause residual deflection greater
than 0.1 percent of the span at a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test
, pressare of 401bf per sq. ft.
D._ Forced-Enhy Resistance: Comply with requirements for Grade 10 level of resistance to
forced entry when tested according to the requirements of ASTM F 842.
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
, A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 1 of 6
'
�-
'
B. Product data for each type of wood sliding glass door specified. Include the following: '
1. Manufacturer's standard construction details. '
2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
3. Data on finishes,hardware,and accessories.
4. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. '
C. Shop drawuzgs for each type of wood slidmg glass door umt requ�red. Include informahon
• not fully detailed in the manufacturer's standard product data and the foilowing:
1. Layoat and instatlation details, including anchors. r
2. Typical unit elevations.
3. Glazing details.
4. Full-size details of typical composite members. '
5. Hardware and accessories.
D. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Samples ofeach required finish on I2-inch-long typical ,
door member. Where finishes involve normal color variations,include sample sets showing
the full range of variations expected.
E. Product certificates signed by the wood sliding glass door manufacturer certifying that door '
units comply with specified perfortnance requirements.
F. Product test reports based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency ,
showing evidence of compliance of the wood sliding glass door units with requirements
indicated based on comprehensive testing within the last 5 years.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Safety Glass Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having
jurisdiction,provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing '
requirements of 16 CFR for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide safety glass permanently marked '
with the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council(SGCC}or
another cerfification agency acceptable to authorities having jnrisdiction.
B. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations ofthe Flat Glass Marketing Association '
(FGMA)"Glazing Manua]"and"Sesiant Manual"except where more stringent requirements
are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not
otherwise defined in this Section or referenced standards. ,
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide wood sIiding glass doors produced by a single
fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those
required. '
D. Design Concept: The Drawings indica.te the sizes,profiles,and dimensional requirements
of wood sliding glass door types required and are based on the specific type and model '
indicated. Wood sliding gtass door units by other manufactucers may be considered
provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design
concept as judged by the Architect. T'he burden of proof of equaiity is on the proposer.
l.b PR�JECT CONDITIONS '
A. Field Measurements: Check actual door openings in construction work by accurate field '
measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on f nal shop drawings.
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 2 of 6
'
'
'
1. Coordinate fabrication schetiule with construction progress to avoid delay. Where
' necessary, proceed with fabrication without fieId measurements and coordinate
fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit of wood sliding glass door units.
' 1.7 WARRANTY
A. Wood Sliding Glass Door Warranty: Submit awritten warranty signed by the manufacturer,
agreeing to repair or replace wood sliding glass door units that fail in materials or
' workmanship within the specifiec�warranty period. Failures include,but are not necessarily
[imited to,the following:
� 1. Structural faitures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, air
infiltration,or failure of weatherstripping.
2. Faulty operation of movabte panels or hardware.
3. Deterioration of inetals,finishes,and other matecials beyond normal weathering.
' 4. Wama.nty period for wood sliding glass doors is 3 years after the date of Substar�tial
Completion.
5. This warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the
' Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties by the Contractor tcnder
reqairements of the Contract Documents.
' PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
, A. AvaiIable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering
wood sliding glass doors that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited
to,the following:
' B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following;
' a. Kolbe&Kolbe.
b. Marvin Windows.
c. Rolscreen Co./Pella.
' d. Andersen Corp.
e. Hayfield Windows
' 2.2 MATERIAI,S
A. General: Comply with requuements of NWWDA I.S.3.
, B. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber, kiln-dried to a
moistare content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication,free from bIue stain,knots,pitch
pockets,and surface checks larger than 1/8 inch deep by 2 inches wide.
, 1. All lumber shali be water-repellent preservative treated after machining according
to NWWDA I.S.4
2. Finger jointed wood members are not acceptable.
' 3. Color as selected by the Architect from the mantifacturer's standard color range.
C. Vinyl Cladding: Pravide manufacturer's standard bonded vinyl cladding on exterior
' exposure ofwood members,consisting ofa rigid polyvinyl chloride sfleath,complying with
requirements of ASTM D 1784,Class 14344-C,not less than 35 mils average thickness,
permanent w�ite paintable fmish.
' WOOD SLIDING GLA5S DOORS Page 3 of 6
,
D. Sill Cap (Track): Provide extruded aluminum track of profile indicated with '
natural-anodized finish.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, cligs, and sliding glass door ,
accessories ofaluminum,nonmagnetic sta.inless steel,or hot-dip zinc-coated steel compIying
with ASTM A 123;provide strength suffcient to withstand design pressure indicated.
F. Compzession Weatherstripping: Provide the manufacturer's standazd compressible '
weatherstripping of molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded
expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,Grade 4,designed for '
permanent resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action,concealed when door is closed.
G. Sliding Wea.therstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping ofwool,polypropylene,or �
nylon pile,with resin-impregnated backing fabric,and an aluminum backing strip;comply
with AAMA 701.2.
1. Provide weatherstripping with integral center�line barrier fin of semirigid plastic '
polypropylene sheet.
H. Insect Sereens: Provide a movable insect screen panel for each movable glazed panel. ,
Comply with requirements of SMA 2005.
1. Screen Fabric: Provide 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of plastic-coated glass-fiber
threads,woven and fitsed to form a screen that is resistant to corrosion,shrinkage, '
stretching,impact damage,and weather deterioration;black or dark grey. Comgly
with requirements of FS LrS-I25.
2. Insect Screen Frames: Provide the manufacturer's standazd extruded aluminum '
� screen frame with removable vinyl fabric-retainer spline mounted on water-repellent
preservative-treated Western Pine wood frame. Comply with requirements of SMA
1004.
a. Finish: Anodized aluminum or baked-on organic coating in color selected '
by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
I. Glazing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's standard sealed insulating safety glazing '
material that complies with the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and the Division 8 Section
"Glazing."
2.3 HARDWARE '
A. Hardware: Provide hardware necessary to properly operate,tightly close,and securely Iock
doors. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, '
provide white bronze, cast or wrought aluminum, solid white metal with special coating
finish,or nonmagnetic stainless steeI.
1. Door Pulls: Provide manufacture�'s standard wood pull grips. '
2. Locks: Install manufacturer's standard pull and keyless locking device on each
movable panel, lockable from the inside. Adjust locking device to allow '
unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction
indicated.Note: One slider must be locked by key from the ontside
3. Security Foot Bolt: Provide security foot-operated dead bolt attached to the bottom
rail of movable door panels to lock the panel when fully closed and when paztially ,
open to permit ventilation.
2.4 FABRICATTON , '
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 4 of 6
,
'
' A. General: Fabricate wood sliding glass door units to comply with indicated standards.
include a complete system to assemble components and anchor units.
' 1. Provide anits that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing.
B. Assembly: Assemble components into complete weathertight units with flush,rigid, and
, hairline joints. Mill, cope, butt,and miter joints; secure by mechanical devices or other
means to ensure permanently watertight joints. Provide at least two corrosion-resistant,
prelubricated or self-lubricating rollers for each sliding panel, of sufficient capacity to
� ensure easy,quiet,and smooth operation.
C. Weatherstripping: Provide operable panels with a double row of sliding weatherstripping
in horizontal rails and single-or double-row weatherstripping in meeting or jamb stiles,as
' required to meet specified performance requirements. Provide compression-type
weatherstripping atthe perimeter ofeach movable panel where sliding-type weatherstripping
is not appropriate.
' D. Preglazed Fabrication: Glaze wood sliding glass door units in the factory where practical
and possible for the applications indicated. Comply with requirements of the Division 8
Section"Glazing" and NWWDA I.S.3.
, E. Screens: Provide insect screen unit for each operable panel. Design daor units and
hardwaxe to accommodate screens in a tight fitting removable arrangement,on either inside
' or outside of door unit,with a minimum of exposed fasteners and Iatches.
2.5 RINISHES
' A. Wood Door Finish: Provide the following finish on exposed wood in door units:
1 Shop-Primed Units: Provide the fabricator's standard shop-prime coat on exterior
, wood surfaces only. Comply with requirements of the Division 9 Section
"Painting"for prime paint.
2. Shop-Finished Units: Provide fabricator's standard shop finish,consisting ofprime
coat and two coats of alkyd semigloss enamel totaling 3 mils dry film thickness
' applied to both exterior and interior wood surfaces.
a Color: White.
' PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
' A. Tnspect openings before beginning wood sliding glass door insta9lation. Verify that the
rough or masonry opening is correct and that the siil plate is level. Do not instail door units
, until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound and well-nailed, free of voids, and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that nai�heads are driven flush with surfaces in the
� opening and within 3 inches of the opening.
3.2 INSTALLATTON
' A. Comply with manufachver's instructions and recommendations for installing door
. units,hardware,accessories,and other components.
1
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 5 of 6
'
'
B. Set sill members and other frame members in bed of compound or with joint fillers �
or gaskets, as indicated, to provide wealfiertight construction. Coordinate
installation with wail flashing and other components. '
1. Refer to Division 7 Section"Joint Seaiants"for compounds,fillers,and gaskets to
be installed concurrently with wood sliding glass door units.
C. Set units plumb,level and true to line,without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide '
prnpar support,and anchor frames and fixed panels securely in place.
3.3 ADJUSTIl�iG �
A. Adjust operating panels,screens,and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and
weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight ciosure. '
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces promptly after installing wood sliding glass doors. Avoid damaging t
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealing compounds,dirt,and
other substances. Lubricate hardware and other movin�parts.
B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing wood sliding glass door units. Wash '
and polish gIass on both faces not more than 4 days prior ta the date scheduled for final
inspection. Comply w,ith manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning and '
maintenance.
C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked,abraded, ar damaged in any
other way during tlie construction period, including by natural causes, accidents, or '
vandalism.
3.5 PROTECTION '
A. Institute and maintain protective measures and other precautions requir�t.�rough remainder
of construction period to ensure that,except for norxnal weathering,wood sliding glass door
units will be without damage or detorioration at the tima of Substantial Completion. ,
END OF SECTION 08312
'
'
'
'
'
'
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 6 of 6
'
'
� WOOD WINDOWS
SECTION 08610
ITHIS SECTION USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT."
, P.ART 1 -GENERAI.,
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of Contrac,�, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Divisional Specification Sections,appiy to this section.
' 1.2 SUNIlI�ARY
A.This Section includes the following vinyl-clad wood window types incl�ding glazing:
' 1. Non-aperative(Fixed)Window Units.
B. Related Sections: The following secrions contain requirements that relate to this section:
' 1. Join#sealingbetween wood windows and adjacent materials is specified in Division
7 Section"Joirit Seaiers."
2. Trim for wood windows,aze specified in Division d"Finish Carpentry"
' 3 Owner shali furnish windows and Generai Contractor wili install.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
' A. Standards: Performance requirements for structural performance,air infilfration,and water
penetration for wood windows are those specified in NWWDAfaI.S.a2"Indushy Standard
for Wood Window Units."
' B. Performance Requuements(Grade 40 Windows): Each required window unit shall comply
with the following performance requirements:
' 1. Air Infiltration: Not rnore than 0.25 cfm per sq. ft. of overall frame area at an
inward test pressure af 1.57 lbf per sq.ft.
2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward
' test pressure of 4.43 lbf per sq.ft. �
3. Structural Performance: No glass breakage, damage to hardware, permanent
deformxtion that would impair operation of#he unit,or residual deflection greater
' #han 0.4 percent of the span at a positive (inward) aud negative {ouh�vard) test
pressure of 40�1bf per sq.ft.
4. Forced Entry Resistance: Provide window units that comply with requirements for
' Performance Level 10 when tested in accordance with ASTMaFa588.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the foltowing in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Divisional Specification Sections:
, 1. Product data for each type of wood window required,includin�
a. Standazd construction details and fabrication methods.
b. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
' c. Daxa on finishes.
WOOD WINDUWS 'Page I of 5
'
'
d. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning exterior surfaces. �
e. Layout and installation details,including anchors.
f. Glazing details. '
B. Samples for color selection
C. Approval by the Architect ' '
1.S QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wood Window Standard: Comply with NWVVI)AaI.S.'a2 for standards ofperformance and ,
fabrication worlananship for wood windows.
B. Safety Glass Standard: Provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 '
and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Provide safety glass permanently marked with the certification label of the Safety '
GIazing Certification Councii(SGCC)or other certification agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Glazing Standatds: Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing Association '
{FGMA)"GlazingManual"and"Sea.lantManual"exceptwheremore stringentrequirernents
are indica#ed.
D. Insulating Glass Certif cation Prograw: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked '
with the appropriate certifcation label of the either the Insulating Giass Certification
Council(IGCC)or the Associated Labora.tories,Inc.(ALI). Provide the certification label '
either on spacers or at least one component pane of each unit.
E. Single Source Responsibility: Provide windows produced by a single fabricator who is
capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those required. '
F. Design Concept: The drawings indicate window sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requuements. '
1.6 1'ROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before '
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
1. Where necessary,proceed with fabrication without measurements,and coordinate '
tolerances with General Contractor to ensure proper fit of window units.
1.7 WARRANTY '
A. Wood Window Warranty: Submit a written wananty, executed by the window
manufacturer,agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within '
the specified warranty period. Failures include,bat are not necessarily limited to:
1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, or air '
infiltration.
2. Faulty operation of window sash or hardware.
3. Deterioration of wood, metals, finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering. '
WOOD WINDOWS Page 2 of 5 t
,
� B. Warranty Period: 3years after the date of Substantial Com letion.
P
� C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may .
have under other provisions of the Coniract Documents and is in addition to and runs
concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor u�der requirements ofthe Contract
� Documents.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
� 2.1 MANUFACT'URERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering
� window units that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Manufacturer: Subject ta compliance with requirements,provide window units by one of
, �e . .
following:
� l. Clad Wood Windows:
a. Marvin Windows.
b. Rolscreen Co.{Pella).
� c. Weather Shield Mfg.,Inc.
d. Kolbe and Kolbe
� 2. Vinyl-Clad Wood Window Units:
a. Andersen Corp.
b. Weather Shield Mfg.,Inc.
� 2.2 MATERIALS
� A. General: CompIy with requirements ofNWWDAaI.S.'a2.
B. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine or other suitabte fine-grain lumber that has been kiln dried to
a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at ti�ne of fabrication and is free of finger joints,blue
� stain,lanots,pitch pockets and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch wide by 2 inches long.
1. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining in accordance with
NWWDA�I.S.a4.
� a. Color: White.
� C. Vinyl Cladding: Mauufacturer's bonded vinyl cladding on exterior exposure of wood
members,consisting of a rigid polyvinyl chloride sheath,complying with ASTM�D'a1784,
Class I4344-C,not less than 35-mil average thickness,in permanent white paintable finish.
� l. Trim Members: Vinyl-clad exterior wood trim. '
2. Trim Members: Stainable interior wood trim to ft windows. Architect to seiect
trim material.
� � D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips and window accessories of
alummum,nonmagnetic stainless steel,or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with
� the requirements of ASTMa.Ba633 for SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide strength
sufficient to withstand design pressure indicated.
' WOOD WINDOWS Page 3 of 5
'
E. Fasteners: Compiy with NWWDA I.S.2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's �
recommendations and standard industry practices fflr type and size of installation fasteners.
1. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and �
installation. '
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Provide compressible weatherstripping, designed for �
pernnanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, completely concealed when
sash is closed.
1. Weatherstripping material: Nonferrous spring metal. �
2. Weatherstripping material: Molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTMaDa2287.
3. Weatherstripping materiaE: Molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets
complying with ASTMaCa509,Grade 4. �
a. Finish: Anodized aluminum or baked-on organic coating in color selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standards. �
I. Glass and Glazing Materiais: Provide the manufacturer's standard clear,scaled,insulating
sa.fety glazing material that compl ies with ANSI Z97.1 and the"GIass and Glazing"Section.
J. Glazing Seal: Provide the manufacturer's standard extruded vinyl or butyl glazing gasket �
providing weathertight seal.
2.5 NON-Ol°ERATIVE FIXED WiNDOWS ,
A. Window Grade: Comply with the requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade 60. �
B. Non rectangular fixed lrte sections must be field measured before manufacture.
2.6 FABRICATION �
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's stanclazd fabrication of units. Comply with indicated
standards. Inciude a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of �
window units.
1. Comply with requirements of referen.ced standards for moisture content of lumber
at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. �
B. Fabricate windows to produce units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing.
Provide openings and mortises precut,where possible,to receive hazdware and other items.
C. Each window unit includes sash,frame,stops,sill(including undersill or nosing),e�cterior ��
casing and moldings,integrat mullions and muntins,hardware,and accessories.
2.10 FINISHES �
1. Shop-Finished Units: Provide fabricator's standard shop finish,consisting of prime �
coat and 2 finish coats, 3-mils dry film thickness, applied to both exterior and
interior wood surfaces.
a. Color: White. �
PART 3-EXECUTION
WOOD WINDOWS P e 4 of 5 �
�
'
,
� 3.1 INSPECTION '
� A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening is conect and the
sill plate is level. Do not proceed with installation of window units until unsatisfactory
conditions have been cotrected.
� I. Wood frame walls shall be dry, cIean, sound and well-naiied, free of voids, and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the
opening and within 3 inches of the comer.
� 3.2 INSTALLATION
� A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommenda#ions for instailation of window
units.
B. Set units plumb,level,true to line,without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper
� support and anchor securely in place.
C. Set sill members in a bed of compound or with joittt fillers or gaskets as indicated, to
� provide weather-tight construction.
3.3 CLEANING
� A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces promptly after installation. Take care to avoid damage
to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other
substances.
� 3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect window units from damage or deterioration unti!tune of substantiai completion.
� END OF SECTION 08610
�
�
� -
�
� �
i
� WOOD WINDOWS Page 5 of 5
� .
,
� DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08710
PART 2 -GENERAL
� 1.01 SLIMMARY
� A. Section Includes:
1. F�msh Hardware for wood doors.
2. Keyed cylinders as indicated.
� B. Related Items:
See ather sections
, 1. Wood doors: Refer to Section 08210.
2. Conduit and power connections: Refer to Division 16.
� 1.02 REFERENCES .
A. National Fire Pro#ection Agency(NFPA):
� l. NFPA 80.
2. NFPA 101.
� B. Underwriters Laboratories,Tnc.(UL):
1. Bwldmg Mater�als D�rectory.
C. Warnock Hersey (WF�:
� 1. Buildin Materials Directo .
g rY
� D. ADA:
I. Americans with Disabilities Act.
� 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Compiy with Section 013fl0,unless otherwise indicated.
� 1. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals ofthis Section with Sections listed
below to ensura the desigu intent of the systein/assembly is understood and can be
reviewed together.
� a. Section 082 i 1 -Flush Wood Doors
� B. Product Data: Manufacturets specifications and technical data including the following:
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
2. Manufacturer's installation instreictions.
� 3. Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts of each hardware item with hardwaze schedule.
C. Shop Drawings-Hardware Schedule: Submit 1 complete reproducible copy.
� 1. List groups and suff�ces in proper sequence.
2. Completely describe door and list architectural door number.
3. Vertical or horizontal schedules only are acceptable.
�
DOOR HARDWARE Page 1 of 5
�
,
D. Wiring Diagram: Submit wiring diagrams for each electric product specifted. �
1. Verify voltage with electrical Contractor. �
E. Templates: Suhmit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule"to door and frame
supplier and others as applicable.
F. Samples: �
1. If requested by Architect,provide 3 sampies of inetaI fmishes. �
G. Keying$chedule: Upon review and acceptattce of Hardware Schedule,develop Keying
Schedule in consultation with Owner.
1. Submit 1 copy to Architect far information only. �
H. Contract Close-out Submittals: Comply with Section 01700 including specific �
requirements.
1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following:
a. Maintenance instructions for each item of hardware. M
b. Catalog pages for each produc�
c. Name,address,and phane number of Iocal representative for each mannfacturer.
d. Parts list for each product. �
e. Copy of final hazdware schedule.
f. Copy of final keying schedule.
1.44 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actuai
production of specified products. �
B. Distributor's Qualifications:
1. Fum with 3 years.axperience in the distribution of commercisl hazdware. �
2. Distributor to employ full time Architectura!Hardware Consultant for the
purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying
schedule. �
3. Hardware Schedule shail be prepared and signed by an AHC.
C. Installe�'s Qualifications:
1. Thuree(3) years experience in instai�ation of similar hazdwaze to that required �
for this project.
D. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide UL label or stamp on hardware required on �
labeled doors.
1 AS DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �
A. Packing and Shipping:
1. Deiiver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's �
identification.
2. Package hardware to prevent damage during hansit and s#ora�e.
3. Mark hardware to correspond with"reviewed Hardware Schedule" �
DOOR HARDWAR,E Page 2 of 5 �
�
� B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
,j PART 2-1'RODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
� Hinges,Bolts............................................... Stan[ey(St}
DA Spring Hinges. Bommer(Bm)
Locks and Latches....................................... Schlage(S)
� Closers.......................... ............................ �
Pushplates,Pails,Kickplates.. Hiawatha(I�
Stops......................................................... Ives(�
'Tbresholds................................................. Reese�)
� KEYIl�TG INSTRUCTIONS
All passage sets to be Residential grade levers.
� All locks to be masterkeyed with existing residence
Provide 3 masterkeys and Z change keys per lock
2.2 HARDVtTARE SCHEDULE
� GROUP A All BATHROOM ANU BEDRQOM A and B TYPE DOQRS
4) Door stop
� 5} Passage set with interior room lock
GROUP B D and E TYPE DOQRS
� I) Passage set
2) Closer
3) ThreshoId
� 4) Lock-keyed to interior
GROUP C All other A TYPE DOORS
� 1) Passage set
2) Door stop
rGROUP D BATHROOM AND BEDROOM C,F and G TYPE DOORS
I) Hardware by Mfg.
� 2) Door stop
3) Integrallock
� PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 E�!:AM]NATION
, A. Verification of Conditians: Examine doors,fraznes,reIated items,and condirions nnder
which Work is to be performed and idenrify conditions detrimental to proper and or
timely comglerion.
� 3.02INSTALLATiON
A. Comply with manufacturefs recommendations.
�
DOOR HARDWARE Page 3 of S
�
�
��
B. Door Hardware:
1. Hang doors with screws inserted and hinges adjusted so doors swing fi�ee and do not rattle when �
closed. Cut holes and mortises in wood doors for locks and other hardware with jig approved or
provided by manufacturer of item to be applied. Mount locics so key enters cylinder with smooth
edge down. Remove or cover hardware after fitting until final painting and cIeaning. Reinstall,
adjust and#est after painting and cleaning is completed Replace itemswith damaged finish or non- �
functional.
C. Keys: �
I. After locks have been reinstatled,seal keys and/or cores in envelopes. Mark each envelope with
door number, change key set or masterkey set and keyway number. Just prior to substantial
completion and under direction of Owner ar his representative,install permanent cores. Tutn key
control system over to owner with instructions on its assembly and use. Ship masterkeys to Owner �
via registered mail.
D. Thresholds:
i. Install threshoids using Tremco,Dymonic sealant(SLNT#2). Completely fill void sgace under �
threshald. At openings with one or more mUllions,install
continuously with cut-outs far muliions.
E. Mounting Heights/Dimensions: �
l. Comply with manufacturer's printed 'unstructions to instalt hardware at specified mounting
heiglrts, Suppiier to make available jigs for hardware instailation. Install and protect hardware until
substantial completion. �
2. Hinges:
a) Bottom of frame to center line af bottom hinge up to 13 inches.
b) Finish door frame head to center line of top hinge up to 11-3/4 inches. �
c) Others spaced equally.
3. Lever Iocks and latches: Bottom of frame to center line of strike shall be 40-5/16 inches. �
4. Exit devices: 40-5/I6 inches from bottom of frame to centar line of strike.
S. Closers: �
a) Mount on room inside of doors.
b) Pazallel arm instaliation where possible on exterior doors.
c} Through-bolt installation not permitted,coordinate with door suppliers. �
6. Door stops: (Coordivate for proper bloclang where requued in Section 092b0).
a) 60C(to catch knob or pull} �
F. Mount'vng heights shall comply with Door and Hardware Institute recommended locations for
standard steel doors and frames.
3.03 ADNSTII�tG �
A. Priar to completion of Project,ascertain that doors closers are in adjustment so closer completes its '
full closing cycle in lass thau 4 to 6 seconds without abrupt change of speed between "S�waep"and
"Latch"speeds. Adjust"Backcheck"according to manufacturer's instructions.Verify that levers are
fi�ee from binding. Ensure that latchbolts and deadbolts aze engaged into strike and hardware is
functioning. Turn over wrenches and adjusting tools,provided with hardware,to Owner. �
'
DOOR HARDWARE Page 4 of 5
�
�
3.04 IlVSTRUCTIONS AND TOOLS
� A. When project is complete, deliver #o Owner complete se# of special tools required for care,
maintenance,and adjustment of hardware items spec�fied under this Section, includmg changing of
� cylinders. Provide cflmplete information on care,maintenance,and adjustment,and data on repair
andreplacementparts,and information onpreservation offinishes. Deliverto Owner,3 bound capies
of catalog pages of hardware supplied.
� END OF SECTION 08710
�
�
�
�1
�
�
�
�
�
�
,�
�
�
�
� DOOR HARDWARE Page S of 5
�
� GLASS AND GLAZING
SEC'I.TUN 0880U
� THIS SECTTON USES THE TERM ARCHITECT. �
PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
� 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products,including those specified in other
Sections where glazing re,quirements are specified by reference to this Section:
� ADNST LIST BELOW TO SUIT PROJECT.
1. Window units.
� 2. Sliding glass doors
B. ReIated Sections: Ttte foliowing sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
� 1.3 DEFINITIONS
� A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or
fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard.
B. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal ase that aze attributed
� to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer`s directions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes
' exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard.
C. Deterioration of�nsulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to
causes othes than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning
� insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,moisture,or film
on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cIeaning glass do
not comply with the manufacturer's directions.
� 1.4 SYSTEM PERF�RMANCE REQiJIREMENTS
A. Genera.l: Provide glazing systems that are produced,fabricaterl,and installed to withstand
� normal thermal movement,wind loading,and impact loading(where applicable),without
failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture,
fabrication,and installation;failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;
� deterioration of glazing materials;and other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Provide glass lites for the variaus size openings in the thicknesses and
strengths(annealed or heat-treated)to meet or exceed the following criteria:
� 1. Minimum glass thickness,aominally,of lites in exteriorwalls is 6.0 mm(0.23 inch).
2. Minimum glass thicknesses of Iites,whether composed of annealed or heat-treated
� glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the
following:
GLA5S AND GLAZING Page 1 of 8
�
�
�
3. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F
(lOQ deg C),material surfaces. �
1.5 SiJBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division I �
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each giass product and glazing material indicated. �
C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated
except for clear monolithic glass products,and 12-inch-long white samples of each color �
required for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant ar gasket sample
between two str�ps of material representative in coloe of the adjoining framing system.
D. Product certificaxes signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products �
comply with specified requirements.
1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's �
permanent labeis designating type and thickness of glass,provided labels represent
a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that�lazing �
materiais were tested far campatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant
manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and �
recommendations for primers$nd substr$te preparation needed for adhesion.
F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that
glass edge sealants wece tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including �
sealants,glazing tape,gaskets,setting blocks,and edge hlocks.
G. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing �
compliance with requirements specified.
H. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and
Maintenance Maaual specified in Division 1. �
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Pvbiications: Comply with published recom�nendations of glass produet �
manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated, Referto these publications for glazingternas not otherwise def�ed inthis Sectioa
or in referenced standards. �
1. SIGMA. Publications: TM-3004 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB-3001
"Sloped Glazing Guidelines." �
B. Safety Glass: Products compIying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR
Part i201 for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with require�ents,provide safety glass permanently marked �
with certifica.tion label of Safety Glazing Certification Council(SGCC)or other
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. �
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 2 of 8
. �
�
� C. Fire-Resistive GlazingProducts forpoor Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per
ASTM E 152,labeted and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to au#horities having jurisdiction.
� D. Insulating Glass Certificarion Program: Provide insulating glass uni#s permanently marked
either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification Iabel
of inspecting and testing agency indicated below:
� 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council(IGCC}.
Z. Associated Laboratories,Inc.(ALn.
3. National Certified Test�ing Laboratories(NCTL).
� E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product
indicated below:
� a. Fully tempered glass.
b. low e insulating glass.
� 1.7 DELNERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent
� damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun,or other causes.
� 1.8 PROJECT CONDTTIONS
1.9 WA�F�ItANT'Y
� A. Manufacturer's Warranty on Coated G1ass Products: Submit written warranty signed by
coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that
deteriorate as defined in"Definitions"article,f.o.b.point of manufacture,freight allowed
� Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only
deterioration due to normal conditions of use and nat to handling, installing,and cleaning
practices cflntraiy to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
' l. Warranty Period: Manufactiuer's standard but not less than S years after date of
Substantial Completion.
� B. Manufacturer's Warranty on low e Insulating Glass: Submit vvritten warranty signed by
manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulatin�glass units
that dateriorate as defined in "Defuutions" articie, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight
� allowed Project site,within specified wanranty period indicated below. Warranty covers
only deteriorahon due tn normal conditions ofuse and not to handling,instailing,protecting,
and main#a.ining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
� 1. Warranty Period: Manufactiuer's standard but not less tban 10 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
� PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
� A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements
�
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 3 of 8
'
�
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float GIass: ASTM C 1Q36,Type I(transparent glass,flat),Class as indicated below,and �
Quality q3 (glazing selec#). .
1. Class 1 {clear)unless otherwise indicated. �
B. Refer to Primary Ctear Float Glass Procluct Data Sheet for Class 1 uncoated tint�i glass for
monolithic glazing. �
C. Refer to�equirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of
assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light �
transmittance,U-values,shading coefficient,and visible reflectance.
2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS,GENERAL
2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS �
A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated �
surfaces),Type I(transparent glass,flat),Class 1 (clear),Quality q3(gIazing select),kind
as indicated below.
1. Kind FT{fully tempered)where indicated. �
Cc. Coated, Tinted, Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other
coated giass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and �
light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing seiect}, with kind, coating type, and
performance characteristics complying with requirements specified under coated
glass products.
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. �
I. AFG indusiries,Inc. �
2. Artistic Glass Products Co.
3. CardinalIG.
4. Saint-Gobain. �
5. Falconer Glass`Industries.
b. Glasstemp,Inc.
7. Guardian Industries Corp.
8. HGP Industries. �
9. PPG Industries,Inc. '
10. Spectrum Giass Products,Inc.
11. Tempglass.
12. Viracon,Inc. �'
2.10 INSULATIl�TG GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organicaily sealed lites of �,
glass segarated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other
requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end �
of this Section.
1. For propettiss of individuat glass lites making up units, refer to requirements
specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and �
conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units.
2.12 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS �
A. General: Provide products of type indicaied,complying with the following require�nents:
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 4 of 8
,
�
� I. Compatibi�ity: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other
materials they will contact,including glass products,seals of insulating glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as
demonstrated by testing and field experience.
� 2. Suitability: Co�ply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for
selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and
conditions existing at time of installation.
� 3. Colors: Provide color of expased joint sealants to compiy with the following:
4. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard
colors for products of type indicated.
� B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard cheraically curing,
elastomeric sealants o£base polymer indicated that comply witti ASTM C 920 requirements
indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealsnt Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section,
� including�hose referencing ASTM classifications for Type,Grade,Class and Uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional raovement capability is
specified inElastoxneric Glazing Sealant ProductData Sheet,provide products,when
� tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM
C 719,with the capability to withstand the specified percentage ehange in the joint
width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with othec
� rec}uirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
2.13 GLAZING TAPES
� A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.
I, Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod:
� 2.14 GLAZfNG GASKETS
SEALANTS.
� 1. EPDM,ASTM C 864.
2. Silicone,ASTM C 1115.
� 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber,AST'M C 111 S.
4. A,ny materiai indicated above.
C. Soft Compression Gaskets: E�ruded or molded closed-cell, integrai-skinned gaskets of
� material
Indicated below,complying with ASTM C 509,Type II,black,and of profile and hardness
tequired to maintain watertight seal:
� l. EPDM.
2. Silicone.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
� 4. Any material in�icated above.
� D. Avaiiable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance wi#h requirements,manufacturers offering
� products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following
companiex.
E. Manufac#urers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
� 1. Lock-Strip Gaskets:
� a. Stanlocic Div.,Griffith Rubber Mills.
2. Preformed Gaskets:
GLASS AND GLAZING Page S of 8
�
�
. a. Advanced Elastomer Systems,L.P.
b. Tremco,Inc. �
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERiALS
A. GeneraI: Provide products of materiai,size,and shape complying with referenced glazing �
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for
glazing applicarion indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation. �
B. Cleaners,Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A darometer hardness of 85 plus or minus �
5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness �
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for instaUation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric materiai of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement �
(side-walking).
F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed,cornpressible,resilient,nonstaining,nonextruding, �
nonoutgassing,sirips of closeti-cell plastic foam of density,size,and shape to control sealant
depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance.
2.16 FABRTCATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZIl�TG PRODUCTS �
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for
Project,with edge and face clearances,edge and surface conditions,and bite complying with �
recommenda#ions of product manufacturer amd referenced glazing standard as required#o
comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 -EXECUTION �
3.1 EXAMIl�IA'I`ION
A Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. �
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean giazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before �
glazing. Remove coatings that are not ftnmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZIl�TG,GENERAL �
A. Comply with combined recommendadons of manufaott�ress of giass,sealants, gaskets,and
other glazing materials,except where more stringent requirements are indicated,including �
those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indica.ted on Drawings provide necessary hite on glass, �
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjnst as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: �
1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass unit�to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not
impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within �
openings;do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or
GLASS AND GLAZING ' Page 6 of 8
�
�
, bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are loca#ed at top of opening, uniess
otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label.
2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged
. glass is glass with edge damage or other unperfections that,when installed,weaken
� glass and impair perfarmance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
� precanstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets,sized and located to comply with referenced
giazing standard,unless otherwise required by giass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
� of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufaaturers for installing glass tites.
� G. Provide sQacers for glass sizes larger than SO united inches(length plus heigl�t)as follows:
1. Locate spacers inside,outside,and directly opposite each other. Install conect size
� and spaeing to preserve required face cl8arances,except where gaskets and glazing
tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face ciearances
and comply with system performance requireraents.
� 2. Provide I/8-inch minimum hite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape,use thickness slightty less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
, H. Provide edge blockingto comply with requirements ofreferenced glazingpublications,unless
otherwise required by glass manufactwer.
� I. Set giass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to presswize se�lant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walic otrt when
� installation is subjected to movemen�
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in maruxer recommended by
� gasket manufac#urer to prevent corners from pulling away;seal corner joints and butt join�.s
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
� A. Position tapes on fuced stops so that wben compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush
vrrith or protrude slightly above sigtitli.ne of stops.
, B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous lengtt�. Do not stretch tapes to make
them fit opening.
� C. Where framing joints are verticaI,cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and si11s fi�rst
and then to jambs. Wlzere framing joints are horizontal,cover these joints by applying tapes
to jambs and then to heads and sills.
� D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining leng�hs butted together,not Iapped.
Seai joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
� E. Do not remove reIease paper from tape until just before each lite is instalIed.
H Center glass Iitas in openings on setting blocks and press firmiy against tape by inserting
, dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 7 of 8
�
�
I. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. �
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING(WET)
A. Install continnous spacers between gIass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face �
ciearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until
sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in pasition to control depth of installed sealant
relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. �
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of seaIant to glass and channel surfaces. �
C. Taol exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install
pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to elinainate dirt and moisture pockets. �
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply witl�ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide �
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise imdicated.
3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING �
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaciung crossed
stceamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels,and clean surfaces. ,
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from conshvction
operations including weld splatter. If,despite such protection,contaminating substances do �
come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at �
frequent intervals during construction, but not iess than once a moath,for build-up of dirt,
scum,alkali deposits,or stains,and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken,chipped,cracked,abraded,or damaged in any way, �
including naturai causes,accidents and vanda.lism,during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior#o date scheduled �
for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended
by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 0880Q t
�
�
�
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 8 of 8 �
�
'
IGYPSUM DRYWALL
SECTION 09250
' PART 1 -GENERAL
' 1.1 SCOPE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
' 1. Insulation is specified in Division 7 Section 07210"Insulation".
' B. All Gypsum Drywall: on walls and the ceiling in the storage and equipment room,to the
extent shown on drawings.
C. Gypsum Board:Regular wallboazd fire-rated wallboard,water resistant wallboazd;backer
' boazd,
acoustical insulation.
' D. Work is to be one layer gypsum board,type and thickness as shown on drawings. Finishing
of joints and heads of fastening devices. Caulking as required by manufacture and
according to good practice.
' E. Anchors, adhesives, hangers, clips, furring channels, accessories, etc.,(unless specified
under other
sections) as required to adequately support and secure work in place, starting from
' conditions of building structure.
F. Insulation
' PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL: ALL MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WIT'H ANSI-A97.1.
' A. Manufacturer: Unless otherwise specified, provide all materials as the product of one
manufacture with installation, and erection in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Provide materials of U.S. Gypsum,National Gypsum or Gold Bond.
' B. Delivery and Storage: Materials to be delivered in original unopened containers and
bundles,with
' manufacturer's hallmark, stored to protect from the elements and damage.
2.2 GYPSUM MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
' A. Gypsum Board: Products of U.S.Gypsum,National Gypsum Company and Georgia
Pacific,5/8"thick,48"wide,unless atherwise noted. Lengths as required to minimize end
joints.
' B Fastenings: As recommended by manufacturer, lengths as required, use screw types "S"
screws.
Comply with requirements U.S. label service.
'
GYPSUM DRYWALL Page 1 of 3
'
'
'
'
C Adhesives: As recommended by Gypsum Board manufacturer, for adhesively applying
gypsum '
board to concrete block and insulation,for laminating in multi=layer and single layer at fire
rated construction.
D Beads and Trim:Exterior corner beads,Dur-A-Bead corner reinforcement;at all exteriar t
corners. Inside corners,to have Perf-A-Bead corner reinforcement. Where gypsum board
terminates provide#400 series metal trim.
E Tape System: All exposed joints and trim to be finished by using USG Perf-A-Tape joint '
system.
F Sealant: Sheetrock brand W/R sealant, apply to all cut edges and screw heads of water- '
resistant,
water resistant fire rated and exterior soffit gypsum board.
1. Caulkin�:Provide caulking as recommended by manufactured to achieve wall STC '
rating.
2.3 ADHESNES ,
1. Only adhesives which are recommended by the manufactured for use on the specific
substrate to ,
insure permanent bond.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATI(JN I
A. Wallboard: '
1. General: Hold gypsum board in firm contact with supports when installing. No
horizontal joints
permitted,eliminate small pieces. Do not use broken or damaged sheets. '
2. Joints: install so all joints occur over a support.Neatly fit all abutting joints and to
all obstructions. '
Do not force joints overly tight.
3. Fastening,General:Fasten gypsum board with adhesive and drywall screws. Apply
adhesive as '
recommended by manufacturer. Space screws not less than 3/8" from edges and
ends of wallboard. Stagger screws on adjoining edges or ends. While screws aze
being driven, hold wallboard in firm contact underlying support. Attach from '
central portion of wallboard toward ends and edges. Drive screws with an electric
screw gun equipped with adjustable screw depth control and Phillips bit. Set heads
of exposed screws to provide slight depression below surface of gypsum board. If
screw size and screw spacing as specified differs with manufacturer's ,
recommendations,verify with architect prior to application.
4. Metal corner bead: Sacurely install at all corners in single lengths where the length ,
of the corner
dces not exceed standard stock lengths. Apply at least two coats of compound over
beads,each coat feathered out onto panel face.
GYPSUM DRYWALL Page 2 of 3 1
,
�
IGYPSUM DRYWALL
SECTION 0925Q
� PART1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 SCOPE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Spec�cation Sections,apply to this Section.
��
1. Insulation is specified in Division 7 Section 07210"Insulation".
� B. Aii Gypsum Drywall: on walls and the ceiling in the storage and ec{uipment room,to the
extent shown on drawings.
C. Gypsum Board: Regular wallboard fire-rated wallboard,water resistant wallboard;backer
� board,
acoustical insulation.
� D. Work is to be one Iayer gypsum board,type and thickness as shawn on drawings. Finishing
of joints and heads ofr fastening devices. Caulking as required by manufacture and
according to good practice.
� E. Anchors, adhesives, hangers, clips, furring channeIs, accessories, etc.,(unless specified
under ofher
sections} as required to adequately support and secure work in place, starting from
� condi#ions of building structure.
F. Insulation
� PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL:ALL MA,TERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI-A97.1.
� A. Manufacturer: Unless otherwise specified, provide ail materials as the product of one
manufacture with installation, and erection in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Provide materials of U.S. Gypsum,National Gypsum or Gold Band.
� B. Delivery and Storage: Materials to be delivered in originai unopened containers and
bundles,with
, manufacturer's hallmark,stored to protect from the elements and damage.
2.2 GYPSUM MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
� A. Gypsum Board:Products of U.S.Gypsum,National Gypsnm Company and Georgia Pacific,
5/8"
thick,48°wide,un�less otherwise noted. Lengths as required to minimize end joints.
� B Fastenings: As recommended by manufacturer, leng�ths as required, use screw types"S"
screws.
Comply with requirements U.S.label service.
�
GYPSUM DRYWALL Page 1 of 3
�
�
�
�
C Adhesives: As recommended by Gypsum Boazd manufacturer, for adhesively applying
�5W11 �
board to concrete block and insulation,for laminating in multi=layer and single layer at fire
. rated construction.
D Beads and Trim: Exterior comer beads,Dur-A-Bead corner reinforcement;at all exterior �
corners. Inside corners,to have Perf-A-Bead comer reinforcemen� Where gypsum board
ter�ninates provide#400 series metal trim.
E Tape System:Al1 exposed joints and trim to be finished by using USG Perf-A-Tape joint ;�
system.
F Sealant: Sheetrock brand W/R sealant, apply to all cut edges and screw heads of water- �
resistant,
water resistant fire rated and exterior soffit gypsum boazd.
1. Caulking:Provide caulking as recommended by manufactured to achieve wall STC �
rating.
23 ADHESIVES �
1. Only adhesives which ace recoir►mended by the manufactured for use onthe specific
substrate to �
insure pernnanent bond.
PART 3: EXECiJTION
3.1 INSTALLATION �
A. Wallboard: �
1. General: Hold gypsum board in firm contact with supports when insta.11ing. No
horizontal joints
permitted,eliminate small pieces. Do not use broken or damaged sheets. �
2. Joints:install so all joints occur over a support.Neatly fit a11 abutting joints and to
all obstructions, ' �
Do not force joints overIy tigh�
3. Fastening,General:Fasten gypsum board with adhesive and drywall screws.Apply
adhesive as '
recommended by manufacturer. Space screws not less than 3/S" from edges and
ends of wallboard. Stagger screws on adjoining edges or ends. While screws are
being driven, hold wallboard in fism contact underlying support. Attach from �
central portion of wallboard toward ends and edges. Drive screws with an electric
screw gun equipped with adjustable screw depth control and Phillips bit. Set heads
of exposed screws to provide slight depression below surface of gypsum board. If
screw size and screw spacing as specified differs wi#h manufacturer's �
recommendations,verify with architect prior to application.
4. Meta1 corner bead:Securely instalI at all comers in single lengths where the length �
of the corner
does not exceed standard stock lengths. Apply at least two coats of corapound over
beads,each coat feathered out onto panel face.
GYPSUM DRYWALL Page 2 of 3 ,
�
�
, 5. Metal trim: Securely instatl at board termiriations finished with joint compound as
required.
� B. Finishing and accessories
I. General:Accomplish all taping and filling on finish layer to provide srr�ooth flush
� sztrfaces,
smoothly sa.nded so no joints,screws or ather depressions are visible after painting,
sand and otherwise fmish so no fiuther pregaration is necessary to the painter.
�� 2. Finish: See details for particular edge conditions. Treat all joints screw heads and
ather depressions in accordance with USG recommendations for PerF A-Tape joint
system. All otrtside corrters to have metal bead,taped in. AlI inside comers to have
� reinforcing. Ends of boazd where board terminates or abuts other materials to have
metal edge, taped in. Spot exposed fastener dimples on face layers with at least
three coats of joint compound,feathered and sanded smoot�.
� C. Workmanship
1. Conform to best practice and as recommended by the manufacturer to produce
� highest quality
work. Mechanics to be thoroughly traineci and skilled in the installation of this type
of work. Accomplish wozk when temperature in the building is between 50 to 74
� degrees F. Provide ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture. Provide protection
to all surfaces,which are covered before building is enclosed,from damage and the
elements. Guarantee of work under this secrion shall warrant against ridging and
beading of joints and popping of walIboard fastenings.
� D. Delivery and Cleanup
� 1. This subcontractor shatl be responsible for bringing into this project all materials
required by him
to complete his work.
� 2. At completion of this subcontractors work,he shall remove materials not installed
in this project
� END OF SECTION 09250
�
�
�
�
GYPSUM DRYWALL Page 3 of 3
'
�
�
ELECTRICAL WORK
� SECTION 160Q0
GENERAL PROVISIONS
�, 1. CONDITIONS .
The E1�ctrical Contractor and his subcontraactors shail be govemed by the Drawings, General
Conditions and Supplementary Cortditions(if any)of this Specification.
' 2. SCOPE OF WORK
Work shall include all labor,materials,equipment,superintendence and services rec�uired to construct
� and install,complete and operative,the electrical systems as shown on the drawings a.nd as specified.
3. CODES AND INSPECTTONS
� The completed electrical installation shall meet all requirements of the latest edition of the National
Elecfricai Code,appticable Natioaal Board of Fire Underwriter Bulletins and all State and LocaI
ordinauces and regulations as they may apply.
, Regular inspections of the electrical work shall be requested and paid for by this contractor as required
by any and all regulatory agencies.
� 4. PERMITS.AND LICENSES
Ail permits and licenses required for work under this contract shali be secured and paid for by t6is
contractor before work is started.
� S. MATERIAL AND W�RI{MANSHIP
All material and equipment furnished by this contractor shall be new and shall be listed by Undervvriters'
� Laboratories,Inc.,as conforming to its standards in every case where such a standard htas been
established.
� 6. UNDERGROUND
Do all trenching and bac�Cfilling required for electrical work. Coordinate this work with General
� 7. DRAWINGS AND CORRELATION OF WORK
1'he Drawings are dimensioned.Do not scale. Reference sha.il be cnade to the architectural and stxucturai
plans for exact building dimensions,wall and partition locations,furred spa.ces,etc.
� 7.1 Neahiess,conceaiment of work and schedule maintenance are prime consideration,equipment and
systems are represented diagrammatic�liy and generally to scale and shall be installed substantially as
� shown.
7.2 Verify the location of all outlets with Owner and Architect,and if interference develops or if
� discrepancies occur between the electrical and other drawings,make rainor changes in the work to
eluninate such discrepancies with no chance in contract cost.
7.3 Particular attention shall be paid to door swings,casework and other fixed fumiture,piping,
� radiation,ductwork and structural steel. No additional campensation will be allowed for the moving of
misplaced items.
' 7.4 When connecting to equipment fiunished by others,obtain exact loca#ions of connecnons before
roughing in.
�
ELECTRICAL WORK Page 1 of 3
�
8. GUARANT'EE �
8.1 The Contractor herehy guarantees all work,materials,equipment, etc.,specified herein,indicated on
the drawings,or approveci and/oc incorporated into the work for a period equivalent to one(1)year of �
actual operation and norcnal use after the date of acceptance or benefcial occupancy of the premises by
the Owner,wlzich ever occurs fust.
8.2 The Contractor agrees to maice aIl necessary repairs to or replace any item of material or equipment �
or part thereof which as proven defective(not due to misuse or improper care)within the stated period,
free from any cost of abrogate other specified guarantees or the usual guarantees against the work, �
materials,or items of equipment that were defectiva when supplied or improperly cared for or protected
during the period of construction.
SPECYAL PROVISIONS: ��
TEMPORARY LIGHTIl�TG AND PO WER �
1.The Electrical Contcactor sha11 fumish and instail temporary service and temporary lighting
adequate for normal operations of all trades.
2.The Electrical Contractor shatl insure that power to the existing residence is not interrupted �
during the entire construction period.
UTILITY COMPANY CHARGES �
1.All utility company installation charges(including temporary service charges)to be paid by
Owner.
1NIRE �
I Non-meta.ilic wiring and aluminum wire may be used where permitted by code except that the
only aluminum wire that may be used on circuits fused at less than 30 AMPS is copper clad. �
DEVICES
1.A11 devices to be residential grade,white color,mounted at heights common to residential• �
work.
EQUIPMENT WIltING �
i. Each uni#to have ground fault protection in bathroom an�d outdoors per code. Ground
fault interrupter receptacle to be fumished by Electrical Contractor.
2. Verify with Architect any requirements for CO and Smoke Detectors.These items shall `
be furnished by Electrical Contractor upon the approval of the architec�
3. Wire for fans,fiunace and other devices shown on the drawings or requestredby the �
Owner (All furnished by Owner).
BASIC METHODS ArTD MATERIALS . �
1. PANELBOARDS
Existing Panelboard shall used. �
2. GROUNDING
The service neutral and service equipment shall be connected to the water main with copper wire. �
3. WIRING DEVICES
1.Ail wiring devices shall be intermediate gade and in generai,flush mounted. �
ELECTRICAL WORK Page 2 of 3
�
, 2.Devi alI
ces sh be furn�shed by this contractor and approved by the Architect
, 3. Wall Ptates shall be of 1 -piece construction,white plastic,furnished by this contractor and
approved by Owner.
� 4. TELEPHONE
This Contractor shall coordinate telephone rough-in witl2 electrical work.
' S. MECHANICAL SUPPORT
1 Exhaust fans wili be provided by Owner and set by others.This contractor shall connect per
plan.
� . 2.Heating system is hot water;thermosta.ts wili be pirovided by others;this contractor sha11
provide wiring and thermostat installation.
� 3.Mechanical room support for the following:
� a. See Pool Equipment
DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS
All disconnect switches and motor starters,will be furnished by the electrical contractor unless
� specifically mentioned otherwise.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
� GENERAL
This Contractor shali instal!a lighting fixture for each lighting outlet, in accordance with the fixtute
� schedule. Fixtures will be supplied by Owner.
Lamps shall be furaished and installed by this Contractor. They shall be of General Electric,
� Westinghouse,Champion or Sylvania manufacture. Incandescent lamps shaIl be 130 volt.
Hanging type fi�ctures sha11 be hung so that the bottora is SO%of the ceiling height abave the floor uniess
' otherwise noted.
Switches shall be as noted on the drawings.
' SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
� A heating unit is to be mounted in Cabana area.Install as per manufactures instructions and locate as per
Architects drawings.This equipment may involve special wiring.
' DISTRIBUTION
CURRENT CHARACTERLSTICS
1.Addition will be sugplied by W/120/240 volt single phase service. Power is supplied by Excel
� Energy Company.
SERVICE AND METERiNG
, l.Existing Meter shall be used.
2.Addition has 200 AMP service which shall be used for addition.
� END OF SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL WORK Page 3 of 3
��
i �
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
� GENERAL CONDITIONS
_ Table Of Contents
� 1. SCOPE .. . . . . . . . ..... .. .. ....... . . . ... ... ... . . ... ....... ... ... .. .. ..... . . ....... . . . . ... . .... .. . .
� 1 . ..... ... ...... ... .. ... . . . ...• ••--. ...... . . .... ......... ........ . . ... .... .. .. ..
2. DEFINITIONS. 1
3. CONTRACTOR DUTIES AND RESPONSIBII.,ITIES ... . ......... ... . .......... ............... ...... 2
� 4. EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS :: : : : : :::::::: :::::::: : :::::::: ::: : :: 2
S. SUBSTITUTIONS 3
6. STANDARDS AND TESTS ..... .. . ...... . . .... ..... ....... ..... . ....... . ........ . . ... .... ... . .. 3
7. PROGRESS SCHEDULE . ........ . .. .... ...... . . .. . ...... . .. ... . .......... ...... . . ....... .... .. 4
� 8. DELAYS . . ... . ..... ... ...... . . . .. .. . . . . .... . ... . ....... . ... . . ...... .......... . ....... . ... .... 5
9. DISPUTES . 5
i0. SUR'VEYS,PERMiTS,LAWS AND REGiJI.,ATIONS .... ....... . .... . .... . . . . ..... ... . . . . . .... ... . ... 5
� 11. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS ...........- •. ........ . ...... . . . '. .. . . . .. . . . . ....... . . ....... ... ... 6
12. PROT'�CTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY;EXIS'TING UTFLITIES 6
I3. SAFE'I'Y -----•.. ... ............ .. .... . . . . ........ . ........ ... . ... .... . ........ . . .. .... .. .. .. 6
14. SUPERVISION AND EMPLOYEES ........ . . .. . .... . . ...... . . . .. . ... . . . . . .... ... ......... . ... .. 7
� 1S. REPORTS AND MEETINGS . ... .. . . ....... . ... . ..... . ...... . . ... . . . . .. . .. . . . ...... . . ..... . ... .. 9
16. SUBMITTALS 9
17. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS . ....... . . . ... ..... . ....... .... . . . . . .. . . . . ....... . .. .... . . . . .. 11
� 18. CLEAN-UP . .. ... . . . ...... . ..... . . ........ ... . .... . ....... . ... . . . . ..... . . . ....... . . . . ... ... .. lI
I9. CHANGE OF CONTRACT 11
20. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST/EXTENSIONS OF TIME ... . ...... . . ... . . . . . .... . . . ...... . . . . ... ... . .. 12
21. CORRECTION OF WORK... ...... .. ...... . . . . . . ..... . ............ . . . .... . . ....... . . . . .... ... . . 13
� 22. OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK/STOP WORK.. ... ...... .............. . ....... ... ........ . ...... . 13
23. CONTRACT TERMINATION . 13
24. LIENS ....... ....... . ...... . .... . ....... . . . . . ..... . .......... . .. . . ....... .. .... . . . .. ... ... .. 14
� 25. ASSIGNMENT AND THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. . . .. ... ........... . ........ . ..... . . .... . . . .... . 15
26. iNSPECTION AND USE OF PREMISES 15
27. INDEMNIFICATION ... ...... . ...... . . . ......... . ...... ............ ........ . . . . ....... . . ...... 15
� 28. INSURANCE..... .. ... . . .... . ......... ..... . ... . ..... . . . ......... . . ........ ... .. . . . ... . ..... . i6
29. SEPARATE CONTRACTS AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS i8
30. SUBCONTRACTORS... ...... ....... . . . . .. .. .... .. .... .. . . ..... . .. . ........ ... ... . . . . .... .... . 19
31. RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS .. . ........... ........ . . . . .. .. ... . ...... 19
� 32. LABOR AND MATERIALS .... . .. ....... . . .... ..... ........ . . . .. ... .. . . . . ...... . ......... . .... . 20
33. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS 20
34. CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ......... . . . .. . ..... .... .. . . . .. . . ..... ...... . .......... . . .... . . . 21
, 35. PAYMENTS V1�THIIELD ...... .. .......... .. .. . ... .... . ... . . . . . ..... . . . . ... . . . . . ....... . ... .. . 21
36. CONTRACT SUM,DISBURSEMENTS AND PAI'MENTS 22
37. COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT ...... . . .. . .... .. .......... ... ....... . ..... .. ....... ... . . . 22
38. WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES ........ .. .. . . .. . ......... ... ......... . .... .. ....... . . ... ... 23
� 39. TAXES .. ... .... .. .. ...... . ...... . ...... .. ... . .. ... . ...... ... ... ....... . . .... . ........ ..... . 23
40. RIGHTS AND REMEDIES. 23
41. PBRFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR MA'TERIAL PAYMENT BOND . ... ........ ..... . ........ ... ... 24
� 42. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS.... .. .... .. ................ ....... . .... .. . ....... ...... 24
43. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 24
44. OWNER FURNISHED MATERIAL ... . . ... .. .... .. ... .......... .. . ....... . . ..... . ....... ...... 24
45. MISCELLANEOUS . .... ..... . ..... . ........ .... .. . ............ . . . . ...... ....... ........ ...... 24
� i
�
�
Construc�ion Contract �
GENERAL CONDITION$
i. scoP� �
This section defines the General Conditions governing the perfamance of the Construaion Condact
2. DEFINI'I'IONS �
A. ADDENDA:Any written or graphic instrumerst issued prior to the opening of bids which darifies,coRects,or changes nny part ofthe bidding
documents or the Contract Documents.
B. GHANGE DIRECTIVE: A written order to procced wiffi Work executed and issued by the Authorized Representative of the Qwner. �
C. CHANGE QF CONT'RACT: A written order issued after the effective daie of the Conuact by the Authorized Representative of the Own�
which authorizes an addition,detetion or revision in the Work and which may include an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contraci Time. �
A. CONTRACT:That certain doaunent,end all ofits schedules,exhibits and subsequent artiendmertts,which defines the scope ofihe ConFractor's
Work and specifies the Contract Sum.
E. CON'IRACT DOCUMEN7'S: The Contract Documents are as defined in the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor. The Contract �
Documents embody the entire and integrated agreement between the parties herew and supecsede all prior communications,negotiations,representations or
ageements,cither written or oral.
F. CONTRACTOR: The person or organization identified as such in the Contract thaE is contracted by the Owner to complete all or a certain �
poRion of the Work required for the conshvction and completion of the Projeck
G. T)AY: Unless otherwise specified,the words"day"or"days"shall mean calendar day or calendar days.
H. DRAWIIdGS_The drawings which show the cbaracter,nature and scope ofthe Work to be performed and which are refemed to in the Contraet �
Documents.
I. MODIFICATION: A"modification"is(1)a writien amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change of Contract issued �
pursuant to Article 19 hereof,(3)any written interpretation,clarification or amplification issued by the Owner pursuant to the terms hereof which alters the Contract
Sum or change the Contract Time,or(4)a wriuen order issued by the Owner pursuant to Article 19 hereof.
J. NOTICE TO PROCEED:A written notice given by thc Owner to the Coatractor fixing the date on which the Conkact Time will commence �
to run and on which Contractor shall start W perform Contractots obligations under the Conhsct Documents.
K. PRODUCT DATA: Dlustrations,standard schedules,perforsnance charts,instruc6ons,brochures,diagrams or other infonnation fumished
by the Conuactor to illustrate a materiai,product or system for some portion of the Work. ,
L. PROJECT: 7he total conswction of which the Work performed urid�the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.
M. SAMPLES:Physical examples fumished by the Contractorwhich illustrate materials,equipmerrcaworkmanship and,ifin conformance with
the Contract Documents,establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. �
N. SHOP DRAWINGS: Drawings,diagrams,illustratioas,schedules or other data which are specifically prepared by or for the Contractor W
illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,brochures,stendard schedules,performance charts,specifications, instructions,diagrams.and other
information preparod by a supplier and submitted by ContracWr to i1lusVate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. �
O. SPECIALPROVISIONS:ThatpartofiheContractDoc►�meatswhichamendsorsupplemenfstheseGeneralConditionsandothermquirements
of the Conlract Documents.
P. SPECIEICATIONS: Those portions of the Con�act Docuncents consisting of written technical descriptions, provisions or reyuirements '
pertaining to the matcrials and workmm�ship applicable to the Work to be perfotmed under the Contract Documents,including,but nat limited to,the quantities or
quality of materials,equipment,construction systems or applications.
Q. SUBCON'I'RACCOR:ThosehavingadirectcontractwiththeContractor{oranywholly-ownedoraffiliatedenNtythereo�toperformaportion �
of the Work or providc materials for the Project
R. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLEI�ON: The completion of the Work to the point that the Owncr could open the Project to the general public for
business,that is,that it is suitable for the functions for which it was intended in a commeroially satisfactory manner. �
S. SUB-SIiBCONTRACTOR Any person other than a Contractor or a Subcontractor(or any wholly�wned or affiliated entity thereo�who
supplies labor or materials to the Project for work wiUtin the Contractor's Scope of Work regardless of how remote that person's contract is from t6e Owner.
T. SUPPLIER: Any party supplying,by sale or lease,diroctly or indirectly,any materials or cbnstruction equipment for the Coniractor's Wodc �
and includes distributors,materialmen,vendors and menufacturcrs.
U. WORK: All tabor,mataials(except mat�ials spceified or noted to be fumished by the Owner),equipment,supplies,permits,licenses, �
insurance and services necessary for and reasanabty incidental W the completion ofthe Contractor's obligatioas heneunder in socordance with the Conuact Documents.
c�,�,.�a 00810-1 �
1
, Construction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
� 3. CONTRACTOT2 bUTIES AND RESPONSiBILITIES
A The Contractor recognizes the relationship oftrust and confidence established between the Owner and ihe ConEractor by this Contract. The
� ConFractor shall furnish the Owner with its best skill and judgment and fvtty cooperate with the Owner in fonvazding the best irtterests of the Owner. Al]the Work
is to be done in the best manner by persons skilled in the iype of Work to be performed.
B. The Contractor shall supervise a�d direct its portion of the Work using its best skill and akention. The Contracror shali be solely responsible
for all consErUction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures,arid for coordinating all portions of the Work under its Contract in accordance with
' Paragraph 29 hereof.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for ihe acts and omissions of its employees,Subcontractors and their agents and emptoyees,
and other persons perfortning any of the Work u�der a contract with the Contractor.
� D. The Contractor shall not be relieved from its obligations to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities
or daties of the Owner or the Owner's Represeetative in the administration of this Contract,or by inspections,tests,acceptances,or approvals required or performed
by persons other than the Coniractor.
� 4 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract shall be signed and dated in duplicate by the Owner and the Contractor.
� B. The Drawings and the Specifications aze complementary and supplementary,and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required
by all.Portions ofthe Work which can be 6est illustrated by the Drawings may not be included in the Specifications anct portions best described by the Specifications
may not be depicted on the Drawings.
� C. The intent of the Conti-act Documents is to include a11 items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. However,it is
understood that while not every detail ofthe Work is shown on the Drawings or described in the Specifications,the Work includes items reasonably inferabte from
the Contract Documents. Work noi covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless such work is consistent therewith and is reasonabty inferable
therefrom.Ifan item or system is either shown oc specif ed,all material and equipment normally fumished with such items or systems and needed to make a complete
� operating installation shall be provided whelher mentioned or not,omitting only such parts�are specifically excepted. The Owner shall not be held responsible
for ihe absence of any detail that the Contractor may require for any construction which may be found necessary as ti►e Work progresses. Words and ab6reviaEions
which have wel]-knovm technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract T)ocuments in accordance with such recognized meanings.
� D. The sections ofthe Specifications are arranged for convenience and shall not wntrol the ConU-actor in dividing
the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed. The Contractor may su6contract the Work in such divisions as it sees fit;
however,Contractor is responsible for fumishing and coordinating all Work required by the Contract Documents regardless ofthe divisions Contractor may make
in the Work.
� E. The General Conditions and Special Provisions are a part of each and every section of the Specifications.
F. Sy executing the Contract,the Contractor represents that it has visited the site,familiarized itselfwith the local conditions which could affect
the prosecution or completion of the Work,and that it has correlated its observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner makes no
� representations or warranties as io subsurface or latent physical conditions to be encoantered in constructing the Project and disclaims t4e accuracy or reliabifity of
any subsurface information which may be provided Eo the Contractor. The Contraetor shall be responsible for conducting such site investigation as is necessary to
determine the nature and characier of all subsurface or latent physical conditions.The Contractor assumes all risks and expressly waives any claim against the Owner
for subsurface or latent physicaE conditions at the site which may differ from those indicated in the Contract Documenis or indicated in any subsurface information
� or report furnished to the Contractor,unless the physical conditions at the site are unknown,could not have been known with a reasonable investigatioq and differ
materially from those ordinarily encountered or from those whicE►are geneeally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the ConVact
DOauments.
� G. Before submitting its bid to the Owner,and continuously thereafter,the Contractor shall study and compa�the Contract Bocuments and shall
immediately report to the Owner's Representative any error,om ission,ambiguity,discrepancy,conflict or variance,including any requirementwhich may be contrary
to any Iaw,code,ordinance,rule,regulation,or order applicable to the performance of the Work. Acceptance of this Contract is a certification by the Contractor
that the Coatract Documents appear complete and correet. Contractor shal[not be liable to the Owner for any damage resulting from any such error,omission,
ambiguity,discrepancy,conflict or variance in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had aetual knowledge thereofor should have reasonably Imown thereof
� and did not norify the Owner promptly. Any such error,omission,ambiguity,discrepancy,conflict or variance shall be resolved by ihe Owner's Representative and
shall be forsvarded to the Contractor via awritten clarification. Contractor shall be liable for any damages which result should it proceed before receipt of the Owner's
written clarification and notice to proceed with any modification.
� H. If any portion of the Contract Documents conflict with any other portion,the various documents compromising the Contract Documents sha11
govem in the following order of precedence: The ConUact(including Exhibits thereto);1Vlodifications;Addenda;any Specia[Conditions;the Special Provisions;
the General Conditions;the Specif cations take precedence over Drawings for the specific type or quality of materials or the quality of instsl3ation;the Drawings
take precedence over the Specifications with regard ro qvantities,locations or detail of installation;as between schedules and information given on Drawings,the
� schedules shail take precedence;as between large-scale Drawings and sma[I-scale Drawings,the larger scale shaEl take precedence.Anysnch conflict or inconsistency
shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative,whose decision thereon shall be binding and conctusive.
I. If necessary,the Owner's Representative will fumish additional instructions to clarify or amplify the Drawings and the Specifications. Such
� instructions will not constitute an extra or result in the issuance of a Change of Contract(as defined in Paragraph 19)unless such alter the Contract Sum or change
the Contract Time.
� Constrct.cnd Od810-2
2
Construction Contract i
GENERAL CONDITIONS
5. SUBSTITVCIONS �
A. The Contractor may offer a substitudon of a specified or indicated item if it presents complete infonnation conceming the substidrtion and
the benefits thereof to fhc Owner by reason of lower cost or improved performance,or both,over the specified or indicated item. However,such submission of a ,
proposed substitution does not relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract. In proposing a substitution,the Contractor
wazrants that the substitution is,at a minimum,equivalent in performance to the spccified or indicated item. A substitution shall not be effective unless accepted
in writing by the Owner. The Owner will accept a proposed substitution only if such acceptance will benefit the Owner.
B. Any addidonal cost�and changes to ttie Work(including,but not limited to the work ofother conUa�tors and additionai design costs which '
may be affected thereby)which may result from the proposed subs�tudon shall be disclosed at the time the substitution is proposed to the Owner. Changes to the
Work and any additional costs therefrom which are not disclosed in advance W the Owner shall be the sole responsibility ofihe Contractor and shalt not increase
the Contraci Sum.
C. The Contracto�'s substitution proposals shalt ireclude written descripHons of the items to be substituted (including drawings and/or �
specifications)and referencod information of tt►e proposed substitution. The Owne�'s Representative's signature on this proposal is required for acceptance. Shop
Drawings will not be considered a substitvtion proposal pws�ant to this Paragaph.Verbal approvals or approvod shop drawings will not be considered as acceptance
of proposed substitutions. �
D. The Owner's RepresentaGve alone may approve a pmposed substitution on behalf of the Owner;the Owner's consultants lack the authority
to approve proposed substitudons and opinions elicited from the Owner's consultants by ffie ContracWr may not be relied upon by the Contractor ss constituting the
Owner's express or implied approval of a proposed substitution. The Owne�s Reprosentative reserves the right to reject any unapproved substitution without �
explanation or formality,and to require the replacem�t of an unapproved subsdtudon with the speci6ed and/or indicated items at no expense to the Owner,and
to require compensation to the Owner for loss of use Hme during repiacement
6. S'fANDARDS AND TES'C5
A Referonce Suecifications or Standards ,
1) Various standards and specifications are incorporated by reference in the technical section of the Specifications. In all such
instances,tha refcrcnce shall mean the latest edition,including the amendment or revision in eflect as of the date of the Contract unless a specific issue �
is othenvise ideatified. Tfreferenced specifications or standards contain requirements at variance with the 9ndividual sections of the SpeciScations,the
more sdringent provision shall govem. Thc Contractor shatl have the responsibility of ineking any speci£ed standard available at the Project Site,
including,but not iimited to,any sample rcquired by the Owner,as set forth in the Special Provisions.
B. Tests �
1) The Owner has the right to test and/or inspect any mabeerial or equipment at any state of development or fabrication,whether or not
speci6ed,including,but not Iimited to ffie supplier's plant or mili. Such inspection will not releace the Supplier or the Contractor from any responsibility
or liability with respect to such material or equipment Any tests and/or inspections perfonned on bchalf of the Owner(other than those tests refersed �
to in Subparagrsph(2)below}will be paid for by the Owner. Any nacessary retesting or re-inspection required due to the failure of an inidal test and/or
inspection will be performed on behalf of the Owncr at the Contractor's expense. Work concealed befo�e such tests are perfonned or before approval is
given shal!be exposed,tested and restored at ihe Conhacto�s expense.
2) Witnessed performance tests shall occur when required by governing suthorities or when required by the Contract Documents. �
'Fhe Contractor shali notify the Owner's Representative at least thrce(3)business days in advanc:e of the date the equipment will be ready for the fmal
shop or field inspec6on or for performence tests. These tests,and any required retests,s6a11 be perfocmed at the ContracWr's expense. The Contractor
shali provide the Owner with all certificates and approvals. �
3) Norivithstanding the foregoing,the Owner may reqoire the Contractor to expose concealed Work for the purposc of testing and/or
inspection. If the Work so exposed fails to mcet the Contract requiranenis,the Contractor sha11 be responsible for alt costs associated with exposure,
testing and/or inspection,replacement,and recons�cction or resmration. lf the Work so exposed mcets the Contract requiremenis,the Uwner shall be ,
responsble for all such costs.
7. PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Unless othecwise required,scheduling under this Contract shall be accomplished using she CridcaI Path Method("CPM"). �
B. Within fifteen(15)days from the earlier ofthe e�Ctive date of the Contrgct or the Start Bate specif�ed by the Owner in the Notice To Proceed
("Start Date"),che Contractor shatt fumish W the Owner,for the Owner's comment and acceptancc,a time-scale preliminary conswction schedule("Preliminary
ConsWction Schedule"). This Preliminary Conshucdon Schedule shall be in a format acc;eptable to the Owner and will be in sufficient detail so as to depict the �
Project Comple6on Date,the completion of interim milestones,if any,and the scheduled completion time for all major activities from the Conhact Start Date to the
Pmject Completion Date,inclvding the Ownefs requirements for instellation of fumiture,fumishings,6xhues,equipment and other items provided by the Owner.
C. Within thiriy(30)days after it fumishes to the Own�its Preliminary Conshvction Schedu[e,the Contractor shall fumish to the Owner,for �
the Ownefs comment and acceptance,a detailed CPM Construcxion Progress Schedule in a format acceptable to the Ownec This Construction Progress Schedulo
shall idec�tify the Project and,at a minimum,contain a detailed graphic represa�tation of all activities that could affcetthe progess ofthe Contractor's Work,inctuding
the Ownet's requ'vements for installation of furnihue,l'umishings,fixtures,equipment and other items provided by the Owner.In his Construction Progress Schedule,
the Contractar shall also depict s schedule for the pceparation,submittal and review of all Shop Drswings,samptes and other submissions;the shop fabrication, �
delivery,storage,end erection or installation of equipment and materials;and the testing and inspection oFequipment and materials.
c�,�.�a U08]0-3 �
3
� Construction Contract
GENEF�L CONDITIONS
� D. Upon acceptance by the Owner,the Construction Progress Schedule shall become a Contract Document and any material revision thereofwill
become effective only upon the subsequent written consent of the Owner.
� E. Beginning at the Start Date specified by the Owner in the Notice To Proceed,and at each weekly Progress Meeting held pursuant to Paragraph
15{C)hereunder,Contractor shall subm'st to the O�vner's Representative a hvo-week Iook-ahead schedule which will detail the Work which the Contractor plans to
perform during the following two weeks. The two-week schedules shall be in substantial conformance with the Construction Progress Schedule. Contractor shall
submit to the Owner's Representative with any two-week schedule at variance with the Construction Progress Schedule a detailed narrative which fully describes
the reason for the variance and any anticipated impact on the Project Completion Date and/or the complerion of interim milestones,if any.
, F. At dates established by the Owner,Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative an updated Construction Progress Schedule.
Contractor's submission shall,at a minimwn unless otherwise directed by the O�mer's Representative,include a narcative setting forth any revisions and a description
of any logic contained in the Construction Progress Schedule which has been changed by the update,any activiGes in ihe Construction Progress Schedule which have
� been resequenced in the update,and any activities which have been added in the update. Owner must consent in writing to any revision described herein before the
Construction Progress Schedule shall be revised. Notwithstanding the foregoing,the Project Completion Date,and the completion dates of interim milestones(if
any)shall be revised only by the issuance of a Change of Coniract. Contractor shall be required to submiE to the Owner a revised or updated CPM chart which
inciudes a�aphic representation of the revision or update at the sole discrefion of the Owner.
� G. The Contractor agrees to comply with the Construction Progress Schedule,as defined herein,or any revision thareof to which the Ownee
consents and agrees that the Work shall be prosecuted regularly,diligently and without interruption,within the time specifsed. The Contractor shaff not allow
reasonably foreseeable weather conditions to impede the progess of ine woric and snaii provide and maintain aii temporary weatner proteciion,pamping iaciii�ies
� and snow,ice,mud or water removal services necessary to maintain the progress of the Work.
H. Should the Contractor fail to comply with the Construction Progress Schedule or,in the Owner's opinion,otherwise fail,refuse or neglect to
suppiy a sufficient amount Of labor,material or supervisi0n in the prosecution of the Work,the Owner shall have the right to(1)direct the Contractor,at the
Contracto�'s expense,to fumish such additionai labor and/ormaterial as may,in the Ownec's opinion,be required to comply with the Construction Progress Schedule
� or otherwise diligently prosecute the Work,(2)fumish,in accordance with Paragraph 22 hereof,such additiona3labor and/or materials as may be required to comply
with said scheduie,(3)wiihhold pay►nents pursuant to Paragraph 35 hereof,and(4)terminate the Contract in accordance with Paragraph 23(A)hereof. 7'he Owner
may exercise any of the foregoing remedies,none to the exclusion of the others. Any costs incurred 6y the Owner pursuant to the exercise of any righu under this
Paragraph shall be bome by the Contractor and shall not increase the Contract Sum.
' I. Notwithstanding Subparagraph H above,should the Contractor fail to complete the Work in accordance with the completion date specified
in the Construction Progress Schedule,as revised with fhe Owner's approvai,tiie ConVactor shal!pay to the Owner as fixed liyuidated damages#he sum as set forth
in the Special Pmvisions. The Contractor shall remain liable ro the Owner for ail actual damages sustained by the Owner subsequent to Substantial Completion until
� all the Work required by the Contract Documents is complete and the Work is accepted by the Osvner.
8. DELAYS
A. If the Contractor is delayed or hindered at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or by any contractor
� empEoyed by the Owner,or by changes ord'ered in the scope ofthe Work,or by fire,adverse�veather con8itions not reasonabfy andcipated,or any other causes beyond
the control of the Contractor,then the duration set forth in the Conslruction Progress Schedule shall be extended as agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor.
However,to the fullest ex[ent permitted by law,and notwithstanding any other provision in ihe COntract Documents,ilte Owner,its agents and employees shall not
be held responsible for any loss or damage,whether direct or indirect,sustained by the Contractor,or additional costs incurred bythe Conlractor,through delay caused
� by the Owner or iu agenu and employees,or any other contractor or subcon�actoy or by abnormal weather conditions,or by any other cause,and the Contractor
agees not to make,and hereby waives,any claim for damages,and agrees chat the sole right and remedy therefor shall be an extension of time.
B. Wi[hin seven(7}days from the commencement of a delay,Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative,in writing,a notice of the
� delay. Such notice of delay shalf,at a minimum,describe the nature and cause of the delay and provide a pretiminary estimate of the impact of said delay on the
Construction Progress Schedu[e. The Con�actor's failure to give such notice to the Owner shall depriva the Contractor of his right to claim an extension of time.
In the case of a continuing cause ofdelay,only one claim shall he necessary. The giving of such notice shall not of itself establish the validiry of the cause of delay
or of ihe extension ofthe time for completion. Submission of reports and/or updates required by Paragraphs 7(E}and 7(�above,or by Paragraph 15(D),shall not
� constitute such noiice.
C. W ithin twenty(20)days from the submittal to the Owner of the notice of delay detailed in Paragraph 8(B)aUove,Contractor shall submit[o
the Owner's Representative a claim for an extension of time which shall include a11 documentation supporting the claim. Such submittal shall include a detailed
description ofall changes in activity dwations,logic,sequence,or otherwise in the Construction Progress Schedule. The filing of such a claim for an extension of
� tittte shall not of itself establish the validity of the cause of delay or of ihe e�ension of time for wmpletion. Submission of construCtion reports and/or updates
required by Paragraphs 7{E)and 7(F)above,or by Paragraph 15(D),shall not wnstitute such a claim.
D. No delay,interference,hindrance,or disruption,from whatever source or cause,in the progress of lhe Contractor's Work shall be a basis for
� an e�ctension of time unless the delay,interference,hindrance,or disruption is without the fault and not the responsibility of the Contractor and direcUy affects the
overall compietion of the Work,as ref�ected in the Contractor`s updated and accepted ConsWction Progress Schedule. No delay,interference,hindrance,or
disruption,from whatever source or cause,in the progess of Contractor's Work shall be a basis for an extension of time for an interim milestone date,if any,unless
the delay,interference,hindrance,or disruption is without the fault and not the responsibility of the Contractor and direcdy affects the overall completion of such
interim milestone,as reflected in the Contractor's updated and accepted Construction Progress Schedule.7'he Contractor expressly agrees that the Owner shall receive
�' the benefit of any float,and delays to construction activities which do not affect the overall completion of the Work shali not entiUe ihe Coniractor to an eactension
of ihe coniract perfonnance time.
� 9. DISPIJTES
ca��.�a OQ810-4
� 4
Construction Contract �
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The presence of disputes or controversies between the Contractor and any other party,including the Owner,over any matter whatsoever,or legal �
proceedings arising&om such disputes or controversies,shall not reIieve lhe Contractor of his ob{igation to perform his Work properly and timely and to comply
with all of the terms and conditions of ffie ContracG
10. SURVEYS,PERMTI'S,LAWS AND REGULATIONS �
A The Owner will fi�mish benchmarks and property markers. The Conuactor shalt be reqaired to maintain these Owner-fiunished benchmarks
and property markers and to perl'orm aIl layout work for the Project working therofrom
B. 4) Unless othenvise indicated in the instr�ctions m Bidders or Schedute A,the Owner will obtain the building permit,which permit ,
shall be,to the extent permitted by applicable laws,assigiable to another contractor designated by the Owner,at the Ownets option,without the consent
of the issuing en6ty.
5) The Contractor shali pay ali plan check fees,water,sewer,gas,electrical,telephone and cable TV hookup fces. Ott�er inspection �
fces,required permits,licenses,approvals,certificates and auffiorizations necessary to the prosecution and completion of the Work will be obtained and
paid for by the Contractor,unless the Contractor is otherwise instructod by the Owner.
i2. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS �
The Coniractor shall pay a11 royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend afl suits or claims for in&ingement of any patent rights and shall savc
the Owner harniless fivm loss on account thereof except that the Owner sball be responsible for all such losses when a particular design,pmcess or the product of
a particular manufactuner or manufacturers is speci£ed,bvt if the Contractor has reason ta believe that the design,process or product specified is an infringement �
of a patent,he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Owne�s Represa►tative.
13. PROTECI'ION OF WORKANA PROPERTY;EXISTING i3TILITIES
A. The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all Work from damage due to any cause,including inclement weather,and �
shall protect a!1 properiy of the Owner from damage or loss. The Contractor shall adeqaately protect property of adjacent land owners.
B. The Contractor shall protect and secure the Project against loss by theft or otherwise. ,
C. The obligations of this Paragraph l2 shall apply,regardless of whether the Ovme�"s properly in the Contractor's possession was purchased by
the Owner or the Contractor.
D. Whenever the Work wiU result in an interruption of any utility service to any existing facility,the Contractor shall submit a written request �
at least fourteen(14)days prior to the anticipated interruption. No services may be intertupted without the prior acceptance of the Owner's Representative.
14. SAFETY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with all applicabla codes,ordinances,rules,and regalaiions,including federal and local `
OSHA regulations,involving safety on the Project. The Contractor shall initiate,maintain and supervise all safety prograzns in connection with his employces on
the Project and all other persons who may be affected thereby and shall g'sve all notices and comply with alt of the applicable iaws,ordinances,ruies,and regulations
of any public authority bearing on the safety ofpersons or properry or thea protection from damage,injury or loss on,about or adjacent to the premises;where the �
Work is being performed. The Conhactor shall erect and propedy maintain at all 6mes,as required by the conditions and progress of the Work,all reasonable
safeguazds for tfte safety and protedion of wodanen and the public and shall post danger signs waming against ha�rds. The Contractor shall ensure that each of
his worlQn�on the Pro,ject Site shall wear a"hard ha1"for his own protection. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization on the Work,
whose dvty sha(l be the preven6on of accidents. The name and position of any pecson so designated shall be reported in writing to the Qwner's Representative by �
the Contractor.
B. In an eme�gency affecting the safety of tife or of the Wor1c or of adjoining properry,the Conuactor is hereby permitted to act at his discretion
to prevent such threatened loss or injury,and he shall so act without appeal,if so authorized or instructed.My costs incuned by the Conhactor because of emergency
work shall be determined by agreement and confirmed by a Change of Contract. �
C. When the use of ha7ardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care
and shall cany on such activities under the supervision of properly quali6ed personnel and in compliance with all applicable laws,rules,regulations and ordinances.
Explosives of any description shall not be stored on the Project Site. If the Contractor wishes to use explosives of aciy description he shatl first provide written noHce �
to the Owne�s Representative and obtain the approval of all appropriate authorities having jurisdiction over the use of such explosives.
D. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to e.ndanger its safety.
E. The Coniractor shaII be responsible for providing fire extinguishers and fire watc6 for periods d�uiog which his personnel may be engaged �
in activities constituting a fire ha�rd,or as otherwise required by law. Prior to engaging in such activities,the Contractor shall assuro himself that all flammable
materials have been cleared from the affected area
F. In case of aQ accident involving injury to any of the Conhacta's employces(including any employee ofanyone working under the Contractor), �
the Contractor shall notify the Owna's Representative within one(1)hour and shall fite a valid accident report within twenty-four(24)hours after such accident
The Contrador shal!also file such reports as are required by his insurance caRier and such other reports as goveming civil authorities might require.
15. SYJPERVISION AND EMPLOYEES '
�.� oas�as
s �
� Construction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
� A The Contractor shall,prior to commeacement ofthe Work,submit to the Owner's Represeatative,for his acceptance,the name and experience
resume ofthe proposed Project Manager and Project Superintendent The Contractor shall also submit ti�e names of key members of his finn who will be direcUy
connected wiih the Project and outlinc the dudes and authority of each.
� B. The Cant�ctor shall have at the Project site,during the full term ofthe Contract,an approved,competent,full-time person who may be eitlier
a Project Manager or a Superintendent,and any necessary assistants,alI satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. The Project Manager or the Superintendent shatl
not be changed,except with the wriuen consent of the Owner's Representative unless the Project Manager or the Superintendea�t ceases to be in the employ of the
Coniractor. The Pmject Manager or the Superintendent shali represent the Contractor in his abs�ce and all directions given to either of them by the Owner or the
� Ownets Representative shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. All directions and communications shail be confirmed in wTiting.
C. If a Project Maneger or a Superintendent approved by the Owner's Representative ceases to be in the Contr�tor's employ,the Contractor shall
immediately repiace him with a person acceptable to the Owner's Represernaave. The Owner in its sole discretion sha11 have the right to requue the removal of any
� agent or employee of the Conhactor or any Subc:ontractor without cause at any time.
D. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees and sha11 not employ on the Work any unfit
person,anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him and anyone who is not satisfactory to the Owner's Representarive.
� E. Equal Emolovment Onoortunitv
The Contractor shall comply with Execvtive Order 1124b of September 24, 1965(41 C.F.R.60-250),which is administered by the United States
� Departrnent of Labor Office of Federal Contract CompGanca Progrmns,and with the relevant rules,reguladons,and orders ofthe Secretary of Labor(collec6vely,
tt�e"EEO Requirements").The Contractor will furnish upon request information and reports required by the EEO Requirements,or pursuant thereto,and will provide
access to ifs books,records,and accounts to appropriate agencies,and the Secretary of Labor for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with t6e EEO
Requirements. The Contractor shall include the provisions ofthis Paza�aph in every subcontract or purchase order so that such provisions will be binding upon
each contractor,subcontractor,or vendor performing services or providing materials relafsng to the Work.
� 1) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any empIoyee or applicant for employment because of race,color,age,religion,sex,
national origin,disability,or veteran status. The Contractor shall take aft'umative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that emptoyees are
treated during employment without regard to their race,color,age,religion,se�c,national origin,disability,or vete�an status. Such action shall include,
� but is not to be limited to the following:employment;upgading;demotion or transfer,recmitment or recn►itment advertising;layoffor termination;rates
of pay or other forms of compensation;and selection for training;incIading apprenticeship. The Contractor shal!post in conspicuous places,available
to employees and applicants for employment,notices setting forth the provisions of this non-discrimination pmvision
� 2) The Contractor shall s�d to each labor union or representative of workers with which it bas a collective bargaining agree�nent,
a notice advising the labor union or worker's representative of the Contracto�'s commitments under the EEO Requirements,and he shall post copies of
the notice in conspicuous places available to employas and appiicants for employment.
3) The Contractor shall,in a11 solicitations�advertiseme�►ts foremployees placed on its behalf,state that aSl qualified applicants will
� receive wnsideration fa employment without regard to ra�ce,color,age,religion,sex,national origin,disability,or veteran status.
The Contractor shal!also comply with TiUe VI of the Civit Rights Act of 1964(Pub.L 88-352),and the regulations issued Qursuant thereto(24 CFR Part
1},which provides that no person in the United States shall on grounds of rac:e,coior,or national origin,be excluded from paRicipation in,be denied the benefits
� of,or be otherwise subjected to discrimination unda any program or activity for which the applicant received Federaf financial assistance and will immediately take
any measures necessary to e�'ectuate this assurance. If any rea!prop�ty or structure thereon in provided or improved with the aid of Federal financial assistance
extended to the appIicant,this assurance shall obligate the applicant,or in the cffie of any transfer of such property,any transferee,for the period during which the
real property a structuro is used for a purpose for which the Federal financial assistance is extended,or for another pu�pose involving the provision ofsimilar services
� or benefits.
F, Non-sesreeated Facilities
� The Contractor certifies t6at it dces not maimain or provide for his employee,v any segregated facilities at any of his establishments,and that it does noi
knowingly permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its contral where segregated facilities aze maintained. The Contractor agrees that a
breach ofthis catification is a violation of the EEO Requirements.As used in this ceRification,the term"segregated facilities"means any waiting room,work areas,
rest rooms and wash rooms,restaurants artd other eating areas,time clocks,lock�rooms,and other storage or dressing areas,parking 1ots,drinking fountains,
recreation or enteRainment areas,transportation,and housing facilides provided for employces.
iExecutive Order 11246,and the regulations issaed pursuant thereto(24 CFR Part 130 and 41 CFR Chapter 64),and Section 4(b)o€the Grant Ageement,
which provides that no person shall be discriminated against on the basis of race,color,rcligion,sex,or national origin in all phases of employment during the
performance of Federal or fede�ally assisttd consUvction contracfs shall take affirmative action to insure fair treatcnent in employment,upgrading,demotioa,layof�
� or teTmination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training and eppren6ceship.
G. Develooment of Affumative Action Comoliance Propram
� 'I'he Contractoe agrees and certifies that it witl:
1) develop a written�rmative action camplieace progam appropriate for each of its establishments as required by Title 41,Code
of Federal Regulations,Section 60-1.40;
, 2) file each yeaz accurate reports on Standard Form 100(EEO-1)with the appropriate govemment agency(Section 1.7,Chapter 60,
� Conslrctcnd ��gla-6
6
Construction Con�ract �
GENERPiL CONDITIONS
Title 41 of the Code of Federal ltegulations)if: {a)the Contractor has SU or more employees and has federa�contracts with a value exceeding$50,000; �
or(b)the Contractor is subject to TiUe VII ofthe Civil Rights Act of 1964,as amended,and has over 100 employees or under I00 employees,but is owned
or affiliated with another wmpany thus employing a combined wod�'orce exceeding 100 employces;and
3) compel its Subcontractors and Svppliers to comply with the provisions of this Paragraph 14(G). �
H. Veterans Emvlovment
1) The Contractor agrees that it will act upon the fotlowing provisions as set forth in 41 C.F.R 60-250: �
a) The Contractor will pmvide speciaE emphasis to the employment of qualified disabted veterans of the Vietnam era.The
Contractor agrces that suitable employment openings which exist at the time of the execution and those which occur during the performance
of contract(s)shal2 be offered for listing at an appropriate locai office o£the Statc Employmeat Service. �
b) The listing of employment openings with the employment system pursuant to ffiis Paragraph 14(I-n shall be made at
least concurrently with the use of any other recruitrnent services or afforts and shall invoive the normal obligarions which attach to the placing
of a bona fide job ordcr,including the acceptance of refenals of vetcrans and non-veterans. The listing of employmeat openings dces not �
require the hiring of any particulaz job applicant or from any particular group of job applicants,and nothing herein is intended to relieve the
Contractor from any requirements contained in the EEO Requirements,
c) This Paragraph 14(En does not apply to openings which ihe Contractor proposes to fill&om within its own organizadon �
or pursuant to a customary and traditioaal promorion from within policy. This exciusion does not apply to a partic�lar opening once the
Contractor decides to consider applicants ootside of its own organization or employer-union arrangements for that opening.
d) The term"suitable employment openings"includes,but is not limited to,openings which occur in the following job
categories: service and non-service;operations or executive offices;iaborers and mechanics;supervisory and non-supervisory;technical and �
executive;administrative;andprofessionalopeningswhicharecompensatedonasalarybasisoflessthanSZ5,000peryear.Thistermincludes
full-time employment,temporary employment of more than three(3)day's duratioq and part-time employment.
2) The Contractor further agrecs that it wiil compel its Subcontractors and Suppliers to comply with the provisions ofthis Paragraph '
14(I�.
I. Handicaaued Emnlovment
1) The Conbracior agecs that it will act upon the following provision as set forth in 41 C.F.R.60-741.3: �
Ttie Contractor shall not discriminabe against any employee or applicant for employir�ent because ofphysical or mental
handicap for emp}oyment, if qualifsed. The Conbractor agees to take affirmative action to employ, advance in
employment,and otherwise treat qualified handicapped individuats without discrimination based upon their physica! �
or mental handicap in all practices including,but not Iimited ro,the foIIowing: employment;upgrading;demotion or
transfer;rec�vitinent or recruitment adveRising;layoffor termination;rates of pay or oth�forms ofcompensation;and
selection for training,including apprenticeship.
2) The Contractor further agees that it will compel its 5ubcontractors and Suppliers to comply with the provisions of this Paragraph �
14(n.
16. REPORTS AND MEETINGS �
A. The Contractor shall prepare a Weekly Repoct,wt�ich wiil be delivered to the Own�on a weekly basis,on the st�ndard form provided by the
Owner(�xhibit F)showing the number of foremen,journeymen mechanics,and other personnel employed at the Project for each day,and the location and nature
ofthc Work perfomied. Failure of the Coniractor to timely deliver daily�eports as required shall cons6tute cause for the withholding of payments unde.r Paragraph �
35(A)(1).
B. Not more than 30 days following wmmencement of construction,the Contractor and representatives of all Subcontracto�designated by the
Owner shall attend a pre-conswction meeting scheduled by the Owner. The Cont:actor shall be represented by its Project Manager,Geoerai Superinte.ndents and
other persons designated by U�e Owner;Subcontractors shalt be represented by the'v supervisory personnel. The purpose of ffie meeting will be to discuss matters �
relating to ihe Projeck
C. Each wcek dwing the progress of the Work,the Contractor will conduct a Progresc Meeting at a time ac�d place agreed upon by the Contractor
and the Owner,dwing which the Contractor shall review the progress ofthe Work relative to the ConsWction Progress Schedute and discuss ways of maintaining �
the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall mquire Subcontractors who are active on the Project at the time the meeting is held to be pr�ent and be represented
by a person with adequate authority.The Contractor shall cequirc Subcontracto�who are not active on the Project to be present and be represented by a person with
adequate authority,if their presence is reques�ted bythe Ownei's Representative.The Contractor shall keep accurate minutes ofeach meeting and shall deliver a signed
copy of each set of minutes to the Owner's Representative witfiin seventy-two(72)houcs of each meeting.Faiture of the Contractor to schedule or hold the Progress �
Meetings required by this Paragraph,or faileua to submit signed copies of Progress Meeting Minutes as nequired by the preceding setitence shell constitute cause
for the withholding of payments under Paragraph 35(A)(8). The Owner shall be entitled to attend and paKicipate in att such Progr�cs Meetings.
D. Each month,on the day a payment request is submitted to thc Owner,the Contractor shet!submit to the Owner a Conhact Status Report '
(Exhibit K),which report shall,at a minimum,show,in detait,the progress of tbe Work rclative to the approved Construction Progress Sehedule,a cument Contract
c�ma 00810-7
7 '
` Construction Contract
GENEItAL CONDITIONS
� Status Report,a listing of outstanding submittals or proposals upon which the Contractor is awaiting response trom Ute Owner and the impact,if any,such submittals
or proposals have on ihe Construction Prvgress Schedule,the Contract Sum,including additions or deductions arising ovt of accepted changes of Contract,and a
listing ofpending or outstanding changes of Contract and Contractor's claimed cost and/or extension of 6me resulting therefrom.
� 17. SETBMI7TALS
Upon the eadier oF (1)the execution of the Cantract;or(2)receipt of al�Iotice to Pioceed,the Contrador shall immediately begin developing all submittals required
� by the Contract Doc�ments. All submitials are due from ffie Contractor to the Owner prior to the expiration of fifty pucent(50'�0)of the original Contract Time,
unless otherwise speci6ed by the Owner.All submittals required for each trade or specification section shall be submitted ac one complete package,unless otherwise
designated by the Owner. Failure of the Contractor to comply with terms contained in this Paragraph shall constituie cause for the wit6holding of paymenu under
Paragraph 35(Axi3).
� A. Submittal Lo�r
On a date to be determined by Owner,the Owner shall submit to the Contractor a Submittal I.og identifying the dates on which the Contractor shal[make
submittals.
� B. Shov Drawings
1) The Contractor shall submit to the Owner one(1)reproducible copy(sepia)and four(4)blueline prints of a�l shop drawings(the
� "Shop Drawiags")in accordance with the Owner's distribution schedute,in ample time to coordinate necessary features of conswction with all fabrication
and installation requirements in order to meet the requirements of the Construction Progress Schedule.One sepia will be returned to the ContracWr. By
the submission of his Shop Drawings,the Contractor warrants that he has coordinated his Shop Drawings with those of other Contractors.
2} Review:
� a) Fabrication may start immediately for Shop Drawings stamped"Submittal FuUy Complies With Requirements of
Contract"or"Complies Except as Noted"(cach subject to the Conhact Documents). No resubmission is required of Shop Drawings which
are stamped ac indicated above.
� b) Fabrication shatl not be started for Shop Diawings stamped"Revise and Resubmit".All cocm,ctions shall be:nade,and
new copies shall be resubmitted.
� 3) Submittals of Shop Drawings which contain insufficient deta or are unchecked by the Contractor will be�tumed for wRection
without furtlier checking by the Owner.
C. Product Data
� L) Submittals: Six(6}copies ofproduct data are required for each submittal or resubmittal. Product data shall be submitted along
with Shop Drawings where appropriaie. Additional copies when requested by the Owner's Representativc s6a11 be furnished without addi6onal cost
2) Data: Data applicable to the item submitted for approval shall be desigiated on the catalog cuts.
' D. Warsanties
Warranties shall be submitted to the Ovmer's Representaave at leest thirty(30)days before Aaxptance of the Work by the Owner in acc�dance wiW
� the provisions of Paragraph 38 hereo� All warranties must be submitted to Owner prior to the Owne�'s Acceptance of the Work and Final Paymenk
E. Samnles
� 1) Oriainal Submittal: Unless otherwise specified or directed,thc Contractor shall submit four(4)of each item for which samples
are required for appmval prior to delivery of the materials to the Project Site. Samples shall be representatEve of the actua)material proposed and of
sufficient size to show design,cotor,texture and finish Rejected samples will not be retumed
2) Accentance: An accepted sample will be retumed to the Contractor. The Owne�s Representative will use the retained approved
, samples to insure compliance of the finished products supplied.
F. Ideatification
� 1) All submittals shall contain a 6tle block on which the following data is permanently attached or noted:
a) Project name and location.
� b) Owner iden65cation numbers.
c) Contractor's and Supplier's names and addresses and the name of ihe individual w whom questions should be addressed.
' d) Product identification.
� ��� 00810-8
8
Construction Contract �
GENERAL CONDITIONS
e) Submival title,drawing number,revision number and datc of drawir�g and revision. �
� Applicable Contract Drawings and Specification secrion numbers.
g) Product data submitted wntaining multiple items for approval need the identiflcation oniy on the exterior. In such �
instances the identification shall include page and caraiog item numbeis.
2) SpaOC: Vacant space approximately 2 1/2"higti by 4"wide shall be provided adjacent to the iden6fication data to receive the
Ovmer's status stamp. �
G. General
1) Sienature:Eac�itemsubmittedshallbetlsoroughlyreviewedbytheContractorandhaveastampornotedescribingtheContractor's �
actioq sig�ed by the person authorizcd by the Contractor to do the checking wiih that person's name clearly printed.
2) Contractor Resnonsibilitv:Contractor shall review each submittal for completeness,conformance to the Conpact Documenu and
coordination with other partc ofthe Work and the Progress Schedule.By providing and submifting to the Owner or the Owners designee Shop Drawings, �
product data,warranties and samples,the Contraclor will be deaned to represent that he has detemiined and verified(a)the availability of all materials,
and(b)field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,and tbat he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such
submittals with the requirement of the Work,the Contract Documents and the Pro�ess Schedule and that such Shop Drawings,samples,warranties and
data conform to the Contract Documents.
3) Characteristics Not Checked bv Owner: Acceptance is for general design on1y. Quantities,size,ficld dimensions and locations �
are some of the required cheracterisdcs which are not part of the Owmer's acceptance and will not be checked. Accordingly,the Owner's limited
acceptance shall in no way relieve the Contraaor&om his obligation to conform his work to required characteristics and to Project Specifications.
4) Delavs: 'It�e Owner may reWrn incomplete submittaIs wich no action taken. 'The Contractor shalf have no claim for any damages �
or for an extension of time due to delay in the Work resulting from the rejection of materials or from the rejectian,cort�ection,and resubmittal of Shop
Drawings,samples and other dats�or from the untimely submission lhereof.
18. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMEN75 �
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the job site,unless otherwise directed by the Owne�s RepresentaNve,copies of all Drawings,Specificaiions,
Addenda,Shop Drawings,Changes of Contracx,Change Directives,other contract moditications and other doeuments subm9Ued'm compliance with the Contract �
Documents. �
B. The Contractor shall check all sections of the Specifications for specific references to maintaining record drawings and diagrams(the"Project
Record Documents"). These references are int�ded to clarify record documentation for particular items and are not intended to limit requirements generally.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that eac6 ofth�Project Record Documents shall be clearly marked"Project Record Copy"and shall be maintained `
in good condition and available at all times for inspection by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall mark up the most appmpriate documents to r�ord
significant changes during the construction process and signifcant details not shown in the original Contract Documents.
D. The Contractor shall�sur�e that the information given shall include,but not be limited to,the actua)location of the undergrouad utiiities and '
appuRenances,referenced to permanent surface improvements. Also,the location of internal piping,wiring,ductwork,conduit and appwtenances concealed in
building structures,referenced to visible and accessible features of the structures. Projeci record documents are to be kept current, No Work shall be permanenUy
concealed until the mquired information h�been recorded. �
E. At the completion of tfie Project,the Oamer's Itepresentative will fumish the Contractor with a complete set of curnent Contract Drawings.
The Contractor shall transfer the recorded chenges to the dsawings neatly with a permanent line of sufficient weight to cleariy show ffie record changes. The
ConUactor shall stamp and sign a certification statement on each Drawing and page that the Drawings as submitted are correct and accurately depict the Work as �
it has bxn consweted. These drawings(the"As-Built Drawings")sha�l be submitted to the Owner prior to Acceptance of the Project by the Owner end prior to
the release of the Contractor's Final Payment
19. CLEAl�t-UP
A. Dailv Clean-Uu �
1) The ConVactor shali pmvide for all clean-up and off-site disposal of all hash and debris as required by the Ovmer.The Contractor
shall pmvide whatever manpower and equipment(including,but not limibed to,dumpsters)that the Owncr's Representative,in its sole discretiot►,&els ,
is necessary to adequatety clean and remove from the Conswction site all trach,diR and debris that results from the operations of the Contractor,his
Subcontractors and Suppliers,and Owner-fumished material installed by the Conhacta.
2) Allequipmentortempo�aryfacilitiesprovidedormaintainedbytheContractorshallberemovedfromtheProjectnolaterthanFinal
Completion. However,prior to Final Completion,the Contractor shall remove or relocate such equipment or temporary facilities within 72 hours of its ,
receipf of notice to do so by the Ovmer.
3) If the Con�actor fails to clean up as provided in this Paragraph,the Owner reserves the dgt�t,upon forty-eight(48)hows written
notice to the Contractor,to procced to remave the debris,the cost of which witl be charged against the Contractor. '
ca�ra.�a 00810-9
9 �
` Construction Contract
GENEI2AL CONDTTIONS
� 8. Final Clean-Uu
Prior to Substantial Completion,the Contractor shall employ experienced persons or a professional team to make a Final Clean-Up ofihe Project or sach
� portions of the Project as the Owne�"s Representative may designate. Such Ctean-Up shalf cause the Project to be suitable for immediate use for iLs intended purpose.
Such Clean-Up shall leave all surfaces,equipment,finishes,fixtures,furtcishing and other similar items in a condition requiring only ordinary c�ne to maintain. The
Contractor shaU be responsible to reclean as directed any areas soiied or dittied as a result of perfortning correcrive or vncompleted Work.
� 110. CHANGE OF CONTRACT
A The Owner may order changes in ttie scope ofthe Work and the Coniractor shall peifom►the Work as changed.The Ovmer may order changes
as follows:
� 1) 'Fhe Owner may issue in writing a request for a Change of Contract proposal to the Cantractoc The Contracior shall submit a
proposai for the requested Ct:ange of Contract to the Owner within fourteen(14)calendar days ofthe receipt of such request(or as othenvise specifically
agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor).The proposal shall contain a quantity survey including quantity calculations,acea calculations,unii prices,
[abor hours,rates and any other information necessary to provide the Own�,in the Ovmer's opinion,with a comprehensive understanding of the proposal.
� The proposal shall contain any credits due the Owner resulting&om the requested Change of Contract The proposal shall reflect unit prices contained
in the Con�act Documents,if any;the Contractor shall represent and certify to the Owner that the prices contained therein are the Iowest prices available
to the Contractor. Ifwork covered by the proposal is similar to work for which unit rates have been established,the unit rates for suct►established work
shall be,at the Ovmer's option,the basis for detecmining the cost of sueh similar work. The proposal shall clearly indicate all areas of the Work affected
� by said requested Change of Contract The Contractor sha11 require each Subcontractor,Supplier and Sub-subconfractor to conform to the require�nents
of this Paragaph.Ifthe Contractor fails to subm'st a proper pro�osal in accordance herewith,the Owner may suspend further payments undl the Contractor
complies.
2) !f time restraints require or if the Owner and the Contractor fail to agae upon the cost of any change in the scope of the Work
� pursuant to Paragraph 19(A)(1),the Owner may dircct the Contractor by written order to proceed with the Wor[c involved by issuing a Change Directive
(Exhibit n.Ift6e Contractor ctaims that such work constitutcs a Change ofContract,ther►the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a request for a Change
of Contract in accordance with Paragraph 19(A)(1). The Contraet sum or the time for pedormanee may not be changed as a result of issuanee of,or
compliance with,a Change Directive. The Ovmer may ffiso issue a C6ange Diredive to assess backcharges against the Contractor.
� B. A Change of Contract is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner or the Owrter's Agen�issued after the execution ofthe Contract,
aukhorizing a change in the scope of the Work or an adjustment of the Contract Sum or the time for performance(Exhibit n. The Contsact Sum and the time for
performance may be changed only by a Change of Coatrack A Change of Contract signed by the Contractor indicates his ageement therewith,including the
� adjusUnent in the Contract Sum or the time for performance,if any. It is understood that unless the Change of Contract specifically and cicazly modifies the time
for perfocmance,the Contractor agrees that there shall be no modification in the time for performance and,by executing the Change of Conuae�the Contractor
expressly waives and releases any and ai!claims,rights,or interests,including,but not limited to,those for extensions of time,impact,disruption,loss of efficiency,
"ripple,"or other extr�aordinary or consequential costs,originating directly or indi�tly out of the Work set forth in or related to the particular Change of Contract.
� C. The charge or credit for the Change of Contract for work perforcned pursuant to Paragraph 14(A)(2)will be determined as set forth in this
Paragap6 19(C). The allowable limit for trade mark-up is based on aetual cost pius a percentage fee for overhead and profit of five percent(5°�)for the Contractor
and ten percent{10'�0)to be apportiw�d behveen any and all Subcontractois and Sub-subcontrsctors. For work performed by the Contractor's own forces,the
Contractor's merk-up shall be limited to actual cost plus a percentage fee for overhead end profrt of ten percent(10'�a).For the purpose of calculating trade mark-up,
� actual cost is defiaed as(i)cost of labor,including social security,old age and unemptoyment insurance,and&inge benefits�equired by agreement or cuswm,
workers'compensation insurance and bond prcmiums(if any),(ii)actual cost of materials,including sales tax and the cost of delivery,and{'v)rental value of
equipment and machinery.based on curnent AGC r�tal rates,obtained and used specificaliy for such work. Acxual cost does not include any item which could be
dcemed to be a general cAnditions cost or overhe,ad such as,but not limited to,the cost of Contractor and Subcontractor supervisory pe�nnnel assignod to the Project,
' and field office and related expenses.All work performed pursuant to this Paragraph 19(C)shal!be sabject to veritication/audit by the Owner. The Contiactor shall
afford Owner reasonable access to all applicabie Pmject records for a period of thra(3)years from the completion of the Project
D. In the alternative,the Owner shall have the right to employ a separate Contractor to perform such work.The Contractor shall afford separate
' Contractors reasonable opportvnity for the delivery and storage of ffieir materials and equipment and the execution of the work,and the Contractor shall fulty and
propedy coordinate his work with the work of such separate Contractors,atl at no additiona�cost to the Owner.
E. The Ovmer,in its sole discretion,may elect to pay for extra work performed by the Contractor although the Contractor hss not complied with
a11 requirements of the foregoing subparagaphs of this Paragaph The ContracEor expressiy a�es that such el�tion by the Owner shall not be deemed a waiver
' of the Owner's rights or constitute a couise of conduct,abrogadng the requirements of this Pacagraph. The ContracWr further expressly agrees that the Owner shall
6ave no obligation to pay the Contractor unless the Contractor hes compGed with all requirements ofthis Para�aph,and the dwne�'s rights to require such compliance
shall be ihe same as if the Owner had required such full compliance with respect to each and eveay item of extra work performed by the Contractor.
1 20. CI.AIMS FOR EXTRA COST/EXTENSIONS OF TIME
Ifthe Contractor claims that any instructions by Drawings(including Shop D�awiags)or wriUen clarification or othervvise involve extra costs or require an extension
of time undes his Contract,he shall give the Owner's Represeatative written notice within seven(7)days of the receipt t!►ereof. Within fourteen(14)days of
� submission of the wriUen no6ce,the Contractor shall submit the back-up for all allowab[e ext�sions of time and all claimed ea�a costs,including,but not limited
W,detailed labor and material costs,subject to Paragaph 8(A)hereof. Except in an emergency which a�dangers life or property,the Conhactor shall not procced
without written acceptance in the form of a Change Directive or a Change of Contract from the Owner. Failure of the Contractor to provide such written notice in
a Nmely manner within seven(7)days shall deprive thc Contractor of its right to claim such extra cosfs.
' 21. CORRECTION OF WORK
' ��a.� 00810-10
10
Construction Contract ,
GENEIt�iL CONDITIONS
A Correction of Work Bcfore Finai Pavment �
1) In the event that the Conhactor receives a noti5cation of faWty or unacceptable Work by Owner's Representative,the Conhactor
shall prompUy remove from the premises ali work condemned as failing to conform to the requirements ofthe Conhact Documents,whether incorporated �
in the Work a not. The Contractor shall then promptly replace and re-execute its own work in accordance with the Contract Documents and without
expense to the Owner and shall bear the e�cpense of maldng good all work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.
In addition,the Conhactor shall perfortn all cutting and fitting for other trades necessitated by the ComracWr's elrors.
2) Should the Contractor refuse or fail to correct fautty or damaged work promptly(but in no case longer than twenty(20)days),or �
should the Owner's Representative consider it inadvisable for tbe Contractor to do so,the Owner may eitiier(a}authorize another conUractor to correct
the work at the Contractors expe�nse or(b)accept tbe faulty or damaged work and obtain from the Contractor a ciedit,contaimd in a Change of Cont�act,
representing the diminished value of the work accepted.
3) The Owner shalI make a final inspection of aIl Work after the Project hae been completed.Coirection of all faulty or unacceptable �
work by the Contractor sha(I be a wndi6on precedent to Final Payment. Final acceptance s6all occur after the Owne�s Punchlist,prepaced during final
inspection,has been satisfied,such satisfaction of the ponchlist being a condition precedent to Final Payme�nt.
B. Cornction of Work After Final Pavment �
No provision in thc Contract Documents shall rolieve the Contractor of his responsibility for faulty materials,equipment or worlananship. Uniess
oWerwise speci6ed,the Conhactor,upon norification by the Owner,shail prompUy remedy any such defeets due thereto and pay for any damage to the Owner �
resulting therefrom.
22. OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK/SI'OP WORI{
3f the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work propedy or make progress sufficient to ensure completion in accordance with the Construction Progress �
Schedule,or othenvise fail to perform any provision of the Contract,the Owner may either(1)order the Contractor to stop the Work(or any portion thereof}until
the cause for such order has bcen eIiminated,or(2)upon forty-eight(48)hours written notice to the Contractor and his surety,if any,and without prejudice to any
other remedy the Owner may have,make good such deficiencies and deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. Ifthe payments
then or thereafter due ihe Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. However,this right of the Owner �
to stop thc Work shatl not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise its right for the benefit of the ContracWr or any other person or entity,nor shall
ii relieve the Cantractor of his responsibility for providing for the saf�y of persons on the Project Site or void any wairanty of the Contractor,either express or
implied.
23. CONTRAGT TERMIlVATION �
A. Owner's Riaht to Terminate
t) The Contractor shall be in default of this Contract if it(s)becomes insolven�(b)files a has filed agaiast it aay Petition in �
Bankruptcy or makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors;(c}fails to pay,when due,for materials,supplies,labor,or other items purchased
or used in connection with the Work;(�refuses or fails to prosecute the Work,or any separable paR thereof,with such diligence as will ensure the
comple6on of the Work in acxordance with the Construction Progress Schedule;(e)in the Owner's opinion,fails,refuses or neglects to stipply sufficient
labor,material or supervision in the prosecution of d�e Wod�(�interferes with or disrupts,or threatens to interferc with or disrupt the operations of the �
Owner,or any offier contractor,sapplier,subcontractor,or other perso+�worlcing on the Projeet,whether by mason of any labor dispute,picketing,
boycotting or by any other reason;or(p�commits any other breach of this Contracx.
2) In the event of a default by the Contractor or an election by the Owner w act in accordance with Subparag�aph 6 of this Paragraph, '
the Owner may terminate this Cootract,and such termination shall bc effective forty-eight(48)hours after the Contractor receives written notice thereof.
At the Owner's option,the Ovmer may rescind its te�mination no6ce by so notifying tl�e Coatractor in any appropriate manner prior to the expiration of
forty�ight(48)hours after the Contractor received the termination noticx or prior to the time the Contractor removes his equipment and forces from the
Project Site,w6ichever is lated,and the Owner may take possession ofall or arry maberiels,supplies,equipment end tools pertaining to this Project whether '
on the Project Site,in the Contractor's shop or in transit,and may make independent aerangements for the completion of the Work. The aznount of the
completion cost,as well as any other costs,damages,or expenses,including the Owrter's legal fces and expenses,incuaed as a resuit of a default,shall
be charged against any unpaid balance due the Contractor,and,ifsaid rotal costs,damages,or expenses shall excaed the ba�ance due,the Contractor agrees
to pay the amount of said excess within 5fteen(15)days of the Owner's demand thaefor.
3) T6e materials,supplies,equipment and tools taken by the Owner may be used in completing ffie Work and may be inco�porated '
into the unprovements being wnsOnicted. With respect to any of such items incoiporated into the Projec�or consumed in the Work,the net reasonable
value of the same as of the date oftaking shall be credited against the aforesaid total complaion costs,damages and expenses. With respeet to eny such
itemc which ate not so incorporated or consumed,or which have a salvage value,the Owner may,at its option(a)assume title to the same or any part ,
of the same,as of the date of default and credit the net reasonable value thareof as of the date of taking against the total complction cost,damages,and
expenses,or(b)retum the same to the Contractor and credit tl�c net reasonabte value of the use thereof 6y the Owner against the said total completion
cost,damages and expenses. As used in the preceding sent�ces,the phrase"net reasonable valae"of any it�ns shall mean the reasonable value after
deducting all amounts which have been paid to ffie Contractor on account theroof. ,
4) In the event ihat the 4wner does rtot terminate this Contract despite the occu�nce of an event of default,but instead assents to
delayed compleGon of the Work by the Contractor,such assertY shall not be consWed as a waiver of the Contractors obligation to reimburse the Owner
for any costs,damages,or acpenses incwred as a result of such delay;and atl such costs,damages,and expenses shall be paid or reimbursed to the Owner '
within Sfteen(15)days of the Owner's demand therefor.
c�.�a 00810-11 '
11
' Construction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
' S) I�after notice of termination of the Contractor's right to proceed pursuant to Paragraph 23(A)(2),it is determined for any reason
that the Contractor was not in default,or that its delays are excusable,or that the Owner is not entitled to the remedies against the Contractor provided
therein,then the Contractor's remedies against the Owner shall be fhe same as and limited to those afforded the Contractor under Paragraph 23(Ax�.
' 6) The Owner shall have the right to tecminate this Contract without cause upon forty-eight(48)hours'written nodce to the Contractor.
In the event of such termination for convenience,the Contractor's rights against the Owner shall be timited to thai portion of the Contract Sum eamed
througlt the date of terminetioq together with all matcriais ordered(which shall btcome the property of Owner)and any retainage withheid,but the
Contractor shalS not be entiUed to any other or further relief against the Owner,including,but not limited to,anticipated profit on Work not performed.
i8. Contractor's Risht to Terrninate
If the Work is stopped for a period of ninety(90)days or more under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction,or as a result of
� an act of govemment,such as a deciaration of a national emergency making materials euiavailable,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or
theu agents a employees or any other person perfonning any of ihe Work under a contract with the Contractor,or ifffie Work is wholly or substantialty discontinued
for a period of sixty(60)days or more by the Ownes,the Contractor may terminate this Contract and such te�mination shall be effective forty-eight(48)hours after
the Ownex receives writt�notice thereo�and recover from the Owner payment for a11 Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials,
' equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,including a prorated portion ofthe Contracior's fee.This Contract can only be terminated by the Contractor
pursuant to the terms ofthis Subparagraph(B).
C. The Contracto�s obligations arising out of this Conhact,including his obligations under Paragraph 40,(except any obligafion to wmplete
� the Work after termination)shall survive Eermination.
24. LIENS
A. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of applicable laws and regulations of the state in which the Project is situated with respect
, to such laws and regulations relating to the liability of tlie Owner for mecbanics'liens. 'fhe Conhactor agrees to take all precautions necessary to ensure that the
Owner's liability for me,chanics'liens and similar liens is limited to the greatest extent possible under the applicable lien laws. The Contractor shall also advise the
Owner of the Owner's obligations under applicable lien laws.To the fullest extent permilted by law,the Contractor waives any rights to file a mechanics'lien against
the property,and agrees not to su�'er or permit mechanics'or materialmen's liens to be filed or continued against any property of the Owner or its related companies
' for services performed,ormaterials,machinery,and equipment fwnished in connection with the Projectbyhimsel�anySubcon�actor,Sub-subcontracWr,mechanic,
laborer,Supplier,or any offier pe�ort,firm or cocporation,for work performed on the Project pursuant to ffiis Contract by,through or under ihe Coatractor. In the
event that any such Gen shall be f led,the Cantractor agrees to tatce all steps necessary and prop�for the release and discharge of such lien in the manner required
by the law in the state in which the lien has been filed on receipt wiFhin seven(7)days of demand from the Owner,and in default of perfortning such obligation,agrees
� to reimburse the Owner,on demand,for all monies paid by the Ovmer in the releasing,satisfying,and discharging of such liens,encluding reasonable attomeys'fees.
B. Neither the Final Payment nor any part ofthe retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a full az►d
final release of a!1 iiens arising out of the Conttact or rcceipts in fnll in lieu thereof,and if required in either case,an�davit that so faz as he has knowledge or
information,the releases and receipts include a11 the labor and materials for which a lien could be filed;but the Contractor may,if any of its Subcontractors refiue
� to fumish a receipt in full,fumish a bond satisfactory ro the Owner,to indemnify him against any liea If any lien remains unsatisfied after a11 payments ar�e made,
the Contractor shal(refund to the Ownec alt monies that the Iatter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attomeys'
fees.
' 25. ASSIGNIVIENT AND THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY
A. The Owner and the Conhactor each binds itsel�and its partners,successors,executors and administrators and assigns to the other party of
this Contract and to the pariners,successors,executors,admiaistrators and agsigns to such other party,with respect to all obligations contained in the Contract
' Documents. The Owner may assign its rights and obligations under this Contract(including a collateral assigun�t thereo�at any time without the consent of the
Contractor,and the Contr�tor agrees to execute any documentallon with respect to such assignment promptly upon t6e Owner's request However,the ConUactor
shall not assign its obligations under this Conh�act or subEet as a whole withouE the prior written consent of the Owner,nor shall the Contractor assign any monies
due to it hereunder,without ihe prior written consent of the Owner. All assigvnents without the Owne�s prior written consent are void.
' B. The Condactor agrees that each subcontract and all purchase orders executed by the Contracmr for this Project,and aU rights ofthe Contractor
thereunde,shall be assignable to the Owmer,or to another contractor designated by the Owrter,at the Own�'s option,without consent of the Svbcontractor or
Supplier,that upon sach an assignment becoming effective such Subcontractor or Supplier will be bound to the Ovmer,or such Contracta designated by the Owner,
as fuliy and in the same manner ac such Subcontractor is bound to the Contract�under such subcontract or purchase order;and that upon such assignment becnmiog
' effective all sureties of the obligations of such Subcontractor shall be boond to the Oumer,or such contractor designafed by the Owner,as fully and in the same
manner as such svreries are bound to the Contractor. The Contractor furlhex agrees tke�to the extent permitted by applicable law,alt pemuts and licenses obtairnd
by the Contrector for the Project and all rights of the Contractor thereunder shall be assignable to the Owner,or to another Contractor designated by the Owner,at
the Owner's option,without the consent of the issuing entiry.
� C. Effective as of any tennination of this Contract,the Contractor shali be deemed to have assigned W the Ownef all of the Contractor's interest
in ihose subcontracts ar►d purchase orders entered into by the Contractor prior to tern►ination which the Owner specifically requests by written norice. Pursuant to
Subparagraph(B)above,ali subcontracts and purchase orders shall provide that they are freely assignable by the Contractor to the Owner aad it�assigns. Such
, assignments by ti�e Contractor shall not in any way be construed as the Owne�s assumption of the Conkactor's then-0utstanding obligations to ifs Subcontractors
and Supplie�s. The Owner shall be at liberty to negotiate with and engage(for itself or for any other contractors that the Owner engages to replace the Contractor)
any Subcomractors,Suppliers,or others that the Conlractor dealt with prior to tennination.
D. No provisions of the Contract Dceaments shall in any way inure to the benefit of any third persan(including the public at large)so as to
, constitute such person a third party benef►ciary of Uus Contract or of any one or more of the teRas and conditions of the Contract Documents or otherwise give rise
c�x.�a 00814-12
� 12
Construction Contract '
GENFRAL CONDITIONS
to eny cause of action in any person not a party hereto. The rights of We Owner set forth in this Paragraph are intended for the protection of the Owner oniy. No �
xights of ti�e Owncr specified in this Paragraph,nor any action taken by the Owner pursuant to this Paragraph,shall be construed as acceptance by the Owner of any
delegation of the daties owed by the Contractor W any l6ird party.
26. INSPECTION AND USE OF PREMLSES '
A. The Owner,the Owner`s Representative and all others specified by the Owner shall have safe access to the Work at all times for inspection
purposes.Nolwithstanding the foregoing,the Owner and the Owner's Representative shall not be responsible for,and will not have control or charge o�consiruction
means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures or for safety precautions and progess in connection with the Work,and they shail not be responsible for the �
Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Docvments.
B. The Ownu reserves the right to occupy any portion of the Project and operate any equipment that is part of the building without constituting
acceptance ofthe Contracto�s Work or material involved either in whole or in part,unless thc Owner,in its sole discretion,ea�ressly accepts portions ofthe Project �
or pieces of equipment by written notice to the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall confine ifs apparatus,the storage of mat�ials and the operatious of his workmen to limits indicated by law,ordinances,
petmits and direc6ons of the Owner's Representative. The Con�actor shall not encumber the premises with its material except for such mataial as is absolutely �
necessary for the Contractor to pedorm the Work wiUwut interruption and as approved by the Owner's Representative.
27. INDEMN3FICATION
A. To tho fullest extent permitted by law,the Contractor shall indemnify,defend and hold harmless the Ovmer and its rclated c�mpanies from �
and against all claims,damages,losses and expenses,including,but not limited to economic loss,direct,ind'vect,and consequendat damages,and attomeys'fees
and expenses,arisingout oforresuhing&omtheperformance ofthe Work,provided that anysuch clsim,damage,Ioss orexpense(I}is altributabteto personal injury,
bodily injury,siclmess,disease or death,a to injury to or destruction of tangibte property including the loss of use resuldng therefi�oro,and(2)is caused in whole
or in part by any act or omissioa of the Conuactor,any of its Subcontractors or Sappliers,anyone direcily or indirectly employed by any ofthem or anyone for whose '
acts any of them may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or eacpense is caused in part by the parties indemnified hereunder. The
Contractor's obligation under this Pazagraph 27 s6all extend to and include liability for the sole,partial,contributory,comparative,or concunent negligence of any
parties indemni5ed herein and for any other acts or omissior�of those parties other than intentional acts or omissions.The phrase"tangible properiy"as used herein
includes without limitation damage to the property of the Contractor,all parties indemni5ed herein,or of any tbird party. ,
B. In any and all claims against the Ovmer or its related companies by any employee ofthe Contractoe,any of its Sube:ontractors or Suppliers,
anyone dirxtly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,ihe indemnification obligation under this Paragaph 27
shail not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any of its �
Subcontracwcs or Suppliers under workers'compensation acts,disability benefit acts or other empioyce benefit acts.
C. As part ofthe mdemnrty set forth above and to the fullest extent pecm9tted by law,the Contractor agrees to indemnify and s�ave the Owner and
its�elated companies harmless from all costs,damages,or expenses,including,but not iimited to,reasonable attomeys'fas and expenses,incumd by any of them
by virtue of any claim or claims whatscever filed by any of its Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,mechanics,laborers,or suppGers,arising from work performed ,
pursuant to this Conh�act by,through,or under the Conhactor,including without limitation any such costs,damages,or expenses which arise as a result of the partial,
concurrent,comparative,orcontributorynegligenceofapartyindemnifiedfiereunder,exceptforthesolenegligenceofapartyindemnifiedhereunder.TheContractor
also hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless,protect,and defend the Owner and its related companies from and against any liability,claims,judgments,losses,
damages,including,but not limited to,direct demages,attomeys'fces,court oosts,and expenses of collection,occasioned in whole or in part by the failure of the ,
Contractor,its Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors orSuppliers,m complywiffi anyoftheter[ns orprovisions ofthe ContractDocumenu,inctudingwithout limitation
tfiis indemnity obligation.
D. The Contracior aeknowledges the receipt and sufficiency of specifiq valuable considuation and other benefiu aceruing to the Contractor in '
ezchange for the Contracto�'s obligation to indemnify for damages to persons or property caused by thc sole,partial,contributory,comparative,or concurrent
negligenceofanypartiesindemnifiodunderthisContract.Thespccificconsiderationincludes,butisnotlimitedto,thefirstfivepercent(5%)ofeachpaymentmade
to the Contractor urtder this Contract
E. The indemnifications contained in this Paragraph 27 shell appiy regardless of whether the liabilities sustained were the result of settlementc �
or contractual or other voluntary forn�s of dispute resolution.
F. The terms"Own�"and"related companies"as used in this Paragraph 27 include the respective off[cers,directors,agents,s�rvants,employees,
successors and assigns of the O�mer and its related companies. The term"related compenies"as used in this Paragraph 27 means any endties in which the Ovmer ,
has controiling or manageriaI interesu or any entities in which the Owner or has ownership interests,and which are in existence at any time betwcen the date of the
Contract and the Contracwr's acceptance of Final Payment. Such entities include,but are not limited to,corporations,partrierships,arid joint ventures.
28. INSURANCE �
A. Contractor's Liabitiri lnsurance
1) Thc Contractor shall purchase from and maintain(or shaU ca�se its Subc:ontracwrs and Sub-subcontractors to purchase from and '
maintain)with insurance companies satisfactory to Owner,such inccwance as wiU protect the Contractor,Subcontracto�,Sub-subcontractors,Owner,
Ovmer's mortgagce{ifany),the ground lessor(if any),and all oftheir respecdve o�'ice�,directors,agentc,servants,aad employees,from claims set forth
below wh�ch may arise out of or result from operations under the Contract by the Owner,by U�e Contractor,by a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor,
by anyone di�ectly or indirect�y employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be lieble:
�
c«�e.«�a 00810-13
13 '
' Construc�ion Contract
GENERAL CONDITYONS
' a) claims by Contractar's,Subcontractor's,or Sub-subcontractor's employees under workers'compensa#ion,disability
benefit and other simiIaz empioyee benefrt acts;
b) claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's,
, Subc�ntractor's,or Sub-subcontractor's employees;
c} claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's,
Subcontractor's,or Sub-subcontractor's employees;
� d) claims far damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained(1)by a person as a result
ofan offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor,Subcontraaor,Sub-subcontractor,or(2)by another
Person;
� e) claims for damages,ottier than to the Work itsel�becaeise of injury to or destruction oftangible property,including loss
of use resuldng therefrom;
� � claimsfordamagesbecauseofbodilyinjury,deathofapersonorprope�tydamagearisingoutofownership,maintenance
or use of a motor vehicle;and
FJ claims involving contractual liability applicable to the Contractor's obligaUons under Paragaph 27.
' 2) The ContracWr and,unless oihecwise specified,each of Contractor's Subcontractors and Sub-subcontracfors,shall procu�and
maintain the iosurance required by Pazagraph 28(Axl)for not less than thc following covecages and Iimits,or greater ifiequired by law,in the following
categories,amounts,and detai[:
� a) Workers'Compensation insurance for statutory amounts including a Voluntary Compensation Endorsement;
b) Employer's Liability insurance for$1,000,000 per Accident and Disease;
' c) Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability insurance with combined single limits for bodily injury and property
damage of$5,000,000 each occucrencc.
Such policy shatl include the foilowing coverages or endorsements(all references are to current Insurance Services Office standard forms):
� ► Independent Contracto�Liability
► Products and Completed Operations Liability to be maintained for two years after final payment
► Contractual Liability(covering the Contra�ctors obligations under Paragraph 27-INDEMNIFICATIOI�
► Additiona(Insureds-Employees
� ► Broad Form Property Damage Liability,including Completed Ogerations to be maintained for two years aft�final payment
► Personal Injury,with Employee Exclusion deleted
► Incidental Medical Malpractice Liability Insurance
► Blanket X,C,and U Coverage
' ► Severability of Interests provision
If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability policy,the General Aggegate Limit shafl not be less than
$2,000,000,and it shall apply,in total,to this Project only by specific endorsement(similar or equivalent to the Insurance Services Office form number
' CG 25 03);
d) BusinessAutoLiabilityinsuranceincludingowned,non-ownedandhiredveh'scleswithcbmbinedsingletiontitsforbodily
injury and property damage of S L,000,000 each occuirence;
' e) Umbrella Excess Liability insurance on a"following form"with combined single limits as required by the Special
Provisions. Such ooverage shall be excess of all liability insurance required under Paragraphs 28(Ax2xb)tlwugh(�; and
fl Aircraft Liability insurance including owned,non-owned,and hired aircraft(applicable only ifthe Project involves the
� use of an aircraft)wirth combined singie IimiL�for bodity injury and propaty damage of$25,OOO,U00 each occurrence.
3) a) All liabi(ity coverages must be written on an"occurrence"policy form(as compared to"claims-made")and shall be
maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment unless otherwise specificd.
� b) Ail insu�ance policies under Paragraph 28(A)shall be maintained with insurance companies qualified io do bvsiness
in the state where the Project is located and shall have a poiicyhotde�s rating of"A•or better and a financial size raling of"X"or better in the
most current Best's Ksy Rating Guide. Such policies,except Workers'Compensatioq shall specifically name Owner,Owner's mortgagee(if
' any),the ground lessor(if any),and atl of their respective directors,officers,agent�,s�vants,and employees,as additiona(insureds.
Con�aactor shall not coaunence work hereunder until true copies of policies or certificates,or both if requimd by Owner,evidencing the
insurance have been submitted to and approved by Owner.All renewai policies or certi5cates shalt be delivered to Owner not fess than twenty
{20)days prior to the expiration date of such poGcies. Contradoe shall not allow any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor to commence work
untii such Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor 6ffi obtained not less than the insurance coverages set forih in paragraphs 28(A)(2)(a)through
� (�above. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment,an additional certificate evidencing
��� 00810-14
� 14
Construction Contract �
GENERAL CONDITIONS
continuation of such coverage shall be submitted to Ownec '
c) All insurance policies under Paragraph 28{A}shall not be cance{led or adversely materially changed except afterthirty
(30)days advance written notice to Owner. Upon receipt of any notice of cancellation or adverse material change,Conkactor shall within
ten(10)days procure replac:ement policies of insurance. If Contractor fails to procure aad maintain acceptable policies of insurance in �
accordance with the tecros hereo�then Owner may,at Owrte�'s op6on,obtain such insurance at the cost and expense of Contractor,without
the noed of any notice to Contractor.
d) AllinsurancepoliciesunderParagaph28(A)sbellbespecificallyendorsedtoprovidethatthecoverageswillbeprimary �
and that any insurance carried by any additional insured required under this Paragraph 28(A)shali be exccss or non-contributory.
B. Buildcr's T2isk
1) Contractorshallpurchaseandmaintainpropertyinswanceonthebuildingandmaterials,equipment(exceptContractors'equipmenE �
es outlined under Parag�aph 28{C)),and supplies at the sife which have been or are to be incorporated into the Projeck Such insurance shalt also include
those Project materials,equipment,and supplies owned by Owner and stored off-site. 1'his insurance shall include the interests of Owner,Owner's
mortgagee(if any), the Contractor,Subcontrectors,and Sub-subcontractors in the Work. Such insurance shall be written on an"ail-risk"roplaceme�t
wst basis. �
2) Contractor shall also purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law. 'fhis
insurance shall include the interests of Owner, Owner's mortgage(if any),the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontracwrs in the Work.
3) T6e insurance under this Para�aph 28(B)shall not have a deducrible g�eater than�25,000 per occumence,and the Conhactor shall �
be responsible for payment of said deductible in the event of an insured loss. Contractor waives its rights of recovery against Owner for such deductible.
Should Contractor elect W increase said deductible,Contractor sE�all be responsible for payment of such increased de�uctible amounts. Contractor shall
provide a certificate of insurance evidencing such required coverage to the Owner upon request. Any insured loss is to be adjusted with Owner and made '
payable to Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause.
C. Contractofs Eaaioment Insurance �
The Contractor shall purchffie and maintain contractor's equipment insurance covering const�uction machinery,equipment,and tools used by the '
Contractor in the performance of the Work.Such coverage shall be written on a policy form at least equivalent to that provided by a"Contrectots Equipment Floater"
as customarily defined within the insurance industry. Contractor also a�ees to notify any Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors of their obligation to insure any
machinery,equipment,and tools used by t}�e Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the performance ofthe Work.
D. Indeoendent Obliuetions ,
The Contractor's insurance obligations wntai�d in this Para�aph 28 are separaie from and in addition to the Contractor's indemnification obligations
contained in Paragaph 27 of this Contract. '
29. SEPARATE COIVTRACCS A1ND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILI'TY OF CON1'RAGTORS
. A. Construcdon of other phases of the overall Project will be conducted concurrendy with the perfoimance oPthis Contract Accordingly,it shaii �
be the responsibility ofthe Contractor to fully coordinate its activities with those of a!l other contractors and with the Owner's Representative to effectively prosecute
the overall completion ofthe Pmject with a minimum amount of interferena and to prevent discrepancies with the continuous Work,and pamit eerty access for
other trades. It is specificaity understood that other work may be scheduled at the sazne time and in the sasne areac as the Contractor's Work. The Contr-actor shatl
intelligently administer its contractual obligations and cooperate to the fuUest extent with other contractors. Additionally,the Contractor specifically agrees to �
coordinate its Shop Ihawings with those of other contractors.
B. The Contractor sl�all be responsible for the coordmahon of the mstallat�on by the Owner,or�ts contractors,of all fixt�ues and equipment to
be purchased by the Owner.Toward this e.nd,the Contractor agees to provide access to the Project for the delivery,setting in place and installation of the fumiture,
fumishings,fixtures,machicery and equipment,in accordance with the Owner's installation schedule,for the Ovmer's exclusive use in such setting in place and �
installation in addition,the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owners other contractors for the installation of utilities,equipment and fixtures.
C. The Contiactor shall afford oth�contractors reasonable opportunity for the introducdon and storage oftheir materials and equipment and the
execution of their work,and shall properly connect and coordinate his Work with theirs. ,
D. If any part of ihe Contractors Work depends for proper execudon or results upon the wark of any other separate contractor,the Contractor
shalI inspect and promptly repoR to the Owner's Representative any apparent discrepancies or defects in such wodc thai render it unsuitable for such proper execution
and results in writing. Failure of the Contractar to so inspect and report shalt constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive its �
Work,except as to defeets which may develop in the ConVactor's Work after the execution of the Contracto�s Work.
E. Should a contractor cause damage to t6e WorEc or property of any other contractor on the Project,the party damaged shall notify the oBending
contractor in writing of such damage and the offending contractor shall bear the cosf of repairing all such damage. The Owner reserves the right to effectuate the
repairs and to charge the c�st the�eof against the offending conuactor.The Contractor hereby expressly waives all claims against the Owner for the cost of repairing ,
damage to the Work caused by other contractors. Contractor he�eby agees to attempt to�solve any issues regarding damage to anod►er conhacWr's work or damage
to its work caused by another contractor wit6lbe other contractor.
30 SUBCONTRACTORS �
co�,,.�a 00810-i 5
IS �
' Construction Contract
GENBFt�iL CONDITIONS
' A. The Contractor shatl fumish the OHmer's Representative,prior to execution of the Contract,a complete list of all major Subcontractors and
material Suppliers who are proposed for the exccution of ihe Work. .
, B. No Work may be subcontracted withont the prior written acceptance of the Owner's Representative who reserves the right not to accept any
proposed Subcontractorwhoserecord does notestablish,in theOwner's sole discretion,the experience,competence and financial abilityofthe proposed subcontractor
to perfom►the Work. The Owner shall not be liable for any additional costs incurred by the Contractor should it withhold its approval of any subcontractor.
C. No payment will be made to the Contractor for work performed by a subcontractor not accepted by the Owner.
� � D. The Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and Suppliers directly to ascertain(1}what amounts,if any,are due to them from
the Contractor,(2)the projected costs of completing the remaining portion of Uteir Work,and(3)the scope and amount of any claims and dispvtes between the
Subcontractor or the Supplier and!he Contractor.
� E. Notiiing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractuat relationship between any Subcontractor and the Owner or any agent
ar emptoyee of the Owner. Nothing in the Gontract Documents,including thc provisions of Paragraph 37,shali create any obligation on the part of the Owner,or
any employee or agent of Owner,to pay or to see to the payment of any sums to any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor or ariy other parly not directly contracting
' with the Owner.
F. The Owner shall have the rigl►t to review,with proposed Subcontractors and the Contractor,the elements of the Work W be per!'ormed by the
Subcontractors in order to find ways of reducing the Cost of the Project and the Contractor agrees to cooperate fully with the Owner in this regard
� 31. RELATTONS OF CONTRAGTOR AND SUSCONTRACTORS
A Relations
, The ConhacWr agrees to bind every Suboontractor and every Subwntractor sha�t agree to be bound by the terms of the Conuact Documenis as far as
applicable to his Work,inctading the foliowing provisions of this Paragraph 31.
B. Each Subcontractor Shall A�+ee:
' 1) To be bound to the Conlractor by the tetms of the Conhact Docum�ts and to assume toward it all the obligations and
responsibilities that ihe Contractor,by those documents,assumes toward the Owner.
' Z) To submit to the Contractor applications for payment in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3) To submit proposais for Changes of Contract in accordance with Paragraph 19 hereof and to require each and every
Sub-subcontractor to subm�t h�s proposals for Changes of Contract in accordance with Paragraph 19 hereof.
, C. T6e Conttactor Aet+ees:
l) To be bound to Subcontractors by all the obligations that the Ownea assumes to the Contractor under the Con�ract Documenfs and
by all the provisions thereof affording remedies and redress to the Contractor from the Owner.
' 2) To pay thc Subcontractor,upon Owner's payment of requisitions,if issued under the Payment Schedule as set forth in Paragraph
33,the amount�llowed to the Coniractor on account ofthe Suboontractors Work to the extent of the Subcontracto�s interest therein.
' 3) TopaytheSubcontractortosuchextentasmaybeprovidedbytheContractDocumentsortheSobcontract,ifeitherofthoseprovide
for earlier or larger payments than the procedure contained in Subparagaph(2)above.
4) To pay the Subcontractor on demand for his work or materials as far as executed and fixed in place,less the retained Qercentage,
at the time paymea�t is due,even though the Owner withholds payment pursuant to Paragraph 35 hereo�unless the cause for which the Own�is
, withholding payment is the fauh of the Subcontractor.
5) To pay the Subcontractor a just share of any fire insurance proceeds received by it,the Contractor,under this Contract
' � To make no demand for liquidated damages or penalty fa delay in any sum in excess ofsuch amovnt as may be specifically named
in the SubconVact
� To require each and every Subcontractor to submit its proposals for Changes of ContracE in accordance with Paragraph 19 hereof
' and to requiro each a�d every Sub-subcontractor to submit its proposals for Changes of Contract in accordanee with Para�aph 19 hereof.
32. LABOR AND MATEItIAIS
� A The Contractorshall provide,pay for and maintain all labor,materials,equipmen;tools,constructiott eqoipment and maclrinery,heat,material
hoisting,scaffolding,shoring,formwork,reshores,craneage,transportation,weather protection,storage,officx facilities and other facilities and services necessary
for the proper execution and completion of the Work,whether tanporary or pe�manent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. All
scaffolding shall be crected and maintained in accordance with OSHA and state and local requiranents.
, B. All materials and equipment fumished by the Contractor under this Coniract shall be new,free from fauits and defecu,of good quality,and
�.� oogiai6
� 16
Construction Contract '
G��w cormzT�oNs
conform to the requirements of the Contract Documenu. The Contractor shall afford and provide as required to the Owner and its representatives,satisfactory '
evidence of the qualiry of the materials used and complete information in writing as to where materials to be used in the performance of the Work are being
manufact�ired or assembled,and full and frce access to all shops and factories for the purposes of infonning themselves as to the general conditions and progress
of the materials to be uscd or installed. The Contractor shall ir�struct such supplieas and manufacturers to give full and accurate infom�ation directly to the Owner
or any person or entity designated by the Owner on any questions conceming quality,performance,delivery status and such oiher data as may be requested by the '
, Owner or its designated represencative. The Owner,the Owner's Representative,and al!others designated by the Owner shall,at all times,have free and safe access
to the office,shops,and}�d of the Contractor to verify any information about the Wortc given by the Contractor.
33. APPLICA'I'ION FOR PAYMEIVTS �
A No Appiication fot Payment will be accepted unless supported by all tequired documentation.
B. Refore the Contracto�'s first application for payment(the "Appiication(s)for Payment"), the Contractor shaq submit to the Owner's �
Representative a pmposed,comp�ehensive payment sc6edule of values(the"Payment Schedule")allocated to the various portions of the Work and For the Work of
each Subcontractor. This Payment Schedule shall be divided so as to facilitate payments W the Contractor and shali be svbstantially in the sequence of performing
ihe Contract Work.This Payment Schedule shall be compiled on the form supplied by the Oe+ner's Representative and incorporated into and be a part ofthe Contract
Documents as Exhibit E. The Owners acceptance of the Contractor's Payment Schedule shall be a condition precedent to any payment obligation of the Owner. �
Applications for Payment shall be based on the accepted Payment Schedule which st�ll be attached thereto and supported by such other documentation ffi may be
required and as approved by the Owner,the Ovme�s Representative or its construction lendec No Application for Paynient wilt be accepted unless the application
�s supporced by a comptete Payment Schedule approved by the pwner's Representatrve.
C. ThisPaym�tScheduleshaltbeusedasthebasisfortheConlractofsperiodicpaymentrequests.TtieContractorsha{Isubmittheformcomplete �
and in the number of copies directed by the Owner's Representative;the fonn and copies shall accompany each Application for Payment.
D. 1) T7►eContractorshallincludeinanApplicationforPaymentallWork,materialsandequipmentcoveredbytheApptication.Except
�set forth in subpazagraph(D)(2),the Owner shall pay Contractor for all on-site Work,materials and equipment Contractor shall provide Owner in '
the nea�t Applicallon for Payment following said paymec►t with properly executed Waivers of Lien in the form of Exhibit C for all such Work,materiais
and equipmenk The Contcactor warrants title to a11 Work,materials and equipme�nt upon his receipt of payment therefore from Owner fra and cIear of
all liens,claims,security interests or encumbrances,and thai no Work,materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been
acquired by the Contractor,or by any other person perfornung Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project,subject to an ,
agreement under which an interest therein or an encurr►brance thereon is retained by the seller or othenvise imposed by the Contractor or such other person.
The Owner shall not be responsible for sueh portion of the Work until the Work has been fulty completed and accepted by the Owner.In each Application
for Payment,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor and material supplier to submit a pmperly executed Partial Waiver of Lien in the fortn of
Exhibit C wasving his lien rights to the extent of paymenu previously received
2) If an Application for Payment is made fa materials not instailed in the Work,but suitably stored off-site at a locadon acceptable ,
to the Owne�'s Representative,such application sha11 be accompanied by legally acceptable paid invoices or bills of sale and copies of delivery tickers,
signed by the Contractor,indicating that the Convactor verif ed that the materials shown on the delivery tickets are at the location accepted by the Owner's
Representative. Failure of the ConVactor to furnish paid invoices or bitls of sale will be cause for withhotding sucf►amounts from payment until such '
paid invoices or bills ofsale have been received by the Ownets Representative.The Ov►nets Rep�esentative reserves the right to examine the stored items
prior to payment.
E. Ten percent(10°�)ofthe value of each payment made pursuant to an Application for Payment shall be recained by the Owner and shall be '
so accounted in the Application for Payment Retainage shall be due and payable to ihe Contractor at the Final Payment subject to the conditions of Paragaphs 35,
35 and 37.
34. CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT �
A In the ev�t that the Owner's Representative dces not accept the Application for Paym�t,he shall retum the Applicarion aad state in writing
his reasons for withholding payment
B. The Owner's payment to the Contractor or partial or entire use of oceupancy of the Work shal(not constitute an acceptance of any Work or '
materials not in conformity with the requirements of the Contract Doeuments.
35. PAYB�NTS WITE�IELD
A The Owner may withhold,setoff,or,on account of subsequently discovered evid�ce,nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent ,
as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account oF
I) Failure or refusal ofthe Contractor to perfortn or comply with any terms,wnditions,provisions or obligations ofthis Contract or ,
any other agreement behvcen the Contractor and the Owner or any of their related companies.
2) Defective Work not remedied.
3) Claims or iiens filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims or liens. '
4) Failure of t6e ConUacior to make payments propedy to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment.
5) A masonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the balance then unpaid. �
constra.c�e W810-17
17 �
' Construction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
� 6) Failw+e to comply with any Change Directive issued by the Owner under Paragcaph 19.
7) Damage to the property of the Owner or another contractor.
' 8) In the Owner's opinion,failure,refusal or neglect in supplying sufl5aient labor,material or supervision in the pmsecution of the
Work.
9) Failure to meet the requirements for Applicadon for Payment contained in Paragraph 33.
' 10) Failure to submit the Conscruction Progess Schedule.
11) Failure to comply with the Consm�ction Progress Schedule.
� 12) Failure to respond to a request for a Change of Contract proposal as required by Paragaph 19 hereaf.
13) Failure to provide sii submittals within the required time frame.
� 14) Failure to submit Constmction Progress Reports as required
B. When the aforementioned bases for withholding paymeat are removed,payment shatl be made for amounts withheId.
' 36. CONTRACf SUM,DISBURSEMENTS AND PAYMENTS
A. The Contract Sum is set forlh in the Contract. It is intended to include all Work descdbed in the Contract Documents and a!(increases in costs
thereo�whether foreseen or urrforeseen,including without(imiting the generality of ihe foregoing,taxes,labor and materials,a11 of which shali be bome by the
' Coniractor.
B. Should the Contractor neglect or refuse to pay any bill,invoice,or any other obligation to a Subcontractor or Supplier,incurrr.d by him for
the Project,the Owner,aftcr giving the Contractor and his surety,if any,Uuee(3)days'written notice of its intention so to do,shall have the righi to pay and dischazge
, the aforementioned biU,invoice or obligation&om any payments due or to become due the Contractor. My such payment made pursuant to this Subpazagraph by
the Owner shall be considered ss a payment to the Contractor and shall be credited against the amounts due the Contractor hereunder.
' G. Arry and all funds paid to the Cont�actor pursuant to this Coniract are hereby deciared to wnstituie trust funds in the hands ofthe ConUactor,
to be applied first to the payment of claims of Subcontractors,laborers,and Suppliers arising out of the Work,w claims for utilities fumished and taxes imposed,
and to the payment of premiwns on surcty and other bonds and on insurance,before application to any other purpose. Whenever required by the Owner,it shall be
the duty of the Contractor to file w�th the Ovmer a verified statement,in a form satisfactory to the Owner,certifying the amounts then due and owing from the
Contractor for labor and materials,setting forth therein the names ofthe persons whose charges or claims for laboror materiais are unpaid,and the undisputed amoum
� dne to each respectively.
D, No payments made hereunder by the Owner to the Contcactor prior to Fina1 Payment shall be deemed conclusive as to the sctual value of the
Work performed by the Contractor or of the Contractor's perfom�ance of his obligations under this Contract
' E. The Owner reserves the right to issue progress payment checks and final payment checks jointly to tt�e Contractor and any Subcontractor or
Supplier at the OwnePs option.
� 3'7. COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYiVIEN7'
A. Upon ihe completion ofthe Work by the Contractor,the acceptance ofthe Work by the Uwner,and the release of all claims against the Owner
and the Work by the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers(which re[eases shall be evidenced by final waivers and releases,propedy recorded releases
of liens,or other documents acceptable w ihe Owner),the Contractor shall f le a request for Snal payment Thereafter,the Owner shall pay the Contract Price(as
' adjusted by any Changes of Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 19 h�eo�tess all prior payments to or for ffie account of the Cantract to the Contractor as Snat
payment("Final Payment'�.
B. Upon the receipt of the Contractor's Final Application for Payment,including Exhibit D,the Owner shall promptly meke a f[nal inspection,
' snd if the Owner 6nds the Work acceptable and complete in strict accordance with the Contract Docnments the Owner shalt promptly issue Final Payment Final
Payment shatE be made upon Complction ofthe Work and shall indicate the Owner's Final Acceptance of the Work and his acknowledgment that the Work(excluding
any further warranty and guaranty obligazions)hss been oompleted and is accepted under the tem�s and c�nditions of the Contract Documents. Comple6on of the
Work shall mean:(1)fu11 perfamance of all Conbract terms;(2)�ceptance of the Wodc by Owner,(3)resolution of all outstanding Changes of Contrac�(4)
t complerion of all"punch-list"items;and(5)delivery of all final lien waivecs,wananties,the CeRificate of Occupancy(if such is to be obtained by Contractor),and
required"as-buitt"drawings.Ifpriorto the makingofFinal Payment the Owner finds deficiencies in the Work,the Owner shall prompUy notify the Contractor thereof
in writing,describing such deficiencies in detail. After the Contractor has remedied any defic9encies noted by the Owner,the Contractor shall request a finai
inspection and the Owner shatl make such inspection and follow the procedure set forth in this Paragaph.
' C. From rime m time,as portions of the Work are completed by the Contractor,the Owner shall have the right,upon giving the Contractor prior
written notice,to accept any portion of the Work that the Owner desires to use and occupy. Such partial acceptance s6a11 be made in writing and thereafter the
Contractor shall have no further obtigation with respect to the Work accepted,except to correcx the Work subsequently found w have been improperly done or to
replace defective materials or equipment,or to perform Work pursuant to Paragiaph 40 hereof. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the�ntrary,all
� guarantees and warrandes arising pursuant to Paragaph 38 haeof shall run from the time of Substandal Completion ofthe endre Project,and not from the time of
cw�.�c.�a 00810-18
' 18
Construction Contract � '
GENERAL CONDITIONS
any partial acceptance which occurs pursuant to ihis Subparagaph(C), '
D. Final Pavment
The making of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of aIl claims by the Owner except those arising from: '
1} Unsettled liens;
2) Faulty or defective Work appearing after completion; '
3) Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;
4) Terms of any special or extended warcanties required by the Contract Documents;or �
5) The obligations of the ContracWr under the indemnification provisions of Paragraph 27 hereof
B. Contractor's Acceotance of Fina!Pavment
The acceptance of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of all daims by the Contractor. '
3& WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
A The Contractor warrants to the Owaer that atl materials and equipment fumished under this Contraa will be new and free from defects,that '
all Work wiil be ofgood quality,free from faults and defects and in strict confo�mance with the Contract Doouments.AIL Work not confomting to these requirements,
including substitutions not properiy approved and authorized,may be considered defective. If required by the Qwner,the Contractor shall fumish satisfactory
evidence as to the kind and quslity ofmaterials and equipmen�This warranty or any other wazranty provided by the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documentc '
shall not be Iimited by the pmvisions of Subparagraph(B)beEow.
B. The Contracxor hereby guarantces a11 Work perfortned and material and equipment fu�nished under the Contract Documents against defects
due to faulty or defective materials or workmanship,or failure of the Work to confocm to the Contract Documents,as shall appear within a period of one(1)year '
from the date of Substantiat Comp[etion ofthe entire Project(unless specified elsewhere),or for a longer period if so specified elsewh�e in U►e Contract Documents
or in applicable wa�ranties supplied by others,provided,however,that if such materials or equipment or portion of the Work is fdund after such finat acceptance
not to comply wrth the Contract Documenis,the guarantee penod therenn shall commence with the date rt�s co�rected by the Contractor to comply vr�th the Contract
Documents. 7'he Contractor shalt require a similer guuanty in all subcontracts,incSuding the requirement that the Owncr be reimbursed for any damage or loss to
the Work or to other wodc resuldng from such defeas.The Contractor agrees as part of its guarantee under this Paragraph 38 to repair or remove or replace as directed ,
by the Owner,all Work which proves defective during the guarantee period or which fails to conform to the Conlract Documents;w repair,remove,and replacs,
as directed by the Owner,all damaged poctions of ihe Work resulting fran or which is incidental to defects in the Work as stated above in this Paragraph 38,or failure
of the Work to conform to ihe Contract Documents. All repairs,removafs and replace►nents must be commencod within sev�(7)da}+s from the receipt of written
notice from the Owner at times approved in advance by the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient workmen and materials to ensure prompt completion '
theraof.Should the Contractor fail to proceed in accordance with the provisions ofthis Paragraph 38,the Owner,without furtber notice to the Contractor,may furnish
ail labor and material necessary for said repairs,or removals and repfacements;all costs associated with such repair or replacement work shafl be charged to the
Contractor.
C. Upon Substantial Comp[etion of the Project and prior to Final Payment,the Cont�actor shall prepare,organiu,assemble and transmit to the '
Ovmer's Representative a duplicate set of all written wacrandes and guarantecs of oth�s appticable to the Work or required by the Contract Documents and
instrucrion,operation and mainte�ance manuais for all operating equipment and systems and for all wearing surfaces. All warrantics and guarantces of othus with
regard to services or materials shall be made for the beneft of the Owner and the Contractor and shall be enforceable by either the Owner or the Contractor and the
Conuactor shall execute any documents or tske such act+on as may be necessary to ensure that the Owner receives the benefitc thereof. Should the Contractoy or �
a Subcontractor replace any paR ofthe Work,aIt Waria[►ties or guarantees applicable w the Work replaced shell begin anew from lhe date of the Owner's acceptance
of the replacemen�
D. No contract or purchase pertaining to the Project shall allow for waiver of wamdnties or guarantees. ,
E. DIothing contained in this Patagraph 38 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respecx to eny other obligaGon which Ehe
Contractor may have under tfie Contract Documeats. The establishment of the time period of one year as set fo�th in Subparagraph(B)above or such longer period
of time as may be prescribed by law or by the other provisions of the Contract Documenis relates onty to the specific obligation of the Contractor to w�rect the Work '
and has no relationship w the 6me within which his obligetion W comply with the Conhact IJocuments may be sought to be enforced nor to the time within which
proceedings may be coromenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to his obligallons other than specifically to correci the Work.
39. TAXFS ,
A. The Contractor s6ai1 pay for all sales,consumer,use and other simiiar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by t6e Contractor_
40. RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
A. The daties and obliga6ons imposed by she Conhact Documents and the rights and remedies availabfe thereunder shall be in addition to,snd ,
not a[imitation of,any duties,obligations,rights and remedies oiherwise imposed or available by law. The Own�reeseerves the right to exercise any right or remedy
available to it either separately or concvrrentiy with any other right or remedy available to it
�
coaeaa.coa 00810-19
19 '
tConstruction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
, B. IQo action or failure to act by the awner or any agent or employee of the Owner(including the Owner's Representative)shall constitute a waiver
of any right or duty afforded it under the Contract Documents,nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in any breach
thcreunder,except ac specifically agreed to in writing. The performance of any inspections or tesis,or the omission of any iaspections or tests,or a decision not to
p�rform any inspection or test,by the Owner or any agent,employee or consultant of the Ovmer,shalt not be a waiver of any ofthe Contractofs obligations hereunder
' and shall not be construed as an approval or acceptance of the Work os any part thereo£ No payment to the Contractor(including Final Payment)or approval or
acceptance by the Ownca of any Work shall constitute a 5na1 acceptance of such Work if it is later discovered that such Work was not perfoRned in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents.
41. PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR MAT�RiAI.PAYA4EPiT BOND
� The Owner shall have the right to irquire the Contractor to fwnish at its sole discretion separate Perfo�mance and Labor and Material Bonds,in the form Exhibits
G and H. These bonds shall cover the faithfut performance of the ConVactor's obligations hereunder and the payment of all obligations which arise hereunder at
' any time prior to or during the course of construction. Such bonds shall be made out for one hundred percent(100%)of the ConUract Sum. If the Contract Sum is
increased under the terms hereof,the Contractor shall obtain a corresponding increase in the coverage of such bonds. The wst af these bonds will be paid by the
Owner. Any premium surcharge in the cost of providing these bonds is to be paid by the Contrector. All dividends accruing on these bonds shall be paid by the
Contractor to the Owner.
' 42. OWINERSHIP ANb 13SE OF DOCUMENTS
All drawings,Project Plans and Spec'sfications,or other documentation,and copies thereof,furnished by the Owner or any agent,employee or cnnsultant ofthe Owner,
or architect,are and shall remain the property ofthe Owner. They aze to be used only wiih respect to this Project and are not to be used on any ott�er project. wth
' the exception of one contcact set for the Contractor,such documents fumished to the Contractor aze to be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner on request
at the completion of the Work.
43. CUTTING AND PATCIiING OF WORK
, A. The Conhactor shall be responsible for aU cutting,fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several pazts
fit together propefly.
' B. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of ihe Work or the Work of the Owner or of any separaze contractor by cutting,
patching or otherwise altering any Work,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the Work ofthe Owner or ofany separate conUactor,except
with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate conuractor. The Contractor shall not unre�onably withhold fmm the Owmer or from any separate
contractor his consent to cumng or othennse altering the Work.
' 44. OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIAL
The Owna reserves the right to procure certsin materials for the Contractor's use on the Project,as designated by the Owner.The Conuractor shall provide the Owner
with proposed quanti6es ofsuch materials.The Owner will review the Contractor's proposal and then the Contractor and Qwnerwill mutually agee on the quantities
' suH'icieirt to complete the Project Upon such agreamen�the Contractor shall cextify in writing that the agreed upon quantities are sufficient to complete ihe Proj ect.
If additional quantides of materials are required to complete the Project,through no fault of the Owner,such excess qvantities of materials will be provided by the
Ovmer at the Contraetor's expense. The Owner shall have the right to direct the Camactor to procure any additional materiais. If the Contractor fails to do so,the
Ownec sha11 procure the materials and bill the Contractor. TI►e Contractor witl be required to pay all necxssary shipping,handling and air-freight ch�to ensure
' timely deliveay of such addiHonal materia�s.
45. IVIISCELLANEOUS
A. The Contract Documents shall be consnued in accordance with the(aws of the state in which the Project is located,
' B. If any of the provisions of the Coniraci Documents shal!contravene or be invalid under sach laws,sach contravention or invalidity shall not
invalidate the whole Contract or any other provision contained within the Contract Documents,but the Contract Documents shall be construed as if not oontaining
16e provision held w be invalid,and the rights and obligations of the parties shaEl be enforced accordingfy.
, C. The captions ofParagaphs and various Subpmagraphs in the Contract Documents are inserted only as a matter ofconvenience and forreference
and in no way define,limit or describe tt►e scope of any Paragraph or Subparagraph herein.
' D. Words of any gender used in the Contrad Documents shall be held ro inclvde any other gender,and words used in the singular shall be held
to include the plural,when the sense requires.
E. All provisions of the Conhact Documents which by their terms require perfomtance by either the Owner or the ContracWr aRer lermination
' of ffiis Contract shall survive any such temiination.
F. Any and all disputes arising hereunder sha31 be resolved hy the courts of competent jurisdictiort located in the state in which the Project is
located.
'
'
co�.me 00810-20
, 20
1
1
A1�CHITECTUR.AL AND STRUC'I'UR�iL
' SPECIFICATIONS
' FOR THE
CONSTRUCTION
' OF THE
' CABANA, POOL AND HOT TUB AREAS
�r � v ABINGDON WAY
' FOR
' Richard and Britt Gage
1
1
1
'
1
1
'
' By
ARCHITECHTURE
' Architects
'
'
1
TiTLE PAGE '
PROJECT: Richard and Britt Gage Residence Addition '
2I$U Abingdon Way
Long 1ake,Minnesota
ARCHITECT AR.CHITECHTURE Suite 101 '
Minneapolis,Minnesota 5540i Phone 512-339-2844
STRUCTURAL Meyer,Borgman&Johnson/Roland Johnson '
ENGINEF.R: Minneapolis,Minnesota
'
CERTIFICATiON:
I hereby e ' t�at this Specification was pregared by me or under my direct supervision and�at I am a '
d Architect under the laws of the State of Minnesota.
C. . un st
'
Date:4,2 2007
Minneso Architectural Registration No.7535 '
�
'
'
t
1
. '
'
'
. '
'
TITLE PAGE Page i of 1
'
'
TABLE OF CONTENTS
' DIVISION 0-BIDDING AND CONTRACTUAL REQi7IREMENT5
Title page
� Certification page
Table of contents
' Note:Pre-bid information, instruction Yo bidders,information available to bidders,bid forms,agreement
forms,and conditions of the contract(contracts between owner and builders,supplementary conditions,
equal employment opportunity/affirmative action requirements,targeted vendor business requirements,
' special conditions for coniract work involving federal labor standard requirements)are by others under
separate cover. The general conditions of the contract for construction are included at end of this
specification
, SPECIFICATIONS
DN[SIDN 1-GENERAL REQUIItEMENTS
' 01010 Summary of Work
01015 General Structural Notes
01430 Alternates
' 01050 Field Installation
OI300 Submittals
01410 Testing Laboratory Services
01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
' Q1600 Material and Equipment
01700 Project Closeoat
01740 Warranties
� DIVISION 2-SITEW4RK
02070 Selective Demolition
t02200 Earttzwork
DIVISIUN 3-CONCRETE
' 03000 Poured in Place Concrete
DI'VISION 4-MASONRY
� U420(?Unit Masonry(CMi�
04300 Stucco
� DIVYSION 5-METALS
05120 Structural Steel
, DIVISION 6-WOUD AND PLASITCS
U6100 Rough Carpentry
06170 Sttvctural Glued Laminated Units
, 06200 Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7-THERMAL ANn MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 �sulation
' 47314 Wood Shalces
07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07901 Joint Sealants
'
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 2
,
'
DIVISION 8-DQORS AND WINDUWS
08800 Glass and Glazing ,
082I 1 Wood Doors
08312 Wood Sliding Glass Doors/Glazing
08b10 Wood Windows/Glazing �
U8710 Door Hardware
DiVISION 9-FIl�iISHES �
09250 Gypsuru Drywall
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES �
DTVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT Pool,Hot Tub and Equipment(under separate cover)
DIVISION 12-FURNiSHIl�TG5 none ,
DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Gas Fireplace(under separate cover) '
DNiSION 15-MECHANICAL by others under separate cover
DIVI5ION 16-ELECTRICAL(SHORT FOR.Nn A GUIDE '
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
END OF DIVISION-BIDDING AND CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS '
,
. '
i
1
i
1
1
1
T.ABLE OF C�NTENTS ' Page 2 of 2 ,
,
r
' O1f110 S
UMMARY OF THE WORK
DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' General:
� The work of the contract consists,in general,of the construction a Cabana,a Poo1 and a Hot Tub at the
Richard and Britt Gage residence,Long Lake,Minnesota as shown on the Drawings and described in
these Specifications. It includes both tha removai of materials and the installation of new materials. The
' Owner has the right to rejects ali bids.if the Owner accepts a bid,the succ�ssfui Bidder/Buitder will
enter into an agreement with the Owner to undertake this project.
' The General construction contract inciudes the contracts,the drawings and the project manual.The
Mechanical and Electrical work shall be bid under separate contracts.
' The data.set forth in this specification and indicated on the drawings is accura#e as can be obtained,but
its extreme accuracy can not be guaranteed. Final application shall be deterinined by the appraval of the
Owner.
, The law and location of the construction sites govern the construction of any contract,alI building,
heating,ventilating,plumbing and electricai codes of the State of Minnesota and local laws and
' ordinances,which are hereby made part of each Contrac�
Scope of'Warlc; Contractors will provide material delivered to the site and all labor to eomglete the work
accarding to tho drawings aad the project manual. AIl Sub-Contractors shall be responsible to the
� General con#ractor. The Owner will enter into various Contracts as requireci to complete the work
described.
' There shall be no communication,concerning technical matters,between the Owner and the Contractors
regarding the Woz�c after it begins. All communication regarciing such matters shall take place between
the Contractors and the Architect and or his Engineers.
' 01015
GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES
' Design Uu�tt Stresses
• Structural$teel-ATSM AS72"W shapes;ASTM A36 for angles,plates saddles and bars.
� • Stcvctural Tube Stcel-ATSM A501,Grrade B. "
• Reinforcing Steel-AT'SM A615,Gra:de 60.
• Welded Wire Fabric-ATSM A185.
, • Concrete-fc=3Q0(}psi @.28 days,footing,slabs and beams;except 4000psi with 7%air
entrainment for garage slab.
• Masonry-f m= 1500 psi.
' • Concrete core fill for masonry-3000 psi @.28 days.
� • Microlam beams and PSL cols-Truss Joist MacMillan 2.OE,Fb=2900 psi treated when exterior
use.
• Glulam beams-DFL,Fb=2400 psi with exterior glue lines.
� � Dimensional iumber SPF#2 or better,treated for exterior use.
SUMMARY UF WORK Page 1 of S
' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
'
,
Design Live Loads '
� Roof Live Load-40 psf.
� Floor Live Load-40 psf. ,
• Balconies and Decks-6Q psf.
• Wind Load- 15 psf.
Foundations �
• Footings are designed for an assumed maximum soii bearing pressure of 2QOOPSP. It shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to verify that this value is achieved at the footing elevations
indicated and without long terxn damaging differential settlemen#to the structure. '
• Bac�ill material aga.inst the foundation walls shall be granular,free draining and conf.ain not more
than 10%passing#200 sieve
• Minimum soil cover for new exterior footings at bUiIiiing perimeter sha.11 be not less than 3'-6" ,
unless required by local building code to be deeper or where reqnired to match existing footing
cover. Soil cover far footings supporting attacheti exterior decks shall he 5-0".
• Unless otherwise noted,footings under exterior and interior bearing walls shall be 12"wider than '
the wall thicknass x 12"deep and reinforced with 2#4 continuous.
Structural Steel '
• Codes for Structural Steel design,fabrication and erection.
• AISC Manuel of Steel Construction,ASD,current addition.
• A11 bolts to be 3/4"diameter,ASTM A325,unless otherwise noted.Shop connections may be
welded. '
• All bearn web copes shall be mada to a 1"minimum radius.
• Provide shop drawings for all structural steel items.
Wood Framing �
• Code:NFPA National Design Specification for Wood Construction,latest edifion.
• Shop drawings are required for all Microiam and Glulam members. '
• Wood posts made up of 2 x members shali be nailed togetfier @ 18"o.c., each side,staggered
spacin�,nsing IOd nails unlcss otherwise noted.
• Double a!1 floor joists under parallel to span partitions. '
• Where indicated,joist hangers shall be 18 ga.,face mounted unless noted otherwise.
Genera! '
• Provide temporary bracing,shoring,etc,to ali structural elemenCs,as required at any stage of
construction,to withstand construction loads or any other usual load during the construction
period. Such hracing shall remain in place as long as rec}uired for safaty until completion of the �
project.
01030 AL'�ERNATES '
General
This section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Altcrnates. ,
Procedures
Coordination:Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate �
that Work into the Project. include as part of each alternate,misceilaneous devices,accessory objects,
and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part af
the Alternate. ,
SUMMARY 4F WORK Page 2 of 5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ,
'
I7efmitions:
' THE DEFINITION BEI,OW AMPLIFIES THE DEFIlVITTON IN AIA DOCUMENT A701,
"INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS."IT ASSUMES THE NORMAL BIDDING SITUATION WTTH
' CONTRACTORS STATING ALTERNATE AMOUNTS REQUESTED�N THE BID FORM. IT
ALSO A5SUMES THAT THE OWNER WILL DECIDE TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ALTERNATES
BEFORE SIGNRJG THE AGREEMENT. IT ALSO ASSUMES THAT THE BIDDII�iG
� DOCUMENTS STIl'ULATE TERMS UNDER WHiCH THE OWNER WILL ACCEPT OR REJECT
THE ALTERNATES.
Alternates: �
, A. Defmition: Aa altemate is an amount proposed by bidders and sta.ted on the Bid Form for certain
work defined in the Bidding Requirem$nts that may be added to or deductcd from the Bsse Bid
' amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction
to be completed,or in the products,materiaIs,equipment,systems,or installation methods
described in the Contract Uocuments.
' 1. The cost or credit for each aItemate is the net addition to or deduction from the
Cvntract Sum to incoxporate the Alternate into the Work No ather adjustrnents are
, made to the Contract Sum.
Procedures:
' A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully
integrate�at Work into the Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate,miscellaneous devices,accessory objects,and similaz
' items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of
the Altemate.
, B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract,notify each party involved, in
writing,of the status of each altemate. Tndicate whether alternates have been accepted,rejected,or
deferred for later consideration. Inctude a complete description of negotiated modif'ications to
' alternates.
C. Execute accepted aiternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
' D. Scheclule: A"Schedule of Alternates"may be included at the end of this Secdon. Specification
Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
' WorlE described under each alternate. �
Prodacts(Not Applicable)
� Execution
Schedule of aiternates
' Q1050 FIELD INSTALLATION
� I,$ying�nd Staldng Uut:
A Surveyor hired by th Ownsr shall meet with the 4wner or their Architect to detern2ine exact location,
accurately lay out the work and provide necessary instrume�ts,etc.,accordigg to the drawings furnished.
' However each Contractor wIll be held responsible for verifying the conect location of their work on the
premises.
' SUMMARY OF WORK Page 3 0#5
GENERAL REQUIItEMENTS
'
01300 SUBNIITTAI.S
Seqae�ce of WorWSecarity: ,
The Cabana Contractor shal!be respansible for setting a schedule and will be responsibie for coordinating '
security with the Owner.
01340 SHOP DI2AWlNGS �
Make all Shop Drawings accurately to scale and sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the
item and its method of connection to the Work, '
Submit 3 copies of Shop Drawings which are clear and legible in blue or black line on white background.
01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES '
General: ,
The Owner will select an independent testing iaboratory,if reqnired.
When initial tests indicate non-compliance wit�t the Contract Documents,subsequent retesting '
occasioned by the same testing agency,and costs thereof will be charged to the responsible Sub-
Contractor.
01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILiT1ES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS '
Genecal: ,
Owner shall pay for all water,electricity,gas,temporary heat and other utilities needed during progress
of construction. '
Products:
The vacious contractors retained by the Owner shall provide such temporary facilities,and utiiities as are '
required for the safe and proper completion of the Work.
Eae�ution: ,
The various cantractors shall maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and ,
proper completion of the Work. Remove such temparary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of
the Work will Permit.
Coordinate iocation of temporary facilities so as not to disYupt the neighbors. �
01600 MA.TERIAL AND EQUII'MENT '
Geaeral:
Substitutions:Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract Docurnents. �
Substit►rtions will be considered oniy when listed at the time of bidding.
Do not substitute materials,equipment,or methods unless such substitution has been approved ,
specifically in writing by the Architect for this Work
SUMMARY OF WORK Page 4 of 5 ,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
�
Where the phrase "or equai"occurs in the Contract Documents,do nat assume that the materials,
' equipment,or other methods will be approved as equal�nless the item has been specifica.ily so approved
for this Work by the Architect.
' Product Handling: Comply with the manufacturer's recommendation on product handling,storage and
protection.Deliver products to the job site in their original containers,with labels intact and legible. All
material shall be stored off the�round.under waterproof en-closures, and away from wet or dam�
' swrfaces. Maintain all finished s�ufaces clean and unmarred,and suitably protected until accepted by
Owner.
' 01700 PROJECT CLUSEOUT
General:
' When the various construction Work is within fifteen(15)days of completion,the various Contractors
shall give written notice to the Archi#ect of da.te of substantial completion artd ready for pre-fuxal
inspection.
' All Snbcontractors shall take action r uired to correct all defi '
eq c�encies listed and when tt�ey have been
completsd,a finaI inspection wiU be made.
' Upon completion af fmal ins�ction the Architect can state that the ro'ect is com lete or if work
P J P �
remains that a surn,satisfactory to insure the performance of the work,be retained until completion.
, When project is approaching completion and final payment,a!1 Syb-Contractors shall secure lien wavers
in full for labor and material fiunished from all suppliers. Inadequate,incomplete,or insufficient wavers
' shall constitute cause for non-approval of fmal application for payments.
Project record documents:
, Throughout progress of the Work,each Contractor will maintain an accurate record of changes in the
Contract Documents. Maintain one camplete set of the CQntract Documents on the Site,to be used only
' as the"Job Record Set".
Do not use the Jab Record Se#for any purpase other than to record ohaBges occurcing in the Contract
' Documents during the progress of the Work. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt nf information
that the change has occutred. Upon completion of the Work,and as a condition of its acceptance,deliver
the properly annotated Job Record Set to the Archite��.
, O1U740 WA�RRANTIES
, Each Contractor s1�at1 be responsible for its own work and shall repair or replace(at its own expense)ariy
defective work or material which may show itself within one year after issuance of Certif cate of Final
Completion by the Owner.
, END OF
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
'
'
' SUlVIl1�ARY�F WORK Page 5 of 5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
'
' SITE WORK
' 020'IU SEI.ECTIVE DEMOLTTION
General:
' Demolition: Provide all materials and Iabor to accomplish demolition as may be reasonably required to carry
out the Work set forth in the Contract Documents. The Demolition Contractor(This Contractor) shali
' salvage any items that are in good condihon and can be reused. All demolition exterior waIls, stairs etc.
indicated or required and not otherwise assigned,is included under the responsibility of this Contractor.
This Contractor shall protect all trees marked with a x�i ribbon. He shali also protect all fances, both
' temporary and permanent, the tree shack and the main house. This Contractor shall contact a11 utility
cornpanies for the location of atl utility lines in the construction area before beginning the work as it shail
be his responsibility#o proteet all utility lines and utility boxes of all types,bath on or in the ground
' This Contractor shall operate within the construction litnit baurtdary lines shown on#he architect's site
drawing.
' Repairs: This Contractor,at their own expense,shall matce good to the General Contractor or any�rson
whose property is damaged or destroyed as a result of demolition operations. He is not responsible far
damage caused by others,however he must inspect the pmperty to be demolished and report any damage of
' items to be sa.ved before he begins luis work.
Termination of Services: Ea.ch Trade shall terminate its own services to existing construction which are to
be permanently disconnected. They shall further make ail temporary service terminations indicated or
' replaced services required as a part of work under all Contracts.
Disposal: This Contractor is responsible for ramoval,hauling,and disposing of all debris resulting frorn his
' operation every two days.
Salvaged items shall be Ieft on the site at a spot chosen by the Construction Manager.
IEND OF SECTION 02070
,
'
,
,
'
' SELECTIVE DEMQLITION Page 1 of 1
'
'
IEARTHWORK
SECTIOAl'02200
, PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and generai provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifcation Sections,apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
, i. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-gra.de, walks, pavements, and
landscaping.
2. Excavating and backfilting for buildings and structures.
' 3. Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for walks and pavements.
5. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
' B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Conerete"for concrete encasings,cradies, and
' appurtenances for utility systems.
2. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
3. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
, 4. 6 inches outside of minimum required dinnensions of concrete cast against grade.
S. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
6. 6 inches beneath invert elevation of pipe in trenches,and the greater of 24 inches
wider than pipe diameter or 42 inches�vide.
' 1.3 DEFJNITIONS
' A. Excavation consists of#he removal of materia.l encountered to subgrade elevatians and the
reuse or disposal of u�ateriais removed.
B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an exca.vation or the top surface of a fill or bacicfill
' immediately below subbase,drainage fill,or topsoit materials.
C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not
, available from excavations.
D. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and base course in a paving system
or tlie Iayer placed between the subgrade and sw�face of a pavement or walk.
' E. Base Course: The Iayes placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving
system.
' F. Dra.inage Fill: Course of washed graziular material supparting sIab-on-grade ptaced to cut
'offupward capillary flow of pore water.
' G. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without direction by the Archit�� Unauthorized excavation,as
well as remedial work directed by the Archrte�t,shall be at the Contraetor's expense.
' EARTHWORK P 1 of 6
�
'
,
H. Structures: Building, Pool,Hot Tub, foatings,foundations,retaining walls, slabs,tanlcs,
curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-m�ade statioaary features '
constructed above or below ground surface.
I, Utilities include on-site nnderground pipes,we11,septic system,conduits,ducts,and cables, ,
as well as underground services within buiiding lines.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: PerForm earthwork complying with requirements of auttiorities ,
having jurisdiction. .
I. Before commencing earthworlc, meet with the Architect, and other concerned ,
entities as required. Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including
testing and inspection procedures(if any)and requirements. Record discussions
and agreements and fiunish a copy to each participant. '
1.5 PROJECT C4NDITIONS
A. ExistingUtilities: Do not interruptexistingutilities servingfacilides occupied bythe Owner '
or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable
temporary utiiity services have been provided.
1. Provide a minimum 48-hours'notice to the Architect and receive written notice to '
proc�ed before intemipting any utility.
B. Coordinate with utility compaaies and Owners as to shutoff services if lines are active. '
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOII,MA.TERIALS I
A. General; SEE STRUCTURAL NOTES AND DETAILS: '
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethyiene film warning tape manufactured for '
marking and identifying underground utilities,6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility.
B. Detectabte Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistaat polyethylene film warning tape '
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities,6 inches wide and 4 mils
thick minimum,continuously inscribed with a description of the vtility,with metallic core
encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protecfion,detectable by metaI detector whea t
tape is buried up to 2'-6"deep.
1. Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to uti�ities as follows: '
a. Red: Electric.
b. Yellow: Gas,oil,steam,and dangerous materials.
c. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
d. Blue: Water systems. '
e. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3-EXECLTTION ,
3.1 PREPARATION
�THWp� Page 2 of 6 '
,
'
' A. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused
b}settlement, iateral movement,undermining,washout,and other ha2ards created by
eazthwork operations.
' B. Tree protection is specif ed in the Division 2 Section"Selective Demolition."See Architect
if it appears that grading may damage existing tr�s
' 3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and snbsurface or grour�d water,fram ponding on prepared sub$rades,
and from floQding Project site and sunrounding azea.
' B. Protect subgrades soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
' 3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Classified Excavation: Excavatian is classified and includes excavation to required
subgrade elevations. Excavation will be classifted as earth excavation or rock excavation
, as follows:
1. Earth excavation includes exca.vation of pavements and other obstauctions visible
' on surface;underground struchues,utilities,and other items indicated to be demolisi�ed and
removed;together with soil and other materials encountered that are not classified as zrock
or unauthorized excavation.
' 3.4 STABII,ITY OF EXCAVATI�NS
A. Comply with Iocal codes,ordinances,and requirements of authorities having jurisdictian
' to maintain stable excavations.
3.5 A.PPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
' A. Notify Architect when excavations have reacheci required subgrade. �
B. When unforeseen unsatisfactory sail is present, continue excavation and replace with
' compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION(T�ANY)
, A. Fi11 unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated
bottom elevation o£concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom,without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used ta bring elevations to proper position
' when acceptable to the Architec�
1. Fiil unauthorizsd excavations under ot�er construction as directed by the Architect.
, 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stocicpiie excavated materials acceptable for backfiIl aBd fill soil materials, including
' acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place,grade,
.and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store.within drip
' line of remaining trees.
3.8 BACKFII,L
, A. Backfill excavations promptly,but not before compieting the following:
EARTHWORK Page 3 of 6
'
'
1. Acceptance afconstructionbelow finish grade uacludingperimeterinsulation where ,
applicable.
2. Surveying Iocations of undergronnd utilities for record documents.
3. Testing, inspecting,and approval of underground urilities. '
4. Concrete form work removal.
5. Remova�of trash and debris from excavation.
B. Place and compact initial bacl�ill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material,free of '
particles larger than 1 inch,to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
G Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. '
D. Fil!voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing,and sheeting is removed.
E. Place and compact final bacicfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. '
F. Install wazning tape directly above utilities,l2 inches below fmished grade,except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs. '
G. Drainage Backfill:Place and compact drainage backfill of filtering material over subse�rface
drain,in width indicated,to within i2 inches of final subgrade. Overlay draina$e backfill '
with one layer of filter fabric, overlapping edges at Ieast 6 inches.
3.9 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, '
obstructions,and deieteri.aus materials from ground surFace prior to placing fills.
1. Plow stcip,or breaic up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill '
material will bond with existing surface.
A. Place fill mater�al in layers to required eIevations for each location listed below. '
1. Under grass,use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements,use subbase or base materia�,or satisfactory excavated '
or borrow soil materiai.
3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material.
4. Under buiiding slabs in all occupied areas,use special gas permeable material(for
Radan prot6ction). ,
3.10 MOISTURE C�NTROL
A. Grade all contours so the slope is away from a1I structures and starting 6"i�elow finished '
buiIding surfaces IE,stucco,wood,Etc.
3.I1 COMPACTION '
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment,and not more ihan 4 inches in loose depth for '
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevatio�s.
Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. t
C. Percenta.ge of Maximum Dry Density Rec}uiremeirts: Compact soil to not less than the
following pexcentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557: '
EARTHWORK Page 4 of b
. '
'
1. Under structures,pool,hat tub,building slabs,steps,and pavemeats,compact the
� top 12 inches below subgrade and each layer o£backfill or filt material at 95}�srcent
maximum dry density.
2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below sabgrade and each layer of
bacicfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
' 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas,compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each
layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent m�imum dry density.
, 3.12 GRADING
A. General: Uniformiy grade areas to a smooth sur£ace,free from irregular surface changes.
CompIy with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
1 indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
' 2. Cut out soft spots,f ll low spots,and h im high spots to conform to required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water ar�vay from buiidings(See Drawings and 3.10 A
, above)to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following
tolerances:
' I. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus Q.10 foot.
2. Walks: Plus ox minus 0.10 foo�
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
' C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Futish subgrade tolerance to 1/2 inch when teste�with a
i 0-ft straigirtedge.
' 3.13 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Under pavements arnd walks,place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place
base course material over subbases to pavements.
� 1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moist�re content to requir�l grades,
lines,cross sections and thiclrness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4�54
1 relative density.
2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
3. When compacted subbase or base course thickness is 6 inches or less, place
materials in a single layer.
1 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, plac8
materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches tluck or less than 3
inches thick when compacted.
' 3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Gzaded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic,freezing,and erosion.
' Keep free oftrash and debris.
B. Protecting axisting site marked vegetation and drawing tnarked vegetation: Protect e�sting
' trees,shrubs,Etc.from damage within grading limits
C. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded,rutted,settled,or lose compaction due to subsequent
' construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architec�reshape
� and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density.
EARTHWORK Page 5 of b
�
S lin . 'n the Pr 'ec t' ve finished '
D. et# g Where settling occurs dun g o,� t conec zon penod., remo
surfacing,backfill with additional a}�proved material,compact,and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance,quaiity,and condition of finished surfacing to matc6 adjacent �
work,and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATER�ALS '
A. Disposal:Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material,includingunsatisfactory soil,
trash,and debris, Note:the surplus soil and unsatisfactory soil will be disposed of on the ,
Owner's property as directed by the architect Only trash and debris will be legally disposed
of off site.
'
,
�
. �
, 1
. '
�
�
�
�
'
�
,
END OF SECTION 0220Q Page b of 6 �
�
'
� POURED-IlwPLACE CONCRETE
' SECTION 03300
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER.
� PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections (General Structural Notes), apply to
this Section.
I1.2 SCTNIlVIARY
' A. This Section sgecifies cast-in place concrete, including formworlc, reinforcing, mix
design,placement procedures,and finishes.
B.. Cast-in-place concrete includes the foilowing:
� 1. Foundations and footings.
2. Slabs-on-grade.
3. Equipment pads and bases.
' C. Rel ted S ti n : Th
a ec o s e foliowtng Sechons contam requuements that relate to this
Section:
' 1. Di�vision 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for concrete wallcs, and
aprons. .
� 1.3 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary mate�ials and items, incIuding reinforcement and forming
' accessories, admixtures, patching campounds, waterstops, joint systems, c�ring
compounds,dry-shake finish materials,and others if requested by Architect.
, C. Shop drawings for reutforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placitig concrete
reinforcemen�. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detaiiing
Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spaaing, bent bar
diagrams, and arrangement of c�ncrete reinforcemen�. Include special reinforcing
' required for openings through ooncrete structures.
D. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, s�urces, and
' descriptians,as follows:
1. Waterstops.
2. Vapor retarder/barrier.
, 3. Tile inlays
G. Material certificates in lieu of material lahoratory test reports. Material certificates shall
, be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies
with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from acimixhue
manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.
' CONCRETE Page 1 of 8
'
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and S#andards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, �
and standards,except where more stringent requirements are shown or specifted:
1. ACI 318, 'Bailding Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." ,
2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSn"Manua.i of Standard Practice."
PART 2-PRODUCTS �
See General Structural Notes: in Divisioa I General requirements for:
2.1 REINFORCING MA.TERIALS �
A. Reinforcing Baxs:
B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bazs: '
C. Steel Wire: AS'TM A$2,piain,cold-drawu steel. (if any,see drawings).
D. Welded Wire Fabric: (If any,see drawings). ,
E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and weIded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-tyge �
supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where ,
base material will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of stipports are in contact with
forms,provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic(CRSI,Class 1)or stainless '
steel{CRS�,Class 2).
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I. i
1. Use one brand of cement througb.aut Project unless otherwise acceptable to �
Architec�.
B. Fly Ash: AST'M C 618,Type F.
C. Normal-\1Veight Aggcegates: ASTM C 33. Provide aggregates fram a single source for '
exposed concrete.
1. For exposed exterior surfaces,do not use fine or coarse aggre�ates that contain '
substances that can cause spailing.
2. Local aggregates not camplying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to '
produce concrete of adequate str�ength and durability by special tests or actual
service may be used when acceptable to Architect.
D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. '
E. Water: Potable.
G. Admixhtres, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent ,
chloride ions.
H. Air-Entraining Admi�cture: AS'I'M C 250, certified by manufacturex to be compatible ,
with other required admi�fures
C�NCRETE Page 2 of 8
'
'
1. Available Products: Snbject to compiiance with requirements, products that may
' be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
2.. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
� I. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A.
1. Available Products: Subject to compIiance with
� 2.3 RELATED MATERTALS
l. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
� A. Sand Cushion: Clean,natural sand.
� B. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested
according to ASTM E 154,as fotlows:
� 1. Polyethylene sheet uot less than$mils thick.
C. Liquid Membran�Forcning Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing
compound cornplying with ASTM C 309, Type �, Class A. Moisture loss not more than
� 0.55 kg/sq.met�r when applied at 200 sq.ft.lgal.
1. Provide material tha#has a maximum volatile organic compound(VQC)rating of
' 350 mg per liter.
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.
PROPORTIONTNG AND DESIGNTNG A��S
� See)1015 General Structwal
' 2.4 CONCRETE��iG
A. Ready-Mixetl Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,and as specified.
' PART 3-EXECUTION
3.i GENERAL
� A. Coordinate ttie installation of joint materials, vapor retarderlUarrier, and other related
materials with placement of fonms and reinforcing steel.
' 3.2 FORMS
A. General: Design,erect,support,brace,and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral,
� static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such
loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size,shape,
alignment, elevation, and posidon. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and
surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 3471imits:
, I. Pravide Class A taierances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
2. Provide Class C tolerances for otb.er concrete surfaces.
1 B. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate
woric of other trades. Determine size and locatiou of openings,recesses, and chases from
trades providing such items. Aacurately giace and securely seipport items built into forms.
I3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARR�R IldSTALLATION
' CONCRETE Page 3 of 8
�
A. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel
with direcNon of pour. ,
B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-
sensitive tape. �
1. PLACING REIl�ORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Conarete Reinforcing Steel Institute's zecommended practice for �
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement place�nent and
supports and as specified.
1. Avoiding cntting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement ,
placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose nist and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that �
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against dispiacement. Locate and �
support reinforcing hy metal chairs, r�mners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approveci
by Architect.
D. Place reinforcement to main#ain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. �
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcennent in position
during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so snds are directed into concrete,not
toward exposed concrete surfaces. ,
E. Instail welded wira fabric in lengths as long as practicable.Lap adjoining pieces at ieast
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous iaps in either direction. �
3.4 JOINTS
A. Waterstops: Pmvide waCerstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to ,
form continnous diaphragm in each join� Support and protect exposed waterstops during
progress of Work. Fieid-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacteuer's printed
ittstructions. ,
B Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Gtade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points
of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surface.s, such as column pedestals, �
foandation walls,grade beams,and other locations,as indicated.
1. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
C. Contraction{Control)Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contcaction joints in slabs-on- ,
grade to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by one-fourtli of
slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fowrth of slab depth,unless otherwise indicated. �
1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded pIastic, hardboard, or fiberboard
strip into firesh cancrete until top surface of strip is flush vrith slab surface. Tool
slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts '
and clean groove of loose debris.
2. Contraction joints in unexposed slabs may be formed hy saw cuts as soon as
possible after slab fmishin�g as may be safely done wrthout dislodging aggregate. �
3. If joint pattern is not showa, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either
direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at colurnn
centerlines,half bays,third bays).
4. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." /
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
CONCRETE Page 4 of 8
'
'
' A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and coFnplete formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
ins#aliation of their work.
' B. General: Comply with ACI 3U4, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete,"and as specified.
� C. Deposit concrete continuously ar in tayers af such thickness that no new concrete will be
placec� an concrete that has hardened sufficiently ta cause seams or planes of weaicness.
If a section cannot be placed contir�uously, provide constnxction joints as specified.
, Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final Iocation.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in fo�rmms in horizontal layers no deeper than
24 inches and in a ma�er to avoid incIined construction joints. Where placement
� consists of several Iayers, place each layer w�ile preceding layer is still plastic to avoid
cold joints.
, 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating ec}uipment supplemented by
hand-spading, rodd'vng, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of cancrete complying with ACI 309.
� E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within timits of consituction joints, until cocnpleting placement of a panel or
section.
� 1. Consolidate concrete during piacement operations so that cc�ncrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement,other embedded items and into comers.
2. Bring slab surfaces to comect level with a stcaightedge and strike off. Use bull
' floats or darbies to smooth swface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing ia proper position on chairs during concrete placemen�.
' F. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that woulci impair quality
and strength of concrete,place concrete complyin�with ACI 305 and as specified.
� 1. Cool ingredients before mixing #o maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilied or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature,provided water equivalent of ice
� is ca.Iculated to total amaunt of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that
steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature imraediately before
, embedding in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcir�g steei, and subgrade just before piacing concrete.
Keep subgrade moislure uniform without puddles or dry areas.
' 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by hig}x temperatures,low
humidity,or other adverse placing conditions,as acceptable to Arciutect.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
� A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not
exposed to view in the finished Work ar concealed by other construction. T'his is the
' concrete svrface having texture impacted by form-facing material used,with tie holes and
defective areas repaired and patched,and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in
height rubbed down or chipped off.
� B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smoo�-formed finish on forfned concrete surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete,or a
covering material applied directly to concrete,such as waterproofing,dampproofing,
� CONCRETE Page 5 of 8
'
�
veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface
obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical �
znanner with a minimum of seams or as shown. Repair and patch defective areas wit�fms
and other projections completeiy removed and smoothed.
3:8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FIl�TISHES �
, A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing,membrane or elastic roofing,or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated. �
1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface
until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, �
when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficientIy
to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with
power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power '
units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F} 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor
levelness) measuted according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill
!ow spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling,
cefloat surface to a uniform, smooth,granular texture. �
B. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation vsing a power-driven trowel. Begin
� final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. �
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel znarks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor
flatness) and F(L) I7 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind
smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through appfied floor covering system. �
C. Trowel and Fine Broom Pinish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-
set mortar, apply a trowel finish as spec�ed, then immediately follow by slightly ,
scarifying the surface with a fine broom.
3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE TTEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by �
otlaer firades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place.
Miac, place, and cure conerete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide �
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.
B. Cwrbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping :forms while concrete is
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, '
intersections,and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and �
foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
3.10 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTTON • �
A. General: Pratect freshiy placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot �
temperatures. �n hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss
before and during fmishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply
according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before
power floating and troweling. �
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after
placing and fnishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 �
days.
CONCRETE Page 6 of 8
' C. Curing Methods: Cure concrate by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-
retaining cover cwring,or by combining these methods, as specified.
� D. Pravide moisture curing by tlie following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
� 2. Use continuous water-fog spray.
3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover,thoroughly saturate cover
with water, and keep continuously wet. Piace absorptive cover to provide
coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent
, ahsorptive covers.
E. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:
' 1. Covesr concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,placed
in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed
by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during
' cw�ting period using cover material and waterproof tape.
F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks,and curbs
' as follaws:
1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as fmal finishing operations are
� complete(within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply
uniformly in conti�auous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during
' curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that witl not affect surfaces to be covered with
fmish materials applied d�rectly#o concrete.
� G. Curing Unformed Surfacss: Cure unformed surfaces, including stabs, floor topping, and
o�her flat surfaces,by applying the appropriate curing method.
� 1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining
cover,unless otherwise directed.
� 3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Max dry pack mortar,consisting ofone part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggrega#e
passing a No. 16 mesh sieve,using only enough water as required for
� handling and pIacing.
1. G�t out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids ovex 1/4 inch in any dimension, and
� hoIes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth iess
than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with
bonding agent. Place patching martar before bonding agent has dried.
' 2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland
cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide
test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
' proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly hig,her
than surrounding surface.
A. Sampling and testing for c�uality control during concrete placement may incIude the
� following,as directed by Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, excegt modified for slump to comply
, with ASTM C 94.
a Slump: ASTM C 143;one test at point of discharge for each ciay's pour of
each type of concrete;additional tests when concrete consistency seems to
� have changed.
CONCRETE Page 7 of 8
i
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumehtic method for lightweight or normal �
weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normai weight
concrete;one for each day's pow of each type of air-entrained cancrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 10d4; one test hourly when air �
temperature is 40 deg� (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C)
and ai�ove,and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard
cyiinders for each compressive-stren�h test, unless otherwise direc#ed, �
Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cumd test specimens except when
field-cured test specimens are required.
e. Compressive-Streng�th Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour �
exceeding 5 cu, yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the
f�rst 2S cu.yd.of each concrete class placed in any one day;one specimen
tested at '7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen �
retained in reserve for Iater testing if required.
f. When tofial quantity of a given class of concrete is Iess than SQ cu, yd.,
Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory
slrength is provided. ,
C. Test results will be reported in writing to Arclutect, ready-mix producer,. and Contraotor
within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive streng#h tests shall contain the Project
identifcation name and number, date of concrete pIacement, name of concrete testing �
service,concrete type and class,location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive
strength at 28 days,concrete mix proportions and materials,compressive breaking strength,
and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. '
END OF SECTION 03300
�
�
�
r
�
�
�
�
�
CONCRETE Page 8 of 8 '
'
. UNIT MASONRY
� SECTIUN d4240
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER".
PART 1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Suppiementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
I.2 SUMMARY
� A. This Section includes the following:
' 1. Concrete unit masonry.
t.3 SY5TEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
� A. Provide uui�t masonry tha.t develops the following installed compressive strengths(fm}:
1, For concrete unit masozuy: As follows:
' a. fm= 1500 psi.
b. As indicated.
� 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Divisian I
� Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each difFerent masonry unit,accessory,and other mannfactured produc#
indicated.
' C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and pIacemen# of unit
masonry reinforcing bars. Camply with ACI 315 "Details a�d Detailing of Concrete
' Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and
arrangement of masonry reinforcement.
D. Material certificates for the following signed by manufacturer atid Contractor certifying
, tha#each material complies with requirements.
1. Each difFerent cement pcoduct required for mortar and grout including name of
� manufacturer,brand,type,and weight slips at time of delivery.
2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
3. Each type and size of joint reinforcemen�.
4. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 27Q.
� 5. Grout mixes. �nclude description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
6. Masonry units.
' E. Hot weather construction procedures evidencing complianr.�with requirements specified
in referenced vnit masonry standard.
� 1.5 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Unit Masonry Sta�dazd: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Spec�cations for Masonry
Structures,"except as otherwise indicated.
�
' UNIT MASONRY Page 1 of b
1. Revi e ,
s ACI 530.1/ASCE b to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2,
and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.S.I.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to
modi:fy Article 2.I.1.4 by deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and �
conduits built into masonry.
2. Mortar camposition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C 780.
3, Grout compressive strength wili be tested per ASTM C 1019. �
1.6 DELNERY, STORAGE,ANb HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. �
B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, tempera.ture changes, �
contaminants, cortosion,and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until ztnits
are in an air-dried condition.
C. Stora cementitious materials off the ground,under cover, and in dry Iocation. '
D, Store aggegates where grading and ather required characteristics can be maintained and
contaminataon avoided. � �
E. Store masonry accessocies including metal items to grevent corrosion and accumulation
of dirt and oil. ,
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls,projections, attd sills with '
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for �
at least 3 days after building masonry walis or columtts.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout,mortar,and soil from staining the face of masonry to be '
left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in
contact with such masonry.
l. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar spfatter by means of '
coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
D. Hot-Weather Construction: Comply wifti referenced unit tnasonry standard. '
PART1 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY LTN�fS �
A. General: Coxnply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete
masonry unit required. �
i. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows:
a. For iintels,corners,jambs,sash,control joints,headers,bonding,and ,
other special conditions.
b. Square�edged units for outside corners,except where indica#ed as
bullnose.
2. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated �
below for size tl�at are manufactured to specified face dimensions within
tolerances specified in #he applicable referenced ASTM spec�cation for '
concrete masoz�ry units.
UNIT MASONRY Page 2 of 6
,
� -.__
a. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8
' inch less than nominal widths by nominal heigiits by nominal lengths
indicated on drawings.
1. Provide Type I,moisture-controlled units.
� 2. Provide Ty}�e II,non-moisture-controlled units.
3. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture,
unless otherwise indicated.
� B. Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90,Grade N and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area
� compressive strength indicated beIow:
a. 1900 psi.
� b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete
�nit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
1 Weight Classification: Normal weight.
' C. Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 145, Grade N and as follows:
� 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide �its with minimum average net area
compressive strength indicated below:
a. 1800 psi.
, b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete
unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated.
' 1. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
, A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type T or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Frovide natural color or white cement as required to produce
required mortar color.
1 B. Masonry Cemen� ASTM C 91.
C. Water. Clean and potable.
, 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL
� A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit
masonry standard and this article.
� B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as foliows:
' 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615.
2. Grade 60.
, C. Plain Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.
2.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
� A. Generai: Provide joint reinforcemen# complying with requirements of referenced unit
masonry standard and this article,formed from the foltowing:
' 1. Galvanized carbon stee!wire,coating class as required by referenced unit
iT1VIT MASONRY Page 3 of 6
'
masonry standard for application indicated.
�
B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and '
plain cross rads into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet,with prefabricated cor�er and
tee units,and complying with requirements indicated below:
1. Wire Diameter for SidO Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage). r
2. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1875 inch.
3. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage).
a. Ladder design with perpendicuIar cross rods spaced not more than 16 �
inches o.c.
b. Truss design with diagonal cross rads spaced not more than Ib inches o.c. '
and number of side rods as follows:
C. Manufact�rers: Subject to compliance with requiremeuts,provide joint reinforcement ,
2.5 T'IES AND ANCHORS,GENERAL
A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with ,
requirements for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of#his article.
B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,coating cIass as required by referenced unit '
masonry standard for application indicated.
1. Wire Diameter: As indicated. '
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: As folIows:
1. ASTM A 526 (commercial quality), Coating Designation G6U, stesl sheet zinc- '
coated by hot-dip process on continaous Iines prior to fabrication, for sbeet metai
ties and anchors completely embedded in mortar.
2. ASTM A 366 (commercial quality) cold-rolled carbon steel sheet hot-dip '
galvani�ed after fabrication to comply with ASTM A I53, Class B2 (for unit
lengths over 15 inches)and Class B3 (for unit Iengths under 15 inches), for sheet
metal tiss and anchors exposed to the weather and not completely embedded in �
mortar and gout.
D. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or
ASTM A 153,Class B3,as applicable to size and form indicated. �
E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS '
C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A Sb3
hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A ,
153, Class C;of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations:
1. Headed bolts. '
2. Nonheaded bolts,straigh�
3. Nonheaded bolts,bent in manner indicated.
2.7 MLSCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES �
A. Nonmetallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D
1056, Type 2 (closeci cell), Class A (cellular rubber and rubber-like materiaLs with �
specific resistance to petroleum base oils), C,rade 1 (compression-deflection range of 2-5
UNiT MASUNRY Page 4 of 6
. '
'
psi), compressible up to 35 percent, of width and thiclrness indicated, formulated from the following
� material:
I. Neoprene.
2. Urethane.
� 3. Polyvinyl chloride.
B. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fzt standard
� sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as
indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000,Designation 2AA-805.
� 2. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D 2287,General Purpose Grade,Type PVC-65406.
' 2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT 1VIIXES
A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators,retarders,water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds,or other admixtures, ,
' unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
� B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270,Proportion Specification,for types
of mortar indicated below:
, C. Mortar for Unit Masanry: Comply with ASTM C 274, Property Specification for job-
mixed mortar and ASTM C 1142 for ready-mixed mortar,of types indicated below:
, D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 4'76 and referenced unit masonry
standard.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
� 3.1 EXAMIlVATI�N
, A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting
performance of unit masonry.
' 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accura.te spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
� widths and for accurate iocating of openings, movement-type joints, retums, and offsets.
Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners,jambs, and where possible at other
locations.
� B. Lay up wal�s to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately
spaced and coordinated with other construction.
� C. Lay concealed masonry with aIl units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by Iapping
not Iess than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
� D. Stopping and Reswning Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for on�half
nznning bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed
surfaces of set masonry, if required}, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to
, laying fresh masonry.
iINIT MASONRY Page 5 of 6
,
E. Su ort maso '
pp nry solidly with mortar,unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING �
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: �
i. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortaz in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,
columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with �
grou�
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar
bed including areas under cells. �
3.4 INSTALLATiON OF REINFORCED UTTIT MASONRY
A. General: Instap reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements of referenced unit '
masonry standard.
B. Temporary Formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry ,
elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make
sufficientiy tight to prevent ieakage of mortar and gou� Brace, tie, and support �
forms to nnaintain position and s�ape during construction and curing of reinforced
masonry.
C. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained ,
snfficient strength to resist grout pressure.
D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened '
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
3.5 REPAIRING,POINTING,AND CLEANING �
A. Remove and replace masonry units that aze loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or if units da not match adjoining units. Instail new units to match adjoining '
units and in fresh mortar or grout,pointed to elimivaate evidence of replacemenY.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints,enlarge any voids or holes,except weep holes, and �
completely fill with m.ortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction to provide a neat,uniform appearance,prepared for application of sealants. �
C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as �
follows:
1. Remove Iarge mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetatlic �
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from con#act with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or �
waterproof masking tape.
3. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK
45 applicable to type of sta.in present on exposecl surfaces.
D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to �
Installer,that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at tnne of
Substantial Completion. '
END OF SECTION Q4200
U1�TIT MASONRY Page 6 of 6 ,
,
� S
TUCCO
' SECTION 04300
PART 1 GENERAL
t.O 1 SUMMARY
� A. Section Description: Portland Cement Plaster over conventionally framed and sh$athed
substrates and masonry.Material used shall be the same�at is on the existiztg house. WaII
' material conditions will be different.
B. Sectian Includes:
' l. Water-Resistive Barrier
2. Lath and accessories
3. Plaster materials
' 4. Optional acrylic primer
5. Acrylic finish
C. Products installed by others bat not supplied under this section:
rl. Flashing PapeYslMembranes:Rough window sills shall be properly covered with
reinfarced cnated vapor barrier,grade A or B prod�ct under the direct supervision
of the suh contractor.
� 2. Flashing and Sheet Metal:Refer to Section 07600.Fabrication and instailation of
related flashing and sheet metal components shall be under direct supervision of sub
contractor. Mechanic shall be experienced and competent in shect metal trade.
' 3. Joint Sealers: Refer to Section 07900. Installation of joint sealant shail be under
direct supervision of the sub coatractor. Joint sealant installer shall be e�rerienced
and competent in the installation of elastomeric construction sealants.
' 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01330—Submittal Proc,�dures
, B. Section 05400—Coid-Formed Metal Framing
C.Section 061 i 0—Wood Framing
D. Section 06164—Sheathing
E. Section 07600—Flaslting and Sheet Metal
� F. Section 07904—Jo�t Sealers
G. Section 08500—Windows
H.Section 08310— Access Doors and Panels
� I. Section 08550—Wood Windows
J. Section 09250—Gypsum$oard
K. Section 10200— Louvers and Vents
� I.03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM}
� Standards.Most cwTent version.
1. ASTM C 79:Standard Spectficahon for Treated Core and Nontreated Core
Gypswn Sheathing
, 2. ASTM C 91: Standard Specification for Masonry Cement
3. ASTM C 15U: Standard Specification far Portland Cement
4. ASTM C 206: Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lizne
S. ASTM C 260: Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
' Concrete
04300 STUCCO Page 1 of 7
�
'
�
. 6. ASTM C 847: Standard Specification for Mata1 Lath
7. ASTM C 897: Standard Specification for Aggrega#e for Job-Mixed '
Porttand Cement-Based Plasters
8. ASTM C 926: Standard Specification for Application of Portland
Cement-Based Plaster '
9. ASTM C 979: Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete.
10. ASTM C 1063: Standard Specification for:
11. Installation of Lathing and Furrir►g to Receive Interior and Exterior ,
Portlanc#Cement-Based Plaster
12. ASTM D 578: Standard Specification for Glass Fiber Strands
B. Portland Cement Plaster(Stucco)Manual:Portland Cement Association '
C. UBC Standard 14-1: Kraft Waterproof Building Paper 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
*NOTE TO SPECIFIER: ED1T ARTICLE B SUBSECTION 1 OR 2 BELOW T�SUIT '
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS.
A. Portland Cemsnt Plaster(Stucco):A proportioned field mixed blend of Portland cement,
masonry cement,sand,glass fibers,acrylic admixtur8 and potable water. �
B. Finish Options.
1. Stucco Finish Coat:A proportioned field mixed blend of white portland �
cement,hydrated lirne,silica sand,acrylic admixture and water.
2. Acrylic Fiunish: A proprietazy mixture of i00 percent acrylic polymer,
aggregate,water and pigments.
C. Functional Criteria. '
1. GeneraL•System shall be applied to vertically orieuted substrates and shalI
be protected from weather exposure harmfiil to coating perFormance. ,
Horizontally oriented surfaces shall be sloped for positive drainage.
2. Substrate Conditions.
a. Substrates shail be sound, dry and free of dust, latence and
contaminants. '
b. Substrate dimensional tolerances:Flatwithin 1/4(0.25)inch in any
4 foot surface radius
3. Expansion and Control Joints: Continuous expansion and control joints �
shall be installed at locallons noted on the drawings.
�.as su�aMIrr�z,s
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330: ,
1.Product Data:Acrylic finish manufacturer's groduot information,evaluation reports,
testing Inform.ation,certificates and warranty. ,
2.Shop Drawings:
3. Samples: [Indicate quantity]24 inch square samples of portland cement plaster with '
[stucco] [acrylic finish] in each color and texture specified, for preliminary appmval.
Each sample shall be prepared using the same tools and techniques proposed for Project
application. ,
1.Q6 QUALiTY ASSURANCE
04300 ST[JCCO P e 2 of 7 ,
�
,
'
' A. Plastering Contractor Qualifications
� 1. Contractor shall provide a list of completed work of eqnal scope.
2. Contractor shall hold a current certificate from the manufacturer of the acrylic finish
' to apply that material.
B. Fteld Mock-Ups:Prepare field nnock-ups to rnatch prelun�nary sampies appmved by the
Architect.
' l. The Architect shall determine location and size.
2.. Mock-up(s)shall accurately represent the products to be installed on the project,
utilizing the same tools,and techniques proposed for Project application.
' 3. The approved mock-up(s) shall be available and maintained at the job site for
reference.
' C. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule a pre-installation conference with the Architect
and Contractor,to review the work of this Section.
1.07 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
' A Deliver materiats in original containers with labels intact and legible. Store and protect
materials in cool,dry location, out of sunlight,pratected from weather and other harmful
� environment, and at a temperature above 40' F and below 110° F zn accorclance with
manufaclurer's instructions.
1 A$PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
' A. Protect adjacent construction materials that are likely to be soiled by the appiication
procass.
' B. Environmental Requirements
1. Cement Plaster
a. Cold Weather
� 1) Da not use frozen materials or materials that have been previously
frozen.
2) Do not apply cement plaster to frozen surfaces or surfaces
� containing frost.
3) Instaliation Ambient A�r Temperature:Do not mix materials or
apply cement plaster when ambient temperature is less than 40°F.
Ainbient air temperature must remain at 40° F and rising, and
� remain so for a minimmn 24 hours thereafter.
b.Hot Weather
1) Protec#cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation
during hot, wir�dy, or dry weather. Avoid application in direct
� sunligh�
2) In hot,windy or dry weather,the cement plaster should be spray
misted with potable water and then covered wit#i a single sheet of
' clear polyethylene piastic.
2.Acrylic Primer and Finish Coatings
a. Comply with acrylic finish manufactarer's recommendations for conditions
affecting product perforinance
' b. Protect installation from direct precipitation during the application and the
setting/curing period of primer and finish coat. Ensure that the finish is
fully set prior to removing protective covering.
, c. Do not use frozem mate�ials.
04300 STUCCO Page 3 of 7
�
�
d. Apply acrylic primer and/or finish only when ambient air temperature is 40° �
F and rising. Ambient air temperature shall remain at 40°F for a minimum
of 24 hours or longer if required,until the coatings are completely dry. �
e. Do not appiy acrylic primer and/or finish to"brown"coat of cement plaster
if sun is directly on#he wall surface and temperature is 75° F or higher.
Protect from dire�t sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS � �
*NOTE TO SPECIFIER:EDIT PARAGRAPH A or B,DEPENDING ON SUBSTRATES.WOOD BASED ,
SHEATf�NGS REQUIRE TWO LAYERS OF GRADE D BUII,DING PAPER. EDIT PARAGRAPH E
BELOW TO LIST
ACCEPTABLE ACRYLIC FINISHES
2.Q1 MATERIALS '
A. Buiiding Paper: Minnesota.State Building Code,Type I,Grade D, Style 2.
1. Tyvek Stucco Wrap
2. Moisture Vapar Traasmission: 35 grams/square metec/24 hours. ,
3. Water Resistance: 10 minutes minimum.
B. Asphalt Felt:Intemational Building Code,International Residennal Code,
No. 15 asphalt fett camplying with ASTM D 226 for Type 1 felt. ,
C. Metal Lath:ASTM C847,self-furring,expanded galvanized steel lath,not less than
3.4 pounds per square yard. �
1. Shapes used as grounds shall be sizsd and diraensioneci to provide
required plaster thickaesses.
2. Weather-exposed accessories shail be fabricated of galvanized steei
or zinc aUoy materials. ,
3. Profile of casing beads and controi joints shall provide screed flange
and/or embedment section.
4. Comer reinforcing shall be galvanized welded wire"Corneraid" '
(Stockton Wire Products) or equal and be fabricated for fulI
embedarent in the"brown"coat.
5. Provide standand trim items including control joints,casing beads
and base screeds. �
D. Plaster Materials
1. Portland C$ment:ASTM C150,Type I.Fresh and free of lumps.
2. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91.Fresh and free of lumps. '
3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206,Type S.
4. Sand:ASTM C897.Moist and loose.
5. Water:Clean.and potable. �
6. Fiber: ASTM D578. 0.5 inch long cho�ped f berglass,polyprnpylene or
nylon strands,allcali-resistan�
7. Admixtures:Acrylic liquid admix Acryl 60(Thoro Systems Products,Inc.)
or equaI. ,
E. Acrylic Fintsh
1..Factory prepared acrylic finish by[indicate manufacturer(s)]. . ,
2. [Indicate CoiorJ.
3. [Indicate Texture].
'
04300 STUCCO Page 4 of 7
�
�
' �
� 2.02 MTXES
� *NOTE TO SPECIFIER:DELETE.ARTICLE B,SUBSECTION 4 IF STUCCO FINISH WII.L BE USED.
DELETE ARTiCLE C, SUBSECTION 3 IF STUCCO FINISH C�AT"IF ACRYLIC FINISH WII.L BE
USED.
� A.General
1. Accurately proportion materials far each batch using measuring devices of
' known volume.
2. Size batches for comglete use within one hour after mixing.
3. Withhold IO percent mixing water until mixing is neaziy complete,then add
as z�eeded to produce necessary consisteacy. Keep water to a minimum.
' B.Mechanical Mixing
' 1. Mix each batch separateiy.
2. Maintain mixer in clean condition before, during and after plaster
preparation.
3. Maintain mixer in continuous operation while charging mixer.
� 4. Mix factory prepared acrylic finish in accordance witlt manufacturers
instructions.
, C. Mix Proportions by Volume
i. Dry Materials—Scra.tch Coat
a. 1 cubic foot portland cement
' b. 1 cubic foot masonry cement.
c. 1.5 to 2.5 pounds of 1/2 inch chopped fiber.
d.4 cubic feet sand.
' 2.Dry Materials—Brown Coat
a. 1 cubic foot portland cement.
b. 1 cubic foot masonry cement.
c. 1.5 to 2.S pounds of 1/2 inch chapped fiber.
, d. 5 to 6 cubic feet sand.
3.Dry Materials—Stucco Finish Coat
a 1 cubic foot white portland eement
b. 3/4 cnbic foot Iime.
' c.Pigments as required.
d.3 cubic feet silica sand.
4.Mixing Liquid:3 parts water and 1 part acrylic admixture.
� PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAIVIIlJATION
, A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed and
notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work.
� B. � Do not proceed with instailation until unsatisfac#ory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
' A. Buiiding Paper Asphalt Felt
' 0430Q STUCCO Page 5 of 7
'
�
I. Shal!be free from holes and breaks other than those created by fasteners. �
2. Apply horizontally with ttte upper layer lapped over the Iower layer not less
thaa 2 inches. Where vertical joints occur, paper shaIl be lapped not less �
than 6 inches.
*NOTE:MINNESOTA STATE BUII,DING CODE REQUIRES TWO LAYERS
OF BUII.DING PAPER ON WOOD BASED SHEATHIlVGS.
B. Lath:Attach to framing or substrate in accordance with ASTM C 1063,lapping sides �
not less than 1/2 inch and ends not less than 1 inch.
C. Accessories '
1. Attach level,plumb and true to create a proper screed and depth for the
cement plaster. ,
2. Install control joints to create panels relatively square,not larger than 144
square feet,and with no dimension exceeding 18 feet or a tength to width
ratio of 2-I/2:i,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. ,
D. Access Panels and Vents:Install accurateIy located and secured to substrate with
appmpriate fasteners as per sections 08310 and 1020Q.
E. Portland Cement Plaster r
1. Total thickness to mect code requirements. '
2. Nominai plaster base coat thicknesses
a. First coat"scratch; 3/8 inc�.
b. Second"brown": 3/8 inch.
3. Apply the scratch coat of cement plaster with sufficient force{by hand or ,
machine)to fili soiidly openings in the lath.
4. Horizontally cross rake the scratch coat slightly to provide key for second
. base coa�Coat must be uniform in thickness.
S. The double-back method of application(first and second coats are applied '
and cured as one system)may be used.
a. Apply the second coat(brown)as soon as the scratch coat is rigid.
6. Apply second coat to provide the required totai thickness. Coat must be ,
uniform in thickness.Rod of�level to screeds,to provide a true flat plane.
FolIow this by wood floating or dazbying thc surface.FilI voids and dress
surface for finish.
7. Completed second coat of cement plaster shall cure a minimum 7 days,prior '
to application of the finish coat.
*NOTE TO SPECIFIER:DELETE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS TO SUiT THE PROJECT �
REQUIIZEMENTS.
F. Stucco Finish Coat
1. Stucco finish coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to '
bond to and cover the brown coa�
G. Acrylic Finish Coat �
1. CompIy with manufacfurers' instructions for mixing and appIication of
acrylic primer and acrylic finish.
2. Apply finish continuously and in one operation to the e�tire walUsoffit area • ,
mainta.ining a "wet"edge sa that completed finish is free of scaffold lines
and other imperfections due to application methods.
3. Completed finish texture(s)and color(s) shall be consistent with the '
approved field samples/mock ups.
04300 STUCCO Page 6 of 7
,
,
'
3.03 CLEANING
' A. Remove spattering of plaster and acrylic finish from other finished surfaces,paving
and WaIks.
' B. Recnove and legally dispose of plaster system instaiiation debris material from
project site.
' END OF SECTION 04300
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
1
�
�
'
'
, 04300 STUCCO Page 7 of 7
'
'
' STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTIUN OS1Z0
, THIS SECTiON USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER."
PART 1-GENEItAt
, 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections(GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES),
apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fa8rication and erection of struc#ural steel work, as shown on
' drawings including schedul8s, notes, and details showing size and locadon of inembers,
typical connections,and types of steel required.
� I. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC) "Code of Standard Practice"and as otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Miscetlaneous 1Vletal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5.
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
' Specification Sections.
1. Structural steel(each type}.
' 2. High-sirength bolts(each type}, including nuts and washers.
3. Structural steel primer pai�nt.
4. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
, B. Shop drawings prepared under supervisioa of a licensed Structural Engineer, including
complete deta.ils and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members,
procednres,and diagrams.
, 1. Include details of cuts, connecrions, camber, holes, and ather pertinent data.
Indicate welds by standard AWS sy�nbols and show siz�,lengt�,and�type of each
, weld.
2. Provide setting drawings,templates,and directions for installation of anchor bolts
and other anchorages to be ins#alled as work of other sections.
' 1.4 QUALIT'Y ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of follawing,except as otherwise indicated:
, 1. American Institute of Steel Consttuction (AISC) "Code of Standard Praetice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
, 2. A.ISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings,"including"Commentary."
3. "Specifications for Stractural Joints using ASTM A�325 or A 490 Bolts"approved
by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
� 4. American Welding Society(AWS)D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel."
, STRUCTEJRt1L STEEL Page 1 of 5
,
5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Del'rvery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, '
Sheet Piling and Bazs for Structural Use."
1.5 DELIVERY,ST�RAGE,AND HANDLING '
A. DeIiver materials to site at such intervals to ensura uninterrup#ed progress of work. '
COORDINATE BELOW WITH DN. 1 REQUIREMENTS.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be ennbedded in cast in-place ,
concrete or masonry,in ample time to not to delay work.
C. St+ore materials to permit easy access for inspectioa and identification. Keep steel members '
off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts becorae dry or rusty,
clean and relubricate before use. ,
1. Do not store materials on structtue in a manner that miglzt cause distortion or
damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials
or structures as directed. '
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERTAL,S . '
A. MetaI Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only '
materials that aze smoothand free ofsurface blemishes includingpitting,rust and scale seam
m.arks, roller marks, rolted trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by
grir�ding, or by welding and grittding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface
finishes. '
B. Structural Steel Shapes,Plates,and Bars: ASTM A572 and ASTM A36.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E or S,Grade B;or ASTM A 501. '
1. Finish: Black,except where indicated to be galvanized. '
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 30'1,nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. '
E. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structi�ral bolts,heavy hexagon nuts,
and hardened washers,as follows: '
1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts,nuts,and washers,complying
with ASTM A 325. '
2. Quenched andtempered alloy steel bolts,nuts,and washers,complying with ASTM
A 490. '
F. Structural Steel Primer Paiu� SSPC-Paint 2;red Iead-iron oxide,oii aikyd.
STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 2 of 5 '
. '
'
' G. Cement Grout: Portland cement(ASTM C 150,Type I or Type III)and clean,uniformly
graded, naturai sand(ASTM C 404, Size No.2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0
, parts sand,by votume,with minimum water required for ptacement and hydration.
H, Metaliic Shrinkage-Resist�nt Grout: Premixed factory-packaged fenous aggregate grouting
, compound.
2.2 FABRICATION
, A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shvp to
greatest elctent possible. Fabrica#e items of structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural
' members where indicated.
1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery
' sequence tiiat will expedite erection and minimize field handling of matcrials.
2. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary
framing members to primary members(including purlins,girts,and other framing
' members taking only nominal stresses} and for temporary bracing to faciiitate
erection.
, B. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance
with AISC "Spec�cations for Structural Joints using ASTM A325."
' C. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures,appearance and quality of
welds,and metheds used in con�ecting welding work.
' D. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes fequired for securing other work to structuraI steel
framing and for passage of other work through steeI framing members,as shown on final
shop drawings.
' E. Cut,drilI,or punch holes perpendicularto metal surfaces. Do not flame�ut holes or enlarge
holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
, F. Painting: Provide a one-coat, shop-applied paint system complying with Steel Structures
Painting Council{SSPC)Paint System Guide No. 7,00.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Gener$1: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill,
shop,and field,conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will
not relieve Contractor of responsibi�ity for providing materials and fabrication procedures
, in compliance with specified requirements.
1. Promptly zemove s.nd replace materials or fahricated components ti�at do not comply.
, B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are ty}�ical;similar details apply to
similar conditions,unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site w&enever possible
' without causing delay in the work.
1. Promptly notify Architect or Engineer whenever design of inembers and
, connections for any portion of strueture are not cleazly indicated.
STRUCTLTRAL STEEL Page 3 OF 5
'
'
'
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION '
A. Temporary Shoiing and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring an.d bracing members with '
coriz�ections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and
connections when permanent members ate in place and final cannections are made. Provide
temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.
B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforir�s as necessary to '
effectively comp�ete work.
C. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Ciean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of '
bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates. ,
1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on
wedges or other adjusting devices.
2. Tighten aachor bolts after supported mer►zbers have been positioned and plumbed. '
Do not remove wedges or shims,but if protruding,cut off flush witt�edge of base
or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no ,
voids remain. Finish expased surfaces, prot�ct installed materials, and allow to
curs.
4. For proprietary grout materials,comply with manufacturer's instructions. '
D. Field Assembly: Set shvctural frames sccurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align
and adjust various members forming part of complete frarae or structure before permatiently '
fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact
before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
E. Level and plumb individual mentbers of slructure within specified AISC tolerances. '
F. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements an mean operatin$temperature of '
structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and
mean temperature at which sttucture will be when complet�ed and in service.
G. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. '
H. Erection Boits: On exposedwelded construction,remove erection bolts,fill holes with plug �
welds,and griud smooth ax exposed surfaces. '
i. Comply with AISC Specificatioas for bearing,adequacy of temporary connections,
aligament,and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent ta field welds. '
2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in mexnbers by buming or by using drift pins,axcept in
secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit i�olts.
J. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torchcs in field for corre,cting fabrication errors in ,
primary structural framing. Cntting will be permitted only on secondary members tha.t are
not under stress, as acceptable ta Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared '
appearance when petmitted.
STRUCTURAL STEEL Page 4 OF 5
'
,
'
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Engage an independent testing and inspection agency to anspect high-strength bolted
connections and welded connections and to perform tests and psepare test reports.
, DELETE EITH�R ABOVE UR BELOW, OR REVISE TO SUIT LUCAL
PRA,CTICE/JURISDICTION.
' B. Owner will e�gage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspec#high-strengtb
bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test repor#s if-
rec�uired by the Engineer..
' C. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests,state in each report whether test specimens
comply with reqnirements,and specifically state any deviations therefrom.
' D. Provide access for testiag agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated
or praduced so that rsquired inspection and testing can be accomplished.
' E. Testing agency may inspect stract�al steel at plant before shipment
F. Correct deficiencies in struct�uai steel work that inspectians and laboratory test reports have
' indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at
Contractor`s expense,as necessary to reconfirm any noncotnpliaace of original work and to
show connpliance of conected work.
, G. Shop-Bolted Connections: Engincer shall decide if Inspections or tests be conducted in
accordance with AISC specifcati4ns.
, H. Shop Welding: Engineer shail decide if Tnspections or tests be conducted in accordance
with AISC specifications.
Inspect ac�d test during fabrication of structura.l steal assemblies and if so as:
, 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types aad
locations of defe�ts found in work. Record work requireci and performed to correct
, deficiencies.
2. Perfarm visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform tests of welds as follows. Inspection procedwes listed are to be used at
' Contractor's option. -
I. �ield-Bolted Conneciions: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications.
' 1. For Direct Tension Indicators,comgly with r�uirements of ASTM F 959. Verify
that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2.
' 3. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steei as follows:
1. Certify welders and condvct inspections and tests as reqnired. Record types and
, locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct
deficiencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all'welds.
' END OF SECTION 05120
STRUC'TURAI,STEEL Page 5 of 5
,
,
, R4UGH CARPENTR
Y
SECTION 06100
, PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Ihawings atid general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Speciftcation Sections,apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUNA�ARY .
A. This Section includes the following:
' 1. Framing with dimension iumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood produc#s.
3. Wood grounds,nailers,and blocking.
, 4. Wood furring.
S. Sheathing.
' B. Related Se�tions: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpeniry"for nonstructurat carpentry items exposed to
view and not specified in another Section.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and
generally not exposed,unless otherwise specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
, A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Conh�ct and Division 1
Specification Sections.
' B. Produat data for the foilowing products:
1. Engineered wood products.
' 2. Insulating sheathing.
3. Air infiltration barrier.
4. Metal framing anchors.
' S. Construction adhesives.
C. Material cerrificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum ailowable
unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use as we11 as design values
' approved by the Board of Revisw of American Lwnber Standards Cammittee.
D. Wood treatment data as follows includ'ung chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions far
' handliug,storing,instalIation,and finishing of treated material:
1. For each type of preservative treated wood product inciuds certification by treating
plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used,net amount of
' preservative retained,and campliance witfi applicahle standards.
2. For water-borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to leveis indicated prior to shipment to project site.
' 3. For fire-retardant-treated wood produc�s inciude certification by ta�eating plant that
#reated material camplies with specified standard and other requirements.
R4UGH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 7
'
1
E. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to '
. authorities having jurisrliction evidencing compliance of the following wood products with
specified requirements and building code in effect for Projec�.
l. Engineered wood products. '
2. Air infillration barriers.
3. Metal framing anchors.
4. Power driven fasteners. ,
5. Treated wood products.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-SourceResponsibilityforEngineeredWoodProducts: Obtaineachtypeofengineered '
wood products from one source froxn a singie manufacturer.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Treated Wood: Obtain treated wood products from one t
source.
1.6 DELNERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLIl�TG '
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as welt as piywood and other '
panels;provide for air circutation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings
including polyethylene and similar materials.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treateii with waterborne chemicals,place spacers � ,
between each bundle to provide air circuIation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER,GENERAL I
A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber�anufacturedto corriply with PS 20"American Soflwood '
Lumber Standard" and with appiicable grading rules of irzspecEion agencies certifed by
American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC)Board of Review.
1. SPIB-Southern Pine Iuspection Bureau. '
2. WCLIB-West Caast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA-Westem Wood Prodacts Association.
B_ Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade st�amp of '
inspection agency evidencing compliance with gcading rule requirements and identifying
gradiri�agency,grade,species,moisture content at time of surfacing,and mill.
I. For exposed lumber fu�ish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each '
piece; or omit gtade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compiiance
issued by inspection agency. '
C. Nominal sizes are indic�ted,except as shown by detaii dimensions. Provide actual sizes as
required by PS 20,for moistnre content spec�ed for each use.
1. Provide dressed Iumber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated. '
2. Provide seasoned lumber with i9 percent maximwn moisture content at time of
dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless '
otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 7 '
,
'
, 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. For light framing provide"Stud,""No.3,"or"Standazd"grade lumber for stud framing(2 to
4 inches thick,2 to 4 inches wide, l0 feet and shorter)and"Stud"or"No.3"grade for other
' light framing(2 to 4 inches thick,2 to b inches wide),any species.
' B. For light framing(2 to 4 inches thick,2 to 4 inches wide)provide the following grade and
species:
1. "Construction"grade.
' 2. Southern Pine graded uader SPIB rules.
3. Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules.
' C. For structural light framing(2 to 4 inches thicic,2 to 4 inches wide),provide the following
grade and species:
1. "No.2"grade or better.
, D. For structural framing{2 to 4 inches thick,5 inches and wider),pravide the following gtade
and species:
' l. 'No.2"grade or better.
2. Douglas Fir-Larch graded under WCLIB or WWPA rules.
3. Hem-Fir graded under WWPA rules.
, 4, Southem Pine graded under SPIB niles.
5. Spruce-Pine-Fir graded under NLGA rules.
2.3 BOARDS
' A. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work,provide the following:
' 1. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum, "S-DRY"or KD-19.
2. Where trat�sparent or natural finish or no fm�sh is indicated,provide the following:
3. Where painted finish is indicated, provide "No. 1 Boards"per SPIB n.�les, "Seiect
Merchantable Boards"per WCLIB ruies,or"No.2 Common Boards&Better"per
' WWPA rules.
B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work,provide lumber of 19
' percent maximum moisture content(S-DRY or KD-19}and of following species and grade:
C. Baard Sizes: Provide sizes indicated as at fascia or, if not indicated (for sheathing, and
similar uses),provide 1-inch by 12-inch boards.
I2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
' A. General: Proviti8lumber for support or attachment of other construction including curbs and
support bases,cant strips,bucks,nailers,blocking,fiuring,grounds,stripping,and similar
members.
' B. Fab�icate rnisceilaneous iumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicatal and i�nto shapes
shown.
' C. Moisture content: 19 percent maxiimum for lumber items not sgecified to receive wood
preservative treatment
D. Grade: "Standard"grade light-frazning-size lumber of any species or boarci-size lumber as
, required. "No.3 Common"or"Standard"grade boards per WCLIB or W WPA rules or"No.
2 Boards" per SPIB rules.
R4UGH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 7
'
'
2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS,GENERAL ,
A. Construction Panel Standards: Comgly with PS I "U.S.Product Standazd for Construction
and Industrial Piywood"for plywood constri�ction panels and,for products not manufactured
under PS I provisions,with APA PRP-108. '
B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark
evidencing compliance with grade requirements. '
1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR.
2. Span Rating: As required to suit joist spacing indicated.
C, Wall Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING. '
1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR. � '
2. Spaa Rating: 12/0, 16/Q,20/0 or Wall-16 oc for stud spacing of 16 inches or less.
2.6 AIR INFII.TItATION BARRIER
A. Poiyethylene sheet,0.0061 inch thick,formed by spinning continaous strands of fine high '
density polyethylene interconnected fibers and bonding them together by heat and pressure;
with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 400 grams/sq. meter/24 hrs, per ASTM E 96,
procedure B;flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 5 and 10 per ASTM E 84. '
2.'7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements '
specified in this articla for material and manufactur8.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, 'vn ground contac�or in area of high '
relative humidity,provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or
of AISI Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails,Wire,Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. '
C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ANSI B 1.8.6.1. '
2.8 METAL FRAMIl�IG ANCHORS ,
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type,size,metal,and fuush indicated that comply
with requirements specified including the following:
1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which madeI code '
evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having j urisdiction
and that evidence compliance of inetal frarning anchors for application indicated with ,
the building code in effect for this Projeat.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes
allowable design loads that are determined from empiricai data or by rational
angineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed '
by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot dip process on continuous lines prior '
to fabrication to comply with ASTM A 525 for Coatin� Designation G60 and with
ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural qualifiy); ASTh�i A 52b (commercial quality); or
ASTM A S27 (lock-forming quality}; as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor
indicated. '
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 7 '
'
1. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in
� ground contact,or in area of high relative humidity,and where indicated.
� 2.9 MISCELLANE4US MATERIALS
A. Sill Sealer Gaskets: Giass fiber resilient insulation fabricated in strip form for use as a sill
sealer, 1 inch nominal thicl�ess compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's
' standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated; in rolls of 50 feet or i 00.feet in
length.
' B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01
that is approved for use with type of consh-�#ction panel indicated by botYt adhesive and panel
manufacturer.
� C. Water Repellent Preservative: NWWDA tested and -accepted formulation containing
3-iodo-2-propynyl butyi carbonate(IPBC)as its active ingredient.
2.10 PRESERVATNE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
� A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservativ�treated wood or is s cified
Pe
herein to be treated,comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2(Lumber)
� and C9 {Ptywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark
Requirements.
� B. Pressure-Ireat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of
0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber�nd plywood to a maximum
moisture content,respectiveiy,of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the
following:
� 1. Wood cants,decking,nailers,curbs,equipment support bases,blocking,stripping,
and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
� waterproofing.
2. Wood sills,sleepers,blocking,furring,stripping,and similar concealed mexnbers in
coutact with masonry or concrete,
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
� C. Pressure-lreat wood me�nbers in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne
preservatives ta a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.
� D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior ta treatment, where possible. If cut after
treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of iumber or
plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.PART 3 -EXECUTION
� 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
� A. Discard units of material with defects that irnpair quality of rough carpentry consttuotion and
that are too small to use in fabricating rougl2 carpentry with minimum joints or optimum j oittt
arrangement.
' B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb and true to line and cut
and fitted.
C. Fit rough catpenfry to other construction; scribe a.nd cope as required for accura.te fit.
� Correlate Iocation of fiirring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to ailow
attachment of other construction.
� D. Secureiy attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.
E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
� ROUGH CARI'ENTRY Page 5 of 7
'
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use fmishing aails for finish work. �
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed
to view or wilI receive finish materials. Make tight connections betweea members. Install
fasteners without splitting of wood;predrill as rec}uired. �
3.2 W40D GROUNDS,NAII.ERS,BLOCKiNG,AND SLEEPERS
A. Install wood grounds,nailers,blocking,and sleepers where shown and where required for '
screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true
line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush �
with surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible,anchor to formwork before concrete placemen�
C. Install permanent grounds of dressed,preservative treated,key-beveled lumber not less than �
1-1/2 inches wide and of thicirness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of
finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. �
33 WOOD FURRING
A. Tnstall plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as �
required for tolerance of finished work.
3.4 WOOD FRAMiNG,GENERAL �
A. Framing Stanclard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manuai for Wood Frame Construction,"unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install framing composed of engineered wood '
products to compiy with manufacturer's directions.
C. Install framing members of size and spaciag indicated. �
D. Anchor and nail as shown,and to comply with the following:
1. National Evaluation Report No. NER 272 for pneumatic or mechaaical driven �
staples,P-Naiis,and aliied fasteners.
2. Published requirements of manufacturer of inetat framing anchars. �
E. Do not spl�ce structural members between supports.
F, Firestop concealed spaces ofwood framed walls and partitions atfloor level and at the ceiling �
Iine. Where firestops are not automaticaily provided by the framing system used,use closely
f tted wood blocks o£nominal2-inch�hick lumbar of the same width as framing members.
3.5 STUD FRAMING �
A. General; An�ange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendiculaz to direction of wall or
parEition and narrow face is parallel. Install single bottom plate and double top plates using '
2-iunch-thick members whose widths ec}ual that of studs;except single top plate may be used
for non-load-bearing paititions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction.
1. For exterior walls iunst�112-inch by Crinch and 2 inch by 12"wood studs spaced lb �
inches o.c.
B. Construct corners and intersections with not lessthan 3 studs(see Architect forcornerdetail). �
�nstall miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing
materiais,fi7ctures,speciahy items,and trim. ,
ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 6 of 7
�
1. Install continuous horizontal bIocking raw at mid-height of singte-story partitions
' over 8 feet high using 2-inch thick members of same width as wall or partitions.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Install nailed header members of thickness
� aqual to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
1. For nonbearing partitions, install double;jamb studs and headers not less than 4
inches deep for openings 3 feet and less in width,and not less than 6 inchas deep for
� wider openings. .
2. For load-bearing partitions,install double jamb studs for ogenings 6 feet and less in
width,and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Install headers of depth shown,or
' if not shown,as recommended by N.F.P.A. "Manual for Ho�se Framing."
D. Install diagonal bracing in stud framing of exterior walls, except as otherwise indicated.
Brace both walls at each extemal corner,fuil story height,at a 45 degrree angle,using either
� a let-in 1 by 4 or 2 by 4 blocking or metal diagonal bracing. Omit bracing where following
iypes of sheathing are indicated.
' 1. Piywood shea.thir�g or carnar bracing,4-feet-wide panels verticaIly.
E. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with erown up and to comply with requirements specified
above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters
' I. Where principal ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters,fi�me as indicated with
additional short joists from wall plate to first joist;nail to ends of rafters and to top
� plate and nail to long joists or anchor with framing anchors or metai straps, install
1 by 8 or 2 by 4 stringers spaced 4 feet o.c.crosswise over grincipal eeiling,joists.
F. Install collar beams(ties)as shown,or if not shawn,install I-inch by 6-inch boards between
� every third pair of rafters.
G. Install special framing as shown for eaves,overhangs,dormers and similar conditions,if any.
rH. Where built-up beams or girders of nominal 2-inch dimension lumber on edge aze shown,
fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 3Z inches o.c. Locate one row
near top edge atid other near bottom edge. Locate end joints in members over supports;for
, continuous members,stagger ends at quarter points between supports.
I. InstalI wood posts using metal anchoring and attachment devices indica#ed.
, J. Seal ends of beams and posts exposed to wea.ther with a water-repelleet preservative.
3,8 AIIi INFILTRATION BARRIER
� A. Cover sheathing with air infiItration barrier as follows:
1. Apply plastic sheet to comply with manufacturer's printed directions.
� END OF SECTION 06100
1
1
1
RUUGH CARPENTRY Page 7 of 7
r
'
� STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINA
TED TIMBER
SECTION 06185
� PART 1 -GENERAL
1.i RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Get�eral and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,appiy to this Section.
' 1.2 SUNIl1dARY
A. This Section includes structural gIued laminated timber elements.
� B. Structural glued Iaminated{glulam)timber is defi�ned to include wood members fa.bricated
from 1-inch or 2-inch nominal thickness lumber, glued face-to-face to a depth of�ive or
more laminations.
� 1. Provide connectors,anchors,and accessories necessary to interconnect and secure
glufa�n members to building striicture.
� C. The types of structural glued iaminated units specified include the followizig:
1. Straight beacns,including girders,purlins,and cambered members{if any}.
� 2. Columns, including posts and standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
� A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
' B. Product data including sQecifications and installation instructions covering lumber,
adhesives,fabrica.tion process,preservative treatment,accessories,and protection.
C. Shop drawings showing full dimensions of each member aitd layout of entire structuraI
� system. Show large-scale details ofconnections,connectors,and other accessories.Indicate
species and laminating combiaation,adhesive type,and other variables in required Work.
� 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSUAITC A 190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber."
� B. Manufac�uer Qualif cation: Provide factory-glued slructural units, produced by an
AITC-licensed firm qualified to apply the AITC Quality Inspected mark
� C. k'actory-znartc each piece of glued iaminated structural units with AITC Qe�ality Inspected
mark.
1. Place AITC mark on timber surfaces which will not be exposed in completed Work.
� D. Tnstaller. Firm that has demonstrated competence speciaiizing in installing glued laminated
timber for at Ieast 5 years.
� 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Gencral: Comply with provisions ofAITC 11 I, "Recommended Practice for Protection of
, Structurai Glued Laminated Timbar During Transit, Storage,and Erection."
STRUCTURAI,GLUED LANIINATED 1'�MBER Page 1 of 3
i
'
�
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMIl�TATED UNITS �
A. Lumber: Comply with ANSUAITC A190.1 and applicable lumber association s�andards �
cited therein for grades required ta achieve glulam requirements for design values,
appearance,fabrication iimitations,and species.
B. Lumber Species: Douglas Fir-Larch or Southem Yellow Pine. �
C. Adhesive: ANSUAFTC A190.1,wet use type.
D. End Sealer: Manvfacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer, effective in �
retarding transmission of moisture at cross-gain cuts.
E. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard,branslucent,penetrating waod sealer,that will �
not interfere with application of wood stain and transparent finish,or paint finish.
1. Refer to Division 9 Sections for required field-appiied finishes.
F. Connectors, A,nchors, and Accessories: Provide fabricated steel (ASTM A 36) shapes, �
plates,and bars,welded into assemblies of types and sizes indicated. Provide skeel bolts
(ASTM A 307),lag bolts,nails,and other standard fasteners as required for installation. �
1. Finish: Finish fabricated assemblies with rust-inhibirive primer.
2. Wet-Use Finish: Where wet-use glulam work is indicated, fin�ish fabricated
assemblies with hot-dip zinc coating(ASTM A 153), including bolts and other �
fasteners.
2.2 FABRICATION r
A. General: Comply with ANSUAITC A I90.1 in providing units indicated;where dimensions
are not comptetely docuinented,proviae manufacturer's standard sizes and shapes required �
to fulfill indicated performances.
B. Appearance Grade: For exposed members, provide Architecturai appearance grade units
complying with AITC 1 i 0. �
C. Preservative Treatarent: Larninate members from preservativ�treated lumber. After
dressing and end-cutting each member to fival size and shape,apply a heavy brush coat of �
� same(or compatible)preservative lreatment{in a light petroleum solvent)to surfaces cut
to a depth of more than 1/16 inch. Apply according to AWPA M4.
1. Provide preservative-tceatrnent solution free of water repellents and other �
substances that might it�terfere when applying finishes.
D. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end-cutting each member to final length, and after �
wood treatment(if any),apply a saturation coat af end seaier to ends and other cross-cut
surfaces,keeping surfaces flood-coated for not less than 10 minutes.
E. Seal Coat: After fabricating and sauding each unit,and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy �
saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit,except for treated wood where
trea�ent has included a water repellen�
CTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER P e 2 of 3 '
STRU �
� i
'
� 2.3 DECKING
A. General: Provida T&G wood2x6 decking,sized as indicated,with followingcharacteristics:
r1. Face Grade: Standard.
2. Edgs Pattem:No V grooves in decking
� 3. M.C. 10-12%.
� 4. Adhesive-Resorcinal waterproof.
B. General: Before shipping or exposing to outdoor conditions,bundle-wrap or individually
wrap with manufacteirer's standard,opaque,durable,water-resistant, plastic-coated paper
� covering with water-resistant seams.
PART 3-EXECUTION
� 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Instail miscellaneous steel connectors,anchors,and accessories.
� B. Plan and execute erection procedures so that close fit and neat appearance of joints and
structure as a whole will not be impaired. When hoxsting members into place,use padded
� ar nonmarring slings,and protect corners with wood blocking.
C. Adequately brace members as they are placed to mau�tam safe posrtzon until full stability
is provided.
� D. Cutting: Avoid c�tting glUlam members during erection unless apgroved by Owner's
Structural Engineer. Except for fastener drilling and other minor cutting,coat cuts with end
sealer.
� 1. Where treated members must be cut during erection,apply a heavy brush coat of the
same preservative treatment,cotnplying with AWPA Standard M4.
� E. Handle and temporarily support members to prevent visible surface c�mage.
F. Do not remove wrapping on individually wrapped members until it will serve no useful
� purpose,including protection from weather,soiling and damage from work of other trades.
1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 9. Retain
� wrapping wherever it can serve as a painting shield.
G. Nail decking to supports according to AITC recom�mendations and detaiIs/See Drawings.
Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking prior to applying
� finished roofing.
H. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after compietin�erection and removing wrappings,
� or replace damaged members as directed where damage is beyond acceptable repair.
3.2 PROTECTION
� A. General: Control heating,ventilating,and air condrtioning in building to avoid damage to
or deterioration of glulam work.
END OF SECTION 06185 �
� STRUCTURAI�GLiJED LANIINATED TiMBER Page 3 of 3
�
'
' FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06200
� PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCiJMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,inciuding General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUNIlVIARY
' A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim and rails.
2. Interior standing and running trim and rails.
� B. Related Sections: The foIlowing Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
� 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for furring,blocking,and other carpentry work
that is not exposed to view.
2. Division 6 Section"Structural Glued Laminated Timber".
� 3. Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for flashing and other sheet metal work
4. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for sealants.
5. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors".
� 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of finish carpentry by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and quality
to those required for this Project.
� 1.4 DELTVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING .
� A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack iumber as well as plywood and other panels.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including
� polyethylene and similar materials.
B. Do not deiiver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation azeas,
� store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation
areas.
� 1.5 PROJECT CONDTTIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with finish carpentry manufacturer's and
� installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for finish
carpenixy during its storage and installation.
� FINISH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 5
'
,
B. Weather Conditions: Proceed with fmish carpentry only when existing and foreeasted weather �
conditions will permit exterior finish carpentry to be installed in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations and when substrate is completely dry.
PART 2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL �
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20"American Softwoad Lumber Standard"for lumber and
with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards ,
Committee Baard of Review.
B. Plywood Standards: Coxnply with PS 1 "U.S.Product Standard for Construction and fndustria] '
Plywood"for plyvvood and,for products nat manufactured under PS 1,with APA PRP-108.
2.2 FABRICATION �
.
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry in relation to relative �
humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in insta.11ation areas. Provide finish
carpentry with moistru�e content that is compatible with Project requirements.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions,profiles and details indicated. Ease edges to radius '
indicated for the following:
1. Lzunber less than 1 inch in nominal thiclmess: 1/16 inch. �
2. Lumber 1 inch or more in no�ninal thickness: 1/8 incit.
PART 3-EXECU'TION �
3.1 F.��AMINATTON
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other �
conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Da not proceed with
installation unti�unsatisfactory conditions have been conected. �
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. �
B. Condition finish carpenSry to averaga prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before '
installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Backprime lumber for painted fi�nish exposed oa the exterior. Comply with requirements for �
swface preparation and application in Section "Painting."
,
FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 of S �
�
�
' 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
' A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly
treated or fmished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing
arrangements.
� i.Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces,sizes,or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level,true,and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
� shims where required for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut futish carpentryto fit adjoining work.Refinish a3nd seal cuts as recommended
' by manufacture.
2. Instail to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb aad level, Install adjoining finish
carpeniry with 1/16 inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/8 inch maximum offset
, for reveal instailation.
3. Coordinate finish carpeniry with materials and systems that may be in or adjacent to
standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that
� penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
C. Finish in accordauce with specified requirements.
� D. Refer to Division 9 Sec�ions for fmal finishing of fittish carQentry.
� 3.4 ADNSTING
A. Repair damaged or defective fimsh carpentry where poss;ble to eluninate functional or visual
' d�fects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
3.S CLEANING
' A. Clea.n finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied fmishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
� 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. Tnstaller Qual�ca#ians: Arrange for installation of finish carpentry by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and q�ality
to those required for this Project.
� 1.4 DELNERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
� A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as weli as plywood and other panels.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temgorary coverings including
� polyethylene aad simiIar materials.
B. Do not deliver interior finish carpenhy until environmental conditions meet rec�uirements
� specified for installation areas. If fuush carpentry must be stored in other than instailaxion areas,
FIlVI5FI CARPENTRY Page 3 of 5
�
�
store only in areas wbere environmental conditions meet xequizements specified for
installation areas. �
1.5 PROdECT CONDITI4NS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with finish carpentry manufacturer's and �
installer's coardinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conclitions for finish
carpentry during its storage and installatiori. �
B. Weather Conditions: Proceeci with fmish carpentry only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit exterior finish carpentry to be installed in compliance with manufacture�s �
recommendations and when substrate is completely dcy.
P.ART 2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20"American Soflwood Lumber Standard"for lumber and '
with aQplicable grading rules of inspection agencies cert�ed by American Lumber Standards
Commrttee Board of Review. ,
B. Plywood Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S.Pmduct Standard for Construction and Industrial
Plywood" for plywood and,for products not manufactured under PS 1,with APA PRP-108. �
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moistur� Content: Comply with reyuirements of specified iaspection agencies and �
manufacturer's recommeadations for moisture content of finish carpentry in relation to relative
hwnidity conditions existing dctting time of fabrication and in installation areas. Frovide finish �
carpentry with moisture content that is compatible with Project requirements.
B. Fabricate f nish carpentry to d'unensions,profiles and details indicated. Ease edges ta radius �
indicated for the£ollowing:
1. Lumber less than 1 inch in nominai thickness: 1/16 inch.
2. Lumber 1 inck or more in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. �
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXANIlNATI4N �
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requ�rements for installation tolerances and other �
conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been conected.
3.2 PREPARATION �
A. Clean substrates of projection�s and subs�tances detrimental to application. . �
B. Condition fuiish carpentry to average prevailing heimidity conditions in installation areas before
installation for a mininaum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recom�nended by �
manufacturer.
FINISH C.ARPENTRY Page 4 of 5 �
�
C. Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with requirements
� for surface prepazation and application in Section"Pa.intang."
3.3 INSTALLA'TIDN, GENERAL
� A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted,
improperiy treated or finished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with
� proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces,sizes,or patterns.
� B. Install finish carpentry plumb,level,true,aud aiigned with adjacent mater�ais. Use concealed
shims where required for alignmen�
� 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recom�nended by manufacturer.
1 2. Install to#olerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/16 inch maximum offset for flush instxllation and 1/8 inch
maximum offset for revea.l installation.
� 3. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems that may be in or adjacent to
standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanicaI and elecirical
items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
' C. Finish in accordance with specified requirements.
� D. Refer ta Division 9 Sections far fmal fnishing of finish carpentry.
3.4 ADNSTING
� A. Repair damageci or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace fmish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
, �APearance.
3.5 CLEANING
� A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
� END OF SECTION 46200
r
�
�
� FINISH CARPENTRY P e 5 of 5
a8
�
�
� BUILDING INSULATION
SECTION 0'7214
� PART1 -GENERAL
� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and generai provisions of Coniract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this 5ection.
� 1.2 SLJMMARY
� A. This Section includes the fnilowing:
ADJUST LIST BELOW TO SUIT PROJECT.
' 1. Insulation e�nder slabs-on-grade.
2. Foundation vaall insulation(supporting backfill}.
3. Concealed building insulation in board form.
� 4. Exposed building insulation in board form.
5. Building insulation in batt form.
' B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for foam plastic board sheathing.
2. Division 7 Section indicated below for fuam plastic insulation specified as part of
� these systems:
a. "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems-Class PB."
� b. "Exterior Insalation and Finish Systems-Class PM."
3. Division 7 Roofing Section indicated below for roof insulation specified as gart of
� roofmg construotion:
a "Gypsum Drywa11."
� 1.3 DEFIl�FITIONS
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by
� "r-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Tliermal
conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous mater�al e�ctly 1 inch thick.
Thermai resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between ttte
' iwo exposed faces required to cause one B1'U to flow through one square foot per hour at
mean temperatures indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
, A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditaan,s of Contract and Division l
Specification Sections.
` B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified.
1.5 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
i
BUILDING INSULAI'I4N Page 1 of 6
I
�
�
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose
indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method �
indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptabla to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspec�ing organization.
1. Surface Buruing Characteristic: ASTM E 84. �
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 1 I9.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. �
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building
insulation from a singla source with resources to provide products of consistent quaiity in
appearance anci physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. �
1.6 DELNERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deter�oration by moisture, '
soiling,and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for handling,stnrage,and protection during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: �
1. Do not Bxpose to sunlight,except to extent necessary£or period of installatian and �
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materiais to
project sit8 ahead of installation time.
3. Complete instatlation and cancealrnent of plastic nnaterials as rapidly as possible in �
each area of constivction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS �
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. AvailableManufacturers: Subjecttocompliaacewithrequirements,manufactwersoffering �
insulation products that may be incorporaxed in the work include,but are not limited to,the
folIowing:
B. Manufaccturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insalation products of �
one of the following. .
1. Extruded Palystyrene Board Insulation: �
a. Amoco Fosm Products Co. �
b. DiversiFoam Products. ,
c. Dow: The Dow Chemical Company.
d. UC Industries,Inc.
2. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ,
a. AFM CorQoration.
b. DiversiFoam Products. '
c. Grace Construction Products Div.,W.R Grace&Co.
d. Manufacturers with a third garly certification program satisfying mandatory
, recjuirements far foam plastics of model building codes. �
BUII.DING INSULATTON Page 2 of 6
�
�
�
3. Phenolic Board Insulation:
' a. ManvilIe: Building Insulation Div.,Manville Sales Corp.
� 4. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
a Hunter H Shield-NB
, 5. Cellular Giass Block Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh Coining Corp.
r6. Manufacturers of GIass Fiber I�tsulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
' b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
c. Manville: Building Tnsulations Div.,Manville Sales Corp.
d. Owens/Coming Fiberglas Corp.
, 7. Manufacturers of Semi-Refractory Fiber Insulation:
a. Cafco Industiries Ltd.
' b. �ibrex�nc.
c. USG: T'herrn�ber Div.,USG interiors,Inc.
' 8. Manufacturer of Loose Granular Perlite Insulation:
a. Producer Members of Perlite Insti#ute Tnc.
' 2.2 ll�TSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
, standards.
i. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated,selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses,widths,and leng�ths.
� B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid,cellular polystyrene thermal insulation with
closed-cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base
� resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for type indicated;with 5 year
aged r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F(4.4 and 23.9 deg C}, respectively; and as
follows:
� 1. Type N, 1.5 pcf min,density,ualess otherwise indicaxed.
C. Fabric-Faced Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid,celluiar polystyrene thermal
� insulation with closed-celis and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of
polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for type
indicated; fabricated with tongeie and groove edges and with one side having a matrix of
vertical and horizontal drainage channels faced with maz►ufacturer's standazd spunboaded
' filtration fab�ic;with 5-year aged r-value of 4.4 at 75 dag F(23.9 deg C).
1. Type VI, 1.8 pcf min.density.
�
BUILDING INSULATION Page 3 of 6
,�
�
D. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermaI insulation formed by the �
expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with
ASTM C 578 for type indicated;and as foliows:
1. Type VIII, 1.15 pcf min. density,aged r-values of 4.2 and 3.8 at 40 and 75 deg F �
(4.4 and 23.9 deg C),respectively.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 75 and 450,respecYively. �
E. PhenolicBoardInsulation:Rigid,cellularthermalinsulationwiththermosetphenolic-based
closed-cell foam core and 2-ply foil-kraft-liner facing lamiu�ated to both sides,in boazd form
complying wit}a ASTM C 1126 for Type II,Grade 1;with r-value of 8.33 at 75 deg F{23.9 �
deg C).
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Ma�cimum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 25 and 35,respectively. r
F. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with
glass-�ber-reinforced polyisocyanurate ciosed-cell foam core and aIuminum foil facing �
laminated to both sides;complying with FS HH-T-1972/I,Class 2; aged r-values of 8 and
7.2 at 40 and 75 deg F(4.4 and 23.9 deg C),respectiveiy;and as follows:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed ,
values of 20 and 20U,respectivety.
G. Cellular Glass Block Insulation: Rigid celIular glass thermal insulation with closed-cell ,
structure,passing ASTM E 136 for testing o€combustion characteristics,in flat or tapered
block form complying with ASTM C 552 for Type I;with r-values of 3.03 and 2.86 at 50
and 75 deg F(10 and 23.9 deg C),respectively. ,
I. Rigid Board: Class 1 and 2,nominal density of 6.0 pcf,r-value of 43 at 75 deg F
(23.9 deg C).
H. UnfacedMineral Fiber Blanket/BattInsulation: Thermal insuIation produced by combining �
mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to compty with
ASTM C 665 for Type I(blankets without membrane facing); and as follows: ,
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from gtass or slag.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 25 and 50,respectively. �
I. Faced Mineral Fiber BlanketBatt InsuIation: Thermal insulation produced by combining
mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with �
ASTM C 665 for Type III,Class A{blankets with reflective vapor-retardermembrane facing
with flame spread of 25 or iess};foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrun-polyethylene vapor-retarder
membrane on one face,and as follows:
l. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. ,
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values�of 25 and 54,respectively. �
J. "RX-2 Reflective Aluminum k'oil Insulation,"R-Fax Technologies,Inc.
VAPOR RETARDERS ,
• A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397,6.0 miIs thick,with a maximum permeance
rating of 0.13 perms. �
BUILDING INSULATION Page 4 of 6
�
�
� B. Tape for Vapor Retarder: Pressure sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetranons in vapor retarder.
C. Available Prociucts: Subject to compliance with requ'vements.
� D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
� 1. Foil-PoI„ester Film Vagor Retarder:
a. Aluiniseal Zero Perm, A.lumiseal Corp.
' PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMIl�TATION
� A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer presen�,for compliance with requirements
of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other
conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with
' installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 i'REPARAT'ION
� A. Clean substrates of substances hanmfiil to insulations or vapor retarders,including removal
of projections that might puncture vapor retarders.
� 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application
1 indicated. If printed instructions are not avaiiable or do not apply to project conditions,
consult manufacturer's technical represemative for specific recommendations before
proceeding with installation of insulation. See drawings.
' B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and
fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulatian. Remove projections that
interfere with placement.
� C. Apply two layers of insulation to meet required thickness,unless otherwise shown.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIlviETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
' A. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces(frorn daznage during back-filling)by
application of protection bosrd. Set in adhesive in accordance with recommendations of
' manufacturer of insulation.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with twapiece
wall ties designed for this purpose and specified under Division 4"Unit Masonry."
� B. On units ofcellular glass insulation,apply insulation with closely fitting joints osing method
indicated balow:
� 1. Gob Method: Install four gobs of adhesive pex unit and apply firmly against inside wythe
of masor�ry or other const�uction as shown, Apply gobs at each corner,spread gobs to form
pads 4 inches in diameter by 1/4 inch thick.
� 3.6 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATTON
�
BUiLDING INSULATION Page 5 of 6
'
. �
A. Apply insulation units to subsirate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's �
recommendations. If no specific method is indicated,bond units to substrate with adhesive
or use mechanical anchorage to provide pemnanent placement and support of units.Overlap
the layers of rigid insulation board on roof deck
B. Seal joints between closed-cell(nonbreathing)insulation units by applying adhesive,mastic, �
or sealant to edges of ea.ch unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved mto place. Fill voids
in completed installation with adhesive,mastic,or sealant as recommended by insulation �
manufacturer.
C. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction,except as
otherwise indicated. '
' D. Set reflective,foil-faced units accucately with not less than 0.75-inch air space in front of
foiI as indicated. �
E. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids aud cavity spaces where
shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume(to a density of
approximately 2.5 pc fl. ,
3.8 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapar �
transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated.
Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates.
B. SeaI vertical joints in vapor retarders over framiag hy lapping not less than 2 wall studs. i
Fasten vapor retarders to frarrting at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall
openings,and at lap joints; space fasteners Ib inches o.c. �
C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or tape per vapor retarder
manufacturer's printed directions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with tape of
type recommended by vapor retarder manafacturer. Locate all joints over framing members ,
or other solid substrates.
D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor re#arder manufacturer. �
E. Seal joints caused by pipes,conduits,electrical boxes,and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with tape oftype recommended byvaporretardermanufacturerto create an airtight ,
seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other ,
work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful �
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or
enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected �
by permanent consiruction immediately after installation. ,
END OF SECTION 07210
�
BUILDING INSULATION Page 6 of 6 '
'
'
IWOOD SHAKES
SECTION 07311
' PART 1 -GENERAL
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM "ARCHITECT."
, L1 RELATED DOCIJMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
' Conditions and Divisiona] Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes wood shakes and requ�red flashing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain reyuirements that relate to this Section:
' 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for underlayment and wood framing.
13 SUBNfITTALS
, A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Divisional
Specification Sections.
' B. Product data for each type of product specified,including details of construction relative to
materials,dimensions of individual components,profiles,textures,and colors.
' C. Samples far initial selectionpurposes in form ofmanufacturer's sample finishes shawingfull
range of colors and profiles available.
' D. Samples for verification purposes in form of two full-size units of each type of shingles
required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products that are identical to those tested for the
specified fire performance characteristics by UL or other testing and inspecting
' organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in iJL
' "�ire Resistance Directory."
1.5 I)ELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with
labels intact.
' B. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other
physical damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations
for job si#e storage,handling, and protection.
' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
' WOOI) SHA.KES Page 1 of 4
1
1
1
A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with Work only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit Work to be installed in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations and when substrate is completely dry. '
1.'7 EXTR.A MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products insta.11ed as '
described below,packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
clearly describing contents. ,
1. Furnish quantriy of full-size wood shakes equal to 2 percent of amount installed.
1.8 VVARRANTY '
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty,executed by manufacturer,agreeing
to repair or replace wood shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of '
shakes beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to,and not a limitation
of,other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty period shall be 20 years after date of Substantial Cornpletion. ,
PART 2 -P120DUCTS
2.1 10�1ANUFACTURERS I
A. Available Nlanufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements,mar�ufacturars offering '
wood shakes that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
foliowing:
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood shakes by ,
following:
1. CERTI-LABLE '
2.2 WOOD SHAKES
A IJse Certi-Lable Cedar Shakes type Certi-Split Handsplit Shakes,Blue Label, (Number 1 ,
Grade) 24"x 1/2" installed by a Shingle Bureau ("CSSB") appraved installer. Proper
application plays a large role in determining roof system integrity.
Fastenerss Two nails (only) for each Certi-label shake-approximately 3/4 from edge and '
approximately 1-1/2"above exposure line. Each Certi=label shake should be applied with
two corrosion-resistant fasteners,such as stainless steel(type 304 or 316),hot-dipped zinc
coated, or aluminum nails or other fastener as accepted by your local building officiaL '
Fasteners shatl be long enough to penetrate into the sheathing at least 3/4" or all the way
through the driven flush with the surface of the Certi-label sha.ke.
Felt: The bottom edge of the felt should be positioned above the butt of the shake at a '
distance equal to twice the weather exposure.. Felt interlay is st►own in Figure 1.
Underdriving or overdriving any fasteneer will affect the integrity of the roofing ,
system. Certi-Guard (fire-retardant-treated) or Certi-Last (preservative-treated)
shakes: Ask the treatment company which fasteners are recommended for use with their
pressure-treated Certi-label shakes. Some fasteners are not compatible with treated materiaL 1
W04D SHAKES Page 2 of 4
'
'
� acin : Spacing beiween adjacent shakes should be a minimum of 3/8"and a maximum
of 5/8". Shakes shall be laid with a side lag of not less than 1-1/2" between joints in
' adjacent courses.
Refer to the CSSB's New Roof Construction Manual for the groper application
method of solid deck installation. Low slope appiicahon is also detailed in the New Roof
' Construction Manual.
�t�of�pc►sure:The maximum recommended weather explosure for Certi-Split and Certi-
Sawu shakes with an interwoven felt or a rubberized membrane system shall be IO".
� B. Hip and Ridge Shakes: Manufacturer's standard factory precut units to match shakes.
, C. Colors,Blends and Pattems: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated,provide
wood shakes with the fallowing tequirexnents:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacture�'s full range of staadard
' colors,textures,and patterns for wood shakes of type indicated.
23 ACCESSORIES
� A. Felt Underlayment: No.l S;unperforated organic felt complying with ASTM�D�226,Type
I;36 inches wide.
, B. Perimeter Underlayment: Polyethylene-sheet-backed rubberized wood membrane,40 mils
thick. Provide primer when recommended by underIayment manufacturer.
' 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that s�all
be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a "Bituthene Ice&Water Shieid,"W.R Grace&Co.
' C. Wood Plastic Cenaent:Nonasbestos fibrated wood cement complyingwith ASTM�4586,
designed for trowel application.
� D. Nails:Otily those fasteners recommended by the shingle manufacture to genetrate 3/4 inah
through pIywood roof sheathing. Note: Material of nails in contact with flashing shall
;natch materials seIected for flashing to prevent galvanic action.
� E. Metal Drip Edge: Minimum 0.024inch mill finish white finish aluminum continuous sheet,
bralce-formed to provide 3-inch roof deck flange and I-1/2-inch fascia flaisge with 3/8-inch
� drip at lower edge.
F. Prefmished Meta1 Flashing: 0.024-inch mill white finish sheet aluminum,job-cut to sizes
and configurations required.
� 1. Each valley flashing piece shaJl be a continuous nreformed piece with inverted v
profile at center of vaIiey and shall match color of shakes.
� PART 3-EXECUTIUN
� 3.1 EXAMII�TATION
A. Examine substrate for comphance wrth requu�ements for substrates,installation tolerances,
and other conditions affeeting performanee of Work of this Section. Do not proeeed with
� installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
WOOD SHAKES Page 3 of 4
�
i
. �
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knatholes ,
or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncozrosive
roofing nails.
B. Coordinateinstallationwithflashingsandotheradjoiningworktoensurepropersequencing. �
Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof
sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. '
3.3 1NSTALLATION
A. Comply with maaafactarer's installahon instructions asd recommendations,bnt not '
less than recommended by"The CSSB RooSng Manual."
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply one layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface �
to receive wood shakes, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches, cnd laps a
minimum of� inches, and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with
sufficient number of roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place �
until wood shingle application.
C. Perimeter Underlayment: Apply minimum 36-inch-wide layer of perimeter underlayment
at eaves. Extend perimeter underlayment at ea.ves a minimum of 24 inches inside exterior ,
wall line.
1. Tn addition to eaves,apply perimeter underlayment at entire perimeter of surfaces �
to receive wood shakes, including ridges,valleys,and rakes.
D. Install wood shakes beginning at lower end with a starter strip of roll roofing. Fasten shakes
in pattern, with weather exposure, and using number of fasteners per shingle as '
recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines or premarked
underlayment to ensure straight coursing.
I. Cut and fit wood shakes at ridges and edges to provide maximwn weather '
protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap
shakes at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. Fasteners
at ridges shall be of suffiaient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. �
E. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicat�ed and in accordance with detaiIs and
recom�nendations of the"Wood Roofing"seefion of"The CSSB Roofmg Manual." �
F. CSSB specifications/notes,sl�all take precedence over similar notes in this specification.
3.4 ADJUSTII�IG ,
A. Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials meeting �
specif ed requirements.
END OF SECTTON 073I 1
�
� WOOD SHAKES Pa 4 of 4 �
�
�
'
� FLASHING AND S�E�'F METAL
SECTION 07600
' THIS SECTION USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT."
PART 1 -GENERAL
' ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions o€ Eontract, ineluc�ing General anck Sttpplementary
� Conditions and Division 1 Speci�cation Sectians,apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SLTMMARY
' A. This Section includes the following:
�. Built-in metal valleys,gutters,and seuppers.
� 2. Gutters and downspo�ts(rain drainage).
3. Exposed metal trim/fascia units.
4. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.
, B. Roo�ingaeeesso�ies installec�integraiwith roofing�nembratie are speei�edin roofing system
sections as raofing work.
' 1.3 SUBMITTAI.S
A. General: Submit the following ur aeeordanee wi�lr Eo»ditions o€Eot�tract and Division 1
� Specification Sections.
B. Produc�data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Aeeessories: 11�fanu€aeture�'s technical produet
data,instailation instructions and general recammendations for each specif ed sheet material
, and fabricated product
C. Samples of the following flashing,sheet metal,and accessory items:
, 1. 8-inch-square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished
surfaces.
' B. Shap drawings show�g layoa�, p�les, methocis of joining, and anchorages details,
includ'ung major counterflashings, trim/fascia units, gutters, downspoats, scuppers, and
expansion joint systems. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale.
' 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Eoordinate work of this sectiog with inter€aeing and adjoining worl�for groper sequeneing
� of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durabiiity of work and
protection of materiais and finishes.
� PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
� A. Extruded 1�Iuminum; 1V�an�€ae�rer's s�anda�e�sions o€sizes anr�pra€iles indieated;
6U063-T52,AA-C22A41 clear anodized fmish;OA80-inch minimum thickness for primary
legs of extrusions.
� FLASHII�IG AND SHEET METAL Page 1 of 4
,
'
B. Fascia gravelstops,gutters and downspouts shali be of continuous,single piece construction '
and shall matah existing profiles of such items used on existing house.
C. Valley flashing shall be of continuous,single piece construction and the scuppers on the '
Cabana shail be part ofthe valley flashing and shall extend 3"past the adjacent fascias. The
flashing shall be 1(?inches wide and run up 8"under the shingles on each side of the valley. ,
See drawings.
D. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-cozrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being '
fastened.
E. Mastic Seatant: Polyisobutylene;non-hardening,non-skinning,non-drying,non-migrating '
sealant.
F. Elastomeric Sealan� Generic type recommended by manufacturer of inetal and fabricator
of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified �
in Division 7 Section"doint Sealers."
G. Epo�cy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrasiv8 metal sea�n cementing compound,recommended '
by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior nonmoving joints including riveted joints.
H. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for
waterproaf/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing shee�. ,
I. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb.rosin-sized building paper.
J. Polyethylene Underlaymen�: Ivfinimum 5-mkl�earbonated polyetltyiene film resis�ant to �
decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154.
K. Reglets: Metal�or plastic units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing '
indicated,non-corrosive.
L. Meta�Accessories: Provide shee��teta�e�ips,shee�metai eriekets as shown on drawings,
shingle tins, straps, anchoring devices, and similaz accessory units as required for '
installation of work,matching or compatible with materia�bein�insta.11ed,non-eorrosive,
size and gage required for performance.
Iv�. ��tter anc�Eoaduetor-Head Guards: 20-gage bronze o�nonmagne�ie stainless steel mesh '
or fabricated units,with selvaged edges and non-corrosive fastene�rs. Select nnaterials for
compatibility with gutters and dovmspouts. All gutters shall have a continuous top screen.
'
N. Elas�ic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell po�yethylene or o�heF so�t closed-eell material
recommended by eiastic flashiag manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure �
movement with minimum stress on flashing shee�.
4. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822,asphaltic.
2.4 FABRICATED i3NITS �
A. �enera�Metal Fabr�eation: Shop€abrieate work ta g�eates�exten�possible. Comply with ,
details shown and with applicable requiremeats of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal
1V�anua�" and other nx:ognized industry prae�ices. Fabrieate for watetproo€ and
weather-resistant perfortnance,with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to
�
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL Page 2 of 4
'
�
' p�rmatren�ly preven#�Yeakage,�damage,or�deterioration�of the work. Form work to fit substrates.
Comply with ma#erial manufacturer instt�,�ctions and rect�mmendations for forming material. Form
' exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning,buckling,and tool marks,true to line and
levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat lock seams. For metal other
, than aluminum,tin edges to be seamed,form seams,and solder. Form aluminum seamswith
epoary seam sealer.
' C. Expansion Provisions: Where lappe�i or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot
be used or would not be sufficiently water/wea�erproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than I inch deep,filled with mast�c sealant{concealed
within,joints).
� D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for
proper performance of wark,fonm metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric
' sealarit,in complianc$with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Prov�de far separation of inetal from non-compat�ble metal or corrosrve
substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contaet,with biluminous coating or
' other percnanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fahricator.
F. Aluminum Eattrusion Units: Fabricate extruded altuninum ninning units with formed or
extruded aluminum joint covers for installation behind maut members where possible.
' Fabricate mitered and welded corner units.
G. Shop Finish,Rain Drainage: Provide manufactvrer's standard baked-on white acrylic shop
� finish on sheet metal rain drainage nnits(gutters,downspauts,and similar exposed units);
I.0-mil dry film thickness.
H. Do not use copper flashing under red cedar wood shingles.
� I. Manufactwers: Subject to compliance with requirements
, PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.i INSTALLATTON REQLTIltEMENTS
� A. General: Exeeptas othecwise indieated,comply with manufacture�'s installation instructions
and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."Anahor
units o£work securely in place by methods indicated,providing for themnal expansion of
' metal t�nits; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units tcae to line and level as
indicated. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will be pennanently waterkight and
weatherproof.
� B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aiuminum is to be installed d�rectly on cementitious
or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene
underlay�ent.
� C. Bed flanges of work in a t.�ick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
' 3.2 CLEAN]NG.AND PROTECTION .
A. CIean exposed metal surfaces,removing substances that might cause c�rrosion of inetal ar
� deterioration of finishes.
FLASHII�TG AND SHEET METAL Page 3 of 4
�
�
B. �rot�ection: Advise Contractor�of xequired procedwes for surveillance and protection�of
flashings and sheet metal work daring canstruction to ensure that work will be without '
damage or deterioration other than natural weatiiering at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07b00 �
�
�
�
�
'
�
r
i
�
�
r
�
�
�
�
FLAS�IING AND SHEET METAL, Page 4 of 4
�
'
' THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION
' JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07901
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT."
IPART1 -GENERAL
' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contra.ct, including Generai and Supplementary
' Conditions and Division�l 5pecifica.tion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SLTMMARY
' A. This Section inaiudes joint sealants for the foliowing locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontra�'ic horizontal surfaces as indicated
' below:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast in-place concrete.
' b. Joints between different materials listed above.
c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and
windows.
' d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-tra�ffic horizoatal surfaces as indicated
, below:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
� doors,windows,
c. Other joints as indicated.
' B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Meta,l" for sealing joints related to
, flashing and sheet metal for roofing.
2. Division 8"Glass and Glazing"for seatants used in glazing.
, 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. P�ovide elastomeric joint sea.lants that have been produced and insta.iled to establish and
� to inaintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or
deterioration of joint substrates.
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditians of Contract and
Divisional Specification Sections.
� B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint seajant product required.
THERMAL& MOISTURE PROTECTIUN Page 1 of b
�
,
C. Certificates from manufacherers of joint seaiants attesting that their praducts comply with '
specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I
THERMA,L&MOISTURE PR4TECTION Page 1 of 5 '
A. Single Source Responsibility for Joint SeaIant Materiais: Obtain,joint sealant materials
from a single manufacturer for each different product required. '
1. Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to subxnit
joint preparation data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are ,
based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and
compatibility with,joint substrates and other materials matching those subnaitted.
1.6 DELNERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING '
A. Delive�t materials to Project site in origi.nal unopened containers or bundles with Iabels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration periocf for use, ,
pot life,cwring time,and mixing instntctions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to mois#ure, high or low temperatures, ,
con#aminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS '
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions: '
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the iimits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substra#es are wet. �
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for appiica.tion indicated. ,
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint seaiants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates. '
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULTNG
PART 2-PRODUCTS '
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL �
A. Compatibility. Provide joint sealants, joint filiers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint snbstrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field '
experience.
S. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to compiy with the folIowing:
THERMAL&MOISTURE PR4TECTION Page 2 of 6 �
'
'
� 1. Provide custom colors to match Architect's samples.
' 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacttuer's standard chernicaily curing
' elastomeric sealaats that comply with ASTM�C�920 and other requirements indicate� on
each Elastomeric Joint Sea.Iant Data Sheet at end of this Section, includin� those
requirements referencing ASTM�C�420 class�cations for Type,Grade,Class,and Uses.
, I. Additional Movement Capability: Where additionaS movement capability is
specified in Elastomeric roint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the
' capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic
movement per ASTMaC�719, to withstand the specified percentage change in
the joint width existing at tune of installation and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM�Ca920 for Uses indicated.
, B. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealanr Manufacturer's standard, solvent release-curing,
pigmented synthetic tubber sealant camplying with AAMA�803.3 and formulated for
� seaiing joints 3I16 inch ar smaller ian width.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with reqnirements.
D. Praducts: Subject to compliauce with requirements.
, 1. Acrylic Sealari�
2. Butyyl Sealant:
, 3. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant:
a PTT 200, Pmtective Treatrnents,Inc.
' 23 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one�art, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable
' latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on
interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage
change in joint width existing at time of instalIation without faiIing cither adhesively or
' cohesively.
B. Acrylio-Emulsion Sealan� Provide product camplying with ASTMaC�834 that
accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and
' compression for a total of 10 percen�
C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM�C�834 and, except
for weight loss mcasured per ASTM�Ca'192, with ASTM�C�920 that accommodates
' joint m�ovement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total
of 5fl percent.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.
, 1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant:
2. Silicone-Emulsion Sealanr
' 2.4 TAPE SEALANTS
ITHERMAL&MOISTURE PR4TECTI4N Page 3 of 6
�
,
A. Tape Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-free, butyl-based tape seslant with a ,
solids content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, anci nonmigrating
in conta.ct with nonporous surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to prevent ,
stretch and packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side,
2.S PREFORMED FOAM SEALANTS '
A. Preformed Foam Sealanfis: Manufacturer's standard pre:formed, precompressed,
impregnated open-cell foa�n sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam '
impregnated with a nondrying, wa�er repeilent agent; factory-produced in precompressed
sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and
airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer, and complying ,
with the following rre�quirements:
1. elastic, mi9dew-resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatibte with joint substrates
and other joint sealants. '
Z.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining, are '
compatible wittt joiut suhstirates, sealants, primcrs and ottier joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience '
and faboratory testing.
B, Plastic Foam Joint Rillers: Preformed, compressible, resiUent, nonstaining, nonwaxing,
nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, '
shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant per;formance:
1. Open-celi golyurethane foam. '
Z. Closed-celi polyethylene foam, nonabsarbent to iiquid water and gas,
nonoutgassing in unreiptured state.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERiALS '
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer . '
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION '
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealaats, with Installer present, for complianc$ '
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting jaint sealant performance. Do not proceed with instailation of joint sealants
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,
3.2 PREPARA,TION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints unmediately before installing joint sealants ,
to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufact�rer and the following
requirements:
'
THERMAL&MOIS1'URE PROTECI'ION Page 4 of 6
'
'
' 1. Remove all forei material from 'oint substrates that could interfe w"
� J re ith
adhesion of joint seafan� including dust,paints(except for permanent, protective
' coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compahbi9ity by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repeilents,
water,surface dirt,and frost
, 2. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
3. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other
nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,harm
' snbstrates,or leave residues capable of interfering witi�adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint
, sealant manufactcuer bascd on preconshuction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
' adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF IOINT SEALANTS
� A. General: Comply witt3 joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent
requ'vements appIy.
' B. Sealatst�nstallation Standard: Comply wiRh recommendations of ASTMaC 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated.
C. Tnstallation of Sealant Backings: Tnstall sealant backings to corr►ply with the following
' requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during
' application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and
depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that a11aw optimum sealant
movement cagability.
' D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants
directly contac#ing and fulIy wetting joint substrates, completely filiing recesses provided
for each joint configuration, and providir�g uniform, cross-seational shapes and depths
' rela#ive to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants
at the same time sealant backings aze instalIed.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealanis: Immediately after sealant applicallon �d prior to time
' skima.ing or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesian of sealant with
sides of join� Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use
' tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or aze not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
' 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure SA in ASTM�Ca1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent se�rfaces of recessed taoled joints.
' 3.4 CLE.ANING
' THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION Page 5 of 6
'
'
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by '
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur. '
3.5 PRO'TECTION
A. Protect jaint sea�ants during and af�er curing period from contact with contaminating '
substances or from damage resulting from constrnction aperations ar other caeises so that
they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despfte '
such protection, damage or deterioration occvrs, cut out and rernove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants smmediately so that and installateons with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work. '
END OF SECTION 07901
'
,
'
. '
,
'
,
'
'
,
,
'
THERMAL&MOIS'TURE PROTEC'IZON ' Page 6 of 6
. ,
,
, FLUSH WOOD DOORS
SECTION 08211
' PART 1 -GENER.AL
1.1 RELAT'ED DOCUMENTS
, A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, incIuding the General and Supplementary
Conditivns and Division 1 Specificafion Sections,apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SI:fMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
' 1. Solid core doors with wood veneer faces.
2. Solid core doors with hardboard fac�s.
3. Solid core doors with plastic laminate faces.
' 4. Shop pritt�ing of flush wvod doors.
5. Factory finishirig of flush wood doors.
6. Factory fitting flush wood doors#o frames and factory machining for hazdware.
' 1. Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork"for requu�ements relating to custom
veneers from the same flitches for bo#h wood doors and architectural woodwork items.
2. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry"for wood door frames.
, 3. Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork"for wood door frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
' A. GeneraL• Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
' B. Product data for each type of daor, including details of core and edge constniction, fa�im for
openiugs and louvers,and factory-finishing specifications.
, C. Shop drawings indicating lacation and size of each door,elevation of each kind of door,details
of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking,fire ratings,requiirements for veneer
matahing and factary finishing and other pertinent data
� 1. For factory-machined doors,indicate dunensions and Iocations of cutouts for locksets and
other cutouts adjacent to iight and louver openings.
D. Sampies for initial selection in the form of color charts consisting of actual materials in small
' sections for the following:
2. Faces of factory-finished doors with transparent finish. Show the futl range of coiors
' availahle for stained finishes.
3. Facss of factory-finished doors with opaque finish. Show the full range ofcolors available.
E. Samples for verification in the form and size indicated below:
, 1. Comer sections of doors approximatety i2 inches(304 mm)square with door faces and
edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and
' solid lumber required. Finish sample with same mater�als proposed for factory-finished
doors.
, FLUSH WUOD DUOR.S Page 1 of 6
'
'
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Quality Standazd: Compty with�he foliowing standard: ,
1. NWWAA Quality Standard: I.S.1-A,"Architectural Wood Flush Doors,"of the National
Wood Window and Door Associatioa '
2. AWI Quality Standazd: "Architectural Woodwork Quatity Standazds"ofthe Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grade of door,core,construction,finish,and other requirements.
3. WIC Quality Standard: "Manual of Miilworlc"of the Woodwork Institute of California for
grade of door,core,construction,fiinish,and other requirements. '
a. Provide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that doors meet
requireinents of grades specified.
b. Provide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate for installation. ,
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELNERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING '
A. Protect doors during transit,storage,and handling to prevent damage,soiling,and deterioration.
Comply with requirements of referenced st�tndard atZd manufactttrer's instructions. '
1. Comply with WIC Technical Bulletin 420.R for delivery,storage,and handling of doors.
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers as designated on shop drawings, using �
temporary,removable,or concealed markings.
1.6 PR�TECT CONDITiONS ,
A. Conditianing: Do not deliver or install doors Until building is enclosed, and wet work is
complete and vc+iiI maintaini temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period. '
B. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative
humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and instailation areas during the '
remainder of the construction period to coznply with the following requirer�aents applicable to
Projec�'s geographical location:
1. AWI quality standard Section 100-5-21 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Conten�." ,
2. WIC quality standard Section 2"General Information,Technical Bulietin 419-R."
1.7 WAR:RANTY ,
A. General Warranty: Door manufactuter's warranty specifed in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Coatract Documents and
shall be in addition to,and run concurrent with,other warranties made by the Contractor under '
requirements of the Contract Dacuments.
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit wcitten agreement on door manufacturer's standazd form '
signed by manufacturer,Installer,and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors
that have warped(bow,cup,or twist)mora than 1/4 inch(6.35 mm)in a 42-by-84inch(1067-by-
2i34mm)section or that show teleg�aphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding O.QI
inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of ,
referenced quality standards.
�,usx wooD nooRs P��af6
1
�
'
, .
1. Warranty shall also include installation and�`mishing that may be requixed due to xep�ir or
' replacern�nt of defective doors whese defeet was not�pparent prior to hanging.
2. '�larranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of
substantial Complation.
' a. So1id Core IntErior poors: �,ife of installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.. Available Manufacturers: Subject to campliance�vith requirern�nts,xnanufacturers offering docsrs
' that may be incorporated in the Waxk include,but are not limited to,the folIowing:
B. Manufacturer: Subject to ca�pliance with requirements,provide doors by one of fhe followiixg:
' 1. Solid Co�e I)aors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Ine.
, b. Aynpco Products,Inc.
c. Buell Door Co.
d. Chappell Door Co.
e. Eag�e Plyu�ood 8z I?oor Manufacturing,Inc_
' f. Eggexs�dustries,Arehitectural Door Division.
g. Fenestra Garporation.
h. Grahaxn Manufaciuring Gorp.
, i. Ha.ley Brothers,l�ic.
j, Ideal Woad Products,Inc.
k IPIK Door Co., Inc.
1_ M�..rli.te.
m. Mo�ia�wk Flush Doors,Inc.
, n. Fon�raft Door Co.
o. Ragland Mat�ufacturing Ca.,Inc.
p. V-T Industries bic. ,
' q. Weyerhauser Co.
2.2
' INTERIOlZ FLUSH'WOOD DQORS
A. So1id Core I�oors for Transparent Fm�sh: Comply watl�the follow�g requ�rements:
' 1. Faces: �Jhite birch,plain sliced.
2.. Grade: Premiiun.
3. Grade: Custom.
4. Grade: Ecoa�pmy.
' S. Construction: 5 plies.
6. Construction: 7 plies.
7. Core: Particleboard core.
' 8. Core: Glued-black core.
9. Core: Nonglued-block core:
I0. Bonding: Stiles a:rgd rails bonded to coi•e,then entire unit abrasive plaued before
veneering.
'
FI��[T�H VVOOD DOOJE2� I�age 3 of 6
'
'
��` 1
B. Solid Core I�oors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requiremients: '
1. Faces: Medi�mrdensity overlay over standard thickness hardwood face veneers. ,
2. Faces: Any closed-grair�hardwood of mi11 option.
3. Faces: Hardboard.
4. Grade: Prertaium.
5. Grade: Custom. � '
6. Crrade: Economy.
7. Construction: 5 plies.
8. Gonstruction: 7 plies.
9. Construction: Hardboard faces glued dixectly to core. '
10. Core: Particleboard core.
l 1. Core: Glued-block core.
12. Core: Nonglued-hlock core. '
13. Bonding: Stiles aaid rails bonded to core,then entire unit abrasive planed before
veneering.
2.3 FABRICATTON '
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to cornply with follovving requi�ements:
l. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. '
2. Factozy fit doors to suit frame�opening sizes indicated,with the foll�owing unifarm
clearances and bevels:
a. Campty with ciearance requirements of.refereneed quality s�tandard for fitting. '
Compty with requiremenfs of NFPA 80 for�re-resistance-rated doors.
3. Factory iiaaeh.ine doors for hardv✓are that is not surface applied. Locaie hardware to '
comply r�vi�h D]HI-WDHS-3. Comply with fuial hardware scheclules, door frame shop
drawings, DI�I A 115-W series standards,a.nd hardware tamplates.
a. Coordinate measurernents of hardware .mort�ses in metal frames to verify '
dimensions and alignment before proceedin�with factory machining.
b. Metal Astragals: Premachine asiragals and formed=ateel edges for
haxdware for pairs of fire-rated doors. '
2.4 SHfOP PRTil�TG
A. Doozs for Opaque Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat '
, flf wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Trans�arent �'inish: Shop-seal faces and edges of doors for tran:sparent finish with stain (if
required},other required pretreatments, and first coat of fmish as�speeified ia�the following: '
1. Division 9 Section "Painting."
2. Division 9 Section "Exterior Wood Stains." '
2.5 FACTORY FII�SH7NG
A. Genaral: Comply with refere�ieed qual�ty standard's requiremeli�s for factory fimishing. ,
B. Finish wood doors at factory.
C. Finish wood doors at factory wi�ere indicated on.sch�dules or Drawings as factory finished. '
FLUSI�WOC)D IDC�OIZS Page 4 of 6 '
'
'
' D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade,finish system,staining effect,
and sheen.
1. Grade: Premium.
' 2. Grade: Custom.
3. Finish: AWI System TR-2 catalyzed lacquer.
4. Finish: AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.
' S. Finish: AWI System TR-2 catalyzed lacquer or TR-4 conversion varnish as standard with
manufacturer.
6: Finish: WIC System#1 b. catalyzed lacquer.
7. Finish: WIC System#2 conversion varnish.
' 8. Finish: WIC 5ystem #1 b. catalyzed lacqe�er or #2 conversion varnish as standard with
manufacturer.
9. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to
either AWI System T'R-2 catalyzed lacquer ar AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.
' i0. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
11. Finish: WIC System#3 catalyzed polyurethane.
12. Staining: None required.
, 13. Staining: Match approved sample for colop.
14. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
15. Effect: Open-grain finish.
16. Effect: Filled finish.
' 17. Sheen: Satin.
18. Sheen: Semiglass.
E. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade,fmish system,color,and sheen.
' 1. Grade: Premium.
Z. Grade: Custom.
' 3. Finish: AWI System OP-2 catalyzed lacquer.
4. Finish: AWI System OP-1 standard lacquer.
5. Finish: AWI System OP-4 opaque conversion varnish.
6. Finish: WIC System#1 g. opaque pigmented lacquer.
' 7. Finish: WIC System#6 syntheric enamel.
8. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements comparable to
AWI System OP-2 c�ta.lyzed lacquer.
' 9. Color: Match approved sample for color selected by Architect from rnanufacturer's
standard colors.
10. Color: Match Architect's sample.
11. Shee�: Satin.
' 12. Sheen: Semigloss.
13. Sheen: Gloss.
' PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
1. Verify that frames comply with uidicated requirements for type,size, location, and swing
characteristics and ha�e been instailed with plumb jambs and level heads.
' 2. Reject doors`vith defects.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
'
' FLUSH WOOD D(JfJIaS Page 5 of 6
'
'
3.2 INSTALLATION '
A. Hardware: For installarion see Division 8 Section "Door Hardwaze."
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and '
referenced quality standard and as indicated.
C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated '
below;do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with
fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after�tting and machining.
1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and ,
heads, 1/16 inch(1.6 mm)per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/8 inch(3.2
mm)from bottarn of door to top of decorati�e floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mrn) clearance from bottom of door to top '
of threshold.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore fmish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at '
the job site.
F. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the followin for fmishin re uirements: '
g g q
1. Division 9 Section "Painting."
2. Division 9 Section "Exterior Wood Stains."
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION I
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. '
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doars damaged during installation.
C. Pratect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without '
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08211
t
'
1
'
'
'
FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 6 of 6
,
'
'
� WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS
� SECTION 08312
THIS SECTION USES THE TERM.A.RCHITECT.
� PART 1 -GENER.AL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
� 1.2 SUMMARY �
C. This Section includes vinyl-clad wood slidiag glass doors provided by the Owner and
� instatled by the General Contractor..
1. Performance Grade: Provide wood sliding glass doors that comply with
� � requirements of NWWDA T.S.3 for performance grade 20.
2. Glazing requirements for wood sliding glass doors,including those specified to be
factory glazed,are specified in the Division 8 Section"Glazing."
� 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards; Performance requirements for operating force, structural performance, air
� infiltration, and water penetration for wood sliding glass doors are those specified in
NWWDA I.S.3 "Wood Siiding Patio Doors."
B. Testing: Manufacturer's stock units of each grade of required wood sliding glass door shall
, have been tested by a recognized testing agency,according to ASTM E 330 for structural
performance,ASTM E 283 for air infiltration,and AST'M E 547 for water penetration. Test
samples shall comply with reqairements in NWWDA I.S. 3 for test sample sizes and
methods.
� C. Performance Requirements(Grade 40 Sliding Glass Doors): Each wood slidin lass door
g8
unit shall comply with the following performance requirements:
� 1. Operating Force: Not more than 301b of force to begin motion,nor more than 15
lb of force to sustain motion.
� 2. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.25 cfm per sq, ft. of overall frame area at an
inward test pressure of 1.571bf per sq.ft.
3. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward
test pressure of 4.43 Ibf per sq.ft.
� 4. Structural Perfarmance: No glass breakage, damage to hardware, or permanent
deformation that would impair unit operation or cause residual deflection greater
thate 0.1 percent of the span at a positive (inwazd) and negative (outward) test
� pressure of 401bf per sq.ft.
D.. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with requirements for Grade 10 level of resistance to
forced entry when tested according to the requirements of ASTM F 842.
� 1.4 SUBMIT"TALS
� A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Spec�cation Sections.
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 1 of 6
�
f'
!
B. Product data.for each type of wood sliding glass door specified. Include the foliowing: �
1. Manufacturer's standard construction details. �
2. Profiles and dimensions of individuai components.
3. Data on finishes,hardware,and accessories.
4. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of e�cterior surfaces. �
C. Shop drawings for each type of wood sliding glass door unit required. Include information
not fully detailed in the manufacturer's standard product data and the foilowing:
1. Layout and installation details,including anchors. �
2. Typical unit elevations.
3. Glazing details.
4. Full-size details of typical co�nposite members. �
5. Hardware and accessories.
D. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Samples ofeachrequired finish on 12-inch-longtypical �
door member. Where finishes involve normal color variations,include sample sets showing
the full range of variations expected.
E. Product certificates signed by the wood sliding glass door manufacturer certifying that door �
units comply with specified performance requirements.
F. Product test reports based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency �
showing evidence of compliance of the wood sliding glass door units with requirements
indicated based on comprehensive testing within the last 5 years.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Safety Glass Standard: Where safefy gtass is indicated or required by authorities having
jurisdiction,provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing '
requirements of 16 CFR for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide safety glass permanently marked �
with the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council{SGCC}or
another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations ofthe Flat Glass MarketingAssociation �
(FGMA}"Giazing Manual"and"SealantManual"exceptwhere more stringent requirements
are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not
otherwise defined in this Section or referenced standards. �
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide wood sliding glass doors produced by a single
fabricator who is capable of indicating prior successful production of units similar to those
required. �
D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate the sizes,profiles,and dimensional requirements
of wood sliding glass door types required and are based on the specific type and model �
indicated. Wood sliding glass door units by other manufacturers may be considered
provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design
concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equaiity is on the proposer.
l.b PROJECT CONDITIONS �
A. Field Measurements: Check actual door openings in construction work by accurate field �
measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on finai shop drawings.
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DUORS Page 2 of 6
�
'
�
I. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. Where
' necessary, proceed with fabrication without fieId measurements and coordinate
fabrication tolerances to ensure proper ftt of wood sIiding glass door units.
� 1.7 WARRANTY
A. Wood Sliding Glass Door Warranty: Submit awrit�en warranty signed by the manufaciurer,
agreeing to repair or replace wood sliding glass door units that fail in materials or
� workmanship within the specif ed warranty period. Failures include,b�t are not necessarily
limited to,the following:
� 1. Structural fai[ures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, air
infiltration, or failure of weatherstripping.
2. Faulty operation of movable panels or hardware.
3. Deteriocation of inetals,finishes,and other materials beyond normaI weathering.
� 4. Wanranty period for wood sliding glass doors is 3 years after the date of Substantial
Completion.
5. This warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the
� Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
� PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
� A. AvaiIable Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with reqairements,manufacturersoffering
wood sliding glass doors that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited
to,the following:
' B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
foIlowing:
� a. Koibe&Kolbe.
b. Marvin Windows.
c. Rolscreen Co./Pella.
� d. Andersen Corp.
e. Hayfield Windows
� 2.2 MATERIAI�S � �
A. General: Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S.3.
� B. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pi�ae or another suitable fine-grained lumber, kiln-dried to a
moisture content of b to 12 perceirt at time of fabrication,free from blue stain,knots,pitch
pockets,and surface checks larger t�han 1/8 inch deep by 2 inches wide.
', 1. All lumber shali be water-repellent preservative treated after machining according
to NWWDA I.S.4
2. Finger jointed wood members are not acceptable.
� 3. Color as selected by the Architect from the mannfacturer's standard color range.
C. Vinyl Cladding: Provide manufacturer's standard bonded vinyl cladding on exterior
� exposure ofwood members,consisting of a rigid polyvinyl chloride sheath,complying with
requirements of ASTM D 1784,Class 14344-C,not less than 35 mils average thickness,
permanent white paintable fmish.
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 3 of 6 '
�
'
D. Sill Cap (Track): Provide extruded aluminum track of profile indicated with �
natural-anodized finish.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and sliding glass door �
accessories of aluminum,nonmagnetic stainless steel,or hot-dip zinc-coated steel compIying
with ASTM A 123;provide strength su�cient Yo withstand design pressure indicated.
F. Comprassion Weatherstripping: Provide the ►nanufact�rer's standard compressible �
weatherstripping of molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded
expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,Grade 4,designed for �
permanent resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action,concealed when door is closed.
G. Sliding Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool,polypropylene,or
nylon pile,with resin-impregnated backing fabric,and an aluminum backing strip;comply �
with AAMA 701.2.
1. Provide weatherstripping with integral center-line barrier fin of semirigid plastic �
polypropylene sheet.
H. Insect Sereens: Provide a movable insect screen panel for each movable glazed panel.
Comply with requirements of SMA 2005. �
1. Screen Fabric: Provide 18-by-I4 or t8-by-16 mesh of plastic-coated glass-fiber
threads,woven and fused to form a screen that is resistant to corrosion,shrinkage, �
stretching,impact damage,and weather deterioration;black or dark grey. Comply
with requirements of FS LrS-125.
2. Insect Screen Frames: Provide the manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum �
� screen frame with removable vinyl fabric-retainer spline mounted on water-repelient
preservative treated Western Pine wood frame. Comply with reyuirements of SMA
1004.
� a. Finish: Anodized aluminum or baked-on organic coating in color selected r
by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
I. Glazing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's standazd sealed insulating safety glazing �
material that complies with the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and the Division 8 Section
��Glazing.,�
2.3 HARDWARE �
A. Hardware: Provide hardware necessary to properly operate,tightly close,and securely lock
doors. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, �'
provide white bronze, cast or wrought aluminum, solid white metal with special coating
finish,or nonmagnetic stainless steel.
1. Door Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standazd wood pull grips. �
2. Locks: Install manufacturer's standard pull and keyless locking device on each
movable panel, lockable from the inside. Adjust locking device to allow �
unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction
indicated.Note: One slider must be locked by key from the ontside
3. SecurityFoot Bolt: Provide security foot-operated dead bolt attached to the bottom
rail of movable door panels to lock the panel when fully closed and when partially �
open to permit ventilation. .
2.4 FABRICATION
, �
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 4 of 6
i
�
� A. General: Fabricate wood sliding glass door units to comply with indicated standards.
Include a complete system to assemble components and anchor units.
t1. Provide anits that are regiazable without disman.tling panel framing.
B. Assembly: Assemble components into complete weathertight units with flush,rigid,and
� hairline joints. Mill, cope, butt,and rniter joints; secure by mechanical devices or other
means to ensure permanently watertight joints. Provide at least two corrosion-resistant,
prelubricated or self-lubricating rollers for each sliding panel, o£sufficient capacity to
� ensure easy,quiet,and smooth operation.
C. Weatherstripping: Provide operable panels with a double row of sliding weatherstripping
,, in horizontal raiIs and single-or double-row weatherstripping in meeting or jamb stiles,as
� required to meet specified performance requirements. Provide compression-type
weatherstrippingattheperimeterofeach movable panel where sliding-type weatherstripping
is not appropriate.
� D. Preglazed Fabr�cation: Glaze wood sliding glass door units in t[ie factory where practical
and possible for the applications indicated. Comply with requirements of the Division 8
Section "Glazing"and NWWDA I.S.3.
� E. Screens: Provide insect screen unit for each operable panel. Design door units and
hardware to accommodate screens in a tight fitting removable arrangement,on either inside
or outside of door unit,with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
� 2.5 FINISHES
� A. Wood Door Finish: Provide the following finish on exposed wood in door units:
1 Shop-Primed Units: Provide the fabricator's standard shop-prime coat on exterior
� wood surfaces only. Comply with requirements of the Division 9 Section
"Painting" for prime pain�
2. Shop-Finished Units: Provide fabricator's standard shop finish,consisting ofprime
coat and two coats of alkyd semigloss enamel totaling 3 mils dry film thickness
� applied to both exterior and interior wood surfaces.
� a. Color: White.
� PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
� A. Tnspect openings before beginning waod sliding glass door installation. Verify that the
rough or masonry opening is correct and that the sill plate is levei. Do not install door units
� until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Wood frame wails shall be dry, clean, sound and well-nailed, free of voids, and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that nai�heads are driven flush with surfaces in the
� opening and within 3 inches of the opening.
3.2 INSTALLATION
� A. Comply with mannfacturer's instructions and recommendations for installing door
. units,hazdware,accessories,and other components.
�
WOOD SLIDING GLASS DOORS Page 5 of 6
�
�
B. Set sill members and other frame members in b�of compound or with joint fillers �
ar gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate
installation with wall flashing and other components.
1. Refer to Division 7 Section"Joint Sea�ants"for componnds,fillers,and gaskets to ,
be installed c�ncwrently with wood sliding glass door units.
C. Set units plumb,level and true to line,without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide �
propar support,and anchor frames and fixed panels se�urely in place.
3.3 ADNSTIl�IG �
A. Adjust operating panels,screens,and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and
weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. �
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces promptly after installing wood sliding glass doors. Avoid damaging �
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealing compounds,dirt,and
other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moviung�arts.
B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing wood sliding glass door units. Wash �
and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior ta the date scheduled for fmal
inspection. Comply with manufacture�'s recoxnmendations for final cleaning and
mainteaance. �
C. Remove and repIace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any
other way during thc construction period, inciuding by natwal causes, accidents, or �
vandalism.
3.5 PROTECTFON �
A. Institute and maxntain protecLve measures and other pr�cauhons requ�red through remamder
of construction period to ens�rethat,except for normal weathering,wood sliding glass door
units will be without damage or deterioration at the ticna of Substantial Completion. �
END OF SECTION 083I2
�
�
�
�
�
�
WOOD SLIDIl�TG GLASS DOORS Page 6 of 6
�
�
� WOOD WINDOW
S
sECTTON os6�a
� THIS SECTION USES THE TERM"ARCHITECT."
� PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Divisipnal Specification Sections,appiy to this section.
� 1.2 SUMMARY
A.This Section includes the following vinyl-clad wood window types including glazing:
� 1. Non-operative(Fixed)Window Units.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain reqvirements that relate to this section:
� 1. Joint sealingbetween wood windows and adjacent materials is specified in Division
7 Section"Joint Sealers."
2. Trim for wood windows,aze specified in Division 6"Finish Carpentry"
� 3 Owner shali furnish windows and Generai Contractor will install.
1.3 SYSTEM PER�ORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
� A. Standards: Performance requirements for structural performance,air inFltration,and water
penetration for wood windows are those specified in NWWDAfaI.S.�'t2 "Inciustry Standard
for Wood Window Units."
� B. Perfortnaace Requuements(Grade 40 Windows}: Each required window unit shall comply
with the following performance requirements:
� 1. Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.25 cfin per sq. ft. of overall frame area at an
inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf per sq.ft.
� 2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward
test pressure of 4.43 lbf per sq.ft.
3. Structural Performance: No glass breakage, damage to hardware, permanent
deforrnation that would impair operation of#he unit,or residual deflection greater
' than 0.4 percent of the span at a positive (inward) and negative (outward} test
pressure of 40�1bf per sq.ft.
4. Farced Entry Resistance: Provide window units that comply with requirements for
� Performance Leve110 when tested in ar,cordance with ASTM�F�S88.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
� A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Divisional Specification Sections:
1. Product data for each type of wood window z�equired, including:
�'
a. St�ndard consbruction details and fab�ication methods.
b. Prafiles and dimensions of individual components.
c. Data on finishes.
WOOD WINDOWS 'Page 1 of 5
'
�
d. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning exterior snrfaces. �
e. Layout and installarion details,including anchors.
f. Glazing details. �
B. Samples for color selection
C. Approval by the Architect � �
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wood Window Standard: Comply wifh NWWDAaI.S.a2 for standards ofperformance and �
fabrication worlQnanship for wood windows.
B. Safety Glass Standard: Provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI Z97.1 �
and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Provide safety glass permanently mazked with the certification label of the Safety �
Glazing Certification Councii(SGCC)or other certifcation agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations o£the Flat Glass Marketing Association �'
(FGMA)"GlazingManual"and"SealantManual"exceptwheremore stringentrequirements
are indicated.
D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked �
with the appropriate certification label of the either the Insulating Glass Certification
Council(IGCC)or the Associated Laboratories,Inc.(ALn. Provide the certif cation label �
either on spacers or at least one component pane of each unit.
E. Single Source Responsibility: Provide windows produced by a single fabricator who is
capable of indicating prior successful prodaction of units similar to those required. �
F. Design Concept: The drawings indicate window sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements. �
l.b PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before �
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
1. Where necessary,proceed with fabrication without measurements,and coordinate '
tolerances with General Contractor to ensure proper fit of window units.
1.7 WARRANTY �
A. Wood Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window
manufacturer,agreeingto repair or replace units that faii in materials or workmanslup within �
the specified warraniy period. Failures include,but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Structural failures, inciuding excessive deflection, excessive leakage, or air
infiltration. jr
2. Faulty operation of window sash or hardware. ■
3. Deterioration of wood, metaIs, finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering. �
WOOD WINDOWS Page 2 of 5 '
�
� B. Warranty Period: 3years after the date of Substantial Completion.
� C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Docaments and is in addition to and runs
concurrentwith other warranties made by the Contractorunder requirements ofthe Contract
' Docaments.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
� 2.1 MA,NUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements,m,anufacturers offering
� window units that may be incorporated in the Work include, but aze not limited to, the
following:
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide window units by one of
the '
foIlowing:
� 1. Clad Wood Windows:
a. Marvin Windows.
b. Rolscreen Co.(Pella).
� c. Weather Shield Mfg.,Inc.
d. Kolbe and Kolbe
2. Vinyl-Clad Wood Window Units:
� a. Andersen Co .
rF
b. Weather Shield Mfg_,Inc.
� 2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements ofNWWDAaI.S.la2.
� B. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine or other suitable fine- sin 1
gr umber that has been kiln dned to
. a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and is free of finger joints,blue
� stain,knots,pitch pockets and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch wide by 2 inches long.
1. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining in accordance with
� NWWDAaI.S.a4.
a. Color: White.
� C. Vinyl Cladding: Manufacturer's bonded vinyl cladding on exterior exposure o£wood
members,consisting of a rigid polyvinyl chloride sheath,complying with ASTM�Da1784,
Class 14344-C,not less than 3S-mil average thickness,in permanent white paintable finish.
�' 1. Trim Members: Vinyl-clad exterior wood trim. '
2. Trim Members: Stainable interior wood trim to ft windows. Architect to select
trim material.
� � D. Anekors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips and window accessories of
alaminum,nonmagnetic stainless steel,or hot-dip zinc-coated steel oriron complying with
, the requirements of ASTM�.Ba633 foz SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide strength
suff'icient to withstand design pressure indicated.
WOOD WINDQWS Page 3 of 5
�
�
E. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S.2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's �
recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners.
l. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and �
instatlation. '
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Provide compressible weathersiripping, designed for �
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, completely concealed when
sash is closed.
1. Weatherstripping material: Nonferrous spring metal. �
2. Weatherstripping material: Molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTMaDa2287.
3. Weatherstripping material: Molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets
complying with ASTMaCa509,Grade 4. �
a. Finish: Anodized aluminum or baked-on organic coating in color selected
by Architect from manufactarer's standards. �
I. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's standard clear,sealed,insulating
sa.fety glazing material that complies with ANSI Z97.1 anc!the"Glass and Glazing"Section.
J. Glazing Seal: Provide the manufacturer's standard extruded vinyl or butyl glazing gasket �
providing weathertight seal.
2.5 N�N-OPERATNE FIXED WINDOWS �
A. Window Grade: Comply with the reqairements of NWWDA Performance Grade 60.
B. Non-rectangular fixed lite sections must be field measured before manufacture. �
2.6 FABRICATION �
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard fabrication of units. Comply with indicated
standazds. Include a compiete system for assembly of components and anchorage of
window units. �
1. Comply with requirements of referenced standards for moisture content of lumber
at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. �
B. Fabricate windows to produce units that aze reglazable without dismantling sash framing_
Provide openings and mortises precut,where possible,to receive hazdware and other items.
C. Each window unit incIudes sash,frame,stops,sill(including undersiil or nosing),exterior �
casing and moldings,integrai muilions and muntins,hardware,and accessories.
2.10 FINTSHES. �
1. Shop-Finished Units: Provide fabricator's standard shop finish,consisting ofprime �
coat and 2 fnish coats, 3-nnils dry fiIm thickness, applied to both exterior and
interior wood surfaces.
a. Color: White. �
PART 3-EXECUTION
WOOD VVYNDOWS Page 4 of 5 �
r
!
� 3.1 INSPECTION '
� A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening is correct and the
sill plate is Ievel. Do not proceed with installation of window units until unsatisfactory
conditions have been cotrected.
� I. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound and well-nailed, free of voids, and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the
opening and within 3 inches of the comer.
� 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacfurer's instructions and recommendations for installation of window
� anits.
B. Set units plumb,level,true to line,without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper
� support and anchor securely in place.
C. Set sill members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated, to
� provide weather-tight construction.
3.3 CLEANING
� A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces promptly after installation. Take care to avoid damage
to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other
substances.
� 3.5 PROTECTION �
A. Protect window units from damage or deterioration antil tune of substantial connpietion.
� END OF SECTION 086i0
�
��
�
r
� �
�
� WOOD WIl�TDOWS Page 5 of 5
� . .
�
� DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08720
PART 1 -GENERAL
t1.01 SLTMMARY
� A. Section Includes:
1. F�n�sh Hardware for wood doors.
2. Keyed cylinders as indicated.
rB. Related Items:
See other sections
� l. Wood doors: Refer to Section 08210.
2. Conduit and power connections: Refer to Division 16.
1.02 REFERENCES .
�' A. National Fi�e Protection Agency(NFPA):
� l. 1�PA 80.
2. NFPA 101.
B. Undervviriters Laboratories,Inc.(UL):
� 1. Building Materials Directory.
C. Warnock Hersey (W'H):
� i. Buildin Materials Directo .
g rY
� D. ADA:
1. Americans with Disabilities Act
� 1.03 SUBMIT"TALS
A. Compiy with Section 0130Q,u�nless otherwise indicated.
� 1. Special Submitta.l Requirements: Combi�e submittals ofthis Section with Sections listed
6elow to ensura the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be
reviewed together.
, a Section 082 i 1 -Flush Wood Doors
� B. Product Data: Manufacture�s specifications and technical data.including the following:
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
� 3. Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts of each hardware item with hardwaze schedule.
C. Shop Drawings-Hardware Schedule: Snbmit 1 complete reproducible copy.
� 1. List groups and suffixes in proper sequence.
2. Completely describe door and list architectural door number.
3. Vertical or horizontai schedules only are acceptable.
�
DUOR HARDWARE Page 1 of 5
�
�
D. Wiring Diagram: Submit wiring diagrains for each electric product specified. �
i. Verify voltage with electri'ca.l Contractor. n �
E. Tempiates: St�bmit templates and reviewed Hardware Schedule to door and frarne
supplier and others as applicable.
F. Samples: ,�
1. If requested by Architect,provide 3 samples of inetal finishes.
G. Keying Schedule: Upon review and acceptattce of Hardware Schedule,develop Keying �
Schedule in consultation with Owner.
1. Submit 1 copy to Architect for information only. �
H. Contract Close-out Submittals: Comply with Section 01700 including specific
requirements. �
1. Operating and maiQtenance man�als: Submit 3 sets containing the following:
a. Maintenance inshvctions for each item of hardware. �
b. Catalag pages for each produc�
c. Name,address,and phone number of Iocal representative for each manufacturer.
d. Parts list for each product. �
e. Copy of final hazdware schedule.
f. Copy of final keying schedule.
1 A4 QUALITY ASSURANCE �
A. Manufacturer's QuaIifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual
production of specified products. �
B. Distributor's Qualifications:
1. Firm with 3 years.experience in the distribntion of commercial hatdware. �
2. Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultant for tfie
pwrpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying
sohedule. �
3. Hardware Schedule shall i�e prepared and signed by an AHC.
C. Installer's Quatifications:
1. Three(3) years experience in installation of similar hardwaze to that required ,
for this proJect.
D. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide UL label or stamp on hardware required on �
labeled doors.
1.45 DELNERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �
A. Packing and Shipping:
1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufactiuer's �
identifica.tion.
2. Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and s#orage.
3. Mark hardware to correspond with"reviewed Hardware Schedule" �
DOOR HARDWAR,E Page 2 of 5 �
j
� B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
� PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTCTRERS
� Hinges,Bolts............................................... Stanley(St}
DA Spring Hinges. B�mmer(Bm)
Locks and Latches....................................... Schlage(S)
� Closers............. ....................................... LCN
Pushplates,Pulls,Kickplates.. Hiawatha{I�
Stops. ...................................................... Ives(�
..
Thresholds................................................. Reese�)
� KEYIl�TG INSTRUCTIONS
All passage sets to be Residential grade levers.
All locks to be raasterkeyed with existing residence
� Provide 3 masterkeys and 2 change keys per lock
2.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
� GROUP A AIi BATHROOM ANU BEDROOM A and B TYPE DOORS
4) Door stop
� 5) Passage set with interior room Iock
GROUP B D and E TYPE DOORS
� 1) Passage set
2) Closer
3) Threshold
� 4) Lock-keyecl to interior
GROUP C All other A TYPE DOORS
� 1) Passage set
2) Door stop
� GROUP D BATHROOM ANll BEDROOM C,F and G TYPE DOORS
1) Hardware by Mfg.
� 2) Door stop
3) Integrallock
� PART 3 EXECUTION
3.41 E,XAMINATION
� A. Verification of Conditions: Examine doors,frames,rela#ed items,and conditions under
which Work is to be performed and icientify conditions detrimental to proper and or
ti�nely completion.
L3.02INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
�
DOOR HARDWARE Page 3 of 5
�
�
�
B. Door Hardware:
i. Hang doors with screws inserted and hinges adjusted so doors swing free and do not rattle when �
closed. Cut holes and mortises in wood doors for locks and other hardware with jig approved or
provided by manufacturer of item to he applied. Mouat locics so key enters cylinder with smooth .
edge down. Remove or cover hardware after fitting until final painting and cleaning. Reinstall,
adjusE and test after painting and cleaning is completed. Replace itemswith damaged finish or non- �
functional.
G Keys:
I. After locks have been reinstatled,seal keys and/or cores i�n envelopes. Mazk each envelope with ]
door number, change key set or masterkey set and keyway number. Just prior to substantial �1
completion and under direction of Owner or his representative,install permanent cores. Tnrn key
control system over to owner with instructions on its assembly and use. Ship masterkeys to Owner �
via registered mail.
D. Thresholds:
i. Install threshoIds using Tremco,Dymonic sealant(SLNT#2). Completely fill void space under
threshald. At apenings with one or more mullions, install
continuously with cut-outs for mullions.
E. Mounting Heights/Dimensions: �
1. Comply wtth manufacturer's printed instructions ta install hardware at specified mounting
heights. Supplier to make availabla jigs for hardware instailation. Install and protect hardware until
substantial completion. �
2. Hinges: _
a) Bottom of frame to center line of bottom hinge up to 13 inches.
b) Finish door frame head to center line oftop hinge up to 11-3/4 inches. �
c) Others spaced equally.
3. Lever locks and latches: Bottom of fiame to center line of sfrike shall be 40-5/16 inches. �
4. Exit devices: 40-5/16 inches from bottom of frame to center line of strike.
5. Clasers: �
a) Mount on room inside of doors.
b) Parallel arm instaJlation where possible on exterior doors.
c) Through-bolt installation not permitted,coordinate with door suppliers. �
6. Door stops: (Coordinate for proper biocicang where requ�red in Sechon 09260).
a) 60C(to caxch knob or pull) �
F. Moun#ing heights shall comply with Door and Hardware Ins#itute recommended locations for
standard steel doors and frames.
3.03 ADJUST'II�iG �
A. Priar to completion of Project,ascertain that doors closers are in adjustment so ctoser completes its
full closing cycle in less thau 4 to 6 seconds without abrupt change of speed between "Svveep"and �
"Latch"speeds. Adjust"Backcheck"according to manufacturer's instruckions.Verify that levers are
fi�ee from binding. Ensure that latchbolts and deadbolts are engaged into strike and hardware is
functioning. Turn over wrenches and adjusting tools,provided with hardware,to Owner. �
r
DOOR HARDWARE Page 4 of 5
�
�
3.Q4 IlVSTRUCTIONS AND TOOLS
� A. When project is complete, deIiver to Owrner complete set of special tools required for care,
maintenance,and adjustment of hardwar�items specified under this Section, including changing of
� cylinders. Provide complete information on care,maintenance,and adjustment,and data on repair
and replacementparts,and inforraation on preservation offinishes. Deliverto Ovmer,3 bound copies
of catalog pages of hazdware supplied.
� END OF SECTION 08710
�
�
�
r
i
�
�
�
�
1
�'
�
�
� �
� DOOR HARDWARE Page S of 5
�
� GLASS AND GLAZING
SECTION 08800
� THIS SECTION USES THE TERM ARCHITECT.
� PA,RT 1 -GENERAI,
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
� A. Drawings and generai provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
� 1.2 SU1VIlViARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products,including those specified in other
Se�tions where glazing requirements are specifed by reference to this Section:
� ADNST LIST BELOW T�SUIT PROJECT.
� 1. Window units.
2. Sliding glass doors
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements ttiat relate to this Section.
� 1.3 DEFIlVITIONS
' A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or
fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard.
B. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed
� to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning lamina.ted glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes
� exceeding thase allowed by referenced laminated glass standard.
C. Deteriora.tion of Insulating G�ass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to
causes othar than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning
� insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,moisture,or film
on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintauung and cleaning glass do
not comply with the manufacture�'s directions.
� 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced,fabricated,and insta.Iled to withstand
� no�rmmal thermal movement,wind loading,and impact loading(where applicable},without
failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:defective manufacture,
fabrication,and installation;failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;
� deterioration of glazing materials;and other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: PXovide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and
strengths(annealed or heat-treated)to meet or exceed the following criteria:
� 1. Minimum glass thickness,nominaliy,of lites in exteriorwalls is 6.4 mm(0.23 inch).
2. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites,whether composed of annealed or Yteat-treated
� glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the
followi�ng:
GLASS AND GLAZING Page I of 8
�
�
�
3. Tempera.ture Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F
(lOQ deg C),material surfaces. �
1.5 SUBMITT'ALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 �
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each glass product aud glazing materiat indicated. �
C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch-squaxe sampies of each type of glass indicated
except for clear monolithic glass products,and 12-inch-long white samples of each color
requured for each type of sealant or gasket exgosed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample �
between two strips of material representative in coloe of the adjoining framing system.
D. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products �
coznply with sp�ified requirements.
1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's
permanent Iabels designating type and thickness of gtass,prvvided labels represent �
a quality control progracn of a recognized eertifieation agency or independent
testing agency acceptabta to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacttu�er indicating that glazing �
materiais were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing seaIants. Inclnde sealant
manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and �
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that
glass edge sealants were tested for compatibiiity with other glazing materials including �
sealants,glazing tape,gaskets,setting blocks,and edge blocks.
G. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing �
compliance with requirements specified.
H. Maintenance da#a for glass and other glazing materials to inclnde in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. �
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Pablications: Comply with published recomrnendations of glass produat �
nnanufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated. Referto these publications for glazingterms not otherwise defuted inthis Section
or in referenced standards.
�
1. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB-3001
"Sioped Glazing Gnidelines." �
B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requuements of 16 CFR
Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide safety glass permanently marked �
with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council{SGCC}or other
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. �
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 2 of 8
�
�
� C. Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for poor Assemblies: Prodncts identical to those tested per
AST'M E 152,labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
� D. Insulating Glass Certificaiion Program: Provide insula#ing giass units permanently marked
either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label
of inspecting and testing agency indicated below:
� 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council{IGCC).
Z. Associated Laboratories,Inc.(ALn.
3. National Certified Testing Laboratories(NCTL}.
� E. Singie-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product
indicated below:
� a. Fully tempered glass.
b. low e insulating glass.
� 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials to compiy with manufacture�'s directions and as needed to prevent
� damage to glass and glazing materials from candensation; temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun,or other causes.
� 1.8 PROJECT COI�DTTIONS
1.9 WARI�ANTY
� A. Manufacturer's Warranfy on Coated Glass Products: Submit written warranty signed by
coated glass manufacturer agreeing to fumish replacements for those coated glass units that
deteriarate as defined in"Defiuiitions"article,£o.b.point of manufacture,freight allowed
� Project site, within specif�ed warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers oniy
deterioration due to normal conditians of use and not to handling,installing,and cleaning
practices contrary to glass maaufacturer's published instructions.
� 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
� B. Manufacturefs Warranty on low e Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by
manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight
allowed Project site,within specifietl warranty period indicated below, V17arranty covers
� only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling,instailing,protecting,
� and mainta.ining practices conirary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
� 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
PART2-PRODUCTS
� 2.1 MANU�ACTURERS
� A. Available Produc�.s: Subject to compliance with requirements
� GLASS AND GLAZING Pa e 3 of 8
S
�
�
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PR�DUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I(transparent glass,flat),Class as indicated below,and �
Quality q3 {glazing select). .
1. Class 1 {clear}uniess otherwise indicated. �
B. Refer to Primary Ciear Float Glass Product Data Sheet for CIass 1 uncoated tinted glass for
monolithic glazing. �
C. Refer ta requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of
assembled units composed of tinted gIass, coated or uncoated, relative to visibie light �
transmittance,U-values,shading coefficient,and visible reflectance.
2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS,GENERAL
2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS �
A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated �
surfaces),Type I(transparent glass,flat),Class 1 (clear),Quality q3 (glazing select),kind
as indicated below.
1. Kind FT{fully tempered)where indicated. �
Cc. Coated, Tinted, Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other
coated glass), T�pe I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and �
lig,Ytt reducing), Q�ality q3 (gIazing seiect}, with kind, coating type, and
performance characteristics complying with requirements specified under coated
glass praducts.
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. �
I. AFG Industries,Inc. �
2. Artistic Glass Products Co.
3. CardinalIG.
4. Saint-Gobain.
5. Falconer Glass Industries. �
b. Glasstemp,Inc.
7. Guazdian Industries Corp.
8. HGP Industries. �
9. PPG Tndustries,Inc.
10. $pectrum Glass Products,Inc.
11. Tempglass.
12. Viracon,Inc. I�
2.10 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sea.Ied Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of �
glass separatsd by dehydrated air spaces cornplying with ASTM E 774 and wifh other
requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end
of this Section. �
1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements
specified elsewhere in this Section applicahle to types, classes, kinds, and �
conditions of glass products comprising Iites of insulating glass units.
2.12 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS �
A. General: Provide products of type indicated,complying with the following requirecnents:
GLASS.AND GLAZING Page 4 of 8
�
�
� 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of pzoven compatibility with other
.materials they wifl contact,including glass products,seals af insulai�g glass units,
and glaziag chanael substrates, ander conditions of installallon and service, as
demonstrated by testing and field experience.
� 2. Suitabiliiy: Comply with sealant and glass manufactuze�'s recommendations for
selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and
conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the fallowing:
� 4. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard
colors for products of type indica.ted.
� B. Elastomeric Glazing$ealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemicaliy curing,
elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that compiy with ASTM C 920 requirements
indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Sectian,
, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type,Grade,Class and Uses.
I. Addit�onal Movement Capabilxty: Where additional movement capability is
specified inElastoxneric Glazing Sealant ProductData Sheet,provide products,when
� tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM
C 719,with the capability to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint
width eausting at time of instalIation and remain in compliance with other
requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
�' 2.13 GLAZIlVG TAPES
� A. Products: Suhject to compliance with requirements.
1. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazin�Tape Without Spacer Rod:
� 2.14 GLAZING GASKETS
SEALANTS.
� 1. EPDM,ASTM C 864.
2. Silicone,ASTM C 11 i5.
� 3. Thermopiastic polyolefin rubl�r,ASTM C 111 S.
4. Any material indicated above.
C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of
� material
Indicated below,complying with ASTM C 509,Type II,black,anc3 of profile and hardness
required to maintain watertight seal:
� 1. EPDM.
2. Silicone.
3. Thecmoplastic polyolefin rubber.
� 4. Any material in�icated above.
D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compIiance with requirements,manufacturers offeri�tg
products that may be incorporated in the woric include,but aze not Iimited to,the foIlowing
, companies.
E. Manufac#urers; Subject to compliance with reqttirements.
� 1. Lock-Strip Gaskets;
� a. Stanlock Div.,Griffith Rubber Mills.
2. Preformed Gaskets:
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 5 of 8
�
w
. a. Advanced Elastomer Systems,L.P.
b. Tremco,Inc. �
2.15 MISCELT,ANEOUS GLAZING MATERiALS
A. General: Provide products of material,size,and shape complying with referenced giazing �
standazd, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for
glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation. �
B. Cleaners,Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by seaiant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: EIastomeric material with a Shore A durorrieter hardness of 85 plus or minus �
5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness �
required by glass znanufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement �
(side-walking).
F. Plastic Foam Joint Fiilers: Preformed, compressible,resilient,nonstaining,nonextruding,
nonoutgassing,strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density,size,and shape to control sealant �
depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance.
2.16 FABRTCATION OF GLASS AND OTI�R GLAZING PRODUCTS �
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for
Project,with edge and face clearances,edge and surface conditions,and bite cozr�plying with
recommenda#ions of product manufachuer and referenced glazing standard as required to �
cornply with system performance requirements.
PART 3-EXECUTION �
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. �
3.2 PREPARATTON
A. Clean glazing channeIs and other framing members receiving glass immediately before i
glazing. Remove coatings that are not fu3mly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING,GENERAL �
A. Coraply with connbined recoramendations of manufacturers of glass,sealants,gaskets,and
other glazing materials,except where more stringent requirements aze indicated, including �
those in referenced glazing publica.tions.
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass,
minunum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable �
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows:
�
1. Use a rolling block in rota.ting glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not
impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units witl�in
openit�gs;do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or �
GLASS AND GLAZING ' Page 6 of 8
�
�
bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless
� otherwise indicated by man�ufacturer's lahei.
2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispase af off site. Damaged
. glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,when installed,weaken
� glass and impair perfoimance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants,as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
� E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets,sized and located to comply with referenced
glazing standard,unless otherwise required by glass manufactwer. Set blocics in thin couzse
� of compatible seglant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge presse�res stipulated by glass manufacturers for instailing glass lites.
1 G. Provide sQacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches(length plus height)as follows:
1. Locate spacers inside,outside,and directly opposite each other. Install correct size
� and spaeing to preserve required face ciearances,except where gaskets and glazing
tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and comply with system performance requixements.
2. Provide I/8-inch rainimum hite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
� widt�. With glazing tape,use thickness slightly less than final comgressed thickness
of tape.
� H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing Qublications,unless
otherwise reqaired by glass manufactwer.
� I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and sunilar characteristics.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to presswize sealani or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot wallc out whea
� installation is subjected to movemen�
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by
� gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away;seal comer joints and butt joints
with sealant recommended by gasket rnanufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
' A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by gIass their exposed edges ace flush
with or protrude slightly above sigtrtline of stops.
� B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous Iength. Do not stretch tapes to make
ttxem fit opening.
� C. Where framing jaints are verticai,cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and si11s first
and then to jambs. Where framing jaints are horizontal,cover these joints by applying tapes
to jambs and then to heads and sills.
� D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted togetlter,not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible seaiant approved by tape manufacturer.
� E. Do not remove reIease paper from tape until just before each lite is installed.
H Center glass lites in openings on setting blocics and press firmiy against t�pe by inserting
� dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in piace against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 7 of 8
�
�
I. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. �
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING(WET}
A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face '
ciearances and to prevent sealant from e�clruding into glass channei weep systems until
sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in Qosition to control depth of installed sealant
relative to edge clearance for optimum sea.iant perforn�ance. �
B. Force sealants into glazing c�annels to eliminate voids and to enswe complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. �
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install
pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly ont ofchannel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING '
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket mannfacturer's printed recommendations. Provide �
suppiementary wet seal ar�d weep system unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately af�er installation by attaching crossed �
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels,and clean surfaces. �
B. Protect glass from contact with contarninating substances resulting from construction
operations including weld splatter. If,despite such protection,contaminating substances do �
come into contact with giass, remove tt►em immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturcr.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at �
frequent intervals during canstruction, but not less than once a�nonth,for build-up of dirt,
scum,alka.li deposits,or stains,and remove as recommended by glass maaufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken,chipped,cracked,abraded,or damaged in any way, '
including naturai causes,accidents and vandalism,during construction periad.
E. Wash glass on both faces in each area.of Proj ect not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled '
for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended
by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 0$8UQ �
�
�
�
GLASS AND GLAZING Page 8 of 8 �
�
�
' GYPSUM DRYWALL
SECTION 09250
' PART 1 -GENERAL
' l.l S�CO�E
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
' l. Insulation is specified in Division 7 Section 07210"Insuiation".
B. All Gypsum Drywall; on walls and the ceiling in the storage and equipment room,to the
' extent shown on drawings.
C. Gypsum Board:Regular wallboard fire-rated wallboard,water resistant wallboard;backer
' board,
acoustical insulation.
D. Work is to be one layer gypsum board,type and thickness as shown on drawings. Finishing
' of joints and heads of fastening devices. Caulking as required by manufaciure and
according to good practice.
' E. Anchors, adhesives, hangers, clips, furring channels, accessories, etc., (unl�ss specified
under other
sections) as required to adequately support and secure work in place, starting from
conditions of building structure.
' F. Insulation
' PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL: ALL MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI-A97.1.
' !�. Manufacturer; Unless otherwise specified, provide all materiais as the product of one
manufacture with installation, and erection in strict accardance with manufacturer's
directions. Provide materials af U.S.Gypsum,National Gypsum or Gold Bond.
' B. Delivery and Storage: Materials to be delivered in original unopened containers and
bundles,with
manufacturer's hallmark, stored to protect from the elements and damage.
I2.2 GYPSLTM MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
' A. Gypsum Board:Products of U.S. Gypsurn,National Gypsum Company and Georgia
Pacific,SI8"thick,48"wide,unless otherwise nmted. Lengths as required to minimize end
joints.
' B Fastenings: As recommended by manufacturer, lengths as required, use screw types "S"
screws.
Comply with requirements U.S. label service.
'
GYPSiTM D12YWALL Page 1 of 3
1
'
'
. r n d G sum Boa d manufacturer for adhesivel a 1 in '
C Adhesives• As ecomme de by yp r , y pp y g
gypsnm '
board to concrete biock and insulation,for laminating in multi=layer and single layer at fire
rated constnaction.
D Beads and Trim: Exterior corner beads, Dur-A-Bead corner reinforcement; at all exterior '
corners. Inside corners,to have Perf-A-Bead corner reinforcernent. Where gypsum board
terminates provide#400 series metal trim.
E Tape System: All.exposed joints and trim to be finished by using USG Perf-A-Tape joint '
system.
F Sealant: Sheetrock brand W/R sealant, apply to all cut edges and screw heads of water- '
resistant,
water resistant fire rated and exteriar soffit gypsum board.
1. Caulking:Provide caulking as recommended by manufactured to achieve wall STC '
rating.
2.3 ADHESIVES '
1. Only adhesives which are recommended by the manufactured for use on the specific
substrate to
insure permanent bond. '
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION '
A. Wallboard:
1. General: Hold gypsum board in �rm contact with supports when installing. No '
horizontal joints
permitted,eliminate small pieces. Do not use broken or damaged sheets. '
2. Joints: instail so all joints occur over a support.Neatly fit all abutting joints and to
all obstructions.
Do not force joints overly tight. '
3. Fastening,General:Fasten gypsum board witli adhesive and drywall screws. Apply
adhesive as t
recommended by manufacturer. Space screws not less than 3/8" from edges and
ends of wallboard. Stagger screws on adjoining edges or ends. While screws are
being driven, hold wallboard in firm contact underlying support. Attach from
central portion of wallboard toward ends and edges. Drive screws with an electric ,
screw gun equipped with adjustable screw depth control and Phillips bit. Set heads
of exposed screws to provide slight depression below surface of gypsum board. If
screw size and screw spacing as specified differs with manufacturer's '
recommendations, verify with a.rchitect prior to application.
4. Metal corner bead: Securely install at all corners in single lengths where the length
of the corner ,
does not exceed standard stock lengths. Apply at least two coats of compound over
beads, each coat feathered out onto panel face.
GYPSUM DRYWALL Page 2 of 3 '
t
�
� 5. Metal trim: Securely install at board terminations finished with joint compound as
required.
� B. Finishing and accessories
I. General:Accomplish all taping and filling on finish layer to provide smooth flush
� surfaces,
smoothly sanded so no joints,screws or other depressions are visible after painting,
sand and otherwise fmish so no further preparation is necessary to the painter.
� 2. Finish: See details for particular edge conditions. Treat all joints screw heads and
ather depressions in accordance with USG reconumendations for Perf-A-Tape joint
system. All outside corners to have metal bead,taped in. All inside comers to have
� reinforcin�. Ends of board where board terminates or a.buts other materials to have
metal edge, taped in. Spot exposed fastener dimples on£ace layers with at least
three coats of joint compound,feathered and sanded smooth.
� C. Workmansiup
1. Conform to best practice and as recommended by the manufacturer to produce
� highest quality
work. Mechanics to be thoroughly trained and skiIled in the instatlation of this type
of wozk. Accomplish work when temperature in the building is between 50 ta 70
� degrees F. Provide ventilation to eiiminate excessive moisture. Provide protection
to all sttrfaces,which are covered before building is encIosed,from damage and#he
elernents. Guarantee of work under this section shall warrant against ridging and
beading of joints and popping of wallboard fastenings.
� D. Delivery and Cleanup
� l.. This subcontractor shall be responsible far bringing into this project all materials
required by him
to complete his work.
� 2. At completion of this subcontractors worlc,he shall remove materiais not installed
in this projec�.
� END OF SECTION 0925U
�
�
�
�
GYPSUM DRYWALL Page 3 of 3
�
�
� ELECTRICAL WORK
� SECTION 1b000
GENERAL PROVISIONS
� 1. CONDITIONS .
The Eiectrical Contractor and his subcontraactors shall be govemed by the Drawings, General
Conditions and Supplementary Conditions(if any)of this Specification.
, 2. SCOPE OF WORK
Work shall include all labor,materials,equipment,superintendence and services required to constxuct
� and install,complete and operative,the electrical systems as shown on the drawings a.nd as specified.
3. CODES AND INSPECTIONS
The completed electrical installation shall meet all requirements of the Iatest edition of the National
� Elecbricat Code,applicable National Board of Fire Underwriter Bulletins and all State and Local
ordinances and regulations as they may apply.
� Regular inspections of the electrical work shall be requested and pa.id for by this contractor as required
by any and ail regulatory agencies.
� 4. PERNIITS AND LICENSES
All permits and licenses required for work under this contract shall be secured and paid for by this
contractor before work is started.
, 5. MATERIAL AND WORICMANSHIP
All material and equipment fitrnished by t6is contxactor shall be new and st�all be listed by Underwriters'
' Labozatories,Inc.,as conforming to its standards in every case where such a standard has been
established.
� 6. UNDERGROUND
Do all Lrenching and bacicf'illing required for electrical work. Cdordinate this work with General
� 7. DRAWIl�TGS AND CORRELATION OF WORK
The Drawings are dimensioned.Do not scale. Reference sha.11 be zn�ade to the architectural and structural
plans for exact building dimensions,wall and partition locations,furred spaces,etc.
� 7.1 Neatness,concealment of work and schedule maintenance are prime consideration,equipment and
systems aze represented diagrammatically and generally to scale and shall i�e installed substantially as
' shown.
7.2 Verify the location of all outlets with Owner and Architect,and if interference develops or if
� discrepancies occur between the electrical and other drawings,make minor changes in�e work to
elizninate such discrepancies with no chance in contract cost.
7.3 Particular attention shall be paid to door swings,casework and other fixed furnibure,piping,
� radiation,ductwork and shvctural st.eel. No additional compensation will be allowed for the moving o€
misplaced items.
� 7.4 When connecting to equipment fiunished by others,obtain exact locations of connections before
roughing in.
,
ELECTRICAL WORK Page 1 of 3
�
8. GUARANTEE �
8.1 The Contractor hereby guarantees all work,materials,equipment,etc.,specified herein, indicated on
the drawings,or approved and/or incorporated into the work for a period eyuivalent to one(1)year of �
actual operation and nor�nal use after the date of acceptauce or beneficial occupancy of the premises by
the Owner,which ever occurs fust.
8.2 The Contractor agrees to make all necessary repairs to or replace any item of material or eyuipment �
or part thereof which as proven defective(not due ta misuse or improper care)within the stated period,
free from any, cost of abrogate other specified guarantees or the usual guarantees against the work, �
materials,or items of equipment that were defective when supplied or improperly cared for or protected
during the period of constraction.
SPECYAL PROVISIONS: �
TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER
1.The Eiectrical Contractor shall furnish and instail temporary service and temporary lighting �
adeqnate for normal operations of all trades.
2.The Electrical Conlractor shatl insure that power to#he existing residence is not intenrupted �
during the entire constnzction period.
UTILITY COMPANY CHARGES �
1.All utility company installation charges(including temporary service charges)to be paid by
Owner.
WIRE ,
1.Non-meta.11ic wiring and aluminum wire may be used where permitted by code except tha#the
only aluminum wire that may be ased on circuits fused at less than 30 AMPS is copper c1ad. '
DEVICES
1.A11 devices to be residential gade,white color,mounted at heights common to residential• �
work.
EQUIPMENT WIRING
I. Each unit to have ground fault protection in bathroom and outdoors per code. Gmund �
fault interrupter receptacle to be furnishetf by Electrical Contractor.
2. Verify with Architect any requirements for CO and Smoke Detectors.These items shall �
be furnished by Electrical Contractor upon the approval of the architect.
3. Wire for fans,furnace and other devices shown on the drawings or requestredby the �
Owner (All furnished by Owner).
BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS . �
1. PANELBOARDS
Existing Panelboard shall used. �
2. GROUNDING
The service neutral a.nd service equipment shati be connected to the water main with copper wire. �
3. WIRING DEViCES
1.All wiring devices shall be intermediate grade and in general,flush mounted. ,
ELECTRICAL WORK Page 2 of 3
�
, 2.Devices shall be furnished by this contractor and approved by the Arehitect
� 3.Wall Plates shall be of 1 -piece construction,white plastic,furnished by this contractor and
approved by Ovmer.
� 4. TELEPHONE
This Contractor shall coordinate telephone rough-in with electrical work.
� 5. MECHATTICAL SUPPORT
1 Exhaust fans will be provided by Owner and set by others.This contractor shall connect per
plan.
, . 2.Heating system is hot wa#er;thermostats will be provided by others;this contractor shall
provide wiring and thermostat installation.
� 3.Mechanical room suppor�for the following:
� a. See Pool Equipment
DISCONNECTS AND STARTERS
AIl disconnect switches and motar starters,will be furnished by the electrical contractor unless
� specificatly mentioned otherwise.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
' GENERAL
This Contractor shall install a lighting fixture for each lighting outlet, in accordance with the fixture
� schedule. F�tures will be supplied by Owner.
Lamps shaIl be furnished and installed by this Contractor. They shall be of General Electric,
� Westinghonse,Champion or Sylvania manufacture. Incandescertt larnps shall be 130 volt.
Hanging type fixtures shall be hung so that the bot�om is 80%of the ceiling height above the floor unIess
� otherwise noted.
Switches shall be as noted on the drawings.
� SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
� A heating unit is to be mounted in Cabana area.Install as per manufactures instructions and Iocate as per
Architects drawings.This equipment may involve special wiring.
' DISTRIBUTION
CURRENT CHARACTERIST`ICS
1.Addition will be supplied by W/120/240 volt single phase service. Power is supplied by Excel
� Energy Company.
SERVIGE AND METERING
� 1.Existing Meter shalI be used.
2.Addition has 200 AMP service which shalI be used for addition.
� END OF SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL WORK Page 3 of 3
�
1 �
CONSTRUC'TION CONTRACT
� GENERAL CONDITIONS
_ Table Of Contents
� 1. SCOPE ........ . ..... .. .. .. ... . . . . . . .. ...... . .... . . . . . .. ... .. . .... . . . ... . . . . . .. ...... ....... .. . .
� � .. .. . .. ........... .. .......... .... . . . . .... .... ...... . . . ... . . . . . ..... ...........
2. DEFINITIONS. 1
3. CO1V'I'RACTOR DU'TIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES . ... . . . . ..... ... ...... . .... ... . ........... ...... 2
1 4. EXECUTION,C�RRELATION AND 1NTENT OF DOCUMENTS :: ::::::::: : : : :: : : : : : : ::::::: :::::::: 2
5. SUBSTITUTIONS 3
6. STANDARDS AND TESTS ....... . ............ ...... .. . .. . . ... . ........... . ... . . . ...... ........ 3
7. PROGRESS SCHEDULE . .. . . . .... .. .... ...... . . ....... ... ........... .. . .. . . .. . . . ..... . ....•-•. 4
, 8. DELAYS ........ . . . ... ... . . .. . . .. .......... ........ . . ... . . . . . ..... . . ... . . .. . . . ..... . ......... 5
9. DISPUTES . 5
10. SURVEYS,PERMITS,LAWS AND REGIJI.,ATIONS ........ . .. . . . . . ..... . .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......... 5
, 11. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS .. . ..... ................... . . . . . .... . . ... . . ......... . . . .... . ....... 6
12. PRO'I'�CTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY;EXISTING UTFLTTIES 6
13. SAFETY .... ....... ... . . ... . ... .. . . .... ...... . .......... . .... . . ................ . . . ... . . . . . . . 6
14. SUPERVISTON AND ENIPLOYEES . .. . . ....... . . . ............... . . . . . . . . . .... ... . . ...... . . . . .. . 7
� 15. REPORTS AND MEETINGS..... .. ..... . . . . . . . . .... . ............. . . . ... . . . .......... . .... ....... 9
16. SUBMITTALS 9
17. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMEN'I'S -•.... . .. . . . . . . . . ................. . . .. . . . .............. . ... ... 11
� 18. CLEAN-UP .. . .. .... . .......... ....... . ......... .. . .............. ..... . . ... ....... ........... lI
I9. CHANGE OF CONTRACT 11
20. CLAIlVIS FOR EXTRA COST/EXTENSIONS OF TIIVIE . . . .. ............. . . ..... .... ..... .. ... ....... 12
21. CORREC'TION OF WORK........ ...... . ...... ...... . . . .. . .......... . ..... ........... .......... 13
� 22. OWNER'S RIGH'I'TO DO WORK/STOP WORK... ........ . . . . . . ... ...... .. ... . ... . . ....... ........ 13
23. CONTRACT TERMINATION . 13
24. LIENS . ...... ... .. .... ... . . . . . ............. ......... . ... . .. . ..... . ..... . .. . . ... . . . .. ........ 14
� 25. ASSIGNMEN'f AND THIlZD PARTY BENEFICIARY..... ... .... . . .. . ... . . .. .... . . . . ........ . .. .... . 15
26. INSPECTION AND USE OF PREMISES 15
27. INDEMNIFICATION ......... . ... . . . . ....... . . . . . . ............. . . ... ........... . .. ..... ... . . . . 15
28. 1NSURA.NCE. .... .. . ......... ....... . .. . . . . ..... . ............. . . . .. . . . . ......... . ..... . ...... 16
� 29. SEPARATE CONTRACTS AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS ::::::: ::::::::::: :: : 18
30. SUBCONTRACTORS. 19
31. RELA'TIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS ............ ...... . .... ..... .. .......... 19
� 32. LABOR AND MATERIAI.,S .... . ............... ...... ... . . . . ........ . ...... ......... . . .. ... .... . 20
33. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTS 20
34. CERTIF'ICATES FOR PAYNIENT . ........ ... .. . ..... . ... ... ...... .. . ....... . ......... . ... .. . . . . . 21
� 35. PAYMENTS WITHHELD .... . . .. ............. ......:.. . ... . .. . . ... . ....... .. ....•••---• . . . . .. . 2I
36. CONTRACT SUM,DISBURSEMENTS AND PAYMENTS 22
37. COMPLE'TIONANDFINALPAYMENT . --•-----• -• ...... . .... .. . . ... . . . ..•-•-- . .. ....... ....... . 22
38. WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES . .. ..... .. .. .. .... . . . .... . .. . .... . . . . .. . .. . . ......... . ... . .. 23
� 39. TA3�S . .... .... .. ...... ... . ..... .. . ... . .. .... . . .... ..... . . . . .... . . . . ... . .. . . . ...... ....... . 23
40. RIGHTS AND REMEDIES. 23
41. PEItFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR MA'TERIAL PAYMENT BOND . ........ . .. .... . ............ . .. 24
� 42. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS. ... ... ..... ...................... . ..... .. . . . .... ....... 24
43. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 24
44. OWNER�`URI�TISHED MATERIAL ....... ... .. . ... .. ............. . . . ....... . ...... . . . ... ........ 24
45. NIISCELLANEOUS . ... ....... ........ . . . .... ... .. . ...... ...... . ......... ...... . . . . ... . ....... 24
� i
�
�
Construction Contract '
GENEIi�aL CONDITIONS
1. SCOPE �
This section defines the General Conditions governing the performance of the Construction Contract.
2. DEFINITIONS �
A. ADDENDA:Any written or graphic instrument issued prior to the opening oPbids which clarifies,corrccts,or changes any part ofthe bidding
documents or the Contract Dacuments.
B. CHANGE DIRECTIVE: A written order to procced with Work executed and issued by the Authorized Representative of the Owner. �
C. CHANGE OP CON'i'RACT: A written order issued aiter the effective date of the Contract by the Authorized Representative of the Owne.r
which authorizes an addidon,deletion or revision in the Work and which may include an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. �
A. CONTRACT:That cerrtain doc�ment,end all ofit�sd►edules,exhibits and subsequent amendments,which defines the scope ofthe Contractor's
Work and specifies the Contract Sum.
E. CONTRACT DOCUIVIMEN'['S:The Contract Documents are as defined in the Contract between the Owner artd the Conhactor. The Contract �
Documents embody the eatire and integated agreement between the parties hereW and supersede ap prior communications,negotiations,representations or
agreements,either written or oral.
F. CONTRACTOR: The person or organization identified as such in the Contract that is contracted by the Owner to complete all or a certain �
poRion of the Work required for the construction and comQletion of the Project
G. DAY: Unless othenvise specified,the words"day"or"days"shall mean calendar day or calendar days.
H. DRAWIIdGS:The drawings which show the character,nawre and scope ofthe Work to be perfonned and which are referred to in the Contract �
Documents.
I. MODIFICATION: A"modification"is(1)a writien amendment ro the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change of Contract issued �
pursuant to Article 19 hereo�(3)any written interpretation,clarification or amplification issued by ihe Owner pursuant to the terms hereof which alters the Comract
Sum or change the Contract Time,or(4)a written order issued by the Owner ptusuant to ARicla 19 hereof.
J. NOT[CE TO PROCEED:A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the dete on which the Contract Time will commence '
to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform Contractor's obliga[ions under the Contract Documertts.
K. PRODUCT DATA: Illuctrations,star►dard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagams or other information fumished
by the Contractor to illustrate a material,product or system for some portion of the Work.
L. PROJECT: The total construction of which the Woric performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a pait. �
M. SAMPLES:NhysicalexamplesfumishedbytheContractorwhichillustratemateriats,equipmentorwodrn�anshipand,ifinconformancewith
the Contract Documents,establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. �
N. SHOP DRAWINGS: Drawings,diagams,illustrations,schedules or od�er data which are specifically prepared by or for the Contractor to
illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,brochures,standard schedules,perfiormsnce charts, specifications,instructions, diagrams,and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illusUate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. �
O. SPECIALPItOV1SIONS:ThatpartoftheConhactDocumrniswhichamendsorsupplementstheseGeneralConditionsandotherrequirements
of the Contract Documents.
P. SPECIFICATiONS: Those portions of the Con�act DacumenLs consisting of written technicaI descriptions, provisions or�equirements �
pertaining to the matedals and workmanship applicable to the Work to be perfortned unda the Conp�ct Documents,including,but not limited to,the quantides or
quality of materials,eqaipment,co�ction systems or applications.
Q. SUBCONTRACTOR:ThosehavingadirectcontractwiththeConuactor(oranywholiy-ownedor�liatedenNtythereo�toperformaportion �
of the Work or provide materials for the Project.
R. SUSSTAN77AL COMPLETION: The completion of the Work to the point that the Owner could open the Project to the general public for
business,that is,that it is suitable for the functions for which it was intended in a commercially satisfactory manner. �
S. SUB-SLBCONTItACTOR My person other than a Contractor or a Subconuactor(or any wholly-owned or affiliated entity thereo�who
supplies labor or materials to the Project for work within the ConUactor's Scope of Work regardless of how remote that person's contract is from the Owner.
T. SUPPLIE2 Any party suppiying,by sale or lease,directly or indirectty,any materials or construction equipment for the Contractor's Work �
and includes distributors,materiaimen,vendors and manufaeturecs.
U. WORK: IU!labor,materiels(except materials specified or noted bo be fumished by the Owner),equipment,supplies,permits,licenses, �
insurance and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the completion ofthe Contractor's obligations heneunder in aocordance with the Contract Documerits.
co�e�,.�a 00810-1
1 �
� Construction Contract
GFNERl�r� CONDITIONS
� 3. CONI'RACTOTi DUTIES AND FtESPONSIBILITIES
A 'I'he Contractor recognizes the relationship oftrust and co�dence established between the Owner and the Contractor by th'rs Contract The
� ContracWr shall furnish the Owner with iu best skill and judgment and fulty cooperate with the Owner in forwarding the best interests of the Owner. All the Work
is to be done in the best manner by persons skilled in the type of Work to be perfom�ed.
B. The Contractor shall supe�vise and direct its portion of the Work using its best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for all construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures,and for coordinating aq portions of the Work under its Contract in accordance with
� Paragraph 29 hereof.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of its employees,Subconh�acWTs and their agents and empfoyees,
and other persons performing any of the Work und�a contract with the Contractor.
1 D. The Contractor shall not be relieved from its obligations to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities
or daties of the Owner or the Owner's Representative in the administration of this Contract,or by inspections,tests,acceptances,or approvals required or pedo�med
by persons other than the Contractor.
� 4 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND�1TENT OF DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract shall be signed and dated in duplicate by the Owner and the Contractor.
� B. The Drawings and the Spec�cations are complementary and supplementary,and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required
by all.Portions ofthe Work which can be best illustrated by the Drawings may not be included in the Specifications and portions best described by the Specifications
may not be depicted oa the Drawings.
� C. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. However,it is
understood that while not every deta�7 oftha Work is shown on the Drawings or described in the Specifications,the Work includes items reasonably inferabte from
the Contract Documents. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless such work is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable
therefrom.Ifan item orsystem is either shown or specified,all material and equipment normaliy fiimished with such items or systems and needed to make a complete
, opera6ng installation shall be provided whether mentioned or noy omitting only such parts as are specifically excepted. 11ie Owner shall not be held responsible
for the absence of any detail that the Contractor may require for any conswction which may be found necessary as the Work progresses. Words and abbreviations
which have well-Irnovm technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such reco�ized meanengs.
, D. The sections of the Specifications are atranged for convenience and shall not control the Contractor in dividing
the Wor[c among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performe.d. The Contractor may subcontract the Work in such divisions as it sees fifi
however,Contractor is responsible for Pomishing and coordinating all Work required by the Contract Documents regardless ofthe divisions Contractor may make
in the Work.
� E. The General CondiNons and Special Provisions are a part of each and every section of the Specifications.
F. Sy executing the Contract,ffie Contractor repracents that it has visited the site,familiarized itselfwith the local conditions which could affect
the prosecuNon or comple6on of the Work,and that it has correlated i1s observations with the requirements of the Conlract Documents. The Owner makes no
� representations or warranties as to subsurface or latent physical conditions to be encountered in constructing the Project and disclaims the accuracy or retiability of
any subsurface information which may be provided to the Contractor. The Conlractor shaIl be responsible for conducting such site investigation as is necessary to
detemii�the nature and characler of all subsurface or Iatent physiael conditions.The Contractor assumes all risks and expressly waives any claim against the Owner
for subsurface a latent physica)conditions at the site which may differ from those indicated in the ConUact Documents or indicated in any subsurface infom�ation
� or report furnished to the Contracxor,unless the physical conditions at the site are unknown,could not have been known with a reasonable investigation,and differ
materially from those ordinarily encounterod or from those which ane generally recogniud as inherent in work of the charaeter provided for in the Contract
Docwnents.
� G. Before submitting its bid to the Owner,and continuousiy thereafter,ihe Contractor shall study and compaze the Contract Aocuments and shall
immediatelyreporttothe Ovmer's Representative any error,omission,ambiguity,discrepancy,conflictorvariance,including any requuementwhich maybe contrary
to any taw,code,ordinance,rule,regulation,or order applicable to the performance of the Work. Acceptance of this Contract is a ceRification by the ContracEor
that the Contract Documeats appear complete and correct. Contraetor shall not be liable to the Owner for any damage resulting from any such error,omission,
ambiguity,discrepancy,conflict or variance in the Contract Docwnents uNess Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should have reasonably lmown thereof
� and did not notify the Owner promptly. Any such error,omission,ambiguity,diserepancy,wnflict or variance shall be resolved by the Owner's Representative and
shall be forwarded to the Contractor via a written clarification.Contrxtor shall be Iiable for any damages which result should it proceed before receipt of the Ownets
written clarification and notice to proceed with any modification.
� H. 1f any portion of the Contract Documes,ts con8ict with any other portion,the various documents compromising the Contract Documents shai!
govem in the following order of precedence: The Contract(including Exhibits thereto);Modifications;Addenda;any Specia)Cottditions;the Special Provisions;
the General Conditions;the Specifications take pre�edence over Drawings for the specific type or quality of materials or the quality of installation;the Drawings
take precedence over the Specifications with regard to quantities,locations or detail of instaliaiion;as between schedutes and infamation given on Drawings,the
� schedules shatt take pre�cedence;as between Iarge-scale Drawings and small-se�le Drawings,the larger scale shall take precedence.Any such conflict or inconsistency
shall be submitted to the Owner's Representativq whose decision thereon shall be binding and conclusive.
I. If necessary,the Owner's Representative will fumish additional instructions to clarify or ampiify the Drawings and the Speeifications. Such
� instr�ctions wi11 not constitute an extra or result in the issuance of a C6ange of Contract(as defined in Paragraph 19)unless such alter the Contract Sum or change
the Contract Time.
c�ra.�e 00810-2
� 2
Construction Contract �
GENERAL CONDITIONS
S. SUBSTI'TU'fIONS �
A The Contractor may offer a substitution of a specified or indicated item if it presents complete infom�ation cronceming the substitution and
the benefits thereof to the Owner by reason of lower cost or improved performartce,or both,over the specified or indicated item. Howeva,such submission of a �
proposed substitution dces not niieve the Contractor fsom iu obligations vnder the Contract In proposing a substitution,the Contractor
wacrants that the substitution is,at a minimum,equivalent in performance to the specified or indicated item. A substitution shall not be eftective unless accepted
m wnttng by the Owner. The Owner will accept a proposed subsGtuUon only�f svch acceptance vnll benefit the Owner.
B. Any additional costs and changes to ttie Work(including,but not limited to the work of other contractors and additional design�sts which �
may be affected thereby)which may result from the proposed substitution shaU be disclosed at the time the substitution is proposed to the Owner. Changes to the
Work and any additional costs thcrefrom which are not disclosed in advance to the Owner sha11 be the sole responsibi[ity ofthe Contractor and shali not increase
the Contraci Sum.
C. The Contracto�'s substitution proposals shal[ include wrilten descriptions of the items to be substituted (inciuding drawings and/or �
specifications)and referenced information of the proposed substitudon. The Owne�s Representative's signature on this proposal is required for acceptance. Shop
Drawings will not be conside�d a substitulion proposal pursuant to this Paragaph.Verbal approvals or approved shop drawings wiA not be considered as acceptance
of proposed substitutions. '
D. T'he Owne�s Representative alone may approve a proposed substitution on behaif of the Owner,the Owners consultants lack the authority
to approve proposed substitutions and opinions elieited from the Owner's consuhants by ihe Contractor may not be rel ied upon by the Conuactor as constituting the
Owne�s express or implied approval of a proposed svbstitution. The Owner's Repcesentative reserves the right to reject any unapproved substitution without �
explanation or formality,and to require the replacxm�t of an unapproved substitution with the specified and/or indicated items at no expense to the Own�,and
to require compensation to the Owmer for loss of ose time during repiacement.
6. SI'ANDARDS AND TE515
A Reference Suecifications or Standards �
1) Various standards end specifications are incorporated by reference in the technical section of the Specifications. In all such
instances,ttie reference shall mean the latest edirion,including the amendmeni or revision in effect as of the date of the Contract unless a specific issue ,
is oihenvise identified. ff referenced specifications or standards contain requirema�ts at variance with the individual sections of the Specifications,the
more stringent provision shall govem. The Contractor shatl have the responsibility of making any speciSed standard available at the Project S'ste,
including,but noi iimited to,any semplc required by the Owner,as set fodh in the Speciat Provisians.
B. Tests '
1) The Owner has the right to test and/or inspect any material or equipment at any state of development or fabrication,whether or not
specified,including,but not limited to the suppiier's ptant or mill. Such inspection will not release the Supplier or the Contractor from any responsibility
or liability with respect to such material or equiprr�nt Any tests and/or inspecdons performed on behalf of the Owner(other than those tests referred �
to in Subparagraph(2)below)will be paid for by the Owner. Any necessary retesting or re-inspection requised due to the failure of en initial test and/or
inspection wi11 be performed on behalf of the Owner at the Contractor's expense. Work concealed hefo�such tests are perfortned or before approval is
given shall be exposed,tested and restored at the Contractor's expense.
2) Witnessed pedorrnance tests shall occur when required by governing sulhorities or when required by the Contract Documents. �
'Fhe Contractor shall nofify the Owner's Representative at least three(3)business days in advance of the date the equipment will be ready for fhe f[nal
shop or 8eld inspection or for performance tests. These tests,and any required netests,shall be perfiucmed at the Contractor's expense. 'Fhe Contractor
shall provide the Owner with all certificates and approvals. �
3) Notwithstanding the foregoing,the Owner may reqoire the Contractor to expose concealed Work for the pulposc of testing and/or
inspection. If the Work so exposed fails to meet the Contract requirapents,the Contractor shalf be responsible for all costs associated with exposure,
testing and/or inspection,replacemeni,and reconstruction or restoration. lf the Work so exposed meets the Contract requirements,the Owner shall be �
responsible for all such costs.
7. PROGRESS SCHEDUbE
A. Un{ess otherwise requiced,scheduling under this Cantract shall be accomplished using the Critical Path Method("CPM•). �
B. Within 5fteen(15)days from the earlier ofthe effective date of ihe Contract or the Start Date spxified by the Owner in the Notice To Proceed
("Starc Date"),the Contractor shat}fumish W the Owner,for the Owners eomment and acceptance,a time-scale preliminary conshuction schedule(°Prefiminary
ConsVuction Schedule'�. 7'his Prelim'snary Construcdon Schedule shall be in a fom�at accephable to the Owner and wili be in sufficient detail so as to depict the �
Project Completion Date,the completion of interim milestones,if any,and the scheduled completion dme for ali major activides from the Contract Start Date to the
Project Completion Date,including the Owner's requirements for installation of fumiture,fumishings,fixtures,equipment and oiher items provided by the Owner.
C. Within thiriy(30)days aft�it fumishes to the Owner its Pceliminary Construction Schedule,the ConMactor shall fumish to the Owner,for �
the Owne�s comrnent and acceptance,a detailed CPM Conshvction Progress Schedule in a format accxptable to the Owner. 'fhis Construction I'rogress Schedule
sha31 identify the Project and,at a aunimum,contain a detailed Braphic representation of all activities thatcould affect the progress ofthe Conhactor's Work,including
the Owne�'s require.�►ents for instellation offiuniture,fumishings,fixhaes,equipment and other items provided by the Owner.In his ConsWction Progress Schedule,
the Contractar shall also depict s schedvle for the preparation,svbmittal and review of al!Shop Drawings,samples and otiaer submissions;the shop fabrication,
delivery,storage,and erection or installation of equipment and materials;and the testing and inspection of equipment and materials. �
co�a«.�oa 0081 Q-3
3 �
� Construction Contract
GENER�L CONDITIONS
� D. Upon acceptance by the Owner,the Construction Progress Schedule shall be.come a Contract Docnment and any material revision thereofwill
become effecdve only upon the subsequent written consent of the Owner.
' E. Beginning af the Start Date specified by the Ovmer in the NoYice To Proceed,and at each weekly Progress Meeting held pursuant to Pazagraph
15(G�hereunder,Contractor shali subm'st to the Owner's Representative a two-week look-ahcad schedule wtuch will detail the Work which the Contractor plans to
perform during the following two wceks. The twaweek schedules shall be in substantiai confamance with the Construction Progress Schedule. Contractor shalt
submit to the Owner's Representative with any twaweek schedule at variance with the Construcdon Progress Schedule a detailed narrative which tully describes
the reason for the vaziance and any anflcipated impact on the Project Completion Date an3/or the completion of interim milestones,if any.
� F. At dafes established by the Owner,Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative an updated Construction Progress Schedule.
Contractor's submission shall,at a minimum unless othenvise directed by the Oumer's Representative,include a narrative setting forth any revisions and a description
of any logic contained in the Construction Progress Schedule which has been changed by the update,any acdvities in ihe Construction Progress Schedule which have
� been resequenced in the updatc,and any activi6es which have bee�►added in the update. Ovmer must consent in writing to any revision described herein before the
Construction Progress Schedule shall be revised. Nohvithstanding the foregoing,the Project Completion Date,and the completion dates of interim milestones(if
any)shall be revised only by the issuance of a Change of Contract Contractor shall be required to submit to the Owner a revised or updated CPM chart which
includes a graphic representation of the revision or update at the sole discretion of the Owner.
� G. The Contractor agrees to compIy with the Consttuction Progress Scheduie,as defined herein,or any revision thereof to which the Owner
consents and agrees that the Work shall be prosecuted regularly,diligendy and without interruption,within tlie time specified The Contractor shalt not allow
reasonably foresceable weather conditions to impede ihe progress of the Work aad shall provide and maintain all temporary weather protection,pumping facilibies
� and snow,ice,mad or water iemoval services necessary to maintain the prog�ss ofthe Work.
B. Should the Conlractor fail to comply with the Construction Progress Schedule or,in the Owner's opinion,othenvise fail,refuse or neglect to
suppiy a sut��cient amount of labor,matenal or Supervision in tF�e prosecution of the Wor[c,the Owner shall have the right to(1)direct the ConVactor,at the
Contractors cxpense,to fumish such addidonal labor and/or material as may,in the Owner's opinion,be required to comply with the Consfruclion Progress Schedule
' or oti►erwise diligenUy prosecute the Work,(2)fumish,in accordance with Paragraph 22 h�eo�such additional labor and/or materials as may be required to compty
with said schedule,(3)withhold payments pursuant to Paragraph 35 hereo�and(4)tecminate thc Contract in accordance with Paragaph 23(A)hereof. The Owner
may exeroise any of the foregoing�medies,none to the exclusion of the others. Any costs incurred by the Owner pursuant to the exercise of any rights under this
Paragraph shall be bome by the Contractor and shall not increase the Contract Sum.
� I. Notwithstanding Subparagraph H above,should the Contractor fail to complete the Work in accordance with the completion date specified
in ffie Construction Progress Schedule,as revised with the Owner's approval,tiie Contractor shal!pay to the Owner as 5xed liquidated damages the sum as set forth
in the Special Provisions. 11�e Contractor shall remain liable to the Owner for all actual damages sustained by ihe Ovmer subsequent m Substantial Completion until
� all the Work required by the Contract llocuments is complete and the Work is accepted by the Owner.
8. DELAYS
A. if the Contractor is delayed or hirsdered at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or�glect of the Owner or by any contractor
� employed by the Oumer,or by changes ordered in the scope ofthe Work,or by fire,adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipated,or any other causes beyond
the control of the Contractor,then the duration set forth in the Construction Progress Schedule shall be extended as agreed to by the Owmer and the Contractor.
However,to the fullest extent pennitted by taw,and notwithstand"mg any othcv provision in the Contract Documents,the Ownex,its agents and employees shatl not
be held responsible for any loss or damage,wh�her direct or indirect,sustained by the Cona�actor,or additional costs incuired by the Contractor,through delay caused
� by the Owner or its agents and employees,or any other contractor or subcon�actor,or by abnamal weather conditions,or by any other cause,and the Contractor
agrees noE to make,and hereby waives,any claim for damages,and agrees that the sole right and cemedy therefor shall be an extens�on of time.
B. Wifhin seven('))days from the commencement of a delay,Contractor shall submit to the Owne�s Representative,in wri6ng,a notice of the
� delay. Such notice of delay shall,at a minimum,describe the nature and cause of the delay and pmvide a pretiminery estimate of the impact of said delay on the
Construction Progess Schedule. 'i'he Con�actor's failure to give such notice to the Owner shall deprivc the Contractor of his cight to claim an extension of time.
In the case of a continuing cause of delay,only one claim sha(I be necessary. The giving of such notice shall not of itself establish the validity of the cause of delay
or of the exterui�ofthe time for completion. Submission of reports and/or updates required by Paragraphs 7(E)and 7(�above,or by Paragaph 15(D),sha11 not
� constitute such nWice.
C. Within twenty(20)days&nm the submittal to the Owner of the notice of delay detailed in Paregraph 8(B)above,Contractor shall submit to
the Owne�s Rep�esentat�ve a claim for an extension oftime which sha11 iaclude all documentstion supporting the claim. Such submittal shall include a detaited
descdption ofall changes in activity dwations,logic,sequence,or otherwise in the Conslruction Pro�ess Schedule. The Sling of such a ciaim for an extension of
� time shail not of itself establish the validity of the cause of delay or of the exteasion of time for completion. Submission of c�onstruction reports andlor updates
roquir�ed by Paragraphs 7{E)and 7(k�above,or by Paragraph 15(D),shall not constitute such a claim.
D. No delay,intederence,hindrance,or disruption,from whatever source or cause,in the progress of the Contractor's Work shall be a basis for
' an extension of time unless the delay,interference,hindrance,or disruption is without the fauh and not the responsibility of the Contractor and direcdy affects the
overali completion of the Work,as reflected in the Coniractor's updated and accepted Construaion Progress Schedule. No delay,intederence,hindtance,or
disruption,from whatever source or cause,in the progress of Gontractor's Work shall be a besis for an extensioa of time for an interim milestorn date,if any,untess
the delay,interference,hindrance,or disruption is without the fauh and not the responsibiGty of the Contractor and direaly affects the overall completion of such
� interim milesWnq as reflected in the Contractor's updated and accepted Conswction Progess Schedule.The Contractor expressly agrces that the Owner shatl receive
the benefit ofany float,and delays to construction activities which do not affect the overall completion of the Work shall not emitle the Contractor to an extension
of the contract performance time.
� 9. DISPl3TES
co��e.�a 00810-4
� 4
Construction Contract �
�.�F�RAT. CONDITIONS
The presence af disputes or confroversies between the Conhactor and any other party,including the Owner,over any matter whatscever,or legal �
proceedings arising from such disputes or controversies,shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform his Work propedy and timety and to comply
with all of the terms and conditions of the Contract.
10. SURVEYS,PERMTTS,LAWS AND REGULATIOIVS �
A. The Owner will fumish benchmarks and property markers. The Contractor shall be required to maintai�these Ovmer-furnished benchmarks
and property markers and to perForm all layout work for the Project working therefrom.
B. 4) Unless otherwise indicated in the Instructions W Biddets or Schedule A,the Owner will obtain the building permi�which permit �
shall be,to the extent permitted by applicable laws,assignable to another contractor designated by the Owner,at the Owne�'s option,without the consent
of ihe issuing entity.
5) '17+e Contractor shall pay all plan check fees,water,sewer,gas,electrical,telephone and cable TV hookup fces. Other inspecdon �
fees,required permits,licenses,approvals,certiRcates and authorizations necessary to the prosecution and completion ofthc Work will be obtained and
paid for by the Contractor,unless the Contractor is othernise instructed by the Owner.
12. ROYALTiES AriIU PATENfS �
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend ail suits or claims for infringement of any patent righu and shall savc
the Owner harmiess from loss on account thereof;except that 4he Owner shall be responsible for all such losses when a particular design,process or the pmduct of
a particular manufacturcr or manufacturers is specified,but if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design,process or product specified is an infringement �
of a gatent,he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such informaGon to the Ownet's Repres�tative.
13. PROTECTION OF WORK ANA PROPERTY;EXISTIl�IG UTILITTES
A. The ConVactor shall continuously maintain adequate Qrotection of aII Work from demage due to any cause,including inclement weather,and �
shall protect all propeity of the Owner from damage or loss. The Contractor shall adequately protect property of adjacent land owners.
B. The Contractor shall protect and secure the Project against loss by theft or otherwise. �
C. The obligations of this Paragraph 12 shall apply,regardless of whether the Ovme�'s property in the Contractor's possession was purchased by
the Owner or the Contractor.
D. Whenever the Work will resalt in an interruption of any utility service to any existing Facility,the Conhactor shatl submit a written request �
at least fourteen(14)days prior to the anricipated intem�ption. No services may be interrupted without the prior acceptance oFthe Owne�'s Representative.
14. SAFETY
A. The Contractor shatl be responsibfe for complying with all applicable codes,ordinances,rules,and regulaiions,including federal and loc:al �
OSHA regulations,involving safety on the Project The Contractor shall iniflate,maintain and supervise all safety prog�ams in connection wiffi his employees on
the Project and all other persons who may be affected thereby and shall give all notices and comply with all of the appiicable laws,ordinances,rules,and regulations
of any public authority bearing on ihe safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,inj ury or loss on,about or adjacent to the premises;where the �
Work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times,as required by che conditions and progress of the Work,al1 reasonable
safeguards for the safety and protection of worlanen and ffie public and shall post danger signs warning against ha�rds. The Contractor sha11 ensure that each of
his worEanen on the P%ject Site shall wear a"hard hat"for his own protection.The Contractor shall designate a iesponsible member of his organi7stion on the Work,
whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. The name and ppsition of any person so designated shall be reported in writing to ihe Ovmer's RepresentaNve by �
the Contractor.
B. In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the Work or o£adjoining properiy,the Conuactor is hereby permitted to act at his discre6on
to prevent such th�eatened loss a injury,and he shall so act without appeat,if so authorized or instructed.Any costs incurred by ihe Contractor becsase of emergency
work shall be determined by agreement and confirmed by a Change of Contrad. �
C. VJhen the use of hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise the utrnost care
and shall carry on such activi6es under the supervision of propedy qusli6ed pe�sonnel and in compliance with all applicabte laws,rules,regulations and ordinances.
Fxplosives of any description shall not be siored on the Project Site. if the Contractor wishes to use explosives of any description he shatZ first provide written notice �
to the Owner's Representative and obtain the approvaE of all appropriate authorities having jurisdiction over the use of such explosives.
D. The Conhactor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.
E. The Contractor shaEl be responsible for Qrovidiag fire extinguishers and fire watch for periods dudng which his personnel may be engaged �
in activities constituting a fire ha�rd,or as otherwise required by law. Prior to engaging in such activities,the Contractor shall essure himself that all fla�nmable
materials have been cieared from the affected area
F. In cace of an accident involving injury to any of the Contractor's employees(including any employee ofanyone worlcing under the Contractor), �
the Contracwr s6all notify the Ownd's Repres�tative within one(1)hour and shall file a valid accident report within twenty-four(24)hours after such accidenk
The Convador shall also file such reports as are mquired by his insw�ance carrier and such other reports as goveming civil authorities might require.
15. SUPERVISION APID EMPLOYEES �
c�,x.ma 00810-5
5 �
` Construction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
� A. The Contractor shall,prior to commencement ofthe Work,submit to the Owner's Representative,for his acceptance,the name and experience
resume ofthe proposed Project Manag�and Project Superintendent The Contractor shall also submit the names of key members of his fi�m who wili be direcdy
connected with ihe Project and outline the duties and authority of each.
� B. The Contractor shaii have at the Project site,during the full term ofthe Contract,an approved,competent,full-time person who may be either
a Project Manager or a Superintend�t,and any necessarp assistants,all satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. The Project Manager or the Superintendent shatI
not be changed,except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative unless the Project Manager or the Supe�intendent ceases to be in the employ of the
Contractor. The Pmject Manager or the Superintendent shalt represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to either of them by the Owner or the
, Owner's Representative shall be as bindsng as if given to the Contractor. All directions and communications shall be confirmed in writing.
C. If a Project Manager or a Superintendent approved by the Owner's Representative ceases to be in the Contractor's employ,the Contractor shall
immediately repiace him with a person acceptable to the Owne�s Representative. The Owner in its sole discretion shall have the right to require the removai of aoy
� agent or employee of the Conhactor or any Subcontractor without cause at any time.
D. The Contractor shall at all times enfomz strict discipline and good order artwng its employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit
peison,anyone not skilled in tha work assigned to him and anyone who is not satisfactory to the Owne►'s Representative.
' E. Equal Emolovment O000rtunitv
The Contractor shall comply with Execotive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965(41 C.F.R.6a250),wt�ich is administered by the lJnited States
� Deparnnent of Labor Office of Federal Contracx Comp6ance Pragrems,and with the relevant rules,reguladons,and orders of the Secretary of Labor(collectively,
the"EEO Requirements").The Contractor will fumish upon request infonnatian and reports required by the EEO Requirements,or pursuant ihereto,and will provide
access to ifs books,records,and acoounts to appropriate agencies,and the Secretary of Labor for the purpose of investigation to ascertain comp{iance with the EEO
Requirements. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Paragraph in every subcontract or purchase order so that such pmvisions wilt be binding upon
each contractor,subcontractor,or vendor performing services or providing materials retating to the Work.
' 1) The Contracior shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race,color,age,religion,sex,
national origin,disahility,or veteran stap�s. The Contractor shall talce�anative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that emptoyees are
treated daring employment without regard to their race,color,age,religion,sex,national origin,disability,or vete�n status. Such action shall include,
� but is not to be limited to the following:employment;upgradin�demotion or transfer,recruitment or rec�uitment advertising;layoffortermination;rates
of pay or other forms of compensation;and selecdon for iraining;including apprenticeship. The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places,available
to employees and applicants for employment,notices setting forrh tt►e provisions of this non-discrimination provision.
� 2) The Contractor shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a coflective bargaining agreement,
a notice advising the labor union or worker's representative of the Contractofs commitrnents under the EEO Requirements,and he shall post copies of
the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment
3) The Coatractor shall,in a11 solicitations or adveRisements forempioyees placed on its behal�state that atl qualified applicants will
� receive consideration for employment without regard to race,color,age,religion,se�national origin,disability,or veteran status.
The Contractor shall aLto comply with Title VI of fhe Civil Rights Act of 1964(Pub.L 88-352),and the regulations issued pursuant thereto(24 CFR Part
1),which provides that no person in the United States shall on grounds of iacx,color,or nationa!origin,be excluded from pariicipation in,be denied ti�e beneSts
� of,or be otherwise subjected to discrimination ued�any program or activity for which the applicant received Federaf financial assistance and will immediately take
any measures necessary to effectuate this assurance. If any real property�struciure thereon in provided or impmved with the sid of Federa!financial assistsnce
extended to the applicant,this assurance shal]obligate the applicant,or in the case of any transfer of such propeity,a�ry transferee,for the period during which the
resi property a sVucture is used for a purpose for whic6 tl�e Federal financial assistance is extended,or for another purpose involving the provision ofsimilar services
� or beneflts.
F, Non-seareeated Facilities
� The Contractor cert�es that it dces aot maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments,and that it does nar
knowingly pennit its employas to paform their services at any location under its conlrol where segregated facilides are maintained. The Contractor a�ees that a
breach ofthis certification is a violation of the EEO Requireccents.As used in this certificatioq the term"segregated facilities"means any waiting room,work areas,
rest rooms and wash rooms,restaurants and other eating areas,time clocics,locker rooms,and oEher storage or dressing areas,parking lots,drinking fountains,
recreation or entertainment aroas,transportatioq and housing facilities provided for employee,s.
� Executive Order 11246,and the regulatians issued pursuant thereto(24 CFR Pert 13Q and 41 CFR Chapter 60),and Section 4(b)ofthe Grant Agreement,
which provides that no person shall be discriminated against on the basis of race,color,religion,srac,w national origin in all phases of employment during the
perfo[mance ofFede�al or federally assisted eonstruction conhactc shall fake affirmative action to insure fairUeatment in employment,upg,rading,demotion,layo�
, or tennination; iates of pay or other fomvs of oompensation; and selec6on for training and apprenticeship,
0. Develo ment of Affirmative Acrion Com liance
� The Contractos agrees and certi5es Wat it wil1:
1) develop a written affirmative action compliance progam appropriate for each of its establishments as required by Tide 41,Code
of Federal Regulations,Section 60-1.40;
� 2) file each year accurate reports on Standard Form 100(EEO-1)with the appropriate govemment agency(Section 1.7,Chapter 60,
�►�+�� 00810-6
� b
Construction Contract �
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Title 41 of the Code of Federal Regulations)if {a)the Contractor has 50 or more employees and has federal contracts with a value exceeding$50,000; �
or(b)the Contractor is subject to Title VII ofthe Civil Rights Act of 1964,as art�ended,and has over 100 employees or under lU0 employees,but is owrted
or affiliated with another company thus employing a combined worl�orce exceeding 100 employces;and
3) compet its Subcontractors and Suppliers to wmply with the pmvisions ofthis Paragraph 14(G). �
H. Veterans Emolovment
1) The Contractor agees that it will act upon the foilowing provisions as set foRh in 41 C.F.R.60-250: ,
a) T'he Coniractor will provide speciei canphasis to the employment of qualified disab}ed veterans ofthe Vietnam era.The
Contractor ag�ees thai suitable employment openings which exist at the time of the execution and those which occur during the performance
of contract(s)shalt be offered for listing at an appropriate local office of the Statc Employment Service. �
b) The listing of employment openings with the employment system pursuant to ffiis Paragraph I4(Ii)shall be made at
least concurrently with the use of any other rec�uitrnent services or effo►ts and shal!involve the normal obligations which attach to the placing
of a bona fide job order,including the accepcance of referrals of veterans and non-veterans. The listing of employment openings dces not �
require the hiring of any particular job applicant or&om any particular group of job applicants,and nothing herein is intended to relieve the
Contractor from any requirements contained in the EEO Requirements.
c) This Paragraph 14(I-n does not apply to openings which the Contractor proposes to fill from within its own organization
or pursuant to a customary and traditional promotion from within poliey. This exclusion doac not apply to a particulaz opening once the �
Conhactor decides to conside.r applicants outside of its own organization or empioyer-union arrangements for that opening.
� The term"suitable employment openings"includes,but is not limited to,openings which occur in the following job
categories: service and non-service;operations or executive officas;iaborers and mechanies;supervisory and non-supervisory;technical and '
executive;administrative;and professional openings which are compenseted on a salary basis ofless than SZ5,000 per year.This term includes
full-time employment,temporary employment of more than three(3)day's duradon,and part-iime employment.
2) The Contractor further ag�es that it wiil compel it�Subcontractors and Suppliers to wmpiy with the provisions ofthis Paragraph �
14(H}.
I. t3andica�ped Emnlovment
1) The Contractor agrees that it witl act upon the following provision as set forth in 41 C.F.R.60-741.3: �
The Conbractor shalt not discriminate against any employee�applicant for employrr�ent bccause ofphysica!or mental
handicap for employment, if qualified. The Contractor agrees to Eake afTirmative action to empioy,advance in
employment,and otherwise treat qualified handicapped individuais without discrimination based upon their physical �
or mental handicap in atl practices including,but not limi[ed to,the following: employmeni;upgradin�demotion or
transfer;recruitment or eecruitment adveRising;layoffor termination;cates of pay or oth�forms ofcampensation;and
selection for training,including apprenticeslup.
2) The Contractor futther agrees that it will compel iEs Subcontractors and Suppliers to comply with the provisions of this Paragraph �
I4(n.
16. REPORTS ANU MEETIlVGS �
A. The Contractor shall prepare a Weekly Repm�wt�ich wil!be delivered to the Ownea on a weekly basis,on the standard form provided by the
Owner(Exhibit�showing the number of foremen,journeymen mechanics,and other personnel employed ai the Project for each day,and the location and nature
ofthc Work performed. Failure of the Contractor to dmely dcliva daily reports as raruired shall consNtute cause for the withholding of paymen�under Paragraph
35(A)(1). �
B. Piot more than 30 days following commencement ofconstruction,the Contractor and representatives of all Subcontraetors designated by the
Owner shall attend a pro-conswction meeting scheduled by the Owner. The Contractor shall be repiesented by its Project Manager,General Superintendents and
other persons designated by the Owner;Subcontractors shall be represented by the'v supervisory personneE. The purpose of the meeting will be to discuss matbers �
rolating to the Project
C. Each wcek during the poogress of the Work,the Contractor wi'1[conduct a Progress Meeting at a ame artd place agreed upon by the Contractor
and the Ovvn�,during which Ute Contractor shaq review the prog�ess ofthe Work relative to the Constructian Progress Schedule and discuss ways of maintaining �
the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall require Subcontractors who are active on the Projeet at the time the mceting is held to be present and be represented
by a person with adequate authority.The Contractor shall require Subcontractors who are not active on the Project to be present and be represented by a person with
adequate suthority,iftheir presence is requested bythe Ownar's Representative.The Contractor shall kcep accwate minutes ofeach meeting and shall deliver asigned
copy of eactt set of minutes to the dwners Repres�taGve within seventy-two(?2)houc�of each meeting. Failure of the Contractor to schedule or hold the Progress �
Meetings required by this Paragraph,or failure to submit signed copies of Progess Meeting Minutes as required by the preeeding sentence shall constitute cause
for the withholding of payments under Paragraph 35(A)(8). The Owner shall be entiUed to attend and participate in att such Pmg�ress Meetings.
D. Each month,on the day a payment request is submitted to the Owner,the Contractor sha[!submit to the Owner a Contract Status Report
(Exhibit In,which report shall,si a minimum,show,in detail,the progess ofthe Work relative to the approved Construction Pragress Schedule,a current Contract �
c�.ma 00810-7
7 '
, Construction Contract
GENEItAL CONDITIONS
� Status Report,a listing of outstanding submittals or proposals upon which the Contractor is awaiting response&om the Owner and the impact,if any,such submittals
or proposals have on the Cons�uction Progress Schedule,the Contract Sum,including additions or deductions arising out of accepted changes of Contract,and a
listing ofpending or outstanding changes of Contract and Contractor's claimed cost and/or extension of time resulting therefrom.
� 17. SUBMTITALS
Upon the earlier of:{1)the execution of the Contrac�or(2)receipt of allotice to Proceed,the Cantracior shall immediately begin developing all submittals required
by the Contract Documents, All submittals are due from the Contractor to the Owna prior to the expiration of fifty percent(SO%)of tlse original Contract Time,
' unless otherwise specifled by the Owner.All submittats required for each trade or specification section shall bo submitted as one complete package,unless otherwise
designated by the Owner. FaiIure ofthe Contractor to comply with terms contained in this Paragraph shall constitute cause for the withholding of payme.nts under
Paragaph 35(Ax13).
� A. Submittal Loa
On a date to be determined by Owner,the Owner shall submit to the Contractor a Submittal I.og identifying the dates on which the Contractor shaIl make
submittals.
� B. Shoo Drawines
1) The Contractor shall submit to the Owner one(1)reproducible copy(sepia)and four(4)blueline prints of all shop drawings(the
� "Shop Drawiags")in accordance with the Owners distribution sctiedule,in ample time to coordinate necessary feahzres ofconstruction with all fabrication
and instailation requirements in order to meet the requirements of the Construction Progress Schedule. One sepia will be retumed to the Contractor. By
the submission of his Shop Drawings,the Contractor warrants that he has coordinated his Shop Drawings with those of other Contractors.
2} Review:
, a) Fabrication may start immediately for Shop Drawing,s stamped"Submittal Fully Complies With Requirements of
Conhact"or"Complies Except as Noted"(each subject to the Contract Documents). No resubmission is required of Shop Drawings which
are stamped as indieated above.
� b) Fabrication shall not be started far Shop Drawings stamped"Revise and Resubmit".Ali co�rections shall be tnade,and
new copies shall be resubmitted.
� 3) Submittals of Shop Drawings which contain insut�cient data or are unchecked by the Contractor will be retumed for w�rection
without further checking by the Owner.
C. Product Data
� l) Submivals: Six(G}copies of product data are required for each submittal or resubmittal. Product data shall be submitted along
with Shop Drawings where appropriate. Additional oopies when requested by the Owne�'s Representativc shall be fumished without additional cost
2) Data Data applicable to the item submilfed for approval shaEl be designated on the catalog cuts.
� D. Warranties
Warran6es shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative at least thirty(30)days before Acceptsnce of the Work by the Ovmer in accordance with
� the provisions of Paragraph 38 hereof. All warranNes must be submilted to Ovmer prior to the Ovme�'s Accepqmce of the Work ar�d Final Paymenk
E. Samnles
� 1) Oriainal Submittal: Unless otherwise specified or directed,the Contractor shall submit four(4)of each item for which samples
are r�equired for approval prior to delivery of the materials to the Project Site. Samples shall be r�resentative of the actual material proposed and of
sufficient size to show design,color,tcxture and finish. Rejected samples will not be retumed.
2) Acceotarece: An accepted sample will be reU�med to ihe Contractor. The Owner's Representative will use the retained approved
� semples to insure compliance of ihe finisl�ed products supplied.
F. Identification
, 1) Alt submittals shall contain a title btock on which the following data is perroanently attached or noted:
a) Project nemc and location.
� b) Owner identiScation numbe�.
c) Coatractor's and Supplier's names and addresses and the name o£the individual to whom questions should be addressed.
� d) Productidentification.
� �.� ooaias
8
Constructian Contract �
GENERAL CONDITIONS
e) Submittal title,drawing number,revision number and date of drawing and revision. �
f} Applicable Contract Drawings and Specification secdon numbers.
g) Product data sobmitted containing multiple items for approval need the identificadon only on the exterior. In such �
instances the identification sha�t inciude page and catalog item numbers.
2) �: Vacant space approximately 2 1/2"high by 4"wide shall be provided adjacent to the identification data to receive the
Owne�s status stamp. �
G. Ge.neral
L) Si ature:Eac6itemsubmittedshallbethoroughlyreviewedbytheContractorandhaveastampornotedescribingtheContractor's �
action,signed by the person auttwrized by the Contractor to do the checking with that person's name clearly printed.
2) Contractor Resoonsibiliri:Contractor shall review each submittal for completeness,conformance to the Contract Documents and
coordination with other parts ofthe Work and the Progress Schedule.By providing and submitting to the Owner or the Owner's designee Shop Drawings, �
product data,wa�ranties and samples,the Contractor will be dee�ned to represent that he has determined and verified(a)the availability of a1!materials,
and(b)field measurements and field construction criteria related thcrcto,and ibat he has checked and coordinated the informadon contained within such
submittals with the requirement of the Work,the Contract Documents and the Progess Schedule and that such Shop Drawings,samples,warranties and
data conform to tfie Contract Documents.
3) Characteristics Not C6ecked bv Owner. Acceptance is for general design on1y. Quantiaes,size,5eld dimensions and locations ,
are some of the required cheracterisdcs which are not part of the Owner's accepiance and will not be checked. Accordingly,the Owner's limited
acceptance shall in no way reIieve the Contractor from his obligation to conform his work to raquired characteristics and to Project Specifications.
4) Delavs: The Owner may retum incomplete submittals with no action taken. The Contr�tor shall have no claim for any damages '
or for an extension of time due to delay in the Work resulang from the rejection of materials or from the rejection,correction,and resubmittal of Shop
Drawings,samples and other data,or from the untimely submission thereof.
18. PROJ�CT RECORD DOCUMENTS ,
A. The Contractor shal!maintain at the job sitc,unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative,copies ofall Drawings,SpeciBcations,
Addenda,Shop Drawings,Changes of Contract,Change Directives,other contract modifications and other doc�iments subm�tted'm compliance with the Contcact �
Docume�nts. �
B. The Contractor shall check all sections of the Specificat�ons for spec�fic references to mau►taunng record drawmgs and d�agraz►u(the"Pro�ect
Record Docaments"). These references aze intended to clacify record documentation for particular items and sre not intended to limit requirements generally,
G The Contractor shall ensure that each ofthe Project Record Documents shall be c(early marked"Project Record Copy"and shall be maintained '
in good condition and avaiiable at all rimes for inspection by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall merk up the most appropriate dowmcnts to record
significant changes during the construction process and signifcaot details not shown in the original Contract Documents.
D. The ContracWr shall ensuro that the information given shall incl�de,but not be limited to,the actual iocation of the under�ound utililies and �
appunenances,referenced to pern�anent surface improvements. Also,the location of intemal piping,wiring,ductwork,conduit and appurtenances concealed in
building structures,referenced to visible and accessible features of the structares. Projecx record dceuments are to be kept current. No Work shall be permanently
concealed until the required information has been recorded. ,
E. At t6e corrtple�ion of the Projec�the Owner's Representative will fumish the Contractor with a oomplete set of cwrent Contract Drawings.
The Contractor shall transfer the recorded changes to the drawings neatly with a permanent line of svfficient weight to clearly show ffie record changes. The
Contractor shall stamp and sign a certification statement on each Draw�ng and page that the Drawings as submitted are comeet and accurately depict the Work as
it has boen constructed. These drawings(the"As-Built Drawings")shall be submitted to the Owner prior to Acceptance of the Project by the Owner and prior to ,
the release of the Contractor's Final Payment
19. CLEAN-UP
A DailY Clean-UD �
1) The Contractor shali provide for all clean-up and off-siu disposal of all trash and debris as mquired by the Ovmer.The Contractor
shall provide whatever manpower and equipment(including,but not limited to,dumpsters)that the Owner's Representative,in its sole discrotion,fe.ds '
is necessary to adequately ctesn and remove from the Construction site all trash,did and debris that results from the operations of the Contractor,his
Subcoatractors and Suppliers,and Owner-fumished material installed by thc Contractor.
2) AllequipmentortempoiaryfacilitiesprovidedormaintainedbytheContractorshaUberemovedfromtheProjectnolaterthanFinal �
Completion. However,prior W Final Completion,the Contractor shall remove or refocate such equipment or temporary faciliries within 72 hours of ifs
receipt of notice to do so by the Owner.
3) If the Contracta fails to clean up as provided in this Paragraph,tt�e Owner reserves the right,upon forty�ight(48)hours written
notice to the Contractor,to proceed to remove the debris,the cost of which will be chargod against the Contra�tor. �
co�,�s.�a 008I0-9
9 �
� Construction Contract
GENEItAL CONDTTIONS
' B. Final Clean-Uu
Prior to Substantial Completion,the Conhactor shall employ experienced persons or a professional team to make a Final Clean-Up ofthe Project or such
� portions ofthe Project as the Ovmei's Representative may designate. Such Clean-Up shalt cause the Project to be suitable for immediate use for its intended purpose.
Such Clean-Up shall leave all surfaces,equipment,finishes,fixtures,fwnishing and othcr similar items in a cond'stion requiring only ordinary care to maintain. The
Contractor shall be responsible to rec2ean as directed any areas soiled or dirticd as a result of performing caaective or uncompleted Worlc
110. CHANGE OF CONTRACT
' A 'The Owner may order changes in the scope ofthe Work and the Contractor shafl perfom�the Work as changed.The Owner may order changes
as follows:
' 1) 'Fhe Owner may issue in wtiting a request for a Change of Contract proposal to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a
proposal for the requested Change ofContract to the Owner within fourteen(14)calendar days of the receipt of such request(or as otherwise specificalty
agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor),The proposal shall cnntain a quantity survey including quantity calculations,area calculations,unit prices,
Iabor hours,rates and any other information necessary to provide the Owney in the Owner's opinion,with a comprehensive understanding ofthe proposal.
' "I7�e proposai shall contain any credits due the Owner resulting from the rc�questsd Change of Conrract The proposal shall reflect unit prices contained
in the Contract llocvmenLs,if any;the Contractor shall represent and certify to the Owner that the prices contained therein are the lowest prices available
to the Contractor. Ifwork covered by the proposal is similar to work for which unit rates have been established,the unit rates for such established work
shall be,at the Owrtefs option,the basis for detecmining the cost of such similar work. The proposal shall clearly indicate all areas of the Work affected
' by said requested Change of Contract. The Contractor shall requice each Subcontr�tor,Supplier and Sub-subwntractor to conform to t6e rexluirements
of this Paragraph.lfthe Contractor fails to submit a pioper proposal in accordance herewith,the Ownermay suspend further payments until the Contractor
compiies.
2) If time restraints require or if the Owner and the Contractor fail to agrce upon the cost of any change in the scope of the Work
' pursua�►t to Paragaph 19(A)(1),the Owner may direct the Contractor by written order to procoed with the Work involved by issuing a Change Directive
(Exhibit n. Ifthe Contractor claims that such work constitutes aChange of Contract,then the Contractor shail submit to the Owner a request for a Change
of Contract in accordance with Patagrdph 19(A)(1). The Contract sum or the time for performance may not be changed as a result of issuance of,or
compliance with,a Change Directive. 'I7►e Owner may also issue a Change Directive to assess backcharges against the Conhactor.
� B. A Change of Coatract is a written order w the Contractor signed by the Owner or the Owner's Agen�issued aft�er the execution ofthe Contract,
authoriaing a change ia the scope of the Work or an adjusUnent of the Contract Sum or the time for performance(Exhibit J). The Contract Sum and the time for
performance may be changed oniy by a Change of Contract. A Change of Contract signed by the Contractor indicates his ageement therewith,including the
� adjustment in the Contract Sum or the time for performance,if any. It is understood that unless the Chaage of Contract specific�lty and cleazly modifies the time
for perfocmancc,the Contracmr agree,e that there shall be no modification in the time for perfarnarsce and,by executing the Change of Contrac�the Contractor
expressly waives and releases any and all ciaims,rights,or interests,including,but n�limited to,those for extensions of time,impact,dismption,loss of efficiency,
"ripple,"or other extraordinary or consequential costs,originating di�ectly or indirectly out of the Work set forth in or related to the particular Change of Contract.
� C. The charge or credit for the Change of Contract for work performed pursuant to Paragraph 14(A)(2)will be determined as set forth in this
Paragaph 19(C). The allowable limit for irade mark-up is based on aetue!cost plus a percentage fee for ove�ead and profit of five percent(5°/a)for the Contractor
and ten percent(10'/0)to be appoRioned between any and all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors. For work performed by the Contractor's own forces,the
Contrac�r's mark-up shall be limited to actual cost plus a p�centage fee for overhead and profrt of ten percent(10%).For the purpose of calcula6ng lrade mark-up,
� actuaI cost is defned as{i)cost of labor,including social security,old age and unemployme,nt insurance,and fringe benefits required by agrcement or custom,
workers'compensation insurance and bond premiums(if arry),(ii)actual cost of materials,including sales tax and the cost of delivery,and(iii)rental value of
equipment and m�hinery,based on eucrent AGC renta!rates,obtained and used specifically for suc6 wodc. Actual cost dces not include any item which could be
dcemed to be a gene[al condi6ons cost or overhead such as,but not limited to,the cost ofContractor and Subcontractor supervisory personnel assigned to the Pro}ect,
� and field office and related expenses.All work performed pursuant to this Parag�aph 19(C)shall be subject to verification/audit by the Owner. T6e ConVactor shall
sfford Owner reasonable access to aii applicable Project records for a period of three(3)years from the completion of the Project
D. In ffie alt�native,the Owner shall have the right to employ a separate Contractor to perfom�such work.The Contractor sha11 afford separate
� Contractors ressonable opportunity for the delivery and storage of ffieir materials and equipmertt and the execution of the work,and the Contractor shall fuity and
propedy coordinate his work with the work of such separate Contractots,all at no additiona�cost to the Owner.
E. The awner,in iLs sole discxetion,may elect to pay for extra work performed by the Contractor althoogh the Contractor has not complied with
a�l requirements of the foregoing subparagraphs of this Paragraph. The Contractor expressly agrees that such eloction by the Owner shall not be deemed a waiver
, of the Owner's rights or constitute a course of conduct,abrogating the requirements of this Paragaph. The Contractor fiuther expressly agrees that the Owner shall
have no obligation to pay the Contractor unless tt►e Contractor has complied with ap requirements ofthis Paragraph,artd the Ownet's righu to require such oompliance
sha(l be the same as if the Owner had requind such full compliance with respect to each and every item of extra work perfom�ed by the Contractor.
� 20. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST/EXTENSIONS OF TIME
Ifthe Contractor claims that any instructions by Drawings(including Shop Drawings)or writte�►clarification or othexwiss involve extra costs or require an extension
of 6me under lvs ConUact,he shall give the Owner's Representsdve written notice within seven('�days of the rec,eipt thereof. Within fourteen(14)days of
� submission of the written notice,the Contractor shall submit thc back-up for all allowable extensions of time and all claimed e�a costs,including,but not limited
Lo,detailed labor and material costs,subject to Paragaph 8(A)hereof. Faceept in an emergency which endaogecs life or property,the Co�ractor shall not proceed
without written acceptance in the form of a Change Directive or a Change of Coniraa from the Owner. Failure of the Contractor to provide such written notice in
a time{y manuer within sevea(7)days shatl deprive the Contractor of its right to claim such extra costs.
, 21, CORRECTION OF WORI{
���-� 00810-10
� 10
Construction Contract �
GENEI2AL CONDITIONS
A. Correction of Work Before Final Pavment �
1) In the event that the Contractor receives a notificstion of faulty or unacceptable Work by Owner's Representative,the Contracta
shall promptly remove fram the premises alt worfc condemned as failing to conform to the requirements ofihe Conlract Documents,whether incorporated �
in the Work or not. The Contractor shall then promptly replace and re-cxecute its own work in accordance with the Contract Documents and without
expense to the Owner and shall bear the expense of making good ali work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removat or replacement.
In addition,the Contractor shall perform a�l cutting and Stting for other trades necessitated by the Contractor's emors.
2) Should the Contractor refuse or fail to correct faulty or damaged work prompUy(but in no case longer than twenty(20)days),or ,
should the Owner's Representative consider it inadvisabte for the Contractor to do so,the Owner may eilher(a)authorize another contractor to correct
the work at the Contractor's expense or(b)accept the fauIty or damaged work and obtsin from the Contcactor a credi;contained in a Change of Conaac;
representing the diminished valve of the woric accepted.
3) 'The Owner shalI make a final inspection of all Work after the Project has been completed.Coirection of all faolty or unacceptable ,
work by the Contractor shall be a wndition precedent to Final Paytnent. Final accepiance shall occur after ttie Owner's Punchlist,prepared during final
inspection,has ban satisfied,such satisfaction of the punchlist being a wndition precedent to Final Paym�t.
B. Correction of Work Atter Einal Pavment ,
No provision in the Contraat Documentc shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for faulty matedals,equipment or wodananship. Unless
otherwise specified,the Contractor upon notification by the Owner,shall prompUy remedy any such defects due thereto and pay for any damage to the Owner ,
resulting therefrom.
22. OWNER'S RiGHT TO DO WORK/STOP WORIC
If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work propedy or make progress sufficie�nt to ensure compleGon in accordance with the Construction Progress �
Schedule,or othernise fail to perform any provision of the Contract,the Owner may either(1)order the Contractor to stop the Work(or any portion thereofl until
the cause for such order has been eliminated,or(2)upon forty-eight(48)hours written notice to the Contractor and his surety,if any,and without prejudice to any
other remedy the Owner may have,make good such deficiencies and deduct the cost thereof&om any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor.If the payments
then or t�sereafter due the Contracior are not suETicient to cover such amount,the Contraaor shall pay the difference to the Owner. However,this right of the Owner �
to stop thc Work shall not givc rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise its right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,nor shall
it relieve the Cantractor of his responsibility for providing for the safety of persons on the Project Site or void any warranty of the Contractor,either express or
implied.
23. CONTRAGT TERMINATION �
A. Owner's Ri�ht to Terminate
1) The Contractor shall be in default of this Conoract if it(a)becomes insolven�(b)files or has filed against it any Petition in �
Bankruptcy or makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors;(c)fails to pay,when due,for materials,supplies,labor,or other items purchasect
or used in connection with the Work;(�refuses or fails to prosecute the Work,or any separable part thereof,with such diligence as will ensure the
completion of the Work in accordance with t}te Conswction Progess Schedule;(e)in the Owner's opinion,fails,refuses or neglects to sapply sufficient
labor,materiai or supervision in the pmsecution of the WodG(�interferes with or disrupts,or threatens to interfere wit6 or disrupt the ope�ations ofthe �
Owner,or any other contractor,sapplier,subcontractor,or other person working on the Project,whether by reason of any labor dispvte,picketing,
boycotting or by any other reason;or(g�commits any other breach of this Contract.
2) In the event of a default by the Contractor or an election by the Owner W act in accordance with Subparagraph 6 of this Para�aph, �
the Owner may terminate this Contract,and such te�mination shall be effective forty-eight(48)hours after the Contractor receives writben notice thereof.
At the Owner's option,the awner may rescind its termination aotice by so notifying the Contractor in any appropriate manner prior to the expiration of
forty�ight(48)hours after the Contractor received the terminatioe nofice or prior to the time the Contractor removes his equipment and forces from the
Project Site,wfiichever is later,and the Ownermay talce possession ofall or any materiels,supp6es,equipment and tools pertaining to this Project whettier �
on the Project Site,in the Contractor's shop or in transit,and may make independent arrangements for the completion of the Work. The arnount of the
completion wst,as well as any ot6er costs,damages,or expenses,including the Ovmer's legal fces and expeoses,incuired as a result of a defaul�shali
be charged agamst any unpa�d balance due the Contractor,and,ifsaid total costs,damages,or expenses shall exceed the ba9ance due,the Contractor agees
to pay the amount of said excess within fifteen(15)days of the O�mer's deroand thaefor.
3) The materials,supplies,equipment and tools taken by the Owner may be used in completing the Work and may be inco�porated ,
into the improvemenls being conswcted. With respect to any of such items incocporated into the Project,or consumed in the Work,the net reasonable
value of the same as of the date of taking shalt be crodited against the aforesaid total completion costs,damages and expenses. With respect to smy such
items which are not so incorporated or consumed,or which have a salvage value,the Owner may,at its option(a)assume dde to the same or arry part '
of the same,as of the date of default and credit thc net reasonable value thcreof as of the date of taking against the total compiction cost,damages,and
expenses,or(b)retum the same to the Contractor and credit the net reasor�abte value of the use thereof by the Owner against the said total completion
cost,damages and expenses. As used ia ihe preceding sentences,the phrase"net reasonable valae"of any it�ns shall mean the reasonable value atter
deducting all amounts which have been paid to the Conkactor on aa;ount theroof. �
4) In the event ihat the Owner does not terminate this Contract despite the occuirence of an event of default,but instead assents to
delayed completion of the Work by the Contraetor,such assent shall not be construed as a waiver of the Conhacto�'s obligetion to reimburse the Owner
for any costs,damages,or wcpenses inewred as a result of such delay;and all sach costs,damages,and expenses shall be paid or reimbursed w the Owner
within fiftaen(15)days of the Owner's demand therefor. �
co,�.�,a 008I0-11
11 '
, Construction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
, 5) If,after notice of termination of the Contractor's right to procxed pursuant to Paragraph 23(Ax2),it is determined for any reasoa
that the Contractor was not in defaalt,or that its delays are excusable,or that the dwner is not entitled to che remedies against the Conhactor provided
therein,then the Contractor's remedies against the Ovmer shall be the same as and limited to those afforded the Contractor under Paragaph 23(A}(6).
� 6) The Owner shall have the right to terminate this Contract without cause upon forty�ight(48)hoars'written notice to the Contractar.
In the event of such termination for convenience,the Contractor's rights against the Owner shall be limited to that portion of the Contr�act Surt2 earned
through the date of tcrmination,together with all materials ordered(whicl�shall become the property of Owner)and any rotainage withheld,but the
Corttractor shal[not be entitled to any other or Curther relief against the Owner,including,but not limited to,anticipated profii on Work not performed.
' 8. ConEractor's Rieht to Temiinate
If the Work is stopped for a period of ninety(90)days or more under an order of any court or other public suthority having jurisdiction,or as a result of
' an act of govemment,such as a declararion of a national emergency making materials unavailabie,tivough no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or
their agents a empioyees or any other petson performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor,or if the Work is wholly or substantially discontinued
for a period of sixty(60)days or more by the Ownes,the Contractor may terminate this Contract and st+ch tcrmination shall bc effective forty-eight(48)hours after
the Owner rxeives written nobce therco�and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materiats,
' equipment,tools,construction equipment and aiachinery,includ'mg a prorated portion of the Contractor's fee.This Contract can only be terminated by the Contractor
pursuant to the terms of this Subparagraph(B).
C. The Contracto�s obligations arising out of this Contract,including his obligadons under Paragaph 40,(exrept airy obligation to complete
' the Work after termination)shall surv'sve ferminadon.
24. LIENS
A. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of applicable laws and regulations of the state in which the Project is sitvated with respect
, to such laws and regulations relating to the liability of U►e Owner for mechanics'liens. The Contractor agees to take all precautions necessary to ensure that the
Owner's liability for mechanics'liens and similar liens is limited to the greatest extent possible nnder the applicable lien laws. 7'he Contractor shall also advise the
Owner of the Owner's obligations under applicable liert laws.To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Contraetor waives any rigt►ts to file a mechanics'lien against
the property,and agrees not to su@'er or permit mechanics'or maEerialmen's liens to be filed or continued against any prope�ty of the Ovmer or its related companies
� forservicespuformed,ormaterials,machinery,andequipmentfumishedinconnectionwiththeProjectbyhimset�anySubconlractor,Sub-subcontractor,mechar�ic,
laborer,Supplier,or any other pe�soce,firm or corporation,for work performed on the Project pursuant to this Contract by,through or under the Contractor. In the
event that any such lien shall be f led,the Contractor agrees to take at1 steps necessary and proper for the release and discharge of such 1 ien in the manner required
by ffie law in the state in which the lien has bcen filed on receipt within seven(�days of demand&om the awner,and in default of perfortning such obligation,agees
� to reimbwse the Owner,on demand,for all monies paid by the Ovmer in the releasing,satisfying,anQ discharging of such liens,iacluding reasonable attomeys'fees.
B. Neither the Final Payment nor any part ofthe retained percentage shall become due until the Contracior shall deliver to tfie Owner a full and
final release of ail iiens arising out of the Conhact or receipts in full in lieu thereof,and if required in eithec case,an affidavit that so far as he has lonowledge or
information,the releases and receipts include a11 tlu laboe and materials for which a lien could be filed;but the Contracta may,if any of its Subcontractors refu�
� to fumish a reeeipt in full,furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner,to incfemnify him aa��*any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all paymentc are made,
the Contractor shall refund to the Owner ali monies that the Iatter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attomeys'
fees.
' 2S. ASSIGN1V�Ni'AND'FHIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY
A. The Owner and the Contractor each binds itsel�and its Qartners,successors,executors and administrators and assigns to the other party of
tkis Contract and to the partners,successors,acecutors,administrators and assigns to such other party,with respect to all obligations contained in the Contraci
� Docnments. The Owner may assign its righu and obEigations under this Contract(including a collateral assignment thereo�at any time without the consent of the
Contractor,and the Conuactor agees to acecute any documentation with respect to such assignment promptty upon the Owner's request. However,the Contractor
sha(1 not assi�its obligations under this Contract or subtet as a whole withouE the prior written consent of ihe Owner,nor shall the Contractor assign any monies
due to it hereunder,without the prior written consent of the pwner. All assigvnents without the Owner's prior written consent are void.
� B. The Contractor agees that each subcontract and all purchase orders execuied by the Contractor for t6is Project,and aU rights ofthe Contractor
thenunde,shall be assignable to the Owmer,or to another contractor designated by the Owner,at the Owner's option,without oonsent of the Subconhactor or
Supplier;that upon such an assignment becoming effective such Subcontractor or Supplier will be bound to ihe Owner,or such Contractor designsted by the Owne�r,
as fuliy and in t6e same manner as such Subcontractor is bound to the Contractor und�such subcontract or purchase order,and that upon sach assignmenE becoming
' effective all sureties of the obligations of such Subcontractor shall be bound to the Owner,or sucb contcactor designated by the Owner,as fully and in the same
manner as such sureties are bound to the Contractor. 'fhe Contractor furrher agrees that,to the extent permitted by applicable 1aw,alt permits and ficenses obtained
by the Contractor for the Project and all rights of the Contractor thereunder shall lre assignable to tf�e Owner,or to another Contractor designated by the Owner,at
the Owna's option,without the consent of the issuing entity.
, C. Effective as of any teimination of this Contract,the Conhactor shall be dcemed to have assigned to the Owner all of the Contractor's interest
in ikose subcontracts and purchase orders entered into by the Contractor prior to termination which the Owner specifically�equests by written notice. Pursuant to
Subparagraph(B)above,ali subcontracts and purchase orders shall provide tbat d►ey are&eely assignable by the Contrador to the Owner and its assigns. Such
� assigunents by the Contractor shall not in any way be coastrued as the Owner's assumption of the Contractor's then-outstanding obligations to ifs Subcontractors
and Supplieas. The Owfxr shall be at Gbe�ty to negotiate with and engage(for ittelf or for any other contractors that the Owner engages to replace the Contractor)
any Subcornractors,Suppliers,or others that the Contractor dealt with prior to temiinatioa
' D. I�io provisions of the Contraet Documents shall in any way inure to the benefit of any third person(including the public at large)so as to
constitute such person a third party beneficiary of this Contract or of any one or more of the terms and condiNons of the Contract Documents or otherwise give rise
co��c.�a 0081 d-12
, 12
Construction Contract '
GENERAZ CONDITIONS
to aay cause of action in any person not a party hereto. The rights of the Owner set forth in this Paragraph are intended for the protection of the Owner only. No '
rights of the Owner specified in this Paragraph,nor any action talcen by the Owner pursuant to this Paragraph,shaU be construed as acceptance by the Owner of any
delegation of the duties owed by the Contractor to any third paRy.
26. INSPECTION ANA USE OF PREM7SES �
A. The Owner,the Owner's Representative and atl others specified by the Owner shall have safe access to the Work at a11 times for inspection
purposes.Notwithstanding the for�egoing,the Owncr and the Owner's Representative shall not bc responsible for,and will not have control or charge of,construction
means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures or for safety precantions and progess in connection with the Work,and they shall not l�responsible for the �
Contracto�s failure to carry out thc Work in accordance with the Contract riocume.nts.
B. The Owner reserves the right to occupy any portion of the Project and operate any equipmcnt that is part of the building wi[hout constituting
acceptance ofthe Conhaetor's Work or material involved either in whole or in part,unless the Ovmer,in its sole discretion,expressly accepts portions ofthe Project �
or pieces of equipment by written notice to the Contractor.
C. The Coniractor shali confine iLs apparatus,the storage ofmaterials and the operations ofhis workmen to limits indicated by law,ordinances,
permits and directions of the Owner's Representetive. The Contractor shall not encumber the premises with its material except for suc6 material as is absolutely ,
neoessary for the Contractor to perform the Work witliout intenupdon and as approved by the Ovmer's liepresentative.
27. INDEMNIF[CAITON
A. To the fullest extent pecmitted by law,the Contractor shall indemnify,defend and hold hartnIess the Ovmer and its rclated companies from ,
and against all claims,damages,losses and expenses,including,hut not timited to economic loss,direct,indirect,and consequen6al damages,and attomeys'fees
and expenses,arisingout oforresulting&omtheperformance ofihe Work,provided that anysuch claim,damage,loss orezpense(1)is attributableto personal injury,
bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangibie property including the loss of use resulting therefrom,and(2)is caused in whole
or in part by any act or omission ofthe Conuactor,any of its Subconvactors or Suppliers,an}rone directly or indirectly empioyed by any ofthem or anyone for whose '
acts any of them may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by the parties indemnified hawnder. 'Fhe
Contractor's obligation under this Pamgaph 27 shall extend to and include liability for the sole,partial,contributory,comparative,or concurnent negligence of any
parties indemnified herein and for any other acts or omissions of those pazties other than intentional acts or omissions.The phrase"tangible properiy"as used herein
'snciudes without limitation damage to the property ofthe Contractor,ail parties indemnified herein,or of any third party. '
B. In any and all claims against the Owner or its related companies by any employ�of the Contractor,any of its Subc:on�actors or SupQliers,
anyone direcUy or indirectly employed by any of them or anyonc for whose ads any ofthe�n may be liable,the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 27
sha11 not be limited in any way by any limitallon on the amount or type of damages,compensaiion or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any of its
Subcontractors or Suppliers under workers'compensation acts,disabiiity bene�it acts or other employee benefit acts. �
C. As part of the indemnity set forth above and to the fullest extent peimitted by law,the Conhactor agrees to indemnify and save the Owner and
its related companies harmless from all costs,damages,or expenses,including,but not limited to,reasonable attomeys'fas and expenses,incvmed by any of them
by viRue of any claim or ciaims whatscever filed by any of its Subcontractors,Sub-subcontraactors,mechanics,laborers,or suppliers,arising from work performed ,
pursuant to this ConVact by,through,or ander the Conkactor,including wiUwut limitation any such costs,damages,or expenses whieh arise as a resuIt oflhe partial,
concwrent,comparative,orc�ntributorynegligenceofapartyindecnnifiedhere�ender,exceptforthesolenegiigenceofapartyindemnifiedhereunder.TheContractor
also hereby agrees to indemnify and hold ham►less,protect,and defend the Owner and its related companies&om�nd against any liability,claims,jud�nents,losses,
damages,including,but not limited to,direct damages,attomeys'fees,court costs,and elccpenses of cnllection,occasioned in whole or in part by the failure of the �
Conh-actor,its Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors orSuppliers,m compIywith anyofthetenns orprovisions ofthe ContractDocumenu,includingwithout limitation
this indemnity obligation.
D. The Contractor acknowledges the receipt and su8'iciency of specific,valuable consideration and other benefits acerning to the Contractor in �
exchange for the Contracto�s obligation to indemnify for damages to persons or property caused by the sole,partial,contributory,comparative,or concurrent
negligenceofanypartiesindemnifiedund�thisContract.Thespecificconsiderationincludes,butisnotlimitedto,thefirstfrnpercait(5%)ofeachpaymentmade
to the Contractor under this ContracL
E. The indemnifications contained in this Paragaph 27 shall apply regardless of whether the liabilities sustained were the result of settlements �
or wntractual or other voiuntary forms of dispute cesoludon.
F. The terms"Owner"and"related companies"as used in this Pazagraph 27 include the mspective off[cers,directors,agents,servants,employees,
succasors and assigns of the Owner and its related companies. The term"related companies"as used in this Paragsaph 27 mcans any enNties in which the Owner ,
has controiling or managerial interests or any entities in which the Owner or has owcership interests,and which are in existence at any timc betwan the date ofthe
Contract and the Contractor's acceptance of Final Payment. Such endNes inclade,6ut are not limited to,corpora6ons,partnerships,arid joint vemures.
28. INSURANCE '
A Contracto�s Liabititv Insurance
1) The Contractor shall purohase from and maintain(or sBaU cause its Subcontracmrs and Sub-suboontractors to purchase from and
maintain)with insuranee companies satisfactory to Owner,such in,surance as will proteet the Contractor,Subcontraeto�,Sub-subcontractors,Owner, �
Ovmer's mortgage�(ifany),the ground lessor(if any),and all oftheir respective officers,directors,agents,se�vants,and employces,from claims set fortf►
below which may arise out of or result from operations under the Contract by the Owner,by the Contrector,by a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor,
by anyone directly or indirecUy employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose actc any of them may be liable:
'
c�x.�a 00810-13
13 '
, Construc�ion Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
' a) claims by Contractars,Subcontractor's,or Sub-subcontractor's employees under workers'compensation,disabilily
bencfit and other simiIar employce benefit acts;
b) ciaims for damages because of bodily injwy, occvpational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's,
, Subcontractors,or Sub-sabcontractor's employees;
c) claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness ar disease,or death of any person otder than the Contractor's,
Subcontractor's,or Sub-subcontractoi's employees;
' d) claims for damages insnrcd by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained(1)by a person as a result
o£an of�'ense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor,Sabcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,or(2)by another
person;
� e) claims fordamages,otherihan to the Work itsel�because ofinjury to or destrucaon oftangible property,including loss
of use resulting thuefrom;
' � cIaimsfordamagesbecauseofbodilyinjury,deathofapersonorpmpertydamagearisingoutofownership,maintenance
or use of a motor vehicIe;and
� claims involving contractual liability applicable to the Conlractor's obligations under Paragragh 27.
' 2) The Contractor and,unless oihecwise specified,each of Contractor's Subcontractors and Sab-subcontractors,shall procure and
maintain ihe insurance required by Paragaph 28(A}(l)for not less ffian the following cove�ages and timits,or greater if required by law,in the following
catcgories,amoants,and detail:
' a) Workers'Compensativn insurance for staartory amounts including a Voluntary Compensation Endorsement;
b) Employer's Liability insurance for�1,000,000 perAccident and Disease;
� c) Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability insurance with combined single limits for bodity injury and pmperty
damage of$5,000,000 each occvrt�ce.
Such policy shall include the foitowing coverages or endorsements(all references are to current Insurance Services Office standard forms):
' ► Independent Contraetocs Liability
► Products and Completed Operadons Liability to be maintained for two years after final payment
► Contractual Liability(covering the Contractor's obligadons under Paragaph 27-IlVDEMNIFICATI01�
► Additional Insureds-Employee.s
' ► Broad FoRn Properiy Damage Liability,including Completed Operations to be maintained for two years after final payment
► Personal Injury,with Employee Exclusion deleted
► ]ncidental Medical Malprac6ce Liabi[ity Insurance
► Blanket X,C,and U Coverage
' ► Severability of Interesfs provision
If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Corrunercial General Liability policy,the General Aggegate Limit sha11 not be less than
�2,000,000,and it shall apply�in total,to this Project only by specific endorscment(similar or equivalent to the Insurance Scrvices Office form number
� CCi 25 03);
d) BusinessAutoLiabilityinsuranceincludingowned,non-0wnedandhiredvehicleswithcombinedsinglelimitsf�bodily
injury and property damage of$1,U00,000 each occu�rence;
' e) Umbrella Excess Liability insurance on a"following form"with combinetl single limit�as reyuired by the Special
Provisioas. Such coverage shall be excess of all liabiiity insurance required under Paragraphs 28(A}(2)(b)through(�; and
� Airctaft Liability insurance including owned,non-owned,and hired aircraft(applicable only ifthe Project involves the
' use of an aircraft)with combined single limits f�bodily injury and propeity damage of$25,000,000 each occurrence.
3) a) All liability coverages must be written on an"occurrence"policy form(as compared to"claims-made")and shall be
maintained wittwut intertup6on from date of commencement of the Work until date of fiaat payment unless otherwise specified.
� b) AlI inswance policies under Paragraph 28(A)sha11 be maintained with in��nce companies qaatified io do business
in the state where the Project is located and shali have a policyholder's ra6ng of"A"or better and a financial size rating of"X"or better in the
most current Best's K$y Rating Guide. Such polieies,except Workers'Compensation,shall specifically name Owner,Owner's mortgagee(if
' any),the grovnd lessor(if any), aad all of theu respective directors,officers,agents,servants,and employees,as additional insureds.
Cont�actor shall not commence work hereunder untit true copies of policies or certificates,or both if required by Owner,evidencing the
insuraace have been submitted to and approved by Owqer.All renewal policies or certificates sha�I be delivered to Owner not less than twenty
(20)days prior to the expirarion date of such policies. Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor to commence work
until such Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor has obtained not less than the insarance cove�ages set forth in paragrapf�s 28(A)(2)(a)tluougt►
' (�above. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment,an additional certificate evidenoing
���� 00810-14
' 14
Construction Contract ,
GENERAL CONDITIONS
continuation of such coverage shall be submitied to Owner. '
c) Ali ioc�*n„ce policies under Paragreph 28(A}shall not be cance{led or adversely materially changed except after thirty
(30)days advance vrritten nodce to Owner. Upon rxeipt of any notice of canceflation or adverse material change,Contractor sha11 within
ten(10)days procure replacement policies of insurance. If Contractor fails to procure and maintain acceptable policies of insurance in ,
accordance with the tertns hereof,then Owner may,at Owner's option,obtain such inswance ai the cost and expense of Conh actor,without
the need of any notice to Contractor.
d) All insurance policies under ParagaQh 28(A)sHall be specifically endorsed to provide that ffie coverages will be primary '
and that any insurance carried by any additional insured mquired under this Paragraph 28{A)shall be exccss or non-contributory.
B. Builder's Ttisk
1) Contractorshallpurchaseandmaintainpropertyinsuranceonthebuildingandmaterials,equipment(eacceptContractas'equipmenE �
as outlined under Paragaph 28{C)),and supplies at the site which have been or are to be incorporated into the ProjecG Such insarance shat[also include
those Project materials,equipment,and supplies owned by Owner and stored off-site. This insurance shall includs the interests of Owner,Owne�'s
mortgagee(if any), the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-subconsractors in the Work. Soch insurance shall be written on an"ait-risk"replacement
wst basis. ,
2) Contractor shall also purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Conuact Documents or by law. 1'his
insurance shalt include the interests of Owner, Owner's mortgage(if any),the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontractors in the Work.
3) The insurance under this Para�aph 28(B)shall not have a deductible geater than�25,000 per occurrence,and the Contractor shall ,
be responsibte for payment of said deductibte in the event of an insured loss. Contractor waives its rights of recovery against Owner for such deductible.
Should Contractor elect to increase said deductible,Contractor shall be responsible for payment of such increased deductible amounts. Contractor shail
provide a certificate of insurance evidencing such required coverage to the Owner upon request Any insured loss is to be adjusted with Owner and made ,
payable to awner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to the requirements of any applicable mo�tgage clause.
C. Contractots Equioment Insurance
The Contractor shall purchase end maintain contracto�s equipm�t insurance covering conshuction machinery,equipment,and tools used by the ,
Contractor in the performance ofthe Work.Such coverage shall be written on a policy form at least equivalent to that provided by a"Contractor's Equipment Floater"
as customarily defined within the insurance industry. Contractor also a�to notify any Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors of their obligation to insure any
machinery,equipmen�and tools used by the Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the perforn►ance ofthe Work.
D. Indenendent Oblieations ,
The Contractor's insurance obligations contai�d in tt►is Paragaph 28 are separate from and in addition to the Contractor's indemnification obligations
contained in Paragraph 27 of this Contract. �
29. SEPARATE CONTRAGTS AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILTTY OF CONTRACTOItS
_ A. Construction of other phases of the overall Project will be conducted ooncu[rendy with the perfocmance of this Contract Accordingly,it shall �
be the responsibitity of the Contractor to fully coordinate iu activities with those of a!1 oth�contractors and with the Owrter's Itepresentative to effectively prosecute
the overall compledon of the Project with a minimum amount of interference and to provent discrepancies with the continuous Work,and permit early access for
other trades. It is specificaily understood that other work may be scheduled at the same time and in the same areas as the Contractor's Work, The Conhactor shaU
intelligenUy administer its contractual obligations and cooperate to the fuilest extent with other contractors. Additionally,the Contractor specifically a�to
coordinate its Shop Drawings with those of other�ntractors. '
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the installation by the Owmer,or its contractors,of all fixtores and equipment to
be purchased by the Owner.Toward this�d,the Contractor agraes to provide access to the Project for the del'svay,s�ting in plaex and installation of the fvmiture,
fumishings,fixtures,machinery and equipment,in accordance with the Owner's instaliation schedule,for the Owner's exclusive use in such setting in place and '
instaliation. In addition,the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner's other contractors for the installation of u6lities,equipment and fixtures.
C. The ContracWr shall aS'ord otha contractors reasonable opportunity for the introducdon and storage oftheir materials and equipment and the
execution of their work,and shall properiy connect and coordinate his Work with theirs. ,
D. If any part of the Contracto�s Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other separate contractor,the Contractor
shalt inspect and promptly report to the Owner's Representative any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work thaE render it unsuitable for such proper execution
and resulu in writing. Failure of the Contractor to so inspect and report sha11 wnstitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive its �
Wock,except as to defects which may deve3op in the Contractor's Work after the execurion of the Contractor's Work.
E. Should a cc�ntractor cause damage to the Work or property of any other contractor on the Project,the party da[naged shall notify the offending
contractor in writing of sach damage and the offending contractor shall bear ihe cost of repairing all such damage. The Owner reserves the right to effectuate the
repa'us aad to charge the cost the�eof against the offending conuactor.The Contiactor hereby expressly waives all claims against thc Owner for the oost of repairing �
damage to the Work caused by other contractors.Contractor hereby agees to attempt to resoive any issues regarding damage to another contracto�s work or damage
to its work caused by another contractor with the other contractor. �
30 SUBCONTRACTORS '
co�a.�a 00810-i 5
IS ,
, Construction Contract
GENEItAL CONDITIONS
' A. The Contractor shatE fumish the Owners Representative,priar to execution of t3�e Contract,a complete list of all major Subconuactors and
material Suppliers who are proposed for the eacecution of the Work.
B. No Work may be subc�►tracted withart the prior vrritten acceptance of the Owner's Representative who reserves the right not to accept any
, proposedSubcontractorw6oserecorddoesnotestablish,intheOwnefssolediscretion,theexperience,competenceandfinancialabi(ityoftheproposedsubcontractor
to perform the Work. The Owner shall not be liable for any addiGonal wsts incurred by the Contractor shoWd it withhold its approval of any subcontractor.
C. No payment witl be made to the Contractor for work performed by a subconlractor not accepted by the Owner.
' D. The Owner shaIl have the right to contact 5ubcontractors and Suppliers directly to ascertain(1}what amounts,if any,are due to them from
the Contractor,(2)the projected costs of completing thc remaining portion of their Wak,and(3)the scopc and amount of any claims and disputes between the
Subcontractor or the Supplier and the Contractor.
, E. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between any Subcontractor and the Owner or any agent
or employee of the Owner. Nothing in the Contract Documents,including the psovisions of Paragraph 37,shalI create any obligation on the part of the Owner,or
any employee or agent of Owner,to pay or to sce to ihe payment of any sums to any Subcontractor or Sub�svbcontractor or any mher party not directly cantracdng
' with the Owner.
F. The Owner shall have the right to review,with proposed Subcontractors and the ConUactor,the elements o£the Work to be perFormed by the
Subconuactors in ordar to find ways of reducing the Cost of the Project and the Contractor agrees to cooperate fully with the Owner in this regard
' 31. RELATIONS OF CONTRAGTOR AND SUBCONTRACI'ORS
A Relations
, The Contractor agees to bind eve"ry SubconVactor and every SubconVactor shall agree to be bound by the terms ofthe Contract Documents as far as
applicable to his Work,including the following pmvisions of this Paragraph 31.
B. Each Subcontrador Shall A�nee:
� 1) To be bound to the Conhactor by the ternis of the Contract Documents and to assume towazd it all the obligations and
responsibilities that the Conhactor,by those docwnents,assumes toward the Owner.
' 2) To submit to the Contractor applicallons for payment in accordance with the Contract Doeuments.
3) To submit proposals for Changes of Contract in accordance with Paragraph 19 hereof and to require each and every
Sob-subcontractor to subm�t h�s proposals for Changes of Contract in accordance with Parag�aph 19 hereof.
' C. The Contractor Aarees:
L) To be bonnd to Subcontractors by all the obligations that the Owner assumes to the Contractor under the Con�act Documenis and
by all the provisions thereof affording remedies and redress to the Contrxtor from the Owner.
' 2) To pay the Subcontractor,upon Owner's payment of requisitions,if issucd under the Payment Schedule as set forth in Paragraph
33,the amount allowed to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's Work to the extent of the Subcontractor's interest therein.
' 3) TopaytheSubc9ntractoriosuchextentasmaybeprovidedbytheContractDocumentsort6eSubcontract,ifeitherofthoseprovide
for earlier or larger payments than the procedure contained in Subparagaph(2)above.
4) To pay the Subcontracc:tor on demand for his work or materials ffi far as executed and 5�d in place,less the retained percentsge,
at the time paymeart is due,even though the Owner withholds payment Qursuant to Paragraph 35 hereo�unless the cause for which the Owner is
, withhold'mg payment is the fault of the Subcontractor.
5) To gay the Subcontracdor a just shaze of any fire insurance proceeds received by it,the Contractor,ander this ConU�act.
' 6) To make no demand for liquidated damages or penalty for delay in any sum in c.xcess ofsuch amount as may be specificaily named
in the SubconUact
7) To requiie each and every Subcontractor to submit itc pmposa(s for Changes of Contract in acxordance with Paragraph 19 hereof
� and to require each and every Sub-subcontractor to submit iu pmposats for Changes of Contract in accordance with Paragraph 19 hereof.
32. LABOR AND MATERIALS
' A The Contractor shal!provide,pay for and maintain all labor materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,heet,material
hoisting,scaffolding,shoring,foimwork,reshoros,craneage,transportation,weather pmtection,storage,offix i�cilities and other facilities and servioes necessary
for the proper arecutiou and compietion of fhe Work,whether temporazy or pesmanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. All
scaffolding shall be erected and ma�ntamed in aceordance wrth OSHA and state and local requirements.
, B. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor under this Contract shall be new,free fcom faults and defects,of good quality,aad
�,.«� ooglai6
' ld
Construction Contrac� '
GENERAL C�NDITIONS
conform to the requirements of the Contract Documenu. The Contractor shal(a�'ord and provide as required to the Owner and its ropresentatives,satisfactory ,
evidence of the quality of the materials used and complete information in writing as to where materials to be used in the performance of the Work a�+e being
manufachired or assembled,and full and free access to all shops and factories for the purposes of infom►ing themselves as to the general conditions and progress
of the materials to be used or installed. The Contractor shall instruct such supptiecs and manufacturers to give fu11 and accurate infom�ation directly to the Owner
or any person or entity designated by the Owner on any quesrions conceming qua(ity,performance,delivery status and such other data ac may be requested by the �
Owner or its designated representative. The Owner,the Owner's Rep�tative,and ali others designated by the Owner shall,at all times,have free and safe access
to the office,shops,and yard of the Contractor to verify any inforn►ation about the Wor[c given by the Contractor.
33. APPLICATION FOR PAYMF,NTS '
A. No Applicaiion for Payment will be accepted unless supported by atI required documentarioa
B. Before the Coe�actors fi�st application for payment (the "Application{s)for Payment"), the Contractor shall submit to the Owner's '
Representative a proposed,compret►ensive payment schedule of values(the"Payment Schedule")allocated to the various poRions of the Work and for the Work of
each Subcontractor. This Payment Schedule shall be divided so as to facilitate payments to the Contractor and shall be svbstantially in the sequence ofperforming
the Conhsct Work.This Payment Schedule shall be wmpiled on the form supplied by the Ovuner's Representative and inwrporated into and be a part ofthe ConOract
L?ocumenu as Exhibit E. The Owne�'s acceptance of the Contractor's Payment Schedule shall be a condition precedent to any payment obligation of the Owner.
Applications for Payment shall be based on the accepted Payment Schedule which shell be attached thereto and supported by such other documentation as may be ,
required and as approved by the Owner,the Owner's Representative or its construction Iender. No Application for Payment will be accepted unless the application
is supporced by a compiete Payment Schedule approved by the pwners RepresentaNve.
C. ThisPaymentScheduleshallbeusedasthebasisfortheCon6actor'speriodicpaymentrequests.TheContractorshallsubmittheforrncomplete ,
and in the nu►nber of copies directed by the Owner's Representative;the foim and copies shatl accompany each Application for Payment
D. 1) The Conlractor shall include in an Applicafion for Payment a11 Work,materiels and equipment covercd by the Application.Except
as set forth in subparagraph(D)(2),the Owner s6a11 pay Contractor for all on-site Work,materials and equipment Contractor shall provide Owner in ,
the next Application for Peyment following said payment with properly executed Waivers of Lien in the form of Exhibit C for all such Work,materials
and equipmenk The Contractor warrants title to al1 Work,materia(s and equipment upon his receipt of payment therefore from Owner fra and ctear of
atl liens,claims,security interests or eneumbrances,and that no Work,materials or equipznent covered by an Application for Payment will have been
acquired by the Contractor,or by any other person performing Work at the site or furnsshing materials and equipment for the Project,subject to an �
ageement under which an interest therein or an c�ncumbrance�n is retained bythe seller or otherwise imposed by thc Contractor or such other person.
The Owner shall not be responsible fa such portion of the Work until the Work has been fully completed and accepted by the Owner.In each Application
for Payment,the Contractor shall cequire each Subcontractor and material supptier to submit a properly executed Partial Waiva of Lien in the form of
Exhibit C waiving his lien righis to the extent of payments previously received.
2) If an Application for Payment is made for materials not installed in the Work,but suitably stored off-site at a location acceptable '
to the Owner's Representative,snch application sha11 be accompaz►ied by legaliy acceptahle paid imroices or bi11s of sale and copies of delivery ticket�,
signed by Lhe Contractor,indicsting that the Contractor verified that the materials shown on the delivery tickets are at the ioca6on accepted by the Owner's
Representative. Failure of the Conh�tor to furnish paid invoices or bills of sale will be cause for withholding such amounts from payment until such ,
paid invoices or bi0s ofsale have bcen received by the Owne�"s Repressntative.'The Ownex's Representative reserves the right to examine the stored items
prior to payment.
E. Ten percent{10°�)ofthe value of each payment made pursuant to an Application for Payment shall be retained by the Owner and shall be ,
sfl acxounted in the Application for Payma�t Retainage shall be due and payabie to the Conhactor at the Final Payment subject to the conditions of Pazagraphs 35,
36 and 37.
34. CER1'IFICATES FOR PAYMENT
A ]n the event that fhe Owner's Representative does not accept the Application fa Payment,he shall return the Application and state in writing '
his reasons for withholding payment
S. The Owner's paymes►t to the Contractor or partia)or entire use of oceupancy of the Work shall not constitute an acceptance of any Work or '
materials not in confomuty with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
35. PAYMENTS WITE�iELD
A The Owner may withhold,seto�or,on�count of subsequendy disoovered evidence,nullify the whole or part of any certi6cate to svch extent ,
as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account oP.
f) Failure or refusal ofthe Contcactor to pafform or comply with any terms,conditions,provisions or obligations ofthis Contract or �
any other agreement between the ContracWr and the Owner or any of their related companies.
2) Defedive Work aot ranedied.
3) Claims or liens Sled or ieasonable evidence indicating probable Sling of claims or liens. '
4) Failure of tl�e Conhactor to make payment�properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment. �
5) A reasonable doubt that the Work can be comQleted for the balance then unpaid. '
c�a.�e 00810-i7
17 '
' Construction Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS
' 6) Failure to comply with any Change Direc6ve issued by the Owner under Paragraph 19.
7) Damage to the property of thc Owner or another contractor.
, 8) In the Owne�'s opinion,failure,refusal or neglect in supplying snffioient labor,material or supervision in the prosecution of the
Work.
9) Failure io mcet the requirements for Application for Payment contained in Paragraph 33.
' 10) Failure to submit tt�Construction Progess Schedule.
11} Faihue to compfy with ihe Construction Pro�ess Schedule.
' 12) Failure to respond to a request for a Change of Contract proposal as required by Paragraph t9 hereof.
13) Failure to provide a!t submittats within the required time frame.
' 14} Failure to submit Constsuetion Progress Repvrts as required.
B. When the aforementioned bases for withholding payment are removed,payment shaii be made for amounts withheld.
' 36. CONTRAC'f'SUM,DISBURSEMENTS AND PAYMENfS
A.. The Contract Svm is set forth in the Contract.It is intended to include ali Work described in the Contract Documents and all iacreases in oosts
thereo�whether fbreseen or unforeseen,including wiihout limiting the generality of the foregoing,taxes,labor and materials,al1 of which shall be bome by the
' Contrador.
B. Should the Contractor neglect or refuse to pay any bill,invoice,or any other obiigation to a Subcontractor or Supplier,incurred by him for
the Project,the Owner,aftcr giving the Contractor and his surety,if any,three(3)days'written notice of its intention so to do,shall have the right to pay and discharge
� the aforementioned bill,invoice or obligation from arry payments due or to become due the Contractor. Any such payment made pursuant to this Subpa�ag�aph by
the Owner shall be considered as a payment to the Contractor and shaq be credited against the amounts due the Contractor hereunder.
' C. My and alt funds paid to the Conhactor pursuant to this Contract are hereby deciared to constitute trusE funds in the hands ofthe ConVactor,
to be applied first to the payment of claims of Subcontractors,laborers,and Suppiiers arising out of the Work,to claims for utilities fumished and taxes imposed,
and to the payment of premiums on surexy artd od�er bonds and on insurence,before application to any other purpose. Whenever required by the Owner,it shall be
the duty of the Contractor to file with the Owner a verified statement,in a form satisfactory to the Oamer,certifying the amounts then due and owing from the
Contractor for labor and materials,setting forth therein the names ofthe persons whose charges or claims for labor or materiais are unpaid,and the undisputed amount
' due to each respectivcly.
D. No paymeats made hueunder by the Owner to the Contractor prior to Final Payment shall be d�conclvsive as to the actual value of the
Work performed by the Contractor or of the Contractor's perfofmance of his obl�gations under this Contract
' E. T'he Owner reserves the right to issue progress payment checks and final payment checks jointly to tbe Contractor and any Subcontractor or
Supplier at the Owner's option.
' 3'l. COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMEN'I'
A. Upon the completion of the Work by ihe Contractor,the acceptance ofthe Work by the pwner,and the release of all claims against the Owner
and the Work by the Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers(which rel�shall be ev�denced by final waivers and releases,properly recwded releases
of li�s,or other documents acceptable to thc Owner),the Contractor shall file a iequest for final paymenk Thereafter,the Owner shail pay the Contract Price(as
' adjusted by any Changes of Contract issaed pursuant to Paragraph 19 6ereo�less all prior payments to or for the account of the Contract to the Contractor as 5nat
payment(°Final PaytnenN�.
B. Upon the receipt of the Con�acto�s Final Application for Payment,including Exhibit D,the Ovmer shall promptly make a final inspectioa,
' and if the Owner finds the Work acceptable and comptete in strict axordance with tfie Contract Documents the Owner shall promptly issue Final Payment Final
Payment shatl be made upon Complction ofthe Worlc and shall indicate the Owner's Final Acceptance of the Work and his acknowledgment that the Work(excluding
any further wacranty and guaranty obligatio�)has been completed and is accepted under the tem�s and conditions of the Contract Documents. Comple6on of the
Work shall mean:(1)fuil p�f'ormance of aq Condact terms;(2)�cceptance of the Work by awner;(3)resolution of all outstanding Changes of Contrac�(4)
' completion of all"paneh-list"items;and(5)deEivery of all final lien waivees,warranties,the Cerlificate of Occupancy(if such is to be obtained by Contractor),and
required"as-buik"drawings.Ifpriorto the making of Final Payment the Owner finds deficiencies in the Wark,the Owner shall promptly notify the Contractor theroof
in writing,describing such deficiencies in detail. After the Contractor has remedied any deficiencies noted by the Owner,the Contractor shall request a final
inspection and the Owner shall make such inspection and follow thc procedure set forth in this Paragraph.
' C. From time to time,ac portions of the Work are completed by the Contractor,the Owner shall have the right,upon giving the Contractor prior
written aotice,to accept any portion of the Wortc thai the Owner desires ro use and occupy. Such partiai acceptance s6all be made in writing and theroafter the
Coniractor shall have no fierther obligation with respect to the Work accepted,except to correcx the Work subsequer[dy found m 6ave been improperly done or to
replace defective msterials or equipmen�or to p�form Work pursuant to Psragraph 40 hereof. Notwitfutanding anything coatained herein to the contrary,all
' guarantees and warranties arising pursuant to Paragraph 38 hereof shall run&om the time of Substantial Canpletion ofthe entire Project,and not from the time of
c�a.ma 00810-18
' 18
Construction Contract � ,
GENERAL CONDITIONS
any partial acceptance which occurs pursuant to this Subparagraph(C}. '
D. Final Pavment
The making of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner except ffiose arising&om: '
1) Unsettted liens;
2) Faulty or defective Work appearing after completion;
3) Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; '
4) Tesms of any special or extended warcanties required by the Contract Documents;or '
5) The obligations of the Contractor under the indemnifccation provisions of Paragraph 27 hereof.
E. Contractor's Acceotance of Final Pavment
The acceptance of Einal Payment shall constitute a waiver of all claitns by the Contractor. '
3S. WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
A. The Contractor warrants to the Owner that atl materials and equipment fumished under this Contract will be new and free from defects,that ,
all Work wiil be ofgood quality,&ee from faults and defects and in suict confoimancx with the Contract Documents.All Work not confomiing to these requirements,
including substitutions not properly approved and authorized,may be considened defective. If required by the Owner,ihe Contractor shall fumish satisfactory
evidence as to the kind and quality ofmaterials and equipment.This wazranty or any other warranty provided by the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Dceumentc '
shall not be Iimited by the pmvisions of Subparagraph(B)below.
B. The Contractor hereby guarantces a11 Work performed and material and equipment furnished under the Contract Documents against defects
due to faulty or defective materials or workmanship,or failure of the Work to confotm to the Contract Documents,as shall appear within a period of one(1)year
from the date of Substantial Completion ofthe entire Project(unless specified clsewherc),or for a longer period if so specified elsewhero in the Contract Documents �
or in applicabie warranties supplied by others,provided,however,that if such materials or equipment or portion of the Work is fdund after such finat acceptance
not w comply with the Contract Documents,the guarantee period thereon shall commence with the date it is comected by the Contractor to comply with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shalt require a similar guaranty in all subcontracts,including the requirement that the Ovmea be reimbursed for any damage or loss to
the Work or to otherwork resulting from such defects.The Contractor agrees ac part of its guarantee under this Parag�raph 38 to repair or remove or replace ac directed ,
by the Owner,all Work which proves defective during the guarantee period or which fails to conform to the Contract Documents;to repair,remove,and replacz,
as directed by the Owner,ell damaged poRions of the Work resulting from or which is incidental to defecLs in the Work as stated above in this Paragaph 38,or failure
of the Work to conform to the Contract Documents. All rrepairs,removals and replac�ents must be commenced within seven(?)days from the receipt of written
noNce from the Owner at times approved in advance by the Ow�►cr. The ContracWr shall fumish sufficient workmen and materials to ensure prompt completion '
ffiex�of.Should the ConUactor fait W pmceed in accordance with the provisions ofihis Paragraph 38,the Owner,without furti►er notice to the Contractor,may fiimish
a{i labor and material necessary for said ropairs,or removals and replacements;all c�sts atsociated with such repair or replacement work shall be charged to the
Contractor.
C. Upon Substantial Completion of the Project and pria to Final Paymeat,the Contractor sh�ll prepare,organize,assemble and transmit to the ,
Owner's Representative a duplicate set of all writien wazrandes and gua�tees of oth�s applicable to the Work or required by the Contract Documents and
instruction,operation end maint�ance manuats for ail operating equipment and systems and for all wearing surfaces. Atl warranties and guarantees of others with
regard to services or materials shall be made for the benefit of the Owner and the Contractor and shall be enforceable by either the Owner or the Contracmr and the
Contractor shall execute any documeets or take such aciion as may be necessery to ensure that the Owner receives the benefits thereof. Should the Contractor,or '
a Subcontractor replace any pa�t ofthe Work,aIl Warranties or guarantees applicable w the Work replaced shall begin anew from the date of the Owner's acceptance
of the replacemenk
D. No contiact or purchase pectaining to the Project shall allow for waiver of warranties or guarantees. '
E. Nothing contained in this Peragraph 38 shall be conshued to establish a period of limitaaon with respect io eny other obligation which the
Contractor may have under the Contract Docun►ents. The establishment of the time period of or►e year as set forth in Subpacagaph(B)above or such longer period
of time as may be prescribod by law or hy the other provisions of the Contract Documents relates onty to the specific obligation ofthe Contractor to cortect the Work '
and has no relationship w the time within which his obligation w compty with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced nor to the time within which
proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contrador's liability with respect to his obligaHons other than speciScally to correct the Work.
39. TAXES
A. The Contractor shall pay for al)sales,consvmer,use and ot6er similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor. '
40. RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
A. The duties and obligations imposed by ihe Cont�act Documents and tLe righfs and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to,and '
not a[imitation o�any duties,obligafions,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. The Owner reserves the right to exercise any right or remedy
available to it either seperately or concwrentiy with any other right or remedy available to it
'
ca�x.�a 00810-19
19 t
, Construction Contract
GENEItAL CONDITIONS
, B. Ido action or failure to act bythe dwner or any agent or employee of the Owner(including the Owner's Representative)shall constitute a waiver
of any right or duty afforded it under the Contract Documents,nor shall any such action or failurc to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in any breach
thereunder,except as speciRcally agreed to in writing. The perfamance of azry inspections or tests,or the omission of any inspections or tests,or a decision not to
perform any inspection or test,by the Owner or any agent,employee or consultant ofthe Owner,shalt not be a waiv�of any ofthe Contracto�'s obligations hereunder
' and shall not be construed as an approval or acceptance of the Work or any part thereo£ No payment to the Contractor(including Finai Payment)or approval or
aoceptancc by the Owncr of any Work shall constitute a finai acceptancc of such Work if it is later discovered that such Work was not perfoaned in accordance with
the requiremarts of the Contract Documents.
41. PERFORMANCE BONI1 ANb LABOR MATERIAI.PAYMEAIT BOND
' The Owner shail have the right to c�equiro the Conhactor w furt►ish at it�sole discre6on separate Pedom�ance and Labor and Material Bonds,in the form Exhibits
G and H. These bonds shall cover i6e faithful performance of the Contractor's obligations hereunder and the payment of all obligations wluch arise hereunder at
' any time prior to or during the course of construction. Such bonds shal l be made out for one hundred percent(100%)of the Contract Sum. If the Contract Sum is
'sncreased under the terms hereof,the Contractor shall obtain a corresponding increase in the coverage of such bonds. The cost of ffiese bonds wili be paid by the
Owner. Any prem'sum surcharge in the cost of providing these bonds is to 6e paid by the Contractor. All dividends acciuing on these bonds sha[L be paid by the
Contractor to t6e Owner.
, 42. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS
All drawings,Project Plans and Specifications,or other documentation,and copies thereof,furnished by the Owner or any agent,employee or consultant ofthe Owner,
or architect,are asid shall remain the property of the Owner. They are to be used only with respect to this Project and are not to be used on any other project. With
, the exception of one contract set for tha Contractor,such documents fumished to t6e Contractor arc W be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner on request
at the compietion of tise Work.
43. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK
' A Thc Contr�tor shaq be responsible for all cutting,fitting or patching that may be requi�ed to complete the Work or to make its several parts
fit together propedy.
B. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the Work of the Owner or of any separate conkractor by cutting,
, patching or otherwise altering any Work,or by excavation.The Conbractor shal(not cut or otherwise alter the Work ofthe Owner or ofany separate contractor,except
with the written consent oP the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contcactor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or from any separate
contractor his consent to cutting or othenvise altering the Work.
' 44. OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIAL
The Owner reserves the right to procare certain mat�ials for the Contractor's use on the Project,as designated by the Ownex.T'he Contractor shall provide the Owner
with proposed quantities ofsuch materials.The Owner will review the Condacwr's proposal and then the Conhactor and Owner will mutuatly agee on the quanGties
' sufficient to comptete the Project Upon such agreement,the Contractor shall certify in writing that the ageed upon quantsties are sufficient to complete the Project
If additional quantides of materials are required to complete the Project,through no fault of the Owner,such eaccess quantities of materials will be provided by the
Owner at the Contractor's expense. 'Ihe Owner shall have the right to direct the Contractor to procure any additional matereals. If the Contractor fails to do so,the
Owner sha11 procure the materiats and bill the Contractor. The Contractor wiil be required to pay all necessary shipping,handling and air-freight ehazges to ensure
' timcly delivery of suct�additional materials.
45. MISCELLANEOUS
A. The Contract Documents sha11 be conslrued in accordance with the laws ofthe state in which the ProjecE is located.
'' B. if any of the provisions of the Contract Documents shal I contravene or be invalid under such iaws,such conhavention or invalidity shall not
invalidate the whole Contract or any other provision contained within the Contract Documents,but the Cocct�act Dacuments shall be const�ued as if not containing
the provisioe held to be invalid,and the righis and obligations of the parties shall be enforced accordingly.
' C. The captions ofParagraphs and various Subpara�aphs in the Contract Documents az�e inserted on[y as a matterofconvenience and for reference
and in no way define,limit or desctibe the scope of any Paragaph ot Subparagraph herein.
' D. Words of any gender used in the Contract Documents shall be held ro include any other genda,and words used in the singular shali be held
to inelude the pfural,when the sense requ'ves.
E. A11 provisions of the Contract Documents which by their tenns require performance by either the Owner or the Contractor after lermination
' of this Contract shall su�vive any such tumination.
F. Any and all disputes arising hereunder shal)be resolved by the courts of competent jurisdiction located in the staie in which the Projed is
located.
'
,
co�«.�e 00810-20
' 20